PHYSICS

PART -B
CHAPTERWISE QUESTION BANK
Circular Motion 3
CHAPTER
1
Syllabus:
Angular displacement, Angular velocity and Angular acceleration, Relation between Linear velocity and Angular velocity,
Uniform Circular Motion, Acceleration in Uniform Circular Motion, Centripetal and Centrifugal forces, Banking of Roads,
Vertical circular motion due to Earth’s gravitation, Equation for velocity and energy at different positions in vertical circular
motion, Kinematical Equations for Circular Motion in analogy with Linear Motion.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The ratio of the angular speed of the minute hand 6. A car is moving along a horizontal curve of radius 20 m,
of a clock to that of its hour hand is and the coefficient of friction between the road and
(a) 3600:1 (b) 60:1 (c) 24:1 (d) 12:1 wheels of the car is 0.25 . It’s maximum safe speed is
2. Angular velocity is a vector whose direction is (a) 3 m/s (b) 5 m/s (c) 7 m/s (d) 9 m/s
(a) the same as that of angular displacement 7. A track for a certain motor sport event is in the
(b) the same as that of the radius vector form of a circle and banked at an angle . For a car
(c) perpendicular to that of the angular displacement driven in a circle of radius r along the track at the
(d) opposite to that of the angular displacement optimum speed, the periodic time is
3. For a particle performing circular motion, the relation r r
between it’s linear and angular velocities is (a) (b) 2 g
g
(a) v = r ×  (b) v = r 
r g tan 
(c) v =  r (d) v =  × r (c) 2 g tan  (d) 2
r
4. A body performing uniform circular motion in a
horizontal plane has a constant 8. A small body of mass m, tied to a string and revolved
(a) velocity (b) acceleration in a vertical circle is just able to reach to the top of
(c) kinetic energy (d) displacement the path and complete the circle. The tension in
5. A stone is tied to a string and rotated in a horizontal the string at the lowest point of the path is
circle with constant angular velocity. If the string is (a) mg (b) 2 mg (c) 6 mg (d) 8 mg
released, the stone flies 9. A body tied to a string is revolved in a vertical circle
(a) radially inward (b) tangentially forward at a place where the gravitational acceleration is g,
(c) radially outward (d) tangentially backward such that it has just the necessary minimum speed
at the top. It’s the centripetal acceleration when
the string is horizontal is
(a) 6 g (b) 3 g (c) 2 g (d) g

ANSWERS
1 - (d), 2 - (a), 3 - (d) 4-(c), 5 - (b) , 6 (c), 7 - (c), 8 - (c), 9 - (b)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Are the motions of the tip of a second hand of Ans. Optimum speed is given as
a clock and the motion of the entire second
voptimum = v0 = Rg tan  ... (i)
hand of a clock the same?
Ans. NO. Motion of the tip of a second hand of a clock At this speed the frictional force is not needed to
is a uniform circular motion. provide necessary centripetal force. There will be
little wear and tear of tyres, if vehicle is driven at
The motion of the entire second hand of a clock this speed .So this speed is called optimum speed.
is a rotational motion.
From equation (i) we can write,
Q.2. Do centripetal and centrifugal forces constitute v 02
an action and reaction pair? tan  =
Rg
Ans. No. The action and reaction forces always act on
two different body. The centripetal and centrifugal  v 02 
 
forces acting on the same body. Therefore they   = tan1  Rg 
 
do not form action and reaction pair.
This formula for angle of banking do not invlove
Q.3. A road at a circular bend is banked for an mass of vehicle m.
optimum speed v0. State the expression for v0 Thus, the angle of banking does not depend on
and hence show that the angle of banking is mass of vehicle
independent of the mass of the vehicle.
(3)
4 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.4. A curved horizontal road must be banked at Q.8. State right hand rule to find the direction of
an angle  for an optimum speed v. What will angular displacement
happen to a vehicle moving with a speed v Ans. Right hand rule: Imagine the axis of rotation is
along this road if the road is banked at an held in right hand with the fingers curled around
angle  such that  <  it and thumb outstretched. If the curled fingers
Ans. For < the horizontal component of the normal give the direction of motion of a particle performing
reaction would be less than the required circular motion, then the direction of outstretched
centripetal force. Therefore, the vehicle will tend thumb gives the direction of angular displacement
to skid outward, up the inclined road surface. vector.
Q.5. A curved horizontal road must be banked at Q.9. Define angular velocity. State its dimension
an angle  for an optimum speed v. What will and S.I. unit
happen to a vehicle moving with a speed v Ans. Angular velocity: Angular velocity of a particle
along this road if the road is banked at an performing circular motion is defined as the time
angle  such that  >  rate of change of angular displacement
Ans. For > the horizontal component of the normal Instantaneous angular velocity
reaction would be more than the required
centripetal force. Therefore the vehicle will tend d
 =
to skid down the inclined road surface. dt
Q.6. Is there a limitation on the semi vertical angle The S.I. unit of angular velocity is rad/s and its
of a conical pendulum? dimensions are [L0M0T1]
Ans. For a conical, pendulum of a given length, the Q.10. Define angu lar acceleration. St ate its
period is proportional to dimension and S.I. unit
Period  cos  ... (1) Ans. Angular acceleration: The average angular
1 acceleration is defined as the time rate of change
And tension in the string is T  ... (2) of angular velocity.
cos 
The linear speed v  cos  ... (3) Average angular acceleration
Thus, as the angle  increases, the cos  change in angular velocity
=
decreases and tan  increases. For  = 90o, time
tension T =  and period = 0 and velocity = .   0
Therefore the angle can never be 90o.   =
t
Q.7. Define angular displacement. State vector
relation between angular displacement and 
=
linear displacement. t
Ans. Angular displacement: Angular displacement is The S.I. unit of angular acceleration is rad/s2 and
defined as the angle described by radius vector its dimensions are [L0M0T2]
in a given time at the centre of circle.
In vector form,
s =  × r

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q 1. Obtain the relation between linear velocity and

angular velocity of a particle performing circular s =  × r 
 v
motion. Dividing by t,
OR
The instantaneous
In U.C.M. prove the relation v =  × r velocity is given by,

r
Ans. Consider a particle
s 
revolving in a circle of = × r Fig. (b)
radius r. Let particle t t

 B
moves from position A s 
to B in small time  s lim = lim × r

t 0 t t  0 t
interval t. Angular r A
displacement () and ds d
Fig. (a) = × r
linear displacement dt dt
(s)of the particle is given by the relation.
Circular Motion 5

ds d dr
But = v = linear velocity = × r + × ... (2)
dt dt dt
By definition,
d
and =  = angular velocity
dt  = d = angular acceleration,
dt
 v =  × r
In magnitude, v = r a = dv = linear acceleration and
i.e. Linear velocity = Radius × Angular velocity dt
dr
Q.2. Obtain the relation between angular acceleration v = = linear velocity
and tangential linear acceleration. dt
Ans. Tangential acceleration of a particle is From (2)
a =  × r +  ×v
dv
a = ... (1)
dt a = aT + aR
But
where,
Relation between linear and angular velocity is
aT = tangential component of linear acceleration
v = r
From (1) aR = radial component of linear acceleration.
d (r)
a = Magnitude of acceleration in circular motion is
dt
d dr a= aT2  aR2 ... (3)
=r + ...(2)
dt dt
dr Q.4. Define centripetal force. Give its any two
As r is constant, =0 examples. Explain concept of centripetal force.
dt
Ans. Centripetal force: It is defined as the force acting
From (2)
on particle performing circular motion, which is
d along radius of circle and directed towards the
a =r
dt centre of circle.
d Centripetal force = Mass × centripetal
But = ... (angular acceleration)
dt acceleration
 a =r ... (3) mv 2
 F = ma = m2r =
Tangential acceleration = Radius × Angular r
acceleration In vector notation,
In vector form, mv 2 
F = r
aT =  × r r
 F =  m2 r
Q.3. Obtain an expression of linear acceleration Concept of Centripetal force:
in circular motion
(1) If a car is travelling round a circular horizontal
OR road with uniform speed, the necessary
In circular motion, assuming the relation centripetal force is provided by the force of static
v =  × r , o btain an exp ression for the friction between tyres of vehicle and surface of
resultant acceleration of a particle in terms road.
of tangential and radial component. (2) The electron revolves in a circular orbit around
OR the nucleus of an atom. Necessary centripetal
For a particle performing uniform circular force is provided by the electrostatic force of
motion v =  × r , obtain an expression of attraction between positively charged nucleus and
negatively charged electron.
linear acceleration of the particle performing
non–uniform circular motion Q.5. Define Centrifugal force. Give its any two
Ans. Consider a particle performing circular motion. examples.
Its linear velocity is given by Ans. Centrifugal force: It is a pseudo force in U.C.M,
which acts along radius and directed away from
v =  ×r ... (1)
the centre of circle.
Differentiating, Centrifugal force = Mass × centripetal acceleration
dv d mv 2
= ( ×r ) F = ma = m2r =
dt dt r
6 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

In vector notation, g = acceleration due to gravity

mv 2   = angle made by the string with the vertical
F =+ r
r
l cos 
F = +m2 r Period of conical pendulum = 2
g
Examples:
Q.9. Draw a diagram showing all components of
(1) When a car in motion takes a sudden turn towards
forces acting on a vehicle moving on a curved
left, passengers in car experience an outward
banked road.
push to the right. This is due to centrifugal force
acting on passengers. Ans.
N N
(2) The children sitting in merry go round experience N cos  N cos 
an outward pull as merry go round rotates about
vertical axis. This is due to centrifugal force acting
on children.  N sin q 
(3) The bulging of earth at equator and flattening at N sin  f cos 

the poles is due to centrifugal force acting on it.
f f sin 
mg
Q.6. Distinguish between centripetal force and f
 mg
centrifugal force.
Ans. Fig. Circular motion of a car on a banked road

Centripetal force Centrifugal force mg - Weight of vehicle

N - Normal reaction
(i) Force acting on particle (i) Force acting on particle
performing circular performing circular f - Frictional force between tyres of vehicle and
motion, which is along motion, which is along road surface
radius of circle and radius of circle and N cos  - Vertical component of normal reaction
directed towards the directed away from the f sin  - Vertical component of frictional force.
centre of circle. centre of circle.
N sin - Horizontal component of normal reaction
(ii) It is a real force. (ii) It is a pseudo force.
f sin - Horizontal component of frictional force.
(iii) It exists in an inertial (iii) It exists only in non-
as well as non- inertial inertial frame of Q.10. What is banking of roads? Why is it necessary?
frame of reference reference. Ans. Banking of roads: The process of raising outer
(iv) Centripetal force is a (iv) It is an effect of circular edge of road over its inner edge through certain
necessary for motion. angle is known as banking of road.
maintaining circular The angle made by the surface of road with horizontal
motion. surface of road is called angle of banking.
Q.8. Draw a neat labelled diagram of a conical Let m is the mass of vehicle moving with a speed
pendulum. State the expression for its period v along a curved road of radius r. Then for safe
in terms of length. turn,
Ans. Diagram: Centripetal force = force of static friction
mv 2
= mg
 r
l
 v = rg
h T T cos  where,  = is the coefficient of static friction
between tyres of car and road surface.
 The above equation gives the maximum safety
r speed with which car can be driven along a curved
A horizontal road. If the speed exceeds this limiting
O T sin 
value, the car will be thrown off. In case of a car
moving at higher speed the force of friction should
mg be increased by making road surface rough.
However this causes wear and tear of tyres.
Labellings:
Besides, force of friction is not always reliable,
T = tension in the string since its value decreases, when road surface
T sin  = horizontal component of tension become wet due to rain or become oily and wear
T cos  = vertical component of tension and tear of tyres.
l = length of the conical pendulum Thus it is necessary to bank the road at the curve.
Circular Motion 7

When road is banked, the horizontal component 1

of the normal reaction between the road surface s = ut + at 2 ... (2)
2
and the vehicle provides the necessary centripetal
force for the circular motion. The final velocity v , and initial velocity u ,

Q.11. A particle of mass m, just completes the vertical constant acceleration a and displacement s are
circular motion. Derive an expression for the related as
tensions at highest position and at lowest v2 = u2 + 2a.s ... (3)
positions
Equation (1), (2) and (3) represent first, second
Ans. Consider an object of v1 and third kinematical equations for a linear
A
mass m tied at the end motion of a particle.
of a massless in v3
mg Equation for circular motion:
extensible string and
whirled in vertical circle T1 For a body rotating with constant angular velocity
of radius r. Let, v1 and v2 r
C 0 when accelerated with constant angular
be the velocities of O
object performing acceleration  then
T2
circular motion at Final angular velocity at the end of time t seconds
highest and lowest is,
position respectively. B v2
mg  = 0 + t ... (4)
At highest position A:
Centripetal force acting Fig. Vertical Angular displacement at the end of instant t is
on object at the circular motion
1
highest position is  = 0 t + t 2 ... (5)
2
provided by the sum of the tension in the string
and weight of the object. 2 = 20 + 2 ... (6)

mv12 Equation (4), (5) and (6) represent first, second

i.e. T1 + mg = and third kinematical equations for circular
r
motion of a body.
mv12
 T1 =  mg ... (1) Q.13. Calculate the angular velocity and linear velocity
r of a tip of minute hand of length 10 cm.
This is the expression of tension in the string at Solution: Data: r = 10 cm = 0.1 m
the highest position.
Period of minute hand, T = 60 min = 3600 s
At the lowest position B:
Angular velocity is
Centripetal force acting on object at the lowest
position is provided by difference between the 2 2  3.14
 = = = 1.745 × 103 rad/s
tension in the string and weight of the object. T 3600
mv 22 Linear velocity is
i.e. T2  mg = v = r
r
= 0.1 × 1.745 × 103
mv 22
 T2 =  mg ... (2) = 1.745 × 104 m/s
r
This is the expression of tension in the string at Q.14. A car of mass 2000 kg rounds a curve of radius
the highest position. 250 m at 90 km/hr. Calculate its
(a) Angular velocity
Q.12. State Kinematical equations for circular
motion in analogy with linear motion. (b) Centripetal acceleration
Ans. Equations for linear motion: (c) Centripetal force
Solution: Data: r = 250 m, m = 2000 kg
If a particle moving with initial velocity u is
1000 5
accelerated with constant acceleration a then v = 90km/hr = 90 × = 90 × = 25 m/s
3600 18
its velocity v at instant t is given by, (a) Angular velocity is
v = u + at … (1) v 25
 = = = 0.1 rad /s
r 250
The displacement s at instant t of a particle
(b) Centripetal acceleration
moving with initial velocity u and constant a = r2 = 250 × (0.1)2 = 2.5 m/s2
acceleration a is given by, (c) Centripetal force
F = mr2 = 2000 × 250 × (0.1)2 = 5000 N
8 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.15. A racing car completes 5 rounds on a circular
track in 2 minutes. Find the radius of track if
the car has uniform centripetal acceleration
2 m/s2.
Solution: Data: a = 2 m/s2, r =?
Q.16. A bucket containing water is whirled in a
vertical circle at arm’s length. Find the
minimum speed at the top circle to ensure that
no water spills out. Find the corresponding
angular speed. (Given r = 0.75m)

distance Solution: Data: r = 0.75 m

 Velocity = Minimum speed at the top so that water does
time
not spills out is
2r  5
 v =
2  60 v = rg = 0 .75  9.8 = 2.711 m/s
r Corresponding angular speed is
=
m/s
12 v 2.711
Centripetal acceleration,  = = = 3.615 rad/s
r 0.75
v2 Q.17. A stone weighting 1 kg is whirled in a vertical
a =
r circle attached at the end of a rope of length
2
 r  of 0.5 m. just crosses the highest position,
  Find the minimum tension at
 12 
a =
r (a) Lowest position (b) Mid position
But a =  2
... (given) (c) Highest position
2 2 Solution: Data:
r
  =2
m = 1kg, r = 0.5m, g = 9.8 m/s2
r  144
(a) Tension at the lowest position
 r = 144 m
T = 6mg = 6 × 1 × 9.8 = 58.8 N
(b) Tension at the mid position
T = 3 mg = 3 × 1= 29.4 N
(c) Tension at the highest position
T=0

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Derive an ex pr ession of c entr ipet al This is the instantaneous displacement of
acceleration or radial acceleration or linear particle.
acceleration of a particle performing U.C.M.
Instantaneous velocity of particle is given as ,
Ans. Consider a particle performing U.C.M along a
circumference ds d
of a circle of v = = ( r cos t i + r sin  t j )
Y dt dt
v
radius r in
a n ti c l oc kw i s e =  r sin t i + r  cos  t j … (2)
N P(x, y)
direction. Let P r Instantaneous acceleration of particle is given as,
be the position y y
of particle at dv d
 a = = ( r sin t i + r cos t i )
x M X dt dt
any instant t. O
Draw a =  r2 cos t i  r  2 sin  t j
perpendicular
PM to OX and =  r cos t i + r sin  t j ) 2
PN to OY. From (1), we get
The angular
Fig. Radial acceleration a = 2 r ... (3)
displacement of
particle in time Negative sign shows that acceleration of particle
t is  = t performing U.C.M. and radius vector are
oppositely directed.
Position vector r of particle at instant t is
The magnitude of centripetal acceleration.
r = xi + y j
v2
r = r cos i + r sin  j a = r2 or a=
r
r = r cos t i + r sin  t j ... (1)
Circular Motion 9

Q.2. Obtain an expression for the maximum safety This is the maximum safety speed of vehicle on
speed of vehicle on a banked road. a banked road,
OR Special case:
Show that the max imum safety sp eed is If  = 0
independent of the mass of the vehicle
voptimum = Rg tan  ... (4)
Ans. Consider a vehicle of mass m moving with velocity
v along a curved banked road at an angle . Let f At this speed the frictional force is not needed to
be the frictional force between tyres of the vehicle provide necessary centripetal force. There will be
and road surface. The forces acting on vehicle are, little wear and tear of tyres, if vehicle is driven at
N N this speed .So this speed is called optimum speed.
N cos  N cos 
From (4)
v2
 N sin q 
tan = Rg
N sin  f cos 

 v2 
mg f f sin    = tan1  Rg 
f
 
 mg
This is the angle of banking.
Fig. Circular motion of a car on a banked road The angle of banking does not depend on mass of
(1) Weight mg acting vertically downward. vehicle.
(2) Normal reaction N in upward direction. The Q.3. For a conical pendulum prove that
frictional force (f) between tyres and road surface v2
can be resolved into tan  =
rg
(1) f cos  - along horizontal direction OR
(2) f sin  - along vertically downward direction
Show that the period of a conical pendulum
The normal reaction (N) can be resolved into two
components l cos 
is T = 2 g
(1) N cos  - vertical component
(2) N sin  - horizontal component Ans. Conical pendulum
The component N cos  is balanced by weight mg is a simple
of vehicle and component f sin  of frictional force. pendulum, which 
l
is given such a
N cos  = mg + f sin 
motion that bob
mg = N cos   f sin  … (1) describes a h T T cos 
Horizontal component N sin  of normal reaction horizontal circle
along with f cos  of frictional force provides the and the string 
necessary centripetal force. describes a cone. r
A
mv 2 Consider a bob of O T sin 
N sin  + f cos  = … (2) mass m revolving
R
along a horizontal
Dividing (2) by (1) circle of radius r mg
with velocity v. let Fig. Conical pendulum
mv 2
N sin   f cos   is angle made by string with vertical. Tension T
R =
mg N cos   f sin  in the string is resolved into two components,

Let vmax is the maximum speed of vehicle, then The weight mg is balanced by vertical component
frictional force produced at this speed is T cos 
maximum. i.e f max = N  T cos  = mg ... (1)
2 The horizontal component T sin  provides
v max N sin   N cos 
= necessary centripetal force for circular motion of
Rg N cos   N sin  bob.
2
v max sin    cos  mv 2
Rg
=
cos    sin   T sin  = … (2)
r
Dividing (2) by (1)
 tan    
vmax = Rg   … (3) v2
1   tan   tan  = rg … (3)
10 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

v2  This is the expression of tension in the string of

  = tan1  rg  conical pendulum.
 
Q.5. Derive an expression for linear velocity at
This is the expression of angle made by string of
lowest point, highest point and point on the
conical pendulum with vertical.
horizontal diameter of a circle for a particle
From equation (3) revolving in vertical circular motion.
v = rg tan  ... (4) Ans. Consider an object of
v1 A
mass m tied at the end
This is the expression of linear speed of bob of of a massless v3
conical pendulum. inextensible string and
mg
Period of conical pendulum, whirled in vertical circle T1
of radius r. r
2r C
T1 = Let v1, v2 and v3 be the O T3
v
2r velocities of object T2
T1 = ... [From (4)] performing circular mg
rg tan 
motion at highest,
lowest and at midway B v2
r
T1 = 2 g tan  point respecively. mg
(i) Velocity of object at Fig. Vertical circular
From diagram, motion
highest position (A):
r There is minimum velocity of object at the highest
sin  =
l position below which string slack i.e. tension in
r = l sin  the string becomes zero. This happens when
object just crosses the highest position.
l sin  i.e. when object just crosses highest position, T1 = 0
T1 = 2
g tan 
mv12
l cos  T1 = mg
 T1 = 2  r
g
mv12
This is the expression for period of a conical 0 = mg
r
pendulum.
mv12
Q.4. Derive an expression for tension in the string = mg
of conical pendulum. r
Ans. Consider a bob of mass m revolving along a v12 = rg
horizontal circle of radius r with velocity v. Let 
is angle made by string with vertical. The forces v1 = rg ... (i)
acting on the bob at the position A are, weight This is the minimum velocity at the highest
mg. and Tension T. Tension is resolved into two position, so that string does not slack.
components, T cos  and T sin . (ii) Velocity at lowest position (B):
The weight mg is balanced by vertical component By law of conservation of energy
T cos 
Total energy at B = Total energy at A
 T cos  = mg
(K.E + P.E)at B = (K.E + P.E) at A
mg
 T = ... (1) 1 1
cos  mv 22 + 0 = mv12 + 2mgr ... (h = 2r)
 2 2
From diagram l

cos  =
h
1
2
1
mv 22 = m rg
2
  2
+ 2mgr
h T T cos 
h2  r2
 v 22 = rg + 4gr
mg 
T = v 22 = 5gr
h r
A
h2  r2 O T sin  v2 = 5rg ... (ii)
mg This is the minimum velocity at the lowest
T = h2  r 2 position.
h mg
2
(iii) Velocity at midway point (C):
r 
T = mg 1    Total energy at C = Total energy at B.
h 
Circular Motion 11

1 1 v3 = 3rg
mv 32 + mgr = mv 22 + 0
2 2
v 32 + 2gr = v 22  E =
1
2

m 3rg  2
+ mgr

v 32 + 2gr = 5gr 3
E = mgr + mgr
 v 32 = 3gr 2
5
E = mgr ... (3)
 v3 = 3rg ... (iii) 2
This is the total energy at the mid position.
This is the expression of velocity at the midpoint
of circle at C From the equations (1), (2), (3) it is seen that the
object possesses both K.E. and P.E. Thus total
Q.6. Show that the total energy of a particle 5
per forming vert ical cir cular mo tion is energy at any position is same i.e. mgr
2
conserved or constant.
Thus total energy vertical circular motion is
Ans. Consider a particle of mass m performing vertical
conserved.
circular motion of radius r. as the particle moves
in vertical circular motion, it has K.E. as well as Q.7. Show that the difference in tension at the
P.E lowest and highest position is 6 mg.
(i) At highest position A: Ans. Consider an object of v1 A
Total energy E = K.E. + P.E. mass m tied at the end
v3
of a massless mg
1 2 v1 A inextensible string and
E = mv1 + 2mgr T1
2 v3 whirled in vertical
mg r
Minimum velocity of circle of radius r. Let v1 C
O
object at highest T1 and v2 be the velocities
position is r of object performing T2
C
O circular motion at
v1 = rg highest and lowest
T2 B v2
position respectively.
E =
1
2
m rg  2
+ (i) At lowest position (B):
mg

2mgr B v2 Fig. Vertical circular

Tension in the string is
motion
1 mg
E = mgr + 2mgr mv 22
2 Fig. Vertical circular T2  mg =
motion r
5
E = mgr ... (1) mv 22
2 T2 =  mg … (1)
r
This is the total energy at the highest position.
(ii) At highest position (A):
(ii) At lowest position B :
Tension in the string is
Total energy E = K.E. + P.E.
1 mv12
2
E = mv 2 + 0 T1 + mg =
2 r
But minimum velocity of object at lowest position is mv12
T1 =  mg ... (2)
r
v2 = 5rg
From (1) and (2)
 E =
1
2

m 5rg  2
+0 mv 22  mv12 
T2  T1 =  mg   r  mg 
5 r  
E = mgr ... (2)
2  mv22 mv12 
This is the total energy at the lowest position. T2  T1 =  r  r  + 2mg
 
(iii) At horizontal position C:
m 2
Total energy E = K.E. + P.E. T2  T1 = [v  v12 ] + 2mg ... (3)
r 2
1 2
 E = mv 3 + mgr By law of conservation of energy,
2
But minimum velocity of object at mid-position  Total energy at   Total energy at 
  =  
is  lowest point   highest point 
12 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

1 1 Q.9. A motor van weighing 4400 kg rounds a level

mv 22 + 0 = mv12 + 2mgr
2 2 curve of radius 200 m of at 60 km/hr. What
should be minimum value of coefficient of
1 1
mv 22  mv12 = 2mgr static friction to prevent skidding? At what
2 2 angle the road should be banked for this
1 velocity?
m (v 22  v12 ) = 2mgr
2 Solution: Data:
(v 22  v12 ) = 4gr ... (4) m = 4400 kg, r = 200 m
From (3) and (4) 1000 5 300
v = 60 km/hr = 60 × = 60 × = m/s
m 3600 18 18
T2  T1 = (4gr) + 2mg = 16.67 m/s
r
T2  T1 = 4mg + 2mg = 6mg Maximum velocity on unbanked road is
Thus, difference in tension at the lowest and vmax = rg
highest position is 6 mg. 2
v max (16.67)2 277.9
Q.8. An object of mass 0.5 kg attached to a rod of  min = = = = 0.1418
rg 200  9.8 1960
length 0.5 m is whirled in a circle at constant
angular speed. If the maximum tension in the Angle of banking is
string is 5 kg-wt., calculate v2 
(i) Speed of stone  = tan1  rg  = tan1(0.1418)
 
(ii) Maximum number of revolution it can
= 8 4
o
complete in a minute.
Solution: Data: Q.10. A pilot of mass 50 kg in a jet aircraft while
executing a loop the loop with constant speed
m = 0.5 kg r = 0.5 m,
of 250 m/s. If the radius of circle is 5 km,
Tmax = mg = 5 × 9.8 = 49N compute the force exerted by the seat on the
(i) Speed of stone (v) = ? pilot.
(ii) Max. no. of revolutions in one minute (n) = ? (a) at the top of loop
mv 2 (b) at the bottom of the loop
(i) Tmax = + mg Solution: Data:
r
mv 2 m = 50kg r = 5km = 5000 m, v = 250m/s
= Tmax  mg (a) Force exerted by seat at the top is
r
r mv 2
v2 = (T  mg) N =  mg
m max r
0 .5 50  (250)2
= (49  0.5 × 9.8) =  50 × 9.8
0 .5 5000
= (49  4.9) = 625  490
= 44.1 = 135 N
v = 6.64 m/s (b) Force exerted by seat at the bottom of the loop is
(ii) We have mv 2
N = + mg
2r r
v = 50  (250)2
T = + 50 × 9.8
v = (2r)n 5000
= 625 + 490
v
n = = 1115 N
2r
6.64 Q.11. A ball is released from height along the slope
= and move along a circular track of radius R
2  3.14  0.5
without falling vertically downwards. Show
= 2.115 rps
5
n = 2.115 × 60 that h = R.
2
n = 126.9 rpm
Solution:
A ball is released from the height h at point P.
It has only P.E. = mgh ... (1)
Circular Motion 13

P A Radial acceleration at Q is
v2 80
ar = = = 40 m/s2 radially inwards
R 2
R Tangential acceleration at Q is g = 10m/s 2
h vertically downwards
Total acceleration a is

a = at2  ar2
B
= 402  102 = 1600  100
For ball to just reach at the highest point P of
the loop, its minimum velocity must be = 1700 = 41.23 m/s2

v = Rg Q.13. A circular race course track of a radius 500 m

and is banked to 10 0. If the coefficient of
At point P friction between tyres of vehicle and the road
Loss of PE at P = Gain in KE at P. surface is 0.25. Calculate,
(a) The maximum speed to avoid slipping
1
mgh  2mgR = m v2 (b) The optimum speed to avoid wear and tear
2
of tyres (g = 9.8 m/s2)
1
mgh  2mgR = m Rg Solution: Data:
2
Coefficient of friction  = 0.25.
1
mgh = 2mgR + m Rg Radius r = 500 m,  = 100
2
5  tan    
= m Rg vmax = rg  
2
1   tan  
5
h = R  tan10  0.25 
2 9.8  500 
= 
Q.12. A block of mass 1kg is released from P on a 1  0.25  tan10 
frictionless track which ends in quarter
 0.1763  0.25 
circular track of radius 2m at the bottom. = 9.8  500 
What is the magnitude of radial acceleration 1  0.25  0.1763 
and total acceleration of the block when it
 0.4263 
arrives at Q? = 4900 
P 1  0.04408 

 0.4263 
= 4900 
 0.9559 
R=2m
h =6m Q = 4900 [0.4460]

= 2185 = 46.75 m/s

Optimum velocity on banked road is
B voptimum = rg tan 
Solution: = 500  9.8  tan10
Loss of PE at Q = Gain in KE at Q
= 500  9.8  0.1763
1
mgh  mgR = mv2 =
2 4900  0.1763
1 2 = 863 .9 = 29.39 m/s
g (h – R) = v
2
1 2
10 (6 – 2) = v
2
80 = v 2
14 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) A particle of mass m, just completes the vertical circular motion. Derive the expression for the
difference in tensions at the highest and the lowest points. (March 2013)
  
(2) For a particle performing uniform circular motion   Obtain an expression for linear acceleration
of the particle performing non-uniform circular motion. (Feb. 2014)
(3) Draw a diagram showing all components of forces acting on a vehicle moving on a curved banked road.
Write the necessary equation for maximum safety, speed and state the significance of each
term involved in it. (Oct. 2014)
  
(4) In circular motion, assuming   , obtain an expression for the resultant acceleration of a
particle in terms of tangential and radial component. (Feb. 2015)
(5) Draw a neat labelled diagram of conical pendulum. State the expression for its periodic time in terms of
length. (Oct. 2015)
  
(6) In U. C. M. (Uniform Circular Motion), prove the relation   , where symbols have their usual meanings.
(Feb. 2016)
(7) Draw a neat labelled diagram showing the various forces and their components acting on a vehicle
moving along curved banked road. (July 2016)
(8) Explain the concept of centripetal force. (March 2017)
(9) Draw neat, labelled diagram showing different forces acting on a vehicle moving along a baked road. (July 2017)
(10) Distinguish between centripetal and centrifugal force. (March 2018)
Problems :
(1) A car of mass 1500 kg rounds a curve of radius 250 m at 90 km/hour. Calculate the centripetal force acting on
it. (March 2013)
(2) A racing car completes 5 rounds on a circular track in 2 minutes. Find the radius of the track if the car has
uniform centripetal acceleration of p2 m/s2. (Oct 2013)
(3) In a conical pendulum, a string of length 120 cm is fixed at rigid support and carries a mass of 150 g at its free
end. If the mass is revolved in a horizontal circle of radius 0.2 m around a vertical axis, calculate tension in
the string (g = 9.8 m/s2) (Oct 2013)
(4) A stone of mass 1 kg is whirled in horizontal circle attached at the end of a 1 m long string. If the string
makes an angle of 300 with vertical, calculate the centripetal force acting on the stone. (g = 9.8 m/s2).
(Feb. 2014)

(6) The spin dryer of a washing machine rotating at 15 r.p.s. slows down to 5 r.p.s. after making 50 revolutions.
Find its angular acceleration. (Feb. 2015)
(7) A stone of mass 100 g attached to a string of length 50 cm is whirled in a vertical circle by giving velocity at
lowest point as 7 m/s. Find the velocity at the highest point. [Acceleration due to gravity = 9.8 m/s2]
(Oct. 2015)
(8) A coin kept at a distance of 5 cm from the centre of a turntable of radius 1.5m just begins to slip when the
turntable rotates at a speed of 90 r.p.m. Calculate the coefficient of static friction between the coin and the
turntable. [g = 9.8 m/s2]. (Feb. 2016)
(9) A stone of mass 2 kg is whirled in a horizontal circle attached at the end of 1.5 m long string. If the string
makes an angle of 30o with vertical, compute its period. (g=9.8 m/s2) (July 2016)


(11) A small body of mass 0.3 kg oscillates in verical plane with the help of a string 0.5m long with a constant
speed of 2 m/s. It makes an angle of 60o with the vertical. Calculate tension in the string. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(July 2017)
(12) A flat curve on a highway has a radius of curvature 400 m. A car goes around a curve at a speed of 32 m/s. What is
the minimum value of coefficient of friction that will prevent the car from sliding? (g = 9.8 m/s2) (March 2018)


Gravitation 15
CHAPTER
2
Syllabus:
Newton’s Law of Gravitation, Projection of a Satellite, Periodic time of a Satellite, Kepler’s Laws of motion, Binding
energy and Escape velocity of a Satellite, Weightlessness condition in a Satellite,Variation of ‘g’ due to Altitude, Latitude and
Depth, Communication satellite and uses of Satellites.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. If the magnitude of the gravitational force between 7. The period of revolution of a satellite in a low-
two particles of masses m and 2 m is F, that between altitude circular orbit around a spherical planet of
two identical particles each of mass 2 m and double radius R and uniform density  is
the separation is
(a) 8F (b) 4F (c) F/2 (d) F/4 3 2  3
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2. The dimensions of the universal gravitational G 3G G G
constant are 8. According to Kepler’s law, the areal velocity of a
(a) [M1 L3 T2] (b) [M2 L2 T2] planet around the sun always
(c) [M1 L3 T2] (d) [M1 L2 T2] (a) increases
3. The acceleration of an earth satellite in a circular (b) decreases
orbit is independent of (c) remains constant
(a) the mass of the earth (d) first increases and then decreases
(b) the radius of the earth 9. The gravitational potential due to the earth is
(c) the mass of the satellite minimum at
(d) the orbital radius of the satellite (a) the centre
4. The radius and mean density of the earth are R and (b) the surface
, respectively. The critical orbital speed of a (c) a distance equal to 100 times the radius of the
satellite for a low altitude orbit is earth
G G (d) infinite distance
(a) 2 (b) 2R 10. The binding energy of a satellite revolving around
3R 3
planet in a circular orbit is 3 × 109 J. It’s kinetic
2G G energy is
(c) 2R (d) 3R
3 2 (a) 6 × 109 J (b) 3 × 109 J
5. The time period T of an artificial satellite of the earth (c) 3 × 10 J
9
(d) 6 × 109 J
depends on the average density  of the earth as
11. The weight of a body is maximum
1 1 (a) at the poles of the earth.
(a) T   (b) T   (c) T   (d) T 
 (b) at the equator of the earth
6. A satellite is an orbit of radius r has a period T. In (c) below the surface of the earth
r
an orbit of radius , it’s period of revolution will be (d) above the surface of the earth
4
(a) T/4 (b) T/8 (c) T/16 (d) T/64

ANSWERS
1 - (c), 2 - (c), 3 - (c), 4 - (b), 5 - (c), 6 - (b), 7 - (d), 8 - (c), 9 - (a), 10 - (b), 11 - (a)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Draw graph showing the variation of gravitational

A
acceleration due to the depth and altitude
from the eath’s surface.
Ans. The variation of acceleration due to gravity with Inside the Outside
the depth and height from the earth’s surface is g earth the earth
shown in thefollowing figure

0 depth R altitude
(15)
16 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.2. What is the period of satellite when it is Ans. At the poles acceleration due to gravity is maximum
orbiting close to the surface of the earth? and at the equator it is minimum. Since at equator
Ans. Period of a satellite is angle of latitude  = 00 and at poles = 900.
R h Q.8. With what angular velocity should the earth
T = gh rotate so that a person at the equator does
not experience any gravity?
When satellite is orbiting close to the earth h  0
Ans. At equator  = 00  cos  =1
R
 T = 2 g  g = g  R2 cos2  becomes
g = g  R2
6400  103
= 2  3.14  = 5077 sec. g
9.8 If we put  = then
R
Q.3. State Newton’s law of gravitation. g
Ans. Statement : Every particle of matter attracts every g = g  R 
R
other particle of matter with a force which is = g g = 0
directly proportional to the product of their masses
and inversely proportional to the square of the Therefore, the earth should rotate with angular
distance between them. g
velocity so that a person at the equator does
If two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are separated R
by distance r, then gravitational force of attraction not experience any gravity.
between them is,
Q.9. How does the rotation of earth affect the value
m1m2 of “g”.
F 
r2 Ans. It decreases with rotation of the earth.
m1m2
 F =G Q.10. Does the speed of a satellite around the earth
r2
depend on its mass?
Q.4. State S.I. unit and dimensions of universal Ans. No. It is independent of the mass of a satellite
gravitational constant and is same for all the satellite of different masses
Ans. S.I. unit of gravitational constant is Nm2/kg2. when revolve in the same orbit.
Dimensions of G are Q.11. On what factors does the orbital speed of a
Fr 2 [F ] [r 2 ] satellite around the earth depend?
G = mm =
1 2 [m1] [m2 ] Ans. It depends on the mass the earth and the
1 1 2
[M L T ][L ] 2 distance of the satellite from the centre of the
= earth.
[M 2 ]
= [M1L3T2] GM
Since, VC =
r
Q.5. At what place a gravitational potential due
to earth is infinite? Q.12. On what factors does the escape velocity of a
Ans. Gravitational potential at a distance r from the body from the surface of earth depend?
centre of earth is Ans. It depends on mass of the earth and the radius
of the earth.
GM
= 2GM
r
Since, Ve =
At the centre of the earth R
r =0 Q.13. Give the equation for the value acceleration
GM due to gravity at a depth d from the surface
 Gravitational potential = =  of the earth. What is the value of g at the
0
centre of the earth?
Hence, gravitational potential at the centre of
earth is infinte. Ans. The expression of acceleration due to gravity at
depth d below the earth surface is given by
Q.6. On what factors does the acceleration due to
gravity depend?  d
gd = g 1  
Ans. For a given density it depends on mass and radius  R
of the planet. At the centre of the earth,

Q.7. How does the shape of the earth affect the d =R

acceleration due to gravity?  gd = 0
Gravitation 17

At the centre of the earth, acceleration due to Q.17. Why is gravitational potential energy negative?
gravity is zero. Ans. Because it arises due to attractive force of
Q.14. What are the factors that make g least at the gravitation.
equator and maximum at the poles? Q.18. The gravitational force between two bodies is
Ans. (i) g is maximum at the pole due to 1 N, if the distance between them is doubled,
(a) Rotation of the earth. what will be the force between them?
(b) The earth is flattened at the pole Gm1m 2
Ans. F1 =
(c) The radius of the earth at the pole is minimum. r2
(ii) g is minimum at the equator due to Gm1m 2 Gm1m 2
F2 = =
(a) Rotation of the earth. (2r )2 4r 2
(b) The earth is bulging out at the equator
F1 Gm1m 2 4r 2
 F2 =  Gm m
(c) The radius of the earth at the equator is maximum. r2 1 2

F1
Q.15. As we go from one planet to another, how will   F1 = 4F2
the mass and the weight of a body will change? F2 = 4
Ans. Mass remains constant but weight changes from But F1 = 1 N ... (Given)
planet to planet as acceleration due to gravity 1
changes from planet to planet.  F2 =
4
Q.16. Which physical quantity is conserved when a Hence, it becomes one fourth.
planet revolves around the sun?
Ans. Angular momentum

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Obtain the relation between the universal This is the acceleration due to gravity at height h
gravitational constant and the gravitational above the surface of the earth or any planet.
acceleration due to gravity on the surface the From (1) and (2)
earth. 2
 R 
OR gh = g  
R h 
Show that acceleration due to gravity at
height h above the surface of the earth is Q.2. Draw a diagram showing different stages of
projection for artificial satellite
2
 R  Ans. Diagram:
gh = g  
R h
h
Ans. Let M is the mass of the earth, R is radius of the V>Vc
earth. Consider an object of mass m is situated R
on the surface of the earth, g is the acceleration Earth V > Ve
due to gravity at the surface of the earth. V = Vc (Hyperbola)
On the surface of the earth, (Circle)

Weight of the object = Gravitational force

GMm
mg = V = Ve
R2 Ve > V > V c (Parabola)
GM (Ellipse)
g = ... (1)
R2
This is the acceleration due to gravity at the
surface of the earth. Notations: V = Velocity of projection
At height h above the surface of the earth, Vc = Critical velocity
acceleration due to gravity is gh Ve = Escape velocity
Weight of the object = Gravitational force Fig. Different shapes of projection of Satellite

GMm
mgh =
R  h 2
GMm
gh = ... (2)
R  h 2
18
Q.3. Why is it necessary to use a minimum two stage
rocket to launch a satellite into a circular orbit
around the earth?
Ans. (i) When a single stage rocket is used, it would
give a satellite only vertically upward thrust. The
maximum height attained by the satellite depends
on the speed of projection of the satellite. Greater
the speed, larger is the height attained by it. At
the maximum height the speed of the satellite is
zero. Then it moves vertically downward and falls
on the ground. If the initial velocity of the satellite
is equal to the escape velocity, then it escapes
from the earth surface. In any case, it would not
become the a satellite of the earth
(ii) When two stage rocket is used. The satellite is
kept at the tip of the rocket. Initially the fuel in
the first stage of the rocket is ignited on the
surface of earth, so that rocket rises to a desired
height above the surface of the earth. Now by
remote control, the first stage of the rocket is
detached and the rocket is rotated through 90 0
so that it points in the horizontal direction. The
second stage rocket gives the correct horizontal
velocity to the satellite so as to revolve it in a
circular orbit around the earth. Now fuel in the
second rocket is ignited so that satellite is
projected in horizontal direction.
Q.4. State Kepler’s law of orbit and law of equal areas.
Ans. (i) First law (Law of orbit):
Every planet revolves in an elliptical orbit round
the sun, with the sun situated at one of the foci
of the ellipse.
(ii) Second law (Law of equal areas):
The radius vector drawn from the sun to any planet
sweeps out equal areas in equal intervals of time.
i.e. The areal velocity of the radius vector is constant.
v1
r2
A1
v2 A2 Planet
r1
Sun
Area A1 = Area A2
Q.5. Obtain an expression for binding energy of a
satellite at rest on the surface of the earth.
Ans. The gravitational potential at a distance R from
the centre of the earth is
GM
Gravitational potential = 
R towards the centre of the earth and both fall
The potential energy of the satellite is,
P.E. = gravitational potential  mass of the satellite
GMm
P.E. = 
R floor of the satellite, in turn satellite does not
As the satellite is at rest on the surface of the
earth, it’s K.E. = 0
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
The total energy of satellite is
T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
GMm
T.E. = 0 
R
GMm
T.E. = 
R
The negative sign indicates that the satellite is
bound to the earth surface, due to gravitational
force of attraction.
Binding energy of Satellite is numerically equal
to its total energy.
GMm
 B.E. = +
R
This is the expression for B.E. of a satellite at
rest on the surface of the earth.
Q.6. What is geostationary satellite? State its uses
Ans. Geostationary satellite: An artificial satellite
revolving in a circular orbit round the earth in
the equatorial plane, in the same sense of the
rotation of the earth and having same period of
revolution as the period of rotation of the earth
(i.e. 1day = 24 hours = 86400 seconds) is called
geo-stationary satellite.
As relative velocity of the satellite with respect
to the earth is zero, it appears stationary from
the surface of the earth. Therefore it known as
geo-stationary satellite or geo- synchronous
satellite. As it is mainly used for the communication
purposes so it is called communication satellite.
Uses:
(i) For military purposes.
(ii) For broadcasting telecommunication.
(iii) For transmitting of TV and radio signals over
large areas of the earth surface.
(iv) For weather forecasting.
Q.7. Ex plain why an astronaut in an orbiting
satellite has a feeling of weightlessness?
OR
Discuss the Weightlessness experienced by an
astronaut in an orbiting satellite.
Ans. (i) Weight of a body is the gravitational force
acting on the body by the earth. When a man
stands on the floor, the floor exerts normal
reaction on him equal to his weight.
(ii) An astronaut of mass m in a satellite is moving
with constant speed along the orbit.
(iii) When an astronaut is in orbiting satellite, the
satellite as well as the astronaut is attracted
towards the earth with same acceleration. This
acceleration is same as g at the satellite.
(iv) Thus astronaut is unable to exert weight on the
provide normal reaction on the astronaut.
Therefore astronaut feels weightlessness.
Gravitation 19

Q.8. Show that the escape velocity of the body from Mass = Volume  density
the surface of the earth is 2Vc where Vc is the 4
M = R 3   ... (2)
critical velocity of the body when it orbiting very 3
close to the earth’s surface. From (1) and (2)
Ans. If body is close to the earth’s surface,
4
Critical velocity of body orbiting at height h is 2G  R 3  
Ve = 3
GM R
Vc =
R h 8
= GR 2
If body is close to the earth’s surface, 3
Then h <<< R
8
Critical velocity for a body orbiting close to the = R G 
3
surface is
Q.11. Does the escape velocity of a body from the
GM earth surface depend on
Ve = ... (1)
R
(i) the mass of the body
Escape velocity of a body
(ii) the location from where it is projected
2GM (iii) the direction of projection
Ve = ... (2)
R (iv) the height of the location from where the
From (1) and (2) body is projected?
GM Ans. (i) The escape velocity of a body is given as
Ve = 2
R 2GM
Ve =
Ve = 2Vc R
It is independent of the mass of satellite.
Q.9. Show that the critical velocity of a satellite
revolving close to the surface of the earth of (ii) The escape velocity can be written as Ve = gR
G From the formula it is seen that escape velocity
radius R and mean density  is 2R . depends on the value of acceleration due to gravity
3
Ans. Critical velocity of a satellite revolving around the at a given place. Since g is different at different
earth close to its surface is place. Therefore escape velocity is different at
different point. However the difference is very
GM small.
Vc = ... (1)
R (iii) It does not depend on the direction of projection.
 Mass = Volume  density
(iv) At a height h from the surface of the earth, the
4 escape velocity is
 M= R 3  ... (2)
3
From (1) and (2) 2GM
Ve =
4 R h
G R 3  
Vc = 3 Hence it depends on the height of projection.
R
Q.12. An artificial satellite has to be set up to
4 revolve around a planet in a circular orbit
= GR 2
3 close to its surface. If  is the mean density
and R is the radius of the planet, show that
G
= 2R 3
3 the period of revolution is T = .
G
Q.10. Show that the escape velocity of a body from Ans. The period of satellite is
the surface of a planet of radius R and mean
8G
R  h 3
T = 2 ... (1)
density  is R . GM
3
As satellite revolves very close to the planet’s
Ans. Escape velocity of a body from the surface of a surface, h is very small and can be neglected
planet is
R3
2GM T = 2
Ve = ... (1) GM
R
20 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

 Mass = Volume  density Wp GM pm Re2

= 
4 We R 2p GM em
 M = R 3  
3
M p Re2
Substituting in equation (1), we get = M  R2
e p

R3 1 2
2
4
T = 2  
4 = =
G  R 3   2 1 7
3
Wp 4
34  2  =
We 7
T =
G  4   4
Wp =  We
3 7
T = 4
G
Wp =  3.5 = 2 kg-wt
7
Q.13. What should be the duration of the year if the
distance between the sun and the earth gets Q.15. Calculate the escape velocity of a body from
doubled the present distance? the surface of the earth.
Solution: Data: [Given: G = 6.67  1011 Nm2/kg2, R = 6400 km,
r2 = 2r1, T1 = 1 year, T2 = ? g = 9.8 m/s2]
Solution: Data:
 T 2r 3
G = 6.67  1011Nm2/kg2,
T12 r13 R = 6400 km = 6.4  106 m, g = 9.8m/s2
 T22 = r23 Escape velocity on the surface of planet
3 3 Ve = 2gR
T12  r1   r1 
T22 =   =  

r
 2  2r1  = 2  9.8  6.4  106
2
 T1 
  = 1 Ve = 125.54  106
T  8
 2
= 11.2 × 103 m/s
T1 1 = 11.2 km/s
T2 = 2 2
Q.16. Find the binding energy of a body of mass 50kg
T2 at rest on the surface of the earth
T1 = 2 2 Solution: Data:
But T1 = 1 year R = 6400 km, M= 50 kg,
  T2 = 2.828 years M = 6 × 1024 kg,
= 2.828 × 365 = 1032 days G = 6.67 × 1011 Nm2 / kg
Q.14. A body weighs 3.5 kg-wt. on the surface of the B.E. of an artificial satellite at rest on the earth
earth. What will be its weight on the surface of surface is
a planet whose mass is 17 th of the mass of the B.E. =
GMm
earth and radius half of that of earth? R

Solution: Data: 6.67  10 11  6  1024  50

=
Me Re 6.4  106
We = 3.5 kg – wt, Mp= , R p= , Wp= ? = 312.7 × 107
7 2
Weight of the body on the earth surface of = 3.127  109 J

GM em
We = ... (1)
Re2
Weight of the body on the planet is
GM pm
Wp = R p2 ... (2)
Gravitation 21

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Describe how an artificial satellite using two
stage rocket is launched in an orbit round the
earth.
OR
Explain the nature of all the possible orbitals
of a satellite with the help of a suitable diagram.
Ans. (i) For projection of satellite minimum two stage
rocket is used. The satellite is kept at the tip of
the rocket. Initially the fuel in the first stage of
the rocket is ignited on the surface of earth, so
that rocket rises to a desired height above the
surface of the earth. Now by remote control, the
first stage of the rocket is detached and the rocket
is rotated through 900 so that it points in the
horizontal direction. Now fuel in the second
rocket is ignited so that satellite is projected in
horizontal direction.
(ii) When the fuel in the second stage rocket is
completely burnt, the empty second stage rocket
also gets detached from the satellite. The
resulting motion of the satellite depends upon
the velocity of the projection given to it.
(iii) The minimum horizontal velocity of projection
that must be given to a satellite at a certain
height, so that it can revolve in a circular orbit
round the earth is called as critical velocity.
h
V>Vc
R
velocity, then the satellite moves in elliptical
orbit, and its apogee or point of greater distance
from the earth, will be greater than projection
height.
(4) If the velocity the of projection is equal to the
escape velocity, then the satellite moves in
parabolic path.
(5) If the velocity of the projection is greater than
the escape velocity, then the orbit will be
hyperbolic and will escape the gravitational pull
of the earth.
Q.2. What is critical velocity? Obtain an expression
for critical velocity of an orbiting satellite.
On what factors does it depend on?
Ans. Critical velocity: The minimum horizontal
velocity of projection that must be given to a
satellite at a certain height, so that it can revolve
in a circular orbit round the earth is called as
critical velocity.
m
Vc
h
R
M O
r = R+h

Earth V > Ve
V = Vc (Hyperbola)
(Circle) Consider a satellite of mass m revolving round
the earth at a height h above the surface of the
earth. Let M is the mass and R is radius of the
earth. The satellite is moving in a circular of
V = Ve
radius
Ve > V > V c (Parabola)
(Ellipse) r = R + h with velocity Vc
The necessary centripetal force for the circular
motion of the satellite is provided by the
Notations: V = Velocity of projection gravitational force of attraction exerted by the
earth on the satellite.
Vc = Critical velocity
Ve= Escape velocity Centripetal force = Gravitational force
Fig. Different shapes of projection of Satellite mVc2 GMm
=
Possible cases of projection of satellite: r r2
(1) If the velocity of the projection is less than the GM
Vc2 =
critical velocity then the satellite moves in r
elliptical orbit, but the point of projection is
GM
apogee and in the orbit the satellite comes closer Vc =
to the earth with its perigee point lying at 1800. If r
it enters the atmosphere while coming towards GM
perigee it will loose energy and spiral down. Vc = ... (1)
R h
(2) If the velocity of the projection is equal to the This is the expression of for critical velocity of a
critical velocity then the satellite moves in satellite.
circular orbit round the earth.
It depends on (1) mass of the planet (2) radius of
(3) If the velocity of the projection is greater than the planet and (3) height of the satellite above
the critical velocity but less than the escape the planet.
22 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.3. Define periodic time of satellite. Kinetic energy of satellite is

Show that the square of the period revolution 1
of satellite is directly proportional to the K.E. = mVc2
2
cube of the orbital radius.
But critical velocity of satellite is
Ans. Period of satellite: The time taken by the
satellite to complete one revolution round the GM
Vc =
earth is called period of satellite r
Consider a satellite of mass m revolving in a 1 GMm
circular orbit of radius r round the earth.  K.E. = ... (1)
2 r
Let M is the mass and R is radius of the earth. The gravitational potential at a distance r from
The distance covered by the satellite in one the centre of the earth is
revolution is equal to the circumference. GM
Gravitational potential = 
r
Circumference of the orbit
Critical velocity = The potential energy of the satellite is,
Period
P.E. = Gravitational potential × Mass of the satellite
2r GMm
Vc = ... (1)  P.E. =  .. (2)
T r
But, Critical velocity is The total energy of satellite is
GM T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
Vc = ... (2)
r 1 GMm GMm
From (1) and (2)  T.E. = 
2 r r
GM 2r 1 GMm
 =  T.E. =  ... (3)
r T 2 r
Squaring both sides, The negative sign indicates that the satellite is
bound to the earth surface, due to gravitational
GM 42r 2 force of attraction.
=
r T2 To free the satellite from the earth’s gravitational
2 3 influence, minimum energy equal to its total
4 r
T2 = energy should be supplied.
GM
1 GMm
42 B.E. = +
Since, = constant 2 r
GM
GMm
 T 2  r3  B.E. = +
Thus the square of the period of revolution of
R  h 
the satellite is directly proportional to the cube If satellite is close to the earth’s surface, then
of the radius of its orbit. 1 GMm
B.E. = +
Q.4. Define binding energy of satellite. Obtain an 2 R
expression for binding energy of satellite of Q.5. Define escape velocity. Derive an expression
a satellite revolving in a circular orbit round for the escape velocity of an object from the
the earth. What is the B.E. of a satellite which surface of the earth.Hence show that if a
is orbiting very close to the earth surface? satellite is close to the earth surface escape
Ans. Binding energy: The minimum amount of energy velocity is Ve = 2  Vc
required for satellite to escape from earth’s
gravitational influence is called as binding energy Ans. Escape velocity: The minimum velocity, with
of a satellite. which a body should be projected from the
surface of the earth, so that it escapes from the
Derivation:
earth’s gravitational field, is called escape
Consider a satellite of mass m revolving round velocity.
the earth in a circular orbit at a height h above
Derivation :
the surface of the earth.
Consider a satellite of mass m, at stationary on
Let M is mass and R is the radius of the earth.
the surface of the earth, then binding energy of the
r = R + h = Radius of the orbit. satellite on the surface of the earth is given by,
A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit round GMm
the earth possesses potential as well as kinetic B.E. = ... (1)
R
energy.
Gravitation 23

To escape the satellite from the earth, binding gh  2h 

energy is to be provided in the form of kinetic  1
g =  R 
energy.
Kinetic energy of projection = Binding energy h h
Higher powers of are neglected, as <<1, we
R R
1 GMm
mVe2 = get
2 R
 2h 
2GM gh = g 1  ... (3)
Ve2 =  R 
R
This is the expression of the variation of
2GM
Ve = ... (2) acceleration due to gravity with altitude. The
R acceleration due to gravity decreases with
This is the expression for the escape velocity of increase of height above the earth‘s surface.
a satellite from the surface of the earth.
Q.7. Discuss the variation of g with depth and
Escape velocity depends on mass and radius of derive the necessary formula.
the earth and does not depend upon the mass of
OR
the body. Hence its value is same for anybody at
Derive an expression for acceleration due to
the rest on the earth’s surface.
gravity at depth d below the earth’s surface.
If satellite is close to the earth’s surface, What is its value at the centre of the earth?
Critical velocity is Ans. Let M is mass and R is the radius of the earth.
Consider body of mass m is situated on the earth’s
GM
Vc = surface.
R
From (1) d
P
GM
Ve = 2
R R d
Ve = 2 Vc O

i.e. Escape velocity = 2 times critical velocity

Q.6. Discuss the variation of g with altitude.

Ans. Let M is mass and R is the radius of the earth.
Consider body of mass m is situated on the earth’s Fig. Effect of depth on ‘g’
surface.
Acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface
Acceleration due to gravity on the earth’s surface is is
GM GM
g = ... (1) g = ... (1)
R2 R2
Acceleration due to gravity at height h above the Consider the earth as sphere of uniform density.
surface of earth is
Density of the earth
GM
gh = (R  h )2 ... (2) Mass
 =
Volume
gh  R 
2
Mass = Volume  density
 g =  
R h  4
M = R 3  
R2 3
 gh = 4
R  h 2 G R 3  
3
This shows that, g =
R2
Acceleration due to gravity goes on decreasing as
altitude of body from the earth’s surface 4
g = RG  ... (1)
increases. 3
gh R2 Consider a point P at depth d below the surface
g = R  h2 of the earth where acceleration due to gravity is
gd .
2
gh R2  h The distance of point P from the centre of the
g = = 1  
2h
2
 R earth is (R – d)
R 1  
 R
24 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Acceleration due to gravity at the point P due to Thus the effective acceleration due to gravity at
sphere of radius (R  d) is the point P is directed towards the centre of the
earth is
GM 
gd = g = g  a
R  d 2
g = g  R2 cos2 
where, M = mass of the sphere of radius (R – d)
This is the value of acceleration due to gravity at
4 the point P of latitude .
 M = R  d 3  
3 The acceleration due to gravity increases as we
4 move from equator to pole due to rotation of the
G R  d 3   earth. Thus acceleration due to gravity increases
gd = 3
with latitude .
R  d 2
Case I :
4
gd = (R  d ) ... (2) At equator  = 0  cos = 1
3
 g = g  R2
From (1) and (2)
This is the value of acceleration due to gravity at
gd R d d the equator. The maximum reduction in g is at
g = =1
R R the equator.
 d Case II :
gd = g 1   .... (3) At the pole,
 R
This is the expression of acceleration due to  = 900  cos = 0
gravity at depth d below the earth surface. g = g  0 = g
It shows that acceleration due to gravity decreases There is no reduction in acceleration due to
with depth. gravity at the pole.
At the centre of the earth, d = R Q.9. A satellite is revolving round the earth in a
 gd = 0 circular orbit with the critical velocity 7km/s.
Thus at the centre of the earth, acceleration due Find the radius of the orbit of the satellite and
to gravity is zero. period of its revolution.
Solution: Data:
Q.8. Discuss the acceleration due to gravity with
M = 5.98  1024 kg, G = 6.67 Nm2/kg2,
latitude.
Vc = 7km/s = 7  103 m
OR
Critical velocity
How does the rotation of earth affect the value
GM
of “g”? Derive the value of acceleration due Vc =
r
to gravity at a place having latitude . What
is the value of acceleration due to gravity at 6.67  10 11  5.98  1024
the equator and at the poles?  7000 =
r
Ans. The earth is rotating about its polar axis from 6.67  1011  5.98  1024
west to east with uniform angular velocity . So 49 106 =
r
everybody on its surface is moving in a circle i.e.
accelerated motion. 6.67  10 11  5.98  1024
r = = 0.814 107
Consider a body placed at point P on the surface 49  106
of the earth making an angle . The body moves r = 8.14 106 m
along the circular path, whose centre is O and Period of revolution T is
radius r is
Centripetal acceleration of a body is r3
T = 2
ar = r2 GM
N
r
cos  = (8.14  106 )3
R T = 2
O r P 6.67  10 11  5.98  1024
r = R cos  
R g
ar = R cos 2  539.35  1018
W O E = 2
The radial component 39.88  1013
of acceleration is
= 2 13.52  105
a = R cos 2 cos 
a = R2 cos2  = 6.28 11.6 100
= 7297 s
Gravitation 25

Q.10. At what distance above the surface of earth B. E. of body orbiting at height h above the earth
and at what distance below the surface of the surface is
earth, is the acceleration due to gravity less 1 GMm
by 10% of its value at the surface ? (i) B.E. =
2 R h
Solution: Data:
1 6 .67  10 11  6  10 24  1000
gd = g  10% g, = 2
6400  3600   10 6
10 90
gd = g  = g = 20.01 × 106 J
100 100
(ii) K.E. = B.E.
gd 9 gh 9
  g = And, g = = 20.01 × 106 J
10 10
(iii) T.E. = B.E.
Acceleration due to gravity at depth d below the
= 20.01 × 106 J
surface of the earth is
(iv) P.E. = 2.T.E.
 d
gd = g 1   = 40.02 × 106
 R
Q.12. If the earth were made of wood, the mass of
gd  d
1  wooden earth is 10% less as much as it is now.
g =  R Without change in its diameter, calculate
escape velocity of space shot from the surface
9  d
= 1   of the wooden earth.
10  R
Solution: Data:
9 d M = 6 1024 kg, G = 6.67  1011 Nm2/kg,
1 =
10 R R = 6400 km
1 d Mass of wooden earth
=
10 R 10
M = M – 10% M = 6 × 1024  (6 × 1024)
R 6400 100
d = = = 5.4 1024 kg
10 10
 d = 640 km 2GM 
Escape velocity =
Acceleration due to gravity at height h above the R
surface of the earth is 2  6.67  1011  5.4 1024
=
 2h  6.4  106
gh = g 1 
 R  72.04  1013
=
gh  2h  6.4  106
1
g =  R  = 11.256107

9  2h  = 112.56  106
= 1 
10  R  = 10.61 km/s

9 2h Q.13. The earth is rotating with angular velocity 

1 = about its own axis. R is the radius of the earth.
10 R
If R2 = 0.03386 m/s2. Calculate the weight of
1 2h a body of mass 100 g at latitude 250.
=
10 R Solution: Data:
R m = 100 g, R2 = 0.03386 m/s2, g = 9.8 m/s2, W = ?
2h = Weight of the body at latitude is
10
mg = mg  m × cos2  × R2
6400
 h= = 320 km = 0.1 × 9.8  0.1 cos2 25 × 0.03386
20
= 0.1  0.1 × (0.9063)2 × 0.03386
Q.11. Find the kinetic energy, potential energy, = 0.98 – 0.1 × 0.8124 × 0.03386
total energy and binding energy of an artificial = 0.98 – 0.002781
satellite orbiting at a height of 3600 km above
= 0.9772 g
the surface of the earth.
Solution: Data:
M = 5.98 kg  1024kg, G = 6.67 1011 Nm2/ kg2,
R = 6400 km, h = 3600 km, m = 1000 kg
26 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) State Kepler’s law of orbit and law of equal areas. (March 2013)
(2) ‘g’ is the acceleration due to gravity on the earth and ‘R’ is the radius of the earth show that acceleration due

 
to gravity at height ‘h’ above the surface of the Earth is gh = g   (Oct 2013)
 
(3) Derive an expression for accleration due to gravity at depth ‘d’ below the earth’s surface. (Feb. 2014)
(4) Draw a diagram showing different stages of projection for artificial satellite. (Oct. 2014)
(5) Explain why an astronaut in an orbiting satellite has a feeling of weightlessness. (Feb. 2015)
(6) Discuss the weightlessness experienced by an astronaut in an orbiting satellite. (Oct. 2015)
(7) Derive an expression for critical velocity of a satellite revolving around the earth in a
circularorbit. (Feb. 2016)
(8) Obtain an expression for critical velocity of a satellite orbiting around the earth. (July 2016)
(9) State Kepler’s laws of planetary motion. (July 2016)
Show that period of a satellite revolving around the Earth depends upon mass of the Earth. (March 2017)

(11) Prove that gh = g 1  2h  where gh is the acceleration due to gravity at altitude h and h << R (R is the radius
 R 
of the Earth). (March 2017)
(12) State Kepler’s law of orbit and law of equal areas. (March 2018)
Problems :
(1) The Earth is rotating with angular velocity  about its own axis. R is the radius of the Earth. If R2 = 0.03386
m/s2, calculate the weight of a body of mass 100 gram at lattitude 25°. (g = 9.8 m/s 2). (March 2013)
(2) A body weighs 4.0 kg-wt on the surface of the earth. What will be its weight on the surface of a planet whose
th
1 1
mass is   of the mass of the earth and radius   of that of the earth? (Oct 2013)
8 2
(3) The escape velocity of a body from the surface of the earth is 11.2 km/s. If a satellite were to orbit close to the
surface, what would be its critical velocity? (Feb. 2014)
(4) Find the total energy and binding energy of an artificial satellite of mass 800 kg orbiting at a height of 1800 km
above the surface of the earth.
[G = 6.67 × 10–11 S.I. units, Radius of earth : R = 6400 km, Mass of earth : M = 6 × 10 24 kg] (Oct. 2014)
(5) Calculate the period of revolution of jupiter around the sun. The ratio of the radius of Jupiter’s orbit to that
of the Earth’s orbit is 5. (Period of revolution of the earth is 1 year.) (Feb. 2015)
(6) Determine the binding energy of satellite of mass 1000 kg revolving in a circular orbit around the Earth when
it is close to the surface of Earth. Hence find kinetic energy and potential energy of the satellite.
[Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, Radius of Earth = 6400 km; Gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10 –11 Nm2/kg2]
(Oct. 2015)
(7) What is the decrease in weight of a body of mass 600 kg when it is taken in a mine of depth 5000 m?
[Radius of earth = 6400 km, g = 9.8 m/s2] (Feb. 2016)
(8) A hole is drilled half way to the centre of the Earth. A body is dropped into the hole. How much will it weight
at the bottom of the hole if the weight of the body on the Earth’s surface is 350 N? (March 2017)
(9) If the angular speed of the Earth 7.26 × 105 rad/s and radius of the Earth is 6,400 km, calculate the change
in weight of 1 kg of mass taken from equator to pole. (July 2017)
(10) What is the decrease in weight of a body of mass 500 kg when it is taken into a mine of depth 1000 Km?
(Radius of earth R = 6400 km, g = 9.8 m/s2) (March 2018)


Rotational Motion 27
CHAPTER
3
Syllabus
Moment of Inertia, Kinetic Energy of Rotating Body, Physical significance of Moment of Inertia, Radius of Gyration, Torque
Acting on a Rotating body, Rolling motion, Theorem of Parallel and Perpendicular Axes, Applications-Rod, Ring, Disc, Solid
cylinder, Solid sphere, Angular Momentum and its conservation.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The moment of inertia of a body does NOT depend 7. For a uniform disc of mass M and radius R, the
upon moment of inertia of the disc about a tangent in its
(a) the mass of the body plane is
(b) the position of the axis of rotation 3 5 1 1
(a) MR2 (b) MR2 (c) MR2 (d) MR2
(c) the velocity of the body 2 4 2 4
(d) the shape of the body 8. A horizontal disc rotates freely about a vertical axis
2. The dimensional formula for rotational kinetic energy through its centre at 120 rpm. A blob of wax falls
is the same as that of and sticks on it. Then the angular momentum and
the frequency respectively,
(a) angular momentum × angular acceleration
(a) increases, decreases
(b) angular momentum × frequency
(b) remains constant, increases
(c) moment of inertia × frequency
(c) remains constant, decreases
(d) moment of inertia × rate of change of angular
momentum (d) increases, remains constant
3. A constant torque acting on a body produces in it a 9. The radius of gyration of a thin rod about a
constant transverse axis through one end is given by
(a) angular acceleration L L L L
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(b) angular displacement 2 3 2 2 3
(c) angular momentum 10. The dimensions of angular momentum are
(d) angular velocity (a) [M1L2T1] (b) [M1L2T1] (c) [M2L1T1] (d) [M2L2T2]
4. The radius of gyration of a thin ring about a 11. The rate of change of angular momentum of a body
transverse axis through its centre is is equal to
(a) 0.5 × diameter of the ring (a) its angular acceleration
(b) diameter of the ring (b) the change in its angular velocity
(c) 2 × diameter of the ring (c) the rotational K.E. of the body
(d) (diameter of the ring)2 (d) the net external torque acting on the body
5. The radius of gyration of a thin ring of radius R about 12. A body rotates about a fixed axis with an angular
a tangent perpendicular to its plane is velocity  and angular momentum L, then its
R R rotational K.E. is
(a) 2R (b) 2R (c) (d) L 1 2  L
2 2 (a) (b) IL (c) (d)
6. Two rings have their moment of inertias in the ratio 2 2 2L 2
2:1 and diameters also in the ratio 2:1. The ratio of 13. A body is acted upon by a constant torque. In 4
their masses is seconds its angular momentum changes from L to
(a) 2:1 (b) 1:2 (c) 1:4 (d) 1:1 4L. The magnitude of the torque is
L 3L
(a) (b) (c) 3L (d) 4L
4 4

ANSWERS
1 - (c), 2 - (b), 3 - (a), 4 - (a), 5 - (a), 6 - (b), 7 - (b), 8 - (c), 9 - (b), 10 - (b), 11 - (d), 12 - (a), 13 - (b)

(27)
28 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. About which axis does a uniform cube have Q.8. A ring, a solid sphere and a solid cylinder
its moment of inertia minimum ? having the same mass m and the same radius
Ans. The moment of inertia of a uniform cube is R are released from rest at the top of the
minimum about an axis passing through its centre inclined plane without slipping. Would they
of mass and perpendicular to opposite faces. arrive at the bottom at the same time?
Ans. As the sphere has maximum acceleration and the
Q.2. Why does not spinning top topple?
ring has minimum acceleration. Therefore, the
Ans. Angular momentum about symmetry axis sphere reaches the first and the ring reaches the
provides an object with orientational stability, last.
making it more difficult for external torque to
change its orientation. Q.9. A solid sphere has a radius R. If the radius of
gyration of the sphere about its diameter is
Q.3. A body rotates at a constant speed. Does
torque act on it? 2
R , what is the radius of gyration of the
5
Ans. No.
sphere about a tangential axis?
The angular velocity of a body remains constant
Ans. By Parallel axis theorem for solid sphere
only if external torque acting on a body is zero.
I T = ID + MR2
Q.4. Is it possible to distinguish between a raw egg 2 2
We know IT = MK T and ID = MK D
and hard-boiled egg by spinning them on the
2 2
table?  MK T = MK D + MR2
Ans. The hard-boiled egg spins faster than a raw egg. 2 2
i.e. K T = K D + R2
As hard-boiled egg has M.I. less than the M.I. of
2
raw egg.  2 
=  5 R  + R2
2
... (  KD = R)
Q.5. State the expression of the moment of inertia   5
of a solid cylinder about an axis passing through 2 2 7 2
its centre and perpendicular to its length. = R + R2 = R
5 5
1 1 7
Ans. I = MR2 + Ml2  KT = R
4 12 5

Q.6. State the expression of the moment of inertia Q.10. State the expression of kinetic energy of a
of a uniform disc about an axis passing rolling body on the horizontal surface. Hence
through its centre and perpendicular to its deduce its expression for a disc rolling with
length. Hence state the radius of gyration velocity v on the surface.
about the corresponding axis 
1 K2
Ans. M.I. of a disc about an axis passing through its Ans. E = Mv2 1  R 2 
2  
centre and perpendicular to its length is
This is the expression of total kinetic energy of
1 rolling body on a plane horizontal surface.
I =MR2
2
For disc,
Its radius of gyration is
K2 1
R =
K = R2 2
2 1  1
 E = Mv2 1  
Q.7. If the radius of a solid sphere is doubled by 2  2
keeping the mass constant, compare the 3
moment of inertia about any diameter. E = Mv2
4
2 Q.11. A body rolling down on an inclined plane, write
Ans. I = MR2, for sphere the formula of the velocity of the body at the
5
bottom of the plane. Hence deduce the velocity
I1 R12 of a solid sphere rolling down the plane.
 = , keeping M constant
I2 R 22 Ans. Velocity of a body rolling down the indined palne
But R2 = 2R1 is given by
I1 R12 1
 = = 2gh
I2 (2R1 )2 4 v =
K2
1 2
R
Rotational Motion 29

K2 2 Q.17. Is radius of gyration of a body a constant

For solid sphere = quantity?
R2 5
Ans. No, it changes with the position of axis of rotation.
2gh 10gh
 v = = Q.18. The M.I. of two rotaing bodies A and B are IA
2 7
1 and IB (IA > IB) and their angular momenta are
5
equal. Which one has a greater rotational
Q.12. A body rolling down on an inclined plane, kinetic enertgy ?
write the formula of the acceleration of the
L2
body at the bottom of the plane. Hence deduce Ans. K.E. =
the acceleration of a hollow cylinder rolling 2I
down the plane Since, IA > IB
Ans. Acceleration of a body rolling down the plane is Therefore, K.EB > K.EA

g sin  Q.19. State the factors upon which the moment of

a = inertia of a body depends.
K2
1 2 Ans. Moment of inertia of a body depends on -
R
(i) The mass, shape, and size of the body.
K2
For a hollow cylinder = 1 (ii) The distribution of mass in the body about
R2
an axis of rotation.
g sin 
 a = (iii) The position and orientation of the axis of
2 rotation.
Q.13. State the S.I. unit and dimensions of angular
Q.21. State the factors upon which the radius of
momentum.
gyration of a body depends
kg.m2 Ans. The radius of gyration of a body depends on -
Ans. S.I. unit of angular momentum is
s (i) The distribution of mass in the body about
Dimensions are [L2M1T1]. an axis of rotation.
Q.14. State the S.I. unit and dimensions of torque, (ii) The position and orientation of the axis of
rotation
Ans. S.I. unit of torque is N m
Dimensions are [L2M1T2]. Q.22. If the earth contracts to half of its present
radius. Then what would be the length of the
Q.15. Define angular momentum of a particle. State day at equator?
its vector form.
Ans. Using law of conservation of angular momentum
Ans. Angular momentum of a particle is defined as
I11 = I22
the product of its linear momentum and its
perpendicular distance from the axis of rotation. 2 2 2 2 2
MR12  = MR2 
In vector form it is given as 5 T1 5 T2
L = rp R12 R22
=
T1 T2
Q.16. State law of conservation of angual momentum.
Ans. Law of conservation of angular momentum: R1
Here T1 = 24 hrs and R2 =
2
It states that the angular momentum of a rotating
body is conserved or remains constant, if the R12 R12
 = 4T  T2 = 6 hours
resultant external torque acting on the body is 24 2
zero.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. What do you mean by radius of gyration of a The moment of inertia of the body is given as
body? Write its S.I. unit and dimensions.
I = MK2
Ans. Radius of gyration (K) :
I
Radius of gyration of a body about an axis of  K =
rotation is defined as the distance between the M
axis of rotation and a point at which the whole S.I. unit of radius of gyration is metre (m).
mass of the body is supposed to be concentrated, Dimensions are [M0 L1 T0]
so as the give the same moment of inertia as the
body about the same axis.
30 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.2. Explain the physical significance of radius of through its centre C and perpendicular to its own
gyration. axis as shown.
Ans: Physical significance of radius of gyration: The moment of inertia of the cylinder rotating
about an axis YY passing through its centre C
(1) The radius of gyration depends upon shape and
and perpendicular to its own axis is given by
size of the body.
(2) It measures the distribution of mass about the 1 1
I= MR2 + ML2
axis of rotation. 4 12
(3) Small value of radius of gyration shows the mass Q.4. Derive an expression of moment of inertia of
of the body is distributed close to the axis of uniform solid sphere about an axis of rotation
rotation so that moment of inertia is small. coinciding with its diameter. Hence deduce
(4) Large value of radius of gyration shows the mass its M.I. about its tangent.
of the body is distributed at large distance from Ans. (a) Moment of inertia of a uniform solid sphere
the axis of rotation, so that moment of inertia is about a diameter :
large.
Q.3. Derive an expression for moment of inertia
of a solid cylinder of uniform cross section R
about r
X X
(i) its own axis of symmetry. C
(ii) an axis passing through its centre and
perpendicular to its length.
Ans. (i) Moment of inertia of a solid cylinder
about its own axis:
Consider a solid uniform sphere of mass M, radius
Consider a thin uniform z R and density .
solid cylinder of mass M M
and radius R rotating dr  = 4
4  M = R2 
about its own axis. Solid R 3 3
r 3
cylinder can be consider
as combination of The moment of inertia of solid sphere about its
number of thin circular diameter is given by
discs piled one above R 2
another. Therefore the L I =MR2
5
moment of inertia of the (b) M.I. of a solid sphere about its tangent :
solid cylinder about its
IC IO
geometric axis will be
same as that of the
disc. The moment of
inertia of the solid
cylinder about its
geometric axis is, h=R
C O
2
MR
I =
2
(ii) Moment of inertia of a solid cylinder about
an ax is passing thr ough its centre and
perpendicular to its length.
By parallel axes theorem,
Ans:
IO = IC + Mh2
Y
2MR 2
 IO = + MR2 (
5

C
7MR 2
R R  IO =
5
r
Q.5. State and prove principle of conservation of
dr angular momentum.
Y
L
Ans. Statement: It states that the angular momentum
of a rotating body is conserved or remains constant,
Consider a solid cylinder of mass M and length L if the resultant external torque acting on the body
and radius R rotating about an axis YY passing is zero.
Rotational Motion 31

Proof:
The angular momentum of a particle is given as
L = r p
Differentiating it with respect to time

dL d
=
dt (r  p )
dt
dL d p dr (a) (b)
= r  + p ... (1)
dt dt dt (2) A diver, while executing a summersault, pulls his
arms and legs, so that moment of inertia decreases
dr dp
But = v , = F , and p = mv and angular speed increases. The ballet dancers and
dt dt ice skaters can increase speed by folding their arms.
 Equation (1) becomes, Consider a person standing on a rotating chair,
when his arms are very close to his body, moment
dL of inertia is I1 and angular speed of rotation is 1. If
= r × F + v  mv
dt he stretches his arms fully horizontally then his
dL moment of inertia increases to I2 and his speed of
 = r × F + m (v  v ) rotation decreases to 2. The chair rotates slower.
dt
Angular momentum before stretching hands is
dL
= r ×F + 0 ( v  v  0 ) L1 = I1
dt
Angular momentum after stretching hands is
But r × F = external L2 = l2
From the principle of conservation of angular
dL dL
=   external = momentum
dt dt
L1 = L2
Now, if the resultant external torque acting on
I1= I2
the body is zero,
I1< I2 and  < 
dL
then = 0 Q.7. Define angular momentum of a particle. State
dt
S.I. unit of angular momentum and obtain its
i.e. L = constant dimensions.
The angular momentum of the body is constant, Ans. Definiation: Angular momentum of a particle is
when external torque acting on the body is zero. defined as the product of its linear momentum
and its perpendicular distance from the axis of
This is proves the principle of conversation of rotation.
anangular momentum.
In vector form it is given as
Q.6. State the law of conservation of angular
moment um. Ex p lain it with a su itable L = r  p
example. Its magnitude is
Ans. Law of conservation of angular momentum: L = pr sin = mvr sin 
It states that the angular momentum of a rotating  L = mvr, if  = 900
body is conserved or remains constant, if the kg.m2
resultant external torque acting on the body is The S.I. unit of angular momentum is
s
zero.
Its dimensions are [L2M1T1]. It is a vector quantity.
Examples:
Q.8. State the S.I. unit and dimensions of moment
(1) Principle of conservation of angular momentum
of inertia. On what factors does it depend?
is used by ballet dancers, skaters, acrobats in a
circus and divers in swimming. They can change Ans. S.I. unit of moment of inertia is kg-m2
their angular speeds by changing the moment of Dimensions of M.I are [M1L2T0]
inertia, which depends upon the distribution of Moment of inertia of a body depends on -
mass about the axis of rotation. In order to have
(i) The mass, shape, and size of the body.
large change in moment of inertia, a person can
extend out or pulling the arms and legs of the (ii) The distribution of mass in the body about
body. an axis of rotation.
(iii) The position and orientation of the axis of
rotation.
32 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.9. State an expression of moment of inertia of a Solution: Data:

thin uniform rod about an axis passing through
IC = 10 kg-m2, Id = ?
the centre of mass and perpendicular to its
length. Hence deduce an expression of for M.I. of disc about an axis passing through its centre
moment of inertia about an axis passing through is
its one end and perpendicular to its length. 1
IC = MR2
Ans. Consider a thin uniform rod of mass M and length 2
L rotating about an axis passing thyrough its M.I. of a disc about a diameter
centre C and perpendicular to its length. Its
Ic = Ix + Iy
moment of interia about an axis passing through
its centre and perpendicular to its length is I z = Ix + Ix
2 = 2Ix (Ix = Ix = Id)
ML
Ic =  I z = 2Id
12
IC Ic
Id = (Iz = Ic)
2

L/2
10
dm L/2  Id = = 5 kg-m2
A C B 2

x Q.12. A ballet dancer spins about a vertical axis at

dx 2.5 rad/s. with his both arms outstretched.
With the arms folded the moment of inertia
about the same axis of rotation changes by
Moment of inertia about an axis passing through
25%. Calculate the new rotation in r.p.m.
its one end and perpendicular to its length:
IO IC Solution: Data:
1 = 2.5 rad/s, 2= ?
I2 = I1  25% I1
h = L/2
O C 25 75 3
= I1  I = I = I
100 1 100 1 4 1
By conservation of angular momentum
Let IC be the moment of inertia of the rod about I1 = I22
an axis passing through the centre and 3
perpendicular to its length I1 = I  2
4 1
I0 be the moment of inertia of the rod about an 3
axis passing through its one end I1  2.5 =  I1  2
4
Distance between the two parallel axes is A
10
h = L/2  2 = = 3.33 rad/s
3
By parallel axes theorem, 2 = 3.33 × 60
I 0 = IC + Mh2 2 = 199.8 r.p.m.
2 2 2 2
ML L  ML ML Q.13. A solid cylinder of uniform density of radius
I0 = + M  = +
12 2 12 4 2 cm has mass of 50g. If its length is 12 cm,
ML2 calculate its moment of inertia about an axis
I0 = passing through its centre and perpendicular
3
to its length.
Q.10. A torque of magnitude 1000 Nm acting on a
Solution: Data:
body produces an angular acceleration of
2 rad/s2. Calculate the moment of inertia of R = 2 cm, L = 12 cm, M = 50 g
body. Moment of inertia of solid cylinder about its axis
Solution: Data: perpendicular to its length is
 = 2 rad/s2,  = 1000 Nm, I =?, 1 1
I = MR2 + ML2
  = I 4 12
1 1
1000 = I × 2 I = 50 (2)2 + 50  (12)2
4 12
 I = 500 kg-m2 I = 50 + 50  12
Q.11. Moment of inertia of a disc about an axis passing I = 50 + 600
through its centre and perpendicular to its plane  I = 650 g-cm2
is 10 kg-m2. Find its M.I. about the diameter.
Rotational Motion 33

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Derive an expression of kinetic energy of a 1 1 1 1

rotating body with uniform angular velocity  Erot = m r 22 + m 2r222 + m 3r322 +…+ mnrn22
2 11 2 2 2
Show that rotational kinetic energy is equal
1
1  Erot = (m r 2  m 2r22  m 3r322  ....  mn rn2 )2
to Erot = L 2 11
2
OR 1 2n
Erot =  m r 2
Show that rotational kinetic energy is equal 2 i 0 i i
2 where,
1 L
to Erot =   n
2M  K 
I =  miri2
Ans. Consider a rigid body rotating with constant i 0

angular velocity about an axis passing through = m1r12  m 2r22  m 3r32  ......  m n rn2
point O and perpendicular to the plane of the
paper. is moment of inertia of the body
1 2
 Erot = I ... (1)
2
v2

Using, L = I
m2
r2 v1 1
Erot = L ... (2)
O m1 2
r1
vn
 I = MK2
rn
mn From (2)
1 L  1 L2 L2
Erot = L   = =
2 I  2M K 2 2I
2
1 L
 Erot =   ... (3)
2MK 
Let m1, m2, m3 ... ... .. mn be the masses of the
Equation (3) represents the rotational kinetic
particles situated at perpendicular distances r1,
energy of a body rotating with constant angular
r2 , r 3 ,.. ... .., rn respectively from the axis of
velocity about an axis of rotation.
rotation.
All particles move in circles with same angular Q.2. Define moment of inertia. State its S.I. unit and
speed  but with different radii about the axis of dimensions. Explain its physical significance.
rotation. Therefore linear speeds of the particles Ans. Moment of inertia:
are diferent. Moment of inertia of a body is defined as the sum
Linear speeds of the particles of masses m1, m2, of product of the mass of each particle and the
m3, .. ... ..., mn are, square of its perpendicular distance from the axis
v1 =r1, v2 = r22 , v3 = r33 ……… vn = rnn of rotation.
The kinetic energy of these particles of masses where,
m1, m2, m3 ... ... ... mn is given as

n
I = mn rn2
i 0
1 1
E1 = m v2 = m r 22 = m1r12  m 2r22  m 3r32  ......  m n rn2
2 11 2 11
1 1 S.I. unit of moment of inertia is kgm2.
E2 = m v2 = m r 22
2 2 2 2 22 Dimensions of moment of inertia as [M1L2T0]
1 1 Physical significance of moment of inertia:
E3 = m v2 = m r 22
2 3 3 2 33 An unbalanced force produces linear motion,
. whereas unbalanced torque produces rotational
motion. To produce linear motion in a body the
.
unbalanced force is applied to overcome its
. inertia. In this case inertia of a body is called
. transitional inertia or mass. This inertia depends
upon only the mass concentrated in the body.
1 1
En = m v 2 = mnrn22 The relation between mass, force and acceleration
2 n n 2
is given as
Total kinetic energy of rotation of body is
F = Ma ... (1)
Erot = E1 + E2 + E3 + ............... + En
34
To produce rotational motion in a body the
unbalanced torque is applied to overcome its
inertia. In this case inertia of a body is called
moment of inertia or rotational inertia. Which
depends upon not only the mass but also
distribution of the mass about the axis of
rotation. The relation between moment of inertia,
torque and angular acceleration is given as
 =I ... (2)
Thus comparing above equations, we conclude
that, the moment of inertia plays same role in
rotational motion as the mass of the body does
in linear motion.
Q.3. Obtain an expression for torque acting on
rotating body with constant angular
acceleration. State its S.I. unit and dimensions.
Ans. Consider a rigid body rotating with constant
angular acceleration  about an axis passing
through point O and perpendicular to the plane
of the paper.
 Total torque acting on the rigid body is equal to
F2

r2 m2  
F1
r1
O m1

Fn
rn
mn
Let, m1, m2, m3 ,.. ... ... .., mn
be the masses of the particles situated at
perpendicular distances r 1 , r 2 ,r 3 ........... r n
respectively from the axis of rotation.
As the body rotates, each particle performs circular
motion of different radii. Therefore, angular
acceleration is same for the particles, but linear
accelerations are different.
Linear acceleration of a particle of mass m1 moving
in a circle of radius r1 is,
a1 = r1
Similarly, linear acceleration for particles of
masses m2, m3 ........... mn are given by,
a2 = r2, a3 = r3 , ……………, an = rn
According to Newton’s second law of motion,
forces acting on these particles of masses m1 ,
m2,m3 ,.. ... ... .., mn are given by
f1 = m1 a1 = m1 r1
f2 = m2 a2 = m2r2
f3 = m3 a3 == m3 r3 
 axes gives
 Iz = Ix + Iy

UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
fn = mn an = mn rn
By definition of Torque,
  r F
In magnitude, = rf sin 
For partices moving in circular path
= 900 = rf
For particle of mass m, torque , is given by
1 = r1f 1 = r1 (m1r1) = m 1r12 
Similarly torque acting on the particles of masses
m2, m3, ... ... ..., mn situated at distances
r2, r3, ... ... ..., rn are given by,
2 = m 2r22 
3 = m 3r32 
.
.
.
n = mn rn2
the sum of the torque acting on all the particles.
 = 1 + 2 + 3 + …………+ n
  = m 1r12  + m 2r22  + m 3r32  + ……… + m n rn2 
  
= m1r12  m1r12  ...  mnrn2 
 n 
i.e.  =   miri  
i 1 
  = I 
In vector form  = I
S.I. unit of torque is Nm
Dimensions of torque is same as work.
[M1L2T2]
Q.4. State and prove theorem of perpendicular axes
Ans. Theorem of perpendicular axes :
Statement: It states that the moment of inertia
of a plane lamina about an axis perpendicular to
its plane is equal to the sum of its moment of
inertia about two mutually perpendicular axes
concurrent with perpendicular axis and lying in
the plane of the laminar body.
Proof : Consider a plane lamina of mass M. let
OX and OY be the two mutually perpendicular axes
in the plane of lamina intersecting each other at
point O. Let OZ be the axis perpendicular to the
plane lamina and passing through point O.
Let Ix, Iy and Iz be the moment of inertia of the
plane lamina about OX, OY and OZ axes
respectively. Then, the principle of perpendicular
Rotational Motion 35

Z

P2

r2 m2 P1
r1 
O
 m1
rn Pn
O y L mn
Y
x r x
N
y P (dm)

X Let m1, m2, m3 ,.. ... .., mn

be the masses of the particles situated at
Fig. Perpendicular axes theorem perpendicular distances r 1 , r 2 , r 3 ........., r n
respectively from the axis of rotation.
Consider an infinitesimally small element of the
lamina of mass dm , situated at point P. Join OP All particles move in circles with same angular
and draw perpendiculars PN and PL on X and Y speed  but with different radii about the axis of
axes respectively. Then ON = PL = x, OL = PN = y rotation. Therefore linear speeds of the particles
and OP = r. are different.
The moment of inertia about Z axis is Linear speeds of the particle of mass m1 is
I z = OP 2 dm = r 2dm v 1 = r1 
The moment of inertia about X axis is Linear momentum of this particle of mass m1 is
I x = PN dm = y dm
2 2 p1 = m1v1 = m1r1
The moment of inertia about Y axis is Angular momentum of this particle is given by
I y = PL dm = x dm
2 2 L1 = p1r1 = (m1r1) r1 = (m1r12 ) 
From OPL Similarly angular momentum of the other
r 2
=x2+y2 ... (1) particles of masses, m2, m3, ........, mn are given as
Multiplaying equation (1) by ‘dm’ on both sides L2 = (m1r22 ) 
and integrating, we get L3 = (m1r32 ) 
r dm = (x 2 + y 2)dm
2
:
r dm = y 2dm + x 2dm
2
:
I z = Ix + Iy :
It proves the theorem of perpendicular axes. Ln = (mnrn2 ) 
Q.5. Define angular momentum of a body. Obtain Total angular momentum of the body
an expression for angular momentum of a L = L1 + L2 + L3 + ...... + Ln
rotating body.  Angular momentum,
Ans. Angular momentum: L = (m1r12  m1r22  m 3r32  ...........  mnrn2)
Angular momentum of body is defined as the
L = (m1r12  m 2r22  m 3r32  ...........  m1r12 ) 
product of moment of inertia and angular velocity.
 n 2
 L = I  L =   miri  
Expression for angular momentum of a i 1 
n
rotating body:
But I =  miri 2
Consider a rigid body rotating with constant i 1
angular velocity  about an axis passing through  L = I
point of and perpendicular to the plane of the This is the relation between the moment of
paper. inertia and angular momentum of the body
In vector form
L = Iω
36 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.6. State the theorem of Q.7. A wheel of moment of inertia 1 kg-m 2 is

(i) Perpendicular axes (ii) Parallel axes rotating at speed of 40 rad/s. Due to friction
on the axis, the wheel comes to rest in 10
Find the moment of inertia of a rod of mass
minutes. Calculate the angular momentum of
M and length L about an axis perpendicular
the wheel, two minutes before it comes to rest.
to it and passing through its one end. Given
the mo ment of iner tia about a n ax is Solution: Data:
perpendicular to rod and passing through its I = 1 kg-m2,  = 40rad/s, 1 = 0,
ML2 t = 10 min = 600 sec, At t = 8 min, L = ?
centre is I =
12  =?
Ans. Parallel axes theorem:  1 = 0 + t
It states that the moment of inertia of a body 0 = 40 +  × 600
about any axis is equal to the sum of its moment 0 = 40 +  × 600
of inertia about a parallel axis passing through
its centre of mass and the product of its mass  40 1
  = =  rad/s2
and the square of the perpendicular distance 600 15
between the two parallel axes. Angular velocity at the end of 8 minutes
 I o = Ic + Mh2 2 = + t
Perpendicular axes theorem: 2 = 40+ 8  60
It states that the moment of inertia of a plane 1
lamina about an axis perpendicular to its plane 2 = 40   480
15
is equal to the sum of its moment of inertia about
2 = 40  32
two mutually perpendicular axes concurrent with
perpendicular axis and lying in the plane of the = 8 rad/s
laminar body.  Angular momentum at the end of 8 minutes is
 I z = Ix + Iy L = I2
The moment of inertia of the rod about an axis L =18
passing through its centre is,  L = 8 kg-m2/s
ML2 Q.8. A body starts rotating from rest. Due to couple
I =
12 of 20 Nm it completes 60 revolutions in one
Expression of for moment of inertia about an minute. Find the moment of inertia of the
ax is p assing t hrou gh its one end and body.
perpendicular to its length: Solution: Data:
IO IC
 = 20 Nm, t = 60 sec,
N = 60 rev,  = 120  rad, 0 = 0, I = ?
h = L/2 1 2
O C  = 0t + t
2
A
B
1
120 = 0 +  × (60)2
2
Consider thin a uniform rod AB of length L and 240 =  × (60)2
mass M.
240
Let Ic be the moment of inertia of the rod about  =
an axis passing through the centre and 3600
perpendicular to its length. I0 be the moment of 
inertia of the rod about an axis passing through   = rad/s2
15
its one end   = I
Distance between the two parallel axes is 
h = L/2  I =

By parallel axes theorem, 20
I o = Ic + Mh2 I =
  15
2
ML2 L  ML2 ML2 4
Io = + M  = + I =
12 2 12 4 3
 I = 0.4236 kg-m2
ML2 MR 2
 Io = = ( h = R)
3 3
Rotational Motion 37

Q.9. A horizontal disc is freely rotating about a 10

transverse axis passing through its centre at 2 104   = (2 × 104 + 20 × 103 × (0.05)2)2n2
3
the rate of 100 revolutions per minute. A 20
5
g blob of wax falls on the disc and sticks to 2  104 × = (2 × 104 + 20 × 103 × 25 × 104 )n2
the disc at a distance of 5 cm from its axis. 3
Moment of inertia of the disc about its axis 5
passing through its centre of mass is 2 × 104 2  104  = (2 × 104 + 200 × 104 × 25 × 104 )n2
3
kg-m2. Calculate the new frequency of rotation
5
of the disc. 2  104  = 104 [2 + 2 × 102 × 25 × 104 ] n2
3
Solution: Data:
10
Id = 2 104 kg-m2, m = 20 g = 20 × 103 kg = [2 + 50 × 104 ] n2
3
n1 = 100 rpm = 5/3 rps, r = 5 cm = 0.05 m,
10
10 = (2 + 0.5) n2
 = 2n1 =  rad/s, I = ? 3
3
10
By conservation of angular momentum = 2.5 n2
3
I 1 = I2
10 10
I d = (Id + mr2)  n2 = =
3  2.5 3
 n2 = 1.333 rpm

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. State and prove theorem of parallel axes. Let OC = h = distance between the two parallel
Radius of gyration of a body about an axis at a axes. OP = r, CP = ro
distance 0.12 m, from its centre of mass is 0.13 I o = OP 2dm = r 2dm and
m. Find the radius of gyration about a parallel
axis passing through the centre of mass I c = CP 2dm =  r02dm
Ans. Statement: It states that the moment of inertia Now from point P, draw PD  OC produced.
of a body about any axis is equal to the sum of Let distance CD = x
its moment of inertia about a parallel axis passing
From OPD
through its centre of mass and the product of its
mass and the square of the perpendicular OP 2 = OD2 + PD2
distance between the two parallel axes. OP 2 = (h + CD)2 + PD2
Proof: Consider a rigid body of mass M rotating OP 2 = h2 + 2hCD + CD2 + PD2
about an axis passing through a point O and OP 2 = h2 + 2hCD + CP2 (CP2 + PD2 = CP2)
perpendicular to the plane of the paper.
r
2
= h + 2hx +
2
r02
Let Io and Ic be the moment of inertia of the body
about an axis passing through point O and about  r
2
= r02 + h2 +2hx
a parallel axis passing through centre of mass C Multipalying both sides by dm and integrating,
respectively. we get
Let small element of a body of mass dm situated r 2dm =  r02dm + h 2dm + 2hxdm
at a point P. Join OP and CP
r 2dm =  r02dm + h 2dm + 2h xdm
I0 Ic
x dm = 0 as C is the centre of mass and algebraic
sum of moments of all the particles about centre
P (dm) of mass is always zero, for body in equilibrium.
 r 2dm =  r02dm + h2dm + 0 ... (1)
r r0
But dm = M = Mass of the body,

 r0 dm = Ic
C 2
O D r 2dm = Io
x
h  Equation (1) becomes
 Io = Ic + Mh2
This proves the law of parallel axes about moment
of inertia.
38 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Problem: This is the expression of total kinetic energy of

K0 = Radius of gyration about a parallel axis rolling body on a plane horizontal surface.
= 0.13 m (i) For solid sphere :
KC = Radius of gyration about an axis passing M.I. about any diameter
through C.M. 2
I = MR2 and I = MK2
= 0.12 m 5
From parallel axes theorem, K2 2
 2 =
Io = Ic + Mh 2
R 5
MK 02 = MK C2 + Mh2 From (1)

K 02 = K C2 + h2 1 2 K2
E = 2 Mv 1  R 2 
 
K C2 = K 02  h2
1  2
K C2 = (0.13)2  (0.12)2 E = Mv 2 1  
2  5
= 0.0169  0.0144
1 7 
= 0.0025 E = Mv 2  
2 5 
 K C = 0.05 m = 5 cm
7
Q.2. Deduce an expression for kinetic energy when E = Mv2 ... (2)
10
a body is rolling on a horizontal plane surface (ii) For disc:
without slipping. Hence find the kinetic
energy for a solid sphere and disc and a ring M.I. of disc above an axis passing through its
centre of mass is
Ans. When a body like a sphere rolls on a surface with
velocity v, the motion can be treated as the 1
I = MR2 and I = MK2
combination of both translational and rotational 2
motion about an axis passing through the centre K2 1
of mass.  =
R2 2
Total kinetic energy of the rolling body is From (1)
E = Etranslational+ Erotational
1 2 K2
Let M and R be the mass and radius of the body, E = 2 Mv 1  2 
v is the linear velocity of the body,  is the  R 
angular speed of the body about an axis passing 1  1
through the centre of mass. E = Mv 2 1  
2  2
Translational kinetic energy
1 3
1 E = Mv 2  
ET = Mv2 2 2
2
Rotational kinetic energy of body is 3
E = Mv 2 ... (3)
1  4
ER = I
2 (ii) For a ring :
1 1  I = MR2 and I = MK2
 E = Mv2 + I
2 2
1 1 K2
E = M(R)2 + MK2  =1
2 2 R2
where v = R, I = MK2 and K is radius of gyration. From (1)
1
 E = M (R2 + K2) 1  K2
2 E = Mv 2 1  2 
2  R 
1 v2
E = M 2 (R2 + K2) 1
E = Mv 1  1
2
2 R
2
2R  K 
2 2
1 E = Mv2 ... (4)
E = 2 Mv  R 2 
 
1 2 K2
E = 2 Mv 1  R 2  ... (1)
 
Rotational Motion 39

Q.3. Derive an expression for velocity a ring, solid 4gh

sphere, and solid cylinder having same radii v = ... (3)
3
rolling down the smooth inclined plane.
(iii) For a solid sphere:
Ans.
K2 2
=0 =
u R2 5
From (1)

2gh
S
v = 2
1
h 5

10gh
v = ... (4)
7

Q.4. Derive an expression for acceleration of a
Considera rigid body of mass M and radius R ring, solid sphere, and solid cylinder having
rolling down inclined plane of inclination  from same radii rolling down the smooth inclined
height h. plane.
Body starts from rest and rolls down, it loses its Ans.
gravitational potential energy. This potential =0
energy is converted into kinetic energy of the u
rolling body.
If v is the linear speed acquried by the body when
it reaches the bottom of the inclined plane, then
S
Loss potential energy = Gain in kinetic energy
h
1 2 1 2
Mgh = Mv + I
2 2
1 2 K2
= 2 Mv 1  2  
 R 

2gh Consider a rigid body of mass M and radius R

v2 = rolling down inclined plane of inclination  from
K2
1 2 height h.
R
Body starts from rest and rolls down, it loses its
2gh gravitational potential energy. This potential
 v = ... (1) energy is converted into kinetic energy of the
K2
1 2 rolling body.
R
Loss potential energy = Gain in kinetic energy
This is the expression for velocity of a body rolling
1 1
down the inclined plane. Mgh = Mv 2 + I2
2 2
(i) For a ring:
K2 1 2 K2
=1 = 2 Mv 1  R 2 
R2  
 From (1)
2gh
v2 =
2gh K2
v = 1 2
11 R
v = gh ... (2)
2gh
v = ... (1)
(ii) For a disc: K2
1 2
K2 1 R
=
R2 2
This is the expression for velocity of a body rolling
 From (1) down the inclined plane
Let a be the linear acceleration of the body while
2gh
v = rolling down the plane.
1
1 As the body starts from rest, u = 0
2
40 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

v2 = 0 + 2as Ans. Consider a thin uniform ring of mass M and radius

2 R rotating about an axis passing through its
v
a = centre and perpendicular to its plane
2as
2gh
K2
1 2
a = R
2s
C R
gh 1
a = 
K2 h
1 2
R sin 

g sin 
a = ... (2)
K2 The moment of inertia of the ring is given by
1 2
R I = MR2
(i) For a ring:
I MR 2
K2 Radius of gyration is K = = =R
=1 M M
R2
 From (2) (a) Moment of inertia of a ring about diameter:
g sin  For uniform ring, the moment of inertia of the
 a = ring about any diameter is the same.
11
g sin  Let Ix and Iy be the moment of inertia of the ring
a = ... (3) about diameter along X and Y axes respectively.
2
(ii) For a disc: Let, Iz be the moment of inertia of a ring about Z
axis passing through the centre of mass of the
K2 1 ring and perpendicular to the plane.
=
R2 2 Z
 From (2)
g sin 
a = 1
1
2
2g sin  C Y
 a = ... (4)
3
(iii) For a solid sphere:
K2 2
=
R2 5 X
 From (2)
Then by perpendicular axes theorem,
g sin  I z = Ix + Iy ... (1)
a = 2
1 But Iz = Ic and for a ring,
5
I x = Iy
5g sin   Equation (1) becomes
 a = ... (5)
7 Ic = 2Ix = 2Iy
Q.5. State an expression of M.I. of a ring about an Let Ix = Iy = Id
ax is p assing t hrou gh its cent re and where, Id is moment of inertia of a ring about
perpendicular to its plane. Hence deduce diameter.
expressions of
 Ic = 2 Id
(a) the moment of inertia of a ring about
diameter. Ic
(b) the moment of inertia of a ring about a  Id =
2
tangent in its plane.
But Ic = MR2
(c) the moment of inertia of a ring about a
tangent perpendicular to its plane. 1
 Id = MR2
also deduce the expressions for corresponding 2
radius of gyrations.
Rotational Motion 41

This is the moment of inertia of a ring about any Let Ic be the moment of inertia of the ring about
diameter. an axis passing through the centre of the ring
and perpendicular to its plane let distance
I MR 2 1 between the two parallel axes is R
Radius of gyration is K = = = R
M 2M 2 By parallel axes theorem,
(b) Moment of inertia of a ring about a tangent in Io = Ic + Mh2
its plane:
But Ic = MR2 and h = R
Consider a tangent drawn through point O in the
plane of the ring.  Io = MR2 + MR2
It be the moment of inertia of the ring about a Io = 2MR2
tangential axis passing through point O in the Radius of gyration is
plane of the ring.
2MR 2
Let Id be the moment of inertia of the ring about K = = 2R
diameter passing through the point O. M
The distance between the two parallel axes is R Q.6. State an expression for moment of inertia of
Z a thin uniform disc about an axis passing
Id through its centre and perpendicular to its
plane. Hence derive an expression for the
moment of inertia and radius of gyration
Y
(i) about any diameter
(ii) about a tangent in the plane of the disc.
C
(iii) about a tangent perpendicular to the
R
O plane of the disc.
Ans. Moment of inertia of a circular disc about an
h=R ax is passing t hrough its cent re a nd
perpendicular to its plane:
Consider a thin uniform disc of mass M and radius
By parallel axes theorem, R rotating about an axis passing through its
I t = Id + Mh2 centre and perpendicular to its plane.
MR 2 The moment of inertia of the disc is given by
It = + MR2
2 MR 2
I = ... (1)
3MR 2 2
It = (i) The mom ent of inert ia o f a disc about
2
diameter:
3MR 2 3 For uniform disc, the moment of inertia of the
Radius of gyration is K = = R
2M 2 disc about any diameter is the same.
(c) Moment of inertia of a ring about a tangent Let Ix and Iy be the moment of inertia of the disc
perpendicular to its plane: about diameter along X and Y axes respectively.
Consider a tangent drawn through point O of the Iz be the moment of inertia of a disc about Z axis
ring, perpendicular to the plane of the ring. Let I0 passing through the centre of mass of the disc
be the moment of inertia of the ring about a and perpendicular to the plane.
tangential axis passing through point O and Then by perpendicular axes theorem,
perpendicular to its plane.
Iz
Ic Io
Iy

C
C O R
h=R

Ix
42 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

I z = Ix + Iy (iii) The moment of inertia and radius of gyration

But Ix = Iy about a tangent perpendicular to the plane
I z = 2Ix = 2Iy of the disc :

MR 2 Ic I0
= 2Iy
2
MR 2
= Ix ... (2)
4
This is the moment of inertia of a disc about any C O
diameter. R

I MR 2 R
Radius of gyration is K = = =
M 4M 2
(ii) The moment of inertia and radius of gyration
about a tangent in the plane of the disc :
Consider a tangent drawn through point O in the
plane of the disc By parallel axes theorem,
It be the moment of inertia of the disc about a I o = Ic + Mh2
tangential axis passing through point O in the MR 2
plane of the disc Io = + Mh2
2
Let Id be the moment of inertia of the disc about
3MR 2
diameter passing through the point O the distance Io = ( ... (4)
between the two parallel axes is R 2
Id Moment of inertia in terms of radius of gyration
is
I o = MK2
It
C 3MR 2
MK2 =
2
R
3R 2
K2 =
2
3
K = R.
2

By parallel axes theorem,

I t = Id + Mh2
MR 2
It = + MR2
4
5MR 2
It = ... (3)
4
Moment of inertia in terms of radius of gyration
is
I t = MK2
5MR 2
MK2 =
4
5R 2
K2 =
4
5
K = R.
2
Rotational Motion 43

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Derive an expression for kinetic energy, when a rigid body is rolling on a horizontal surface without slipping.
Hence find kinetic energy for a solid sphere. (March 2013)
(2) Define radius of gyration. Explain its physical significance. (Oct 2013)
(3) State and prove the theorem of ‘parallel axes’. (Feb. 2014)
(4) State the law of conservation of angular momentum and explain with a suitable example. (Oct. 2014)
(5) State the theorem of parallel axes and theorem of perpendicular axes about moment of inertia. (Feb. 2015)

(6) State an expression for the moment of inertia of a solid uniform disc, rotating about an axis passing through
its centre, perpendicular to its plane. Hence derive an expression for the moment of inertia and radius of
gyration :
(i) about a tangent in the plane of the disc, and (ii) about a tangent perpendicular to the plane of the disc.
(Oct. 2015)
(7) State and prove: Law of conservation of angular momentum. (Oct. 2015)

1 2  K2
(8) Obtain an expression for total kinetic energy of a rolling body in the form 2 MV 1  R 2  (Feb. 2016)
 
(9) State and prove theorem of parallel axes about moment of inertia. (Feb. 2016)
(10) Obtain an expression for torque acting on a body rotating with uniform angular acceleration. (July 2016)

Problems :
(1) A wheel of moment of inertia 1 kgm2 is rotationg at a speed of 40 rad/s. Due to friction on the axis, the wheel
comes to rest in 10 minutes. Calculate the angular momentum of the wheel, two minutes before it comes to
rest. (March 2013)
(2) A ballet dancer spins about a vertical axis at 2.5p rad/sec. with his both arms outstretched. With the arms
folded, the moment of inertia about the same axis of rotation changes by 25%. Calculate the new rotation in
r.p.m. (Oct 2013)
(3) A solid cylinder of uniform density of radius 2 cm has mass of 50 g. If its length is 12 cm, calculate its moment
of inertia about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its length. (Feb. 2014)
(4) A body starts rotating from rest. Due to a couple of 20 Nm it completes 60 revolutions in one minute. Find the
moment of inertia of the body. (Oct. 2014)
(5) A horizontal disc is freely rotating about a transverse axis passing through its Centre at the rate of 100
revolutions per minute. A 20 gram blob of wax falls on the disc and sticks to the disc at a distance of 5 cm
from its axis. Moment of inertia of the disc about its axis passing through its centre of mass is 2 × 10 –4 kg m2.
Calculate the new frequency of rotation of the disc. (Feb. 2015)
(6) A uniform solid sphere has a radius 0.1 m and density 6 × 103 kg/m3. Find its moment of inertia about a
tangent to its surface. (July 2016)
(7) A solid sphere of mass 1 kg rolls on a table with linear speed 2 m/s, find its total kinetic energy.
(March 2017)
(8) A uniform solid sphere has radius 0.2m and density 8 × 103 kg m 3. Find the moment of inertia about the
tangent to its surface. ( = 3.142) (July 2017)


44 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
4
Syllabus
Explanation of Periodic motion, Linear Simple Harmonic Motion, Differential Equation of Linear S.H.M., S.H.M. as
Projection of U.C.M. along any Diameter, Phase of S.H.M, Kinetic Energy and Potential Energy of A Particle Performing
S.H.M., Composition of Two S.H.M.s having same period and along same line (Path), Simple Pendulum, Damped Oscillations.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The differential equation of SHM for a seconds (c) halved, doubled
pendulum is (d) unchanged, quadrupled
d 2x d 2x 6. The minimum time taken by a particle in SHM
(a) 2 + x = 0 (b) + x = 0 (period T) to go from an extreme position to a point
dt dt 2
half way to the equilibrium position is
d 2x d 2x
(c) 2 + 4x = 0 (d) + 2x = 0 (a) T/12 (b) T/8
dt dt 2
(c) T/ 6 (d) T/4
2. An oscillatory system consists of a particle of mass
m and has a force constant k. The dimensions of 7. In simple harmonic motion, the acceleration of
particle is zero when it’s
k /m are
(a) velocity is zero
(a) [M0L1T2] (b) [M0L0T2]
0 0 1
(b) displacement is zero
(c) [M L T ] (d) [M0L1T1]
(c) both velocity and displacement are zero
3. The force constant of SHM is measured in
(d) both velocity and displacement are maximum
(a) Nm (b) N
8. For a particle performing SHM of amplitude a, its
(c) Nm1 (d) N1m
speed is one-half the maximum speed when it’s
4. For a particle performing linear SHM from general displacement from the mean position is
position, the state of oscillation of the particle giving (a) a/2 (b) a (c) 3 a/2 (d) 2a
the position and direction of motion at a time equal
to zero (t = 0) is called the 9. The total energy of a particle executing SHM is
proportional to
(a) phase of the SHM
(a) the frequency of oscillation
(b) final phase of the SHM
(b) the square of the amplitude of motion
(c) angular speed of the SHM
(c) the velocity at the equilibrium position
(d) epoch of the SHM
(d) the displacement from the equilibrium position
5. A block performs harmonic oscillations on a
horizontal frictionless surface. If the amplitude is 10. Which of the following quantities of a single
doubled, it’s frequency and total energy are respectively harmonic motion DOES NOT vary sinusoidally with
(a) both doubled time?
(b) havled, quadrupled (a) Displacement (b) Velocity
(c) Acceleration (d) Total energy

ANSWERS
1 - (d), 2 - (c), 3 - (c), 4 - (d), 5 - (d), 6 - (c), 7 - (b), 8 - (c), 9 - (b), 10 - (d)

Very Short Answer Type Question (1 mark each)

Q.1. How is the period of S.H.M. affected, if the
amplitude of a simple pendulum is increased?
Ans. No effect on time period when amplitude of
pendulum is increased or decreased.
Q.2. How is the frequency of oscillation related
with the frequency of change in the K.E. and
P.E. of the body in S.H.M.?
Ans. P.E. or K.E. completes two vibrations in a time
during which S.H.M. completes one vibration or
the frequency of P.E. or K.E is doubled than that
of S.H.M.
(44)
Q.3. What is the frequency of total energy of a
particle in S.H.M.?
Ans. The frequency of total energy of S.H.M. is zero
because it remains constant.
Q.4. How is the length of second’s pendulum
related with acceleration due to gravity of any
planet?
Ans. Length of second pendulum is directly
proportional to acceleration due to gravity.
Oscillations 45

Q.5. Under what condition a simple pendulum Q.8. A particle perform S.H.M. of amplitude a. At
perform S.H.M.? what displacement is the kinetic energy 3
Ans. If pendulum is displaced through very small times that of potential energy
angle , then it performs S.H.M. When the Ans. For K.E. = 3 (P.E.)
amplitude is small, or angular displacement is
1 1
small, then sin  =  k (a2 x2) = 3 kx2
2 2
Q.6. When the displacement in S.H.M. is 1/3rd of k (a2 x2) = 3kx2
the amplitude. What fraction of total energy a2 x2 = 3x2
is potential?
a2 = 3x2 +x2 = 4x2
Ans. Here, we have to find
a2
1 2  x2 =
kx 4
P .E . 2
= 1 a
T .E . ka 2  x = 
2 2
x2 Q.9. A particle perform S.H.M. of amplitude a. At
= 2
a what displacement from the mean position is
its kinetic energy is equal to its potential
x2  1 
=  x  a  energy.
3x 2  3 
Ans. For K.E. = P.E.
x2
= 1 1
9x 2 k(a2  x2) = kx2
2 2
1 a2  x2 = x2
=
9 2x2 = a2
Q.7. A particle perform S.H.M. of amplitude a. What
a2
fraction of total energy is kinetic when the x2 =
displacement is half of the amplitude? 2
a
1  x = 
k (a 2  x 2 ) 2
K .E . 2
Ans. = Q.10. What is the speed of a particle performing
T .E . 1 2
ka
2 S.H.M. of amplitude ‘a’ over one oscillation?
a  x2
2
2a
= Ans. Speed =
a2 
2
a2  a  1  Q.11. What is the velocity of a particle performing
= 4  x  a  S.H.M. of amplitude a over one oscillation?
a2  2 
 1 Ans. Zero
a 2 1  
 4 Q.15. Define linear simple harmonic motion.
=
a2 Ans. Linear simple harmonic motion is defined as the
linear periodic motion of a body in which the
3
= restoring force or acceleration is always directed
4 towards the mean position and its magnitude is
directly proportional to the displacement from
the mean position.

Very Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Obtain the differential equation of S.H.M Force = mass × acceleration
Ans. In linear S.H.M., the force is directed towards F = ma ... (2)
the mean position and its magnitude is directly
From (1) and (2)
proportional to the displacement of body from the
mean position. ma = kx ... (3)
Restoring force F = kx ... (1) dv dx
But acceleration a = and velocity v =
Here, k = force constant and x = displacement of dt dt
body from mean position. d  dx  d 2x
 a=   =
From Newton’s law of motion, dt  dt  dt 2
46 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

From equation (3) Ans. Period of S.H.M. (T):

2
d x The time taken by a particle to complete one
m = kx oscillation is called period of S.H.M.
dt 2
Frequency of S.H.M. (f) :
d 2x
m 2 + kx = 0 ... (4) The number of oscillations performed by particle
dt
performing S.H.M. in one second is called
d 2x k frequency of S.H.M.
+ x = 0 ... (5)
dt 2 m
Q.5. Explain : (i) Phase of S.H.M. (ii) Epoch of S.H.M.
d 2x
+ 2x = 0 … (6) Ans. (i) Phase of S.H.M:
dt 2 The physical quantity which describes the state
k of oscillation is called phase of S.H.M.
where 2 = and
m In equation of displacement of S.H.M.
 = angular frequency of S.H.M. x = a sin (t + )
Equation (4), (5), (6) are differential equations of The quantity (t + ) is called the phase of S.H.M
S.H.M. (ii) Epoch or initial phase of S.H.M.:
Q.2. State expression of velocity of S.H.M. at a The physical quantity which describes the state
displacement x from mean position. Hence of oscillation of particle performing S.H.M at the
state its values at maximum and minimum start of motion (t = 0) is called epoch of S.H.M.
position. In the term phase (t + ), is phase at start of
S.H.M. i.e. at t = 0.
Ans. The velocity of S.H.M. is v =   a 2  x 2 Therefore this angle  is called starting phase or
(a) At mean position x = 0 initial phase or epoch of S.H.M.

 v =   a 2  02 Q.6. Define second’s pendulum. Obtain an expression

of its length.
v = a
Ans. Seconds pendulum:
At mean position velocity of S.H.M. is maximum,
and this maximum value is vmax = a A simple pendulum whose period is two seconds
is called seconds pendulum.
(b) At extreme position, x =  a
L
 v =   a2  a2 Period of simple pendulum is T = 2 g
v =0 For second’s pendulum, period is T = 2 second
At extreme position velocity of particle performing L
S.H.M. is minimum.  2 = 2 g
i.e. vmin = 0
L
Q.3. State expression of acceleration of S.H.M. at 1 = g
a displacement x from mean position. Hence
state its values at maximum and minimum  Length of second’s pendulum is
position. g
L =
Ans. Acceleration of particle performing S.H.M. is 2
a = 2x Length of second’s pendulum is different at
(a) At minimum position x = 0 different places on the earth. It is small at the
equator and large at poles of the earth, as the
amin = 0
acceleration due to gravity is smaller at equator
At minimum position acceleration is minimum than at poles.
which is zero.
Q.7. State laws of simple pendulum.
(b) At extreme position, x =  a
Ans. Laws of simple pendulum:
Acceleration = 2a
(i) Law of length : Period of simple pendulum at a
At extreme position acceleration is maximum and
given place is directly proportional to square root
this maximum value is amax = 2a
of its length.
Q.4. Define:
T  L
(i) Period of S.H.M
(ii) Law of acceleration due to gravity:
(ii) Frequency of S.H.M. State formula for each
Period of simple pendulum for a given length is
inversely proportional to square root of
acceleration due to gravity.
Oscillations 47

1 2
T  = = 0.6369 Hz
g 
(iii) Law of mass : Q.11. The maximum velocity of a particle performing
linear S.H.M. is 0.16m/s. If its maximum
Period of simple pendulum does not depend upon
acceleration is 0.64 m/. Calculate its period.
mass of bob.
Solution: Data:
(iv) Law of isochronous:
vmax= 0.16 m/s, amax= 0.64 m/s2, T = ?
Period of simple pendulum does not depend upon
its amplitude.  v max = a and amax = a2

Q.8. Draw a neat labelled diagram of damped oscillator. a max a2

 v = = 
Ans. max a
Rigid support 0.64
=
0.16
  = 4 rad/s
Spring
2 2 
Period, T = = = = 1.57 s
 4 2
Q.12. A particle in S.H.M. has a period of 2 seconds
Block and amplitude of 10 cm. Calculate the
acceleration when it is at 4 cm from its positive
extreme position.
Solution: Data:
a = 10 cm, x = 6 cm (from mean position),
Vane
T = 2 seconds
Acceleration of S.H.M. at a distance x from mean
position is
accleration = 2x
Fig. Damped simple harmonic oscillator
2
 2 
Q.9. Represent graphically the variation of K.E., accleration =  6   
P.E. and T.E. of a particle performing linear T 
S.H.M. with respect to displacement.  2  3.14 
2

 accleration =  6   
 2 
Ans. Energy T.E. =  6  (3.14)2
=  6  9.87
P.E.
=  59.22 m/s2
Q.13. The p er iodi c time o f a linear harmonic
K.E.
oscillat or is 2 seconds wit h max imum
displacement of 1 cm. If the particle starts
a 0 +a from extreme position, find the displament
Displacement (x) 
Fig. Variation of K.E. and P.E. in S.H.M. of the particle after second
3
Solution: Data:
Q.10. A body of mass 1 kg is made to oscillate on a

spring of force constant 16 N/m. Calculate T = 2  seconds, a = 1 cm, t = second, x = ?
3
angular frequency and frequency of vibration
Displacement of S.H.M from extreme position is
Solution: Data:
x = a cos t
m = 1 kg, k = 16 N/m
2
Angular frequency is x = a cos t
T
k 16
 = =  2  
m 1 x = 1 × cos   
T 3
= 16 = 4 rad/s 
Frequency of vibration is x = cos  
3
 4 1
n = =  x = = 0.5 cm
2 2 2
48 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.14. A particle performing linear S.H.M. has period Q.15. A mass M attached to a spring oscillates with
of 6.28 seconds and a path length of 20 cm. period of 2 seconds. If the mass is increased
What is the velocity when its displacement by 2 kg , the period increases by 1 second. Find
is 6 cm from mean position? the initial mass. (Assume hook’s law).
Solution: Data : Solution: Data:
T = 6.28 s, 2a = 20 cm, a = 10 cm, x = 6 cm, v = ?
T1 = 2s, T2 = 3s
2 Period of oscillation of spring is
 =
T
M
2 T1 = 2
 = = 1 rad/s k
6.28
M 2
v =   a2  x2 T2 = 2
k
v =  1  102  62 T2 M 2
v =  64 T1 = M
v = ± 8 m/s 3 M 2
=
2 M
9 M 2
=
4 M
9M = 4M + 8
 5M = 8
 M = 1. 6 kg

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Show that linear S.H.M. is the projection of Velocity of the particle is
U.C.M. on any diameter
dx d
v = = [a sin (t + )]
Ans. Consider a particle P is performing circular motion dt dt
with constant angular speed  in anticlockwise v = a cos (t +)
direction.
Acceleration of the particle is
Y dv d
Acceleration = = [a cos (t + )]
dt dt
= a2 sin (t + )
= 2 [a sin (t + )]
x  Acceleration = 2x ... [from (1)]
O M
X ( X
A t B This shows that the acceleration of particle M is
+
) directly proportional to its displacement and
=

a  direction is opposite to that of the displacement.

P
t

Thus the projection M of U.C.M. particle perform

(t = t)
P0 S.H.M. on a diameter of circle.
(t = 0)
Y Q.2. State the expressions of K.E. and P.E. at
displacement x for a particle performing
Suppose initialy at time t = 0, particle is at P0. Let linear S.H.M. Represent them graphically. Find
it moves from P 0 to P in time intervel t, its the displacement at which K.E. is equal to P.E.
projection on diameter AB is M. Ans. Kinetic energy at a distance x from its mean
From diagram, in OPM position is
x 1
sin (t + ) = K.E. = m 2 (a2  x2) ... (1)
a 2
where, a is radius of circle and a is initial phase Potential energy at a distance x from its mean
 x = a sin (t + ) ... (1) position is
This is the expression of displacement of the 1
P.E. = m2x2 ... (2)
particle M 2
Oscillations 49

Displacement x at which K.E. is equal to P.E (iii) At extreme position:

 K.E. = P.E. Velocity of particle performing S.H.M. is minimum
1 1 and displacement is maximum i.e. x =  a
m2(a2  x2) = m2x2
2 2 1
a2  x2 = x2 P.E. = ka2
2
a2 = x2 + x2 1 2 2
K.E. =  (a  x2)
a2 = 2x2 2
a2 =0
x2 = T.E. = P.E. + K.E.
2
a 1 1
x =± = ka2 + 0 = ka2
2 2
2
1
Graphical representation:  T.E. = m2 a2 ... (3)
2
Energy T.E. From equation (1), (2), (3), we conclude that total
energy of S.H.M. is constant, i.e. conserved. But
P.E. kinetic and potential energy are interchangeable.
The graph is plotted between variations of K.E. P.E.
and T.E. with respect to displacement as following:
K.E.
Energy T.E.
a 0 +a
Displacement (x) P.E.

Q.3. Sho w that t otal energy of t he p article

performing linear S.H.M. is constant. K.E.
Ans. Conservation of energy in S.H.M.:
(i) At a distance x from mean position: a 0 +a
Displacement (x)
1 1
P.E. = m2x2 = kx2
2 2 Q.4. For a Particle performing S.H.M. starting from
1 1 mean position, Plot a graph of displacement,
K.E. = m2(a2  x2) = k(a2  x2)
2 2 velocity and acceleration against time.
T.E. = K.E. + P.E. OR
Rep rese nt graphically t he varia tion of
1 1
T.E. = k(a2  x2) + kx2 displacement, velocity and acceleration for
2 2
particle performing S.H.M. starting from mean
1 position.
 T.E. = m2 a2 ... (1)
2
Ans. The equation of displacement of particle starting
(ii) At mean position: from mean position is
At mean position, velocity of particle performing x = a sin t
S.H.M. is maximum and displacement is Velocity of particle v is
minimum i.e. x = 0
1 dx d
P.E. = kx2 = 0 v = = [a sin t] = a  cos t
2 dt dt
1 dv d
K.E. = m2(a2  x2) Acceleration = = [a cos t]
2 dt dt
1 1  Acceleration = a2 sin t
= k(a2  02) = ka2
2 2
T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
1
= ka2 + 0
2
1
= ka2
2
1
 T.E. = m2 a2 ... (2)
2
50 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

dv d
Acceleration = = [a sin t]
dt dt
Displacement

+a
 Acceleration = a2 cos t
3T/4
O Time(t) or  Time (t) 0 T/4 T/2 3T/4 T
T/2 T
T/4 5T/4 Fig.(a) Phase t) 0 /2  3/2 2
a
Displacement (x) a 0 a a a
Velocity (v) 0 a 0 a 0
Acceleration a 2
0 a 2
0 a2
+a
Velocity

O T/2 5T/4
Time(t) +a
T/4 3T/4 T Fig. (b)

Displacement
T
4 T/2 T 5T/4
a O Time(t)
3T/4 Fig. (a)

a

+a2
Acceleration

T/4 5T/4
3T/4
O Time(t)
T/2 T
Fig. (c)
+a
2
a T
Velocity

3T/4
4 T
O Time(t)
Fig. Graphical representation of S.H.M. starting from T/2 Fig. (b)
5T/4
mean position
a
Time (t) 0 T/4 T/2 3T/4 T
Phase (= t) 0 /2  3/2 2
Displacement (x) 0 a 0 a 0
Velocity (v) a 0 a  0 a +a2
Acceleration

Acceleration 0 a  2
0 a 2
0 T
4 T/2 T
Conclusion: From the graph we conclude that O Time(t)
The phase difference between displacement and 3T/4 5T/4 Fig. (c)
velocity is /2 radian and between acceleration
and velocity is /2 radian. The phase difference a2
between displacement and acceleration is 
radian.
Fig. Graphical representation of S.H.M. starting from
Q.5. Particle performing S.H.M. starting from
extreme position
extreme position. Plot a graph of displacement,
velocity and acceleration against time. Conclusion: From the graph we conclude that the
OR phase difference between displacement and
Rep resent g raph ically t he varia tion of 
velocity is radian and between acceleration and
displacement, velocity and acceleration for 2

particle performing S.H.M. Starting from velocity is radian. The phase difference between
extreme position. 2
displacement and acceleration is  radian.
Ans. The equation of displacement of particle starting
from extreme position is Q.6. The period of a simple pendulum increases
by 10 % when its length is increased by 21cm.
x = a cos t
Find the original length and period of the
Velocity of particle v is pendulum.
dx d Solution: Data:
v = = [a cos t]
dt dt L1 = initial length, L2 = final length,
= a  sin t
10
T2 = T1+ 10% T1 = T1 + T = 1.1T1 ,
100 1
Oscillations 51

L2 = L1 + 21cm 1
=
2
Initial period of simple pendulum
= 0.5 sec.
L1 (c) Resultant phase of the resultant motion is
T 1 = 2 g
 a1 sin 1  a 2 sin 2 
Final period of simple pendulum  
 = tan1  a cos   a cos a 
 1 1 2 2
L2
T2 = 2  8  sin 0  6 sin  
g  2
= tan1  8 cos 0  6 cos  
T2 L2  2 
 T1 = L1  6 sin 2 
 
= tan1  8 
1.1T1 L1  21  
T1 = L1 6
= tan1  
Squaring, 8
L1  21   = tan1 (0.75) = 36.89
1.21 = L1 Q.8. A particle of mass 10 g performs linear S.H.M.
of amplitude 5 cm. With a period of 2 second.
1.21L1 = L1 + 21 th
1
0.21L1 = 21 Find its potential energy, kinetic energy  
6
L1 = 100 cm = 1 m seconds after it has passed through the mean
Initial period of simple pendulum position.
L1 Solution: Data:
T1 = 2 g th
1
m = 10 g, a = 5 cm, t =   seconds,
1 1 6
T1 = 2 = 2  3.14  T = 2 second, P.E. = ? K.E. = ?
9 .8 3.13
th
 T1 = 2.007 s 1
Displacement of S.H.M after time t =  
Q.7. S.H.M. is given by equation 6
second from mean position is
X = [8 sin 4 t + 6 cos (4t)]cm.
x = [a sin t]
Find its amplitude, initial phase, period and
  2  
frequency = 5 sin  t
Solution: Data:  T  
   2  1 
a1 = 8 cm, a2 = 6 cm,1= 0,2 = , = 5 sin  
2   2  6
 = 4 rad/sec., R = ?
   
(a) The equation can be written as = 5 sin  
  6 
   
X = 8 sin 4t  6 sin  4t   cm   1 
  2  = 5   
  2 
Resultant amplitude is
 x = 2.5 cm
R = a12  a22  2a1a 2 cos (1   2 ) Potential energy of S.H.M. is
 1
= (8 )2  (6)2  2  8  6 cos   P.E. = m2 x2
2 2

= 1
64  36  2  8  6  0 = 10 ()2  (2.5)2
2
= 100 = 5  9.87  6.25
 R = 10 cm  P.E. = 308.436 erg
2 Kinetic energy of S.H.M is
(b) T =
 1
2 K.E. = m2 (a2  x2)
= 2
4
52 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

1 Q.10. When the length of a simple pendulum is

=  10  ()2 [52  2.52] decreased by 20 cm, the period changes by 10%
2
= 5  9.87 [25  6.25] Find the original length of the pendulum.
 K.E. = 925.3125 erg Solution: Data:
L1 = initial length, L2 = final length,
Q.9. A particle executes S.H.M. with a period
8 second. Find the time in which half the total T2 = T1  10% T1
energy is potential. 10
= T1  T = 0.9 T1
Solution: 100 1
L2 = L1  20 cm
1
Period, T = 8 sec., P.E. (T.E.) Initial period of simple pendulum
2
By given condition, L1
T1 = 2 g
1
P.E. = (T.E.) Final period of simple pendulum
2
1 1 1 L2
m2x2 = × m2x2 T2 = 2
2 2 2 g
1 2
x2 = a T2 L2
2
 T1 = L1
a
 x =
2 L2  20
We know, x = a sin t 0.9 = L1
a L1  20
 = a sin t 0.81 =
2 L1
1 0.81 L1 = L1  20
 sin t =
2 0.19 L1 = 20
 2  1 2  L1 = 105.26 cm
sin  t = ... (   = )
 T  2 T
 2  1
sin  t = ... (  T = 8 sec.)
 8  2
2   1
t = ... (  sin = )
8 4 4 2
 t = 1 sec.

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. Obtain differential equation of S.H.M. Hence
d  dx 
derive expressions of acceleration, velocity  acc =  
and displacement of S.H.M. dt  dt 
Ans. In linear S.H.M., the force is directed towards d 2x
 acc =
the mean position and its magnitude is directly dt 2
proportional to the displacement of body from the Put in equation (2)
mean position.
d 2x
 Restoring force F = kx ... (1)  m =  kx
dt 2
where, k = force constant and x = displacement
d 2x
of body from mean position. m + kx = 0 ... (3)
dt 2
From Newton’s law of motion,
d 2x k
Force = mass × acceleration + x = 0 ... (4)
dt 2 m
i.e. F = macc ... (2)
d 2x
 m acc = kx [From (1) and (2)] + 2x = 0 ... (5)
dt 2
dv dx k
But acceleration acc = and velocity v = where 2 =
dt dt m
Oscillations 53

 = is angular frequency of S.H.M. v =  a2  x2

Equation (3), (4) and (5) are differential equations
of S.H.M. dx
i.e. =  a2  x2
(a) Acceleration of S.H.M. : dt
From differntial equation dx
= dt
d 2x a  x2
2

+ 2x = 0
dt 2 Integrating both sides, we get
2
d x dx
dt 2
= 2x
 a  x2
2
=   dt

d 2x x
but = acceleration
dt 2 sin 1   = t + 
a 
d 2x where,  is a constant of integration, which
 acceleration of S.H.M. = = 2x ... (6)
dt 2 depends upon initial phase called epoch.
(ve) sign shows that acceleration of S.H.M. is x
opposite to its displacement.  = sin (t + )
a
(b) Velocity of S.H.M. :  x = a sin (t + ) ... (9)
d 2x dv dv dx This is the expression for displacement of
Now, acceleration = = = 
dt 2 dt dx dt particle performing S.H.M.
dx Q.2. Derive an expression of total energy of a
But velocity v =
dt particle performing S.H.M.
d 2x dv OR
=v , Obt ain ex pr essi ons for kinetic ener gy,
dt 2 dx
potential energy and total energy of a particle
From equation (b)
performing S.H.M.
dv OR
 v = 2x
dx Sho w that energ y of S.H.M. is d irec tly
vdv = 2x dx proportional to
Integrating both sides, (i) Square of amplitude
(ii) Square of frequency
 v dv     x dx
2

Ans. Consider a particle of mass m performing S.H.M.

v2 2x 2 along the path AB about mean position O as
= +C ... (7) shown in figure.
2 2
C is the constant of integration. A O Q P B

When particle of S.H.M. is at extreame position,

a x
dispacement is maximum (amplitude is a) and dx
velocity is zero. Fig. Particle performing S.H.M.
At x = ± a , v = 0
(a) Kinetic energy of S.H.M.:
2a 2 Velocity of particle is
0 = +C
2
v =   a2  x 2
2a 2
=C v2 = 2 (a2  x2)
2
Substitute in equation (7) 1
 Kinetic energy of particle is mv2
2
v2 2x 2 2a 2
= + 1
2 2 2  K.E. = m2 (a2  x2) ... (1)
2
v2 = 2a2  2x2
This is the expression of kinetic energy of particle
v2 = 2 (a2  x2) performing S.H.M.
 v =   a2  x 2 ... (8) (b) Potential energy of S.H.M.:

This is the expression of velocity of S.H.M. When a particle performing S.H.M. is at a distance
x from its mean position. Restoring force acting
(c) Displacement of S.H.M.: on it is
Velocity of particle performing S.H.M. is f = kx
54 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

The work done to move it through a small (a) Kinetic energy of S.H.M.:
displacement dx against the restoring force is, Velocity of particle is
Work done dw = fdx
v =   a2  x 2
= (kx) dx
= kxdx v2 = 2 (a2  x2)
1
Total work done to displace the particle from 0 to  Kinetic energy of particle mv2
x is 2
1
x x  K.E. = m2 (a2  x2) ... (1)
2
W   dw =  kxdx
0 0 This is the expression of kinetic energy of particle
1 1 performing S.H.M.
W = kx2 = m2x2 (b) Potential energy of S.H.M.:
2 2
This is the expression of work done. This work When a particle performing S.H.M. is at a distance
done is stored as potential energy of S.H.M. x from its mean position, restoring force acting
on it is
1
 P.E. = m2x2 ... (2) f = kx
2
(c) Total energy of S.H.M.: The work done to move it through a small
displacement dx against the restoring force is,
Total energy of particle performing S.H.M. is equal
to sum of its potential energy and kinetic energy. Work done dw = fdx
T.E. = K.E. + P.E. = (kx)dx
From (1) and (2) = kxdx
Total work done to displace the particle from 0 to
1 1
T.E. = m2 (a2  x2) + m 2x2 x is
2 2
x
1
T.E. = m 2 a2
2
... (3) W d =  kxdx
0
This is the expression for total energy of particle
1 1
performing S.H.M. W = kx2 = m2x2
2 2
As m, 2, a2 are constant, therefore T.E. of particle
This is the expression of work done. This work
performing S.H.M. remains constant. It is
done is stored as potential energy of S.H.M.
independent of displacement x.
 Angular frequency  = 2f 1
P.E. = m2x2 ... (2)
2
1
E = m (2f )2 a2 (c) Total energy of particle performing S.H.M. is
2 equal to sum of its potential energy and kinetic
E = 2m 2f 2a2 ... (4) energy
As 2 and  are constant
2
 T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
T.E  m, T.E  f 2 and T.E a2 1 1
Total energy of particle performing S.H.M. from T.E. = m 2 (a2  x2) + m2 x2
2 2
equation (4), is
1
(1) directly proportional to its mass T.E. = m2 a2 ... (3)
2
(2) directly proportional to square of its frequency, (i) At any distance: At any distance ‘x’ from mean
(3) directly proportional to square of its amplitude. position.
Q.3. Der ive ex p r essions for kine tic ener gy, 1
K.E. = m2 (a2  x2)
potential energy of a particle performing 2
S.H.M. Hence show that the total energy is 1
conserved in S.H.M. In which position of the P.E. = m2x2
2
oscillator, is the energy wholly kinetic or
wholly potential?  Total energy
Ans. Consider a particle of mass m performing S.H.M. T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
along the path AB about mean position O. 1 1
E = m2 (a2  x2) + m2x2
A O Q P B 2 2
1
a x E = m2a2 (4)
dx 2
Fig. Particle performing S.H.M.
Oscillations 55

(i) At mean position, displacement is minimum 1

i.e. x = 0 Kinetic energy of particle is mv2
2
1 1
 P.E. = kx2 = 0  K.E. = m 2 (a2  x2) ... (1)
2 2
1 This is the expression of kinetic energy of particle
K.E. = m2 (a2  x2) performing S.H.M.
2
1 1 (b) Potential energy of S.H.M.:
= k (a2  02) = ka2 When a particle performing S.H.M. is at a distance
2 2
T.E. = K.E. + P.E. x from its mean position, restoring force acting
on it is
1
T.E. = ka2 + 0 f = kx
2
1 The work done to move it through a small
T.E. = ka2 displacement dx against the restoring force is,
2
1 Work done dw = fdx
T.E. = K.E = m2a2 ... (5) = (kx) dx
2
(ii) At extreme position: Velocity of particle = kx dx
performing S.H.M. is minimum and displacement Total work done to displace the particle from 0 to
is maximum i.e. x = ±a
x
1
P.E. = ka2
2 x is dw =  kx dx
0
1
K.E. = m2 (a2  a2)
2 1 1
= 0 W = kx2 = m2x2
2 2
T.E. = P.E. + K.E. This is the expression of work done. This work
1 done is stored as potential energy of S.H.M.
T.E. = ka2 + 0
2
1
1  P.E. = m2 x2 ... (2)
T.E. = ka2 2
2
(c) Total energy of particle performing S.H.M. is
1 equal to sum of its potential energy and kinetic
T.E. = P.E. = m2a2 ... (6)
2 energy.
From (4), (5) and (6)
T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
Total energy is constant at all the position.
Also, at mean position, total energy is purely 1 1
T.E. = m2 (a2  x2) + m2 x2
kinetic and at extreme position, total energy is 2 2
purely potential. 1
T.E. = m2a2 ... (3)
Q.4. Derive an expression for total energy of a 2
par ticle perfor ming S.H.M. Henc e show The graph is plotted between variations of K.E
graphically the variation of potential energy, P.E. and T.E. with respect to displacement as
kinetic energy and tot al energ y wi th follows:
displacement. At what displacement is the
Energy
K.E. equal to P.E.? T.E.
Ans. Consider a particle of mass m performing S.H.M.
along the path AB about mean position O. P.E.

A O Q P B
K.E.
a x
dx
a 0 +a
Fig. Particle performing S.H.M. Displacement (x)

(a) Kinetic energy of S.H.M : 1

Velocity of particle is  P.E. = kx2
2
1
v =   a2  x 2 and K.E. = m2 (a2  x2)
2
v2 = 2 (a2  x2) For, K.E = P.E
56 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

1 1 R2 sin2  + R2 cos2  = (a1 sin 1 + a2 sin 2)2

m2 (a2  x2) = kx2
2 2 + (a1 cos 1 + a2 cos 2)2
a2  x2 = x2 R (sin  + cos )
2 2 2

a2 = x2 + x2
= a12 sin2 1+ a 22 sin2 2 + 2a1a2 sin 1 sin 2
a2 = 2x2
+ a12 cos2 1 + a 22 cos2 2 + 2a1a2 cos 1 cos 2
a
 x =  R2 = a12 (sin2 1 + cos2 1) + a 22 (sin2 1 + cos2 1)
2
Q.5. Discuss analytically the composition of two + 2a1a2 (sin 1 sin 2 + cos 1 cos 2)
S.H.M. having same period parallel to each R2 = a12 + a 22 2a1a2cos (1  2)
other. Find the resultant amplitude and
initial phase, R = a12  a22  2a1a 2 cos (1   2 ) ... (5)
When phase difference is
This is expression of resultant amplitude of the
 3 S.H.M.
(i) 0 (ii)  (iii) (iv) rad
2 2
Resultant phase of the resultant motion:
OR
Divide, (3) by (2)
Two S.H.M. are represented by
R sin  a1 sin 1  a 2 sin  2
x1 = a1 sin (t + 1) and x2 = a2sin (t + a2). = a cos   a cos 
Obtain the expressions for the displacement, R cos  1 1 2 2

amplitude and initial phase of the resultant a1 sin 1  a 2 sin  2

motion. tan  = a cos   a cos 
1 1 2 2
Ans. Consider two S.H.M.’s having same period and
 a1 sin 1  a 2 sin  2 
travelling along the same straight line but they  = tan1  a cos   a cos   ... (6)
are having different initial phases and different  1 1 2 2 
amplitudes. This is the expression of resultant phase of
The equation of displacement of two S.H.M. S.H.M.
travelling along same straight line are Special cases :
x1 = a1 sin (t + 1) (i) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is
x2 = a2 sin (t + 2) zero, i.e. a1  a2 = 0 then
where, R = a12  a 22  2a1a2 cos 0
a1 and a2 are amplitudes and 1 are 2 initial
phases of two S.H.M. R = a12  a22  2a1a2 (cos 0 = 1)
The resultant displacement x = x1 + x2
R = (a1  a2 )2
x = a1 sin (t + 1) + a2 sin (t + 2)
Use sin (A + B) = sin A cos B + cos A sin B R = a1 + a2
x = a1 [sin t cos 1 cos t sin 1] (ii) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is 
radian, i.e. 1  2 =  then
+ a2 [sin t cos 2 cos t sin 2]
= sin t [a1cos 1 + a2 cos 2] R = a12  a 22  2a1a2 cos 
+ cos t [a1 sin 1+ a2sin 2] ... (1)
R = a12  a 22  2a1a 2 (cos = 1)
Let a1 cos 1+ a2 cos 2 = R cos  ... (2)
a1 sin 1+ a2 sin 2 = R sin  ... (3) R = (a1  a2 )2
where R is the resultant amplitude of S.H.M. and
 R = a1  a2
 is the resultant phase of S.H.M.
x = R sin t cos  + R cos t sin  
(iii) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is
2
= R (sin t cos  + cos t sin )

x = R sin (t + ) ... (4) radian, i.e. a1  a2 = then,
2
Thus the resultant motion is S.H.M. whose
amplitude is R and initial phase is  and has the 
R = a12  a 22  2a1a 2 cos
same period as that of individual S.H.M’s. 2
Resultant amplitude of the resultant motion:   
R = a12  a 22  cos  0 
Squaring and adding above equation, (2) and (3)  2 
we get
Oscillations 57

3 O
(iv) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is
2
3
radian, i.e. 1  2 = then,
2
3 
R = a12  a 22  2a1a 2 cos L=l+r
2
 3  l
R = a12  a 22  cos  0
 2  T
Consider, two S.H.M. having equal amplitude,
same period and travelling along the same line. B
As a1 = a2 = a ...(say) m
x
(a) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is r 

m
zero, i.e. 1  2 = 0 and a1 = a2= a then, A

g
mg cos 

si n
R = a1 + a2 = a + a = 2a


(b) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is , mg
i.e. 1  2 =  and a1 = a2= a then, Fig. Simple pendulum
R = a1  a2 = a – a = 0
Radial component mg cos  is balanced by tension
 T. Tangential component mg sin  acts as a
(c) If the phase difference between two S.H.M. is ,
2 restoring force.
 Restoring force F = mg sin 
i.e. 1  2 = and a1 = a2= a then,
2 Negative sign shows that F and  are opposite.
R = a12  a12 As  is small, sin  = 
x mg
R = a2  a2 = a 2 = 1.414 a F = mg  =  mg = x
L L
Q.6. Define ideal simple pendulum and obtain an As m, g, and L are constant,
expression of period of simple pendulum.  F   x
OR
For small displacement, the restoring force is
Define ideal simple pendulum. Show that directly proportional to the displacement and it
under certain conditions, a simple pendulum is oppositely directed. Thus simple pendulum
performs linear S.H.M. Obtain an expression performs linear S.H.M.
for its period. x
 mg
OR Force L
Acceleration = =
Obtain an expression for period of simple Mass m
pendulum. On what factors it depends? gx
Ans. Definition : An ideal simple pendulum is defined =
L
as a heavy particle (point mass) suspended by a  Acceleration per unit displacement is
weightless, inextensible and twistless string from
perfectly rigid support. acceleration g
= =
Consider a simple pendulum having mass m , x L
length L and displaced by small angle  with Period of simple pendulum:
vertical. In the displaced position forces acting on
2
it are T =
acceleration per unit displacement
(i) Weight ‘mg’ in the downward direction
(ii) Tension T in the string. 2
T =
Weight mg is resolved into two components, g
(1) Radial component mg cos along the string. L
(2) Tangential component mg sin perpendicular
to the string. L
 T = 2 g

This shows that the period of simple pendulum

depends on length of the pendulum and acceleration
due to gravity at a given place. It does not depend on
the mass of a bob of pendulum
58 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Frequency of pendulum: Total force acting on the block is

1 1 g F = Fd + Fs But F = ma
f = =  ma =  bv  kx
T 2 L
ma + bv + kx = 0
Q.7. Draw a neat labelled diagram of a damped
spring block-oscillator. 2 dx
d x
m 2 +b + kx = 0
Write the differential equation of motion for dt dt
an oscillator in the presence of a damping This is the differential equation of the oscillator
force directly proportional to the velocity. in presence of a resistive force which is
proportional to velocity.
Show that the oscillations in the presence of
a force which is proportional to velocity is The solution of this equation is
periodic and S.H.M. Also show graphycally the x = Aebt/2m cos (t + ) ... (3)
damping increases the period and decreases the term cos (t + ) shows that the motion is
the amplitude. State the condition due to still periodic and S.H.M.
which the period of oscillation decreases.
Aebt/2m is the amplitude of the damped harmonic
Ans. Periodic oscillations of gradually decreasing oscillations. Amplitude decreases with time
amplitude are called damped harmonic oscillations exponentially as shown in fig.
and oscillator is called a damped harmonic oscillator
Displacement
Rigid support x

A
Spring
Ae(b/2m)t

Block x
O
t

Vane

+A

Fig. Displacement - time graph

Fig. Damped simple harmonic oscillations
The motion of damped oscillator is periodic
Block of mass m oscillates vertically on a spring
2
with spring constant k. From the block, a rod k  b 
Angular frequency  =  
extend to a vane that is submerged in a liquid. As m  2m 
the vane moves up and down, the liquid exerts
drag force on it with time. The mechanical energy The period of oscillation is
of the block – spring system decreases, as energy
2
is transferred to thermal energy of liquid and vane. T = ... (4)
2
Damping force acting on the vane is directly k  b 
 
proportional to velocity of the vane and the block m  2m 
Fd = bv ... (1) Period of oscillation increases due to the presence
where b is a damping constant 2
 b 
Negative sign indicates that damping force of the term    in the denometer.
 2m 
opposes the motion.
Thus damping increases the period and decreases
Force acting on the block due to spring is the amplitude.
Fs = kx ... (2)
where, k is spring constant
Oscillations 59

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Define an ideal simple pendulum. Show that, under certain conditions simple pendulum performs linear
simple harmonic motion. (March 2013)
(2) Derive an expression for the period of motion of a simple pendulum. On which factors does it depend?
(Oct 2013)
(3) State an expression for K.E. (kinetic energy) and P.E. (potential energy) at displacement ‘x’ for a particle
performing linear S.H.M. Represent them graphically. Find the displacement at which K. E. is equal to P. E.
(Feb. 2014)
(4) Define phase of S.H.M. Show variation of displacement, velocity and acceleration with phase for a particle
performing linear S.H.M. graphically, when it starts from extreme position. (Oct. 2014)
(5) Obtain an expression for potential energy of a particle performing simple harmonic motion. Hence evaluate
the potential energy, (a) at mean position and (b) at extreme position. (Feb. 2015)
(6) Discuss the composition of two S.H.M.s along the same path having same period. Find the resultant amplitude
and initial phase. (Oct. 2015)
(7) Define linear S.H.M. Show that S.H.M. is a projection of U.C.M. on any diameter. (Feb. 2016)
(8) Define practical simple pendulum.
Show that motion of bob of pendulum with small amplitude is linear S.H.M. Hence obtain an expression for
its period. What are the factors on which its period depends? (July 2016)
(9) Obtain the differential equation of linear simple harmonic motion. (March 2017)
(10) Prove the law of conservation of energy for a particle performing simple harmonic motion. Hence graphically
show the variation of kinetic energy and potential energy w. r. t. instantaneous displacement. (March 2017)
(11) Define linear simple harmonic motion. Assuming the expression for displacement of a particle starting from
extreme position, explain graphically the variation of velocity and acceleration w.r.t. time. (July 2017)
(12) State the differential equation of linear simple harmonic motion. Hence obtain the expression for acceleration,
velocity and displacement of a particle performing linear S.H.M. (March 2018)
Problems :
(1) A body of mass 1 kg is made to oscillate on a spring of force constant 16 N/m. Calculate :
(a) angular frequency, (b) frequency of vibration. (Oct 2013)
(2) When the length of a simple pendulum is decreased by 20 cm, the period changes by 10%. Find the original
length of the pendulum. (Feb. 2014)
(3) The maximum velocity of a particle performing linear S.H.M. is 0.16 m/s. If its maximum acceleration is
0.64 m/s2, calculate its period. (Oct. 2014)
(4) A particle in S.H.M. has a period of 2 seconds and amplitude of 10 cm. Calculate the acceleration when it is
at 4 cm from its positive extreme position. (Feb. 2015)
(5) The periodic time of a linear harmonic oscillator is 2p second, with maximum displacement of 1 cm. If the

particle starts from extreme position, find the displacement of the particle after seconds. (Feb. 2015)
3
(6) A particle performing linear S.H.M. has a period of 6.28 seconds and a pathlength of 20 cm. What is the
velocity when its displacement is 6 cm from mean position? (Feb. 2016)
(7) A particle executes S.H.M. with a period of 10 seconds. Find the time in which its potential energy will be half
of its total energy. (July 2016)
(8) A clock regulated by seconds pendulum, keeps correct time. During summer, length of pendulum increases to
1.005 m. How much will the clock gain or loose in one day? (g = 9.8 m/s2 and  = 3.142) (July 2017)
(9) A particle performing linear S.H.M. has maximum velocity of 25 cm/s and maximum acceleration of 100 cm/s2.
Find the amplitude and period of oscillation ( = 3.142) (March 2018)


60 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
5
Syllabus:
General Explanation of Elastic property and Elasticity, Plasticity, Deformation, Definition of stress and Strain, Hooke’s
Law, Elastic constants, Determination of Young’s Modulus of Material of Wire, Behaviour of metal wire under increasing
Load, Application of Elastic behaviour of Materials, Elastic Energy.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Stress has the same dimensions as 9. A wire is stretched so that it’s length increases by
(a) Force (b) work 2.5%. If it’s diameter decreases by 1%, Poisson’s
(c) pressure (d) torque ratio of the material of the wire is
2. The SI unit of a modulus of elasticity is (a) 0.1 (b) 0.25 (c) 0.4 (d) 0.5
(a) N-m 2 (b) N/m2 (c) N-m (d) N/m 10. Poisson’s ratio is defined for
3. Which of the following quantities does NOT have (a) solids only
the unit of force per unit area? (b) solids and liquids
(a) Pressure (c) solids, liquids and gases
(b) stress (d) liquids and gases
(c) strain 11. Poisson ratio is the ratio of the lateral strain to
(d) Young’s modulus of elasticity (a) volume strain (b) shear strain
4. If both the length and the radius of a wire are halved, (c) longitudinal stress (d) longitudinal strain
the modulus of elasticity 12. When a spring is stretched, the strain in the wire is
(a) becomes half the initial modulus (a) tensile strain (b) compressive strain
(b) becomes one-fourth the initial modulus (c) shear strain (d) volume strain
(c) becomes double the initial modulus 13. The strain energy per unit volume is given by
(d) remains unchanged 1 1
(a)  stress  strain (b) (stress )2
5. Volume strain is equal to 2 2Y
(a) bulk modulus divided by change in pressure Y 1
(b) longitudinal strain divided by poisson’s ratio (c) 2 (stress )2 (d) Y (stress )2
2
(c) shear stress divided by shear modulus
14. The maximum stress to which a body can be
(d) change in pressure divided by bulk modulus subjected without permanent deformation is called
6. The compressibility of substance is the reciprocal (a) Plastic limit (b) elastic limit
of (c) yield point (d) breaking point
(a) young’s modulus (b) bulk modulus
15. When a wire fractures on stretching just beyond its
(c) modulus of rigidity (d) poisson’s ratio elastic limit or yield point, the material is called
7. Shear strain is (a) ductile (b) brittle
(a) measured in rad/m (c) malleable (d) plastic
(b) the angle of shear in radian 16. When a wire fractures on stretching just beyond its
(c) the change in area per unit surface area elastic limit or yield point, if there is a large strain
(d) the lateral strain before the wire fractures, the material is called
8. Fractional change in volume per unit change in (a) ductile (b) brittle
pressure is called (c) malleable (d) plastic
(a) bulk modulus (b) shear modulus 17. When a load W is placed at the middle point of the
(c) volume strain (d) compressibility beam of lenth l, breath b and thickness d, then the
sag produced in it is given as
Wl 3 Wb 3 Wb 3 yd 3
(a) 3 (b) (c) (d)
4bd y 4ld 3y 4ld 3y 4bl 2W

ANSWERS
1 - (c), 2 - (b), 3 - (c), 4 - (d), 5 - (d), 6 - (b), 7 - (b), 8 - (d), 9 - (c), 10 - (a), 11 - (d), 12 - (c), 13 - (b),
14 - (b), 15 (b), 16 - (a), 17 - (a)

(60)
Elasticity
Very Short Answer Type Questions
Q.1. Differentiate the properties plasticity and
elasticity of material
Ans. Elasticity is the property by virtue of which material
bodies regain their original dimensions (size, shape
or both) after removal of deforming force.
Plasticity is the property of a material to undergo
a permanent deformation even after removal of
external deforming forces.
Q.2. Draw stress-strain curve for elastic tissue of Aorta.
Ans.
1.0
Stress (106 N/m2)
0.5
Strain
1 2
Fig. Stress-strain Curve.
Q.3. What is the value of bulk modulus for an
incompressible liquid?
Ans. For incompressible liqid change in voulme is zero.
Therefore strain also zero.
 Bulk modulus,
Volume Stress Volume Stress
K= = =
Volume Strain 0
Q.4. Define Poisson’s ratio. Does it have any unit?
Ans. Poisson’s ration is defined as the ratio of lateral
strain to longitudinal strain.
It has no unit, since it is the ratio.
Q.5. What is the factor that may affect elasticity
of a material?
Ans. Material to which body is made up of.
Q.6. Give one example each of nearly perfectly
elastic and perfectly plastic material.
Ans. (i) Nearly perfectly elastic  Quartz
(ii) Nearly perfectly plastic  Wet-clay
Q.7. What are the factors on which modulus of
elasticity of a material depends?
Ans. The nature of material and manner in which it is
deformed.
Q.8. Under what condition, the restoring forces are
equal and opposite to the external deforming
forces?
Ans. The restroing forces are equal and opposite, when
the body is deformed within the elastic limit.
Q.9. What is the slope of graph between stress
versus strain known as?
Ans. Stress versus strain is known as modulus of
elasticity
61
(1 mark each)
Q.10. What is the value of Young’s modulus for a
perfectly rigid body?
Ans. For perfectly rigid body, strain is zero.
stress stress
Y = = =  (infinite)
strain 0
Q.11. The Young’s modulus of a wire of length L and
radius r is Y. If the length is reduced to L/2
and radius is reduced to r/2, what will be its
Young’s modulus?
Ans. Y, since it is a material constant.
Q.12. What is called reciprocal of bulk modulus?
Ans. Compressibility is called reciprocal of bulk modulus.
Q.13. How does Young’s modulus change with
change in temperature?
Ans. Young’s modulus of a material decreases with
rise in temperature.
Q.14. Name the factors, which affect the proportionality
of elasticity of a solid.
Ans. Change in temperature, effect of hammering and
annealing, presence of impurities affect the
proportionality of elasticity of a solid.
Q.15. What is theoretical range of Poisson’s ratio?
Ans. For homogeneous isotropic material
1    0.5
Q.16. Which of the three types of elasticity (Y, K
and ) is possessed by all the three states of
matter?
Ans. The value of bulk modulus is possessed by all
the states of matter.
Q.17. Though the dimensions of stress and pressure
are the same, they are different. Justify
Ans. The pressure is defined as normal force per unit
area. The increase in pressure on a body cause
decrease in volume. The pressure at a given point
is same in all direction. So it is a scalar quantity.
Stress is defined as internal restoring force per unit
area. For a given deforming force acting on a body,
stress can have different magnitudes in different
directions. Hence stress is a vector quantity.
Q.18. Two spheres of equal volume, one made of
brass and other steel, are dropped into the
ocean. At the same depth, will both the spheres
undergo the same change in volume? If not,
what will be the ratio of the volume changes?
VdP
Ans. Bulk modulus K = 
dV
VdP
 dV = 
K
For same dP at the same depth
1
dV 
K
62 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Since values of K are different for brass and steel,
Therefore the two sphere will not undergo the
same change in volume at the same depth.
As Ksteel > Kbrass
dVbrass> dVsteel
Q.19. You are given a cube of jelly. Which moduli is
associated with it?
Ans. Bulk modulus and modulus of rigidity are
associted with it.

Short Answer Type Question - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Define elasticity. Explain the concept of Q.4. Distinguish between elastic and plastic body.
elasticity. Ans.
Ans. Elasticity: The property by virtue of which
Elastic body Plastic body
material bodies regain their original dimensions
(size, shape or both) after removal of deforming (i) A body which return (i) A body which does not
force is called elasticity. exactly to its original retur n a t all to its
Concept of elasticity: dimensions after or ig in al d im en sion s
removal of deforming after removal of
Solid consists of atoms and molecules situated
force is called elastic d ef orm in g for ce is
at definite positions in equilibrium state. When
body. called plastic body.
a force is applied to a body the atoms in a body
are displaced from their equilibrium positions. (ii) When deforming force (ii) When deforming forced
Internal restoring forces are developed within the is applied to elastic is applied to plastic
body, which try to restore the atoms back to their body, internal restoring body, internal restoring
equilibrium positions. The applied force and forces are produced in forces are produced in
internal restoring force are numerically equal in the body. the body are negligible.
equilibrium state. When external applied force (iii) A large deforming force (iii) These bodies can be
is removed, internal restoring force brings the is required to produce deformed to a large
body back to its original position. small deformation. exten t b y a sm all
deforming force.
Q.2. What do you mean by elastic bodies and
plastic bodies? Give one example each (iv) e.g. Quartz (iv) e.g. Putty, dough, lead,
plasticine, clay
Ans. (a) Elastic bodies:
Bodies which return to their original dimensions Q.5. Define stress. State its S.I. unit and dimension.
after removal of deforming forces are called Ans. Stress: Stress is defined as internal restoring
perfectly elastic bodies. Large internal restoring force per unit cross sectional area of body.
forces produced.
In equilibrium, the applied force and internal
e.g. Quartz restoring force are numerically equal, however
(b) Plastic bodies : they are oppositely directed.
The bodies which do not regain their original
Internal restoring force Applied force
dimensions after removal of deforming forces are Stress = =
Area Area
called plastic bodies.
S.I. Unit of stress is N/m2
These bodies can be deformed to a large extent
by a small deforming force. Internal restoring The dimensions of stress [L1 M1 T2]
forces are negligible. Q.6. Obtain the relation between Young’s modulus,
e.g. Clay, plasticine and putty coefficient of linear expansion, and thermal
stress.
Q.3. Distinguish between elasticity and plasticity.
Ans. Ans. Consider a metallic rod of length l0 at 0C. If the
temperature of rod is increased by 
Elasticity Plasticity Then the final length of rod is given by
(i) The property by virtue (i) The property of material l = l0 (1 +  )
of which material to undergo a permanent  l  l0 = l0 
regain their original deformation even after
dimensions (size, where  is the coefficient of linear expansion of
removal of external
shape or both) after the rod
deforming forces.
removal of deforming Change in length
force is called elasticity Linear strain = original length
(ii) An elastic deformation (ii) A plastic deformation
Final length  orginal length
is reversible. is irreversible. = Original length
Elasticity 63

l  l0 (i) Which material is more ductile?

Linear strain = l 0 =  (ii) Which material has greater value of
Young’s modulus?
stress
Young’s modulus, Y = (iii) Which of the two is stronger material?
strain
(iv) Which material is more brittle?
 Thermal stress = Y × strain
Ans. (i) Wire with larger plastic region is more ductile.
= Y 
Here, material B is more ductile.
Force exerted by rod due to heating
stress
= Thermal stress × Area = Y  × A (ii) Young’s modulus is
strain
Q.7. Stress strain curve for two wires of material  YB >YA
A and B are shown in figure.
(iii) For a given strain, larger stress is required for B
than that for A
Stress
B Therefore B is stronger than A
(iv) Material with smaller plastic region is more brittle,
A therefore A is more brittle than B

Strain

Q.8. Distinguish between Young’s Modulus, Bulk modulus and Modulus of elasticity.
Ans.
No. Young’s Modulus Bulk modulus Modulus of rigidity
1. Young’s modulus is defined as Bulk modulus is defined as Modulus of rigidity is defined as the
the ratio of longitudinal stress the ratio of volume stress to ratio of shearing stress to shearing
to longitudinal strain volume strain strain
2. It is associated with change in It is associated with change in It is associated with change in
length volume shape
3. Only solid possesses Y All solids liquids and gases Only solid possess it
possess bulk modulus
MgL VdP F
4. Y = K =  =
r 2l dV A

Q.9. A 3 m long copper wire is stretched to produce Solution: Data:

an extension of 0.3 cm. If Poisson’s ratio for dP = 2 106 N/m2, V = 1 litre = 103 m3,
copper is 0.26, what is the lateral strain
dV = 106 m3, K = ?
produced in the wire?
Bulk modulus
Solution: Data:
Poisson’s ratio  = 0.26, VdP
K =
dV
l = 0.3 cm = 3 × 104 m, L = 3 m,
Lateral strain = ? 103  2  106 2  103
= 6 =
10 106
Lateral strain
 = Longitudinal strain = 2  10 N/m
9 2

 Lateral strain =  × longitudinal strain Q.11. What pressure is required to reduce the volume
of a lead block by 1%.
l
=× (Bulk modulus of lead is 6 × 109 N/m2).
L
Solution: Data:
3  10 3
= 0.26 × = 0.26 × 104 dV 99
3 K = 6  109 N/m2, = = 0.99
V 100
Q.10. When the pressure is applied to one litre of a Bulk modulus
liquid is increased by 2 × 106 N/m2, its volume
decreases by 106 m3. Find the bulk modulus dP
 K = dV
of the liquid.
V
64 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

dV Solution: Data:
 dP = K
V Strain energy = 1.1 × 103 J,
dP = 6  109  0.99 Load = 10 N, l = ?
= 5.94  109 N/m2
1
Q.12. A steel wire is acted upon by a load of 10 N. Strain energy = load × extension
2
Calculate the extension produced in the wire, 1
if the strain energy stored in the wire is 1.1 × 103 = × 10 × extension
2
1.1 × 103 J
0.22 103 = extension
 Extension = 0.22 mm

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. What are different types of stress? Explain Q.2. What are different types of strain? Explain
different types of stress. different types of strain.
Ans. Types of stress are - Ans. Types of strain :
(i) Longitudinal stress or tensile stress: (i) Longitudinal strain or
When applied force produces change in length of tensile strain:
a body, the corresponding stress is called It is defined as the ratio of
longitudinal stress. change in length to the
When a metal wire of length L and radius r is original length. L
stretched by a load F, it elongates by length l. Longitudinal strain
L+l
applied force
Longitudinal stress = final length  original length
area = original length
F Mg
= = L l  L
A r 2 = l
L
(ii) Volume stress :
l
When an applied force produces change in volume =
L
of a body, then corresponding stress is called
(ii) Volume strain: F
volume stress.
When a block of rubber having volume V is It is defined as the ratio of
subjected to additional pressure dP from all sides, change in volume to the original volume.
its volume decreases. dP

applied force
Volume stress =
area
AdP
= = dP = change in pressure.
A dP V- V dP
(iii) Shearing stress:
When an applied force produces change in shape
of a body, then corresponding stress is called
shearing stress.
dP
When a tangential force is applied to a top surface
of a cube whose bottom surface is fixed, its shape V
 V   V  V
 


changes to a parallelepiped. Volume strain =
V  V 
tangential applied force ve sign shows that as pressure increases,
Shearing stress =
area volume decreases.
F (iii) Shearing strain :
=
A Shearing strain or shear is defined as the ratio
of relative displacement of any layer to its
perpendicular distance from the fixed layer.
Shearing strain is equal to shear angle
Elasticity 65

H H G G Change in length l
Longitudinal strain = =
Original length L
F
applied force
F Longitudinal stress =
E area
E F
F Mg
= =
q A r 2
D C
Longitudinal stess
Young’s modulus Y =
Longitudinal strain
A B
F Mg
Fig. Shear strain A  2 MgL
Y= l = r =
l r 2l
EE  L
Shearing strain = L
AE
Shearing strain = shear = tan  S.I. unit of Young’s modulus is N/m2
As  is small, tan  =  C.G.S. unit is dyne/cm2.
Shearing strain = shear=  (in radian). Its dimensions are [L1M1T2].
Q.3. State Hook’s law. Give S.I. unit and dimensions Young’s modulus is a property of only solids.
of modulus of elasticity Therefore only solids possess Young’s modulus.
OR Liquid and gases do not have Young’s modulus
State Hook’s law. Define modulus of elasticity as they do not have definite shape.
Ans. Hook’s law: Within elastic limit, stress is directly Q.5. Obtain an expression for modulus of rigidity
proportional to strain. State S.I. unit and dimensions of 
Thus, stress  strain Ans. It is defined as the ratio of shearing stress to
 Stress = M (strain) shearing strain.
The constant of proportionality M is called Shearing stress
modulus of elasticity. Modulus of rigidity = Shearing strain

F
 = A


Stress
F
=
A
Slope = modulus of elasticity S.I. unit of modulus of rigidity is N/m2
C.G.S unit is dyne/cm2.
Its dimensions are [L1 M1 T2].
Strain Modulus of rigidity is a property of only solids.
stress
M= Q.6. Define three moduli of elasticity. State their
strain
formula
Modulus of elasticity: The modulus of elasticity
Ans. (1) Young’s modulus (Y):
of material is defined as the ratio of stress to
the strain. It is defined as the ratio of longitudinal stress to
longitudinal strain.
S.I. Unit of modulus of elasticity is N/m 2

Its dimensions are [L1M1T2]. Longitudinal stress

 Y = Longitudinal strain
Q.4. Obtain an expression for Young’s modulus of
material of wire. State S.I. unit and dimensions MgL
= ... (1)
of Y. r 2l
Ans. Young’s modulus: It is defined as the ratio of (2) Bulk modulus (K):
longitudinal stress to longitudinal strain. It is defined as the ratio of volume stress to
Consider a metal wire of length radius r is volume strain.
suspended from a rigid support. Let a load Mg is Volume stress
attached at the free end of wire. The load produces Bulk modulus =
Volume strain
the change in length of wire called extension l.
66 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

S
dP VdP
 K =  dV =  ... (2) A B
dV
Reference Experimental
V wire
wire
(3) Modulus of rigidity ():
It is defined as the ratio of shearing stress to
shearing strain.
Shearing stess
Modulus of rigidity = Shearing strain

1
2
F

3
V
 = A

4
 (Vernier scale)

5
 M

6
(Metre scale)

7
F
= ... (3)
A
Apparatus consists of two long wires A and B of
Q.7. Explain Poisson ratio. Discuss its limiting
same length and same radius, and same material
value.
are suspended side by side from a rigid support.
Ans. Poisson’s ratio : Poisson’s ratio is defined as The wire A is called reference wire and B is called
the ratio of lateral strain (transverse) to the experimental wire carries a pan in which known
longitudinal strain. weights can be placed. Vernier scale is attached
When a force is applied to the free end of a metal at the bottom of experimental wire, whereas main
wire, it gets elongated. This is accompanied by scale is fixed to reference wire. Reference wire is
decrease in the diameter of metal wire. Thus used in order to compensate change in length
longitudinal extension is accompanied by a that may occur due to change in temperature.
lateral contraction. Both reference and experimental wire are
Within elastic limit, lateral strain is proportional sufficiently loaded in order to make wire straight
to longitudinal strain. and taut and Vernier scale is noted.
Lateral strain  Longitudinal strain Now load is increased gradually in the
Lateral strain =   Longitudinal strain experimental wire, every time Vernier scale is
noted. The difference between two Vernier scale
Lateral strain
Poisson’s ratio = Longitudinal strain readings gives elongation produced for a given
load.
Change in diameter Let Mg is the load attached to the experimental
lateral strain = T
Original diameter wire, l be the corresponding extension produced
D in the wire. r is the radius of the wire q, then
Lateral strain = Young’s modulus
D
l Longitudinal stress
Longitudinal strain = dD Y = Longitudinal strain
L L
D D F Mg
A  2 MgL
Poisson’s ratio =
D = l = r =
l l r 2l
L L L
l
LD Thus,
=
lD T Measuring extension (l ) , radius (r), original length
For homogeneous isotropic material, 1    0.5 (L), load (M), Young’s modulus (r) of the material
In actual practice  is always positive. of wire can be determined.
0.2    0.4 Q.9. Ex plai n the behavi our of wire under
Poisson ratio is the ratio of two different strain, increasing load.
Therefore it is dimensionless and unitless. OR
Explain stress versus strain graph with the
Q.8. Describe a method to determine Young’s
help of neat labelled diagram.
modulus of a material of thin wire.
OR
Ans. Following figure illustrates a tyical arrangement With the help of neat graph exp lain the
for determination of Y of material of wire behaviour of wire under increasing load.
Elasticity
Ans. The behaviour of a metal wire under increasing
load can be studied by Searle’s method.
A load is applied to the wire in steps of half a
kilogram until the wire breaks. The elongation in
the wire is measured. The graph of stress versus
strain is plotted. The nature of the graph is shown
below
(1) Initial part OP of the graph is straight line, which
shows that stress is directly proportional to
strain. Hooke’s law is obeyed up to point P. The
value of stress corresponding to the point E is
called elastic limit.
N is called ductile material. The metals beyond the
B
E Yp
E
P
Tensile
stress
O S
Tensile strain
A typical stress-strain curve for a ductile metal
(2) Elastic limit is defined as the maximum stress
that can be applied to the wire, which when
removed the wire regain its original dimension.
If the load applied to the wire is removed, the
wire completely regains its original length. The
point E represents limit of proportionality
between stress and strain.
(3) If the stress is increased beyond point E, the
graph no longer remains a straight line and
Hooke’s law does not hold good. In this case, for
a small increase in stress, the strain increases
faster and graph bends towards strain axis. If
the wire is is strained upto E and then if the
load is removed, the wire is unable to cover its
original length. However the wire retains its
elastic properties. The strain OS remains
permanently in the wire. If the wire is loaded
again, we get straight line graph SE’. The strain
OS is called permanent set.
(4) If the load is increased further, a point Y p is
reached, at which the tangent to curve becomes
parallel to strain axis. The point Yp is called yield
point. This means that extension begins to
increase even without any increase in the load
or stress, the wire is said to flow (Plastic flow).
The value of stress corresponding to yield point
is called yield stress.
(5) Next to yield point the curve begins to bend
upwards and portion is obtained. At this stage,
when the wire begins to flow, the cross section
of the wire decreases uniformly up to point N.
67
Later neck or constriction begins to form at a weak
point. The point N represents the maximum
stress which the wire can bear and is called
breaking stress. Once the neck is formed the
wire begins to thin out locally, where the strain
increases faster even though stress is decreased
and the wire finally breaks at point B.
Q.10. What are ductile materials, brittle materials
and elastomers? Give two examples. each.
Ans. (1) Ductile materials:
The material which has large plastic deformation
in between the elastic limit and breaking point,
yield point are ductile. These materials are used
in making the wires, springs and sheets etc.
e.g. Copper, aluminium, iron, lead
(2) Brittle materials:
These substances possess very small plastic
range beyond elastic limit. Substances which
breaks just after elastic limit is reached are called
brittle substances.
e.g. Glass high carbon, steel, etc.
(3) Elastomers:
Fig. shows stress strain curve for elastic tissue
of aorta. From the graph it is seen that although
elastic region is very large, the material of aorta
does not obey Hooke’s law. There is no well-
defined plastic region. Such substances like aorta
can be stretched to cause large strains are called
elastomers.
e.g. Tissue of aorta, rubber
Stress
1.0
0.5
Strain
1 2
Q.11. Explain the applications of elastic behaviour
of materials.
Ans. Elastic behaviour of materials plays an important
role in designing of bridges, construction of
homes and malls, in machinery, in industry and
so on. In design of building knowledge of strength
of materials, stresses suffered by columns and
beams are required.
(1) Metallic ropes of cranes:
Thick metallic ropes are used in cranes to lift
and move heavy loads from one place to another.
The thickness of the rope is decided on the basis
of elastic limit of the material of the rope and
the factor of safety.
68
To lift the load, the rope attached to it is pulled
up by using pulleys and motors.
Suppose a rope made of steel is used in a crane
which can lift a load of 10 metric tons (104 kg).
The stress produced in the rope should not exceed
beyond the breaking stress or elastic limit of steel
30 107 N/m2. Therefore, one should not attach
the load more than 104 kg.
Load to be lifted
Ultimate stress = Area of cross section of rope
Mg
 Ultimate stress =  elastic limit
A Thus to reduce bending we should use a material
Mg
A 
Elastic limit
10 4 kg  10 m/s 2
A =
30  107 N/M2
105
A =
3  108
A = 3.3  104 m2
r2 = 3.3 104
 r = 1.03 cm
In practice, one should not attach a load more
than 104 kg but usually the rope is designed for a
safety factor of 10 in the load, which means that
the rope can lift a load of 10 × 104 kg = 105 kg. This
corresponds the radius of the rope about 3 cm.
Thus a thicker rope of radius about 3 cm is
recommended. A single wire of this radius would
be practically be a rigid rod. So ropes are always
made of a number of thin wires braided together.
(2) Design of bridges:
The dimensions, type of material used and the
design of a bridge should be such that it can
withstand the load of the traffic, its own load and
the force of wind. In the structure of bridge , the
beam and columns are commonly used. Under a
heavy load the beam should not bend too much
or break. We know that the bending of a beam
depends on its length, its cross sectional area
and Young’s modulus of the material of which it
is made.
(a) Consider a horizontal beam loaded at the centre
and supported at its two ends shown in fig.
l is ½ × load × extension
d OR
b
W
When a load W is placed at the middle point of
the beam of length l , breath b and thickness d,
then the depression produced in it is
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
Wl 3

4bd 3y
(1) Sag () is inversely proportional to d3
(2) Sag () is inversely proportional to b
(3) Sag () is directly proportional to l3
(4) Sag () is inversely proportional to Y
From above to have smaller bending (depression)
for a given road,
(i) l should be small
(ii) Y, b and d should be large.
of large Young’s modulus (i.e. steel) in the
construction of bridges.
(b) Another effective method to reduce bending in
the beam is to make depth or thickness of the
beam large, rather than the breadth.
But on increasing the thickness too much, the
beam may bend as shown in fig (b).
b
Beam
d
I - beam
Fig. (a) Fig. (b) Fig. (c)
(a) Rectangular bar
(b) Buckling of a bar
(c) I - beam
This bending is called buckling.
To avoid this buckling, the beam is designed
I-Shaped as shown in fig (c).
Such I shaped girderis, a common compromise
between the the thickness and breadth of the
beam and provides a large load bearing surface.
This shape reduces the weight of the beam and
hence the cost of the material.
Q.12. Show that strain energy per unit volume of a
stretched wire is ½ stress × strain.
OR
Prove that work done in stretching the wire
Derive an expression for strain energy.
Hence show that strain energy per unit
volume is directly proportional to the square
of the stress
Ans. Consider a wire of length L and radius r, which is
suspended from a rigid support. Let a load Mg is
suspended from the free end of wire. This load
produces extension l in the wire. Then,
Young’s modulus
Elasticity 69

Longitudinal stress stress

Y = Longitudinal strain but Y =
strain
F  Stress = Y  strain
A FL
Y = l =  Strain energy per unit volume
L Al
1
YAl = Y (Strain)2 ... (4)
F = 2
L
1  stress 
The magitude of streching force incerases from 0 = (Stress)2 ... (5)  strain  
to f during elonation of wire. 2Y  r 
The equations are (3), (4) and (5) are the various
Let f be the force and x is the corresponding
forms of strain energy per unit volume of stretched
extension at certain instant, during the process
wire.
of extension. Then,
YAx Q.13. A steel wire of diameter 1 mm is stretched by
f = a force of 20 N. Calculate strain energy per
L
unit volume.
The work done to increase a small extension dx
is, Work = Force × Displacement (Young’s modulus of steel = 2 × 1011 N/m2)
dw = f × dx Solution: Data:
F = 20 N, Y = 2  1011 N/m2, d = 1mm,
YAx
dw = dx  r = 0.5 mm = 5  104 m
L
Total work done in stretching wire from 0 to l is F 20
Stress = =
l A r 2

W =  dw
0
20
 Stress = 3.14  (5  10  4 )2
l
YAx 8  107
= 
0
L
dx  Stress =
3.14
= 2.547 × 107 N/m2

Strain energy per unit volume

l

 x dx
YA 1
= = (Stress)2
L 0
2Y
l 1
YA  x  YA  l 
2 2
= (2.547 × 107)2
=   =   0 2  2  1011
L  2  0 L  2  = 0.25 × 1011 × 1014 × (2.547)2
YAl 2 = 6.5847 × 0.25 × 103
W =
2L = 1.62 × 103 J/m3
1 YAl Q.14. Copper metal cube has side of length 1m. The
W = ×l bottom edge of the cube is fixed and tangential
2 2L
force 4.2 × 108 N is applied to a top surface.
1
W = F×l Calculate the lateral displacement of the top
2 surface, if modulus of rigidity of copper is
1 14 × 1010 N/m2.
W = (Load) × (Extension) ... (1)
2 Solution: Data:
This is the expression of work done by stretching A = 1 m2, L = 1 m, Lateral displacement =?
force. This work done is stored in in the wire as
 = 14  1010 N/m2, F = 4.2 108 N/m2
strain energy.
F
1 Stress =
 Strain energy = (Load) × (Extension) ... (2) A
2
Strain energy is defined as elastic potential 4.2  108
=
energy gained by a wire during elongation by 1
stretching force. = 4.2 108 N/m2
Strain energy per unit volume Shearing stress
1F l  Modulus of rigidity = Shearing strain
=
2A L
Shearing stress
1 Shearing strain = Modulus of rigidity
=  (Stress)(Strain) ... (3)
2
70 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

4.2  108 Q.16. A steel wire having cross sectional area

= 1.5mm2 when stretched by a load produces a
14  1010
lateral strain 1.5 × 105. Calculate the mass
= 3 × 103
attached to the wire (Y = 2 × 1010 N/m2, Poisson’s
Lateral dispalement ratio = 0.29 and g = 9.8 m/s2)
 Shearing strain = Perpendicular distance
Solution: Data:
 Lateral dispalement = Shearing strain × 1 Y = 2 × 102 N/m2,
3
= 3 × 10 × 1 Poisson’s ratio = 0.29, g = 9.8 m /s2,
= 3 × 10 3
m = 3 mm Lateral strain = 1.5  105,
Q.15. The area of upper face of a rectangular block is A = 1.5 mm2 = 1.5  106 m2
0.5m × 0.5m and the lower face is fixed. The Lateral strain
height of the block is 1 cm. A shearing force Longitudinal strain =
Poission ratio
applied at the top face produces displacement
of 0.015 mm. Find the strain and shearing 1.5  105
Longitudinal strain =
force. (Modulus of rigidity = 4.5   N/m2) 0.29
Solution: Data: Stress
 Y =
 = 4.5 × 10 10
N/m , L = 1 cm = 10 m
2 2 Starin
A = 0.5 m × 0.5 m = 0.25 m2  Stress = Y × Strain
dx = 0.015 mm = 1.5 × 105 m 1.5  10 5
 Stress = 2 × 1010 ×
Lateral dispalacement 0.29
Strain =
Perpendicular distance Mg 1.5  10 5
from the fixed layer  = 2 × 1010 ×
A 0.29
1.5  105
= M  9.8 2  1010  1.5  105
102 6 =
1.5  10 0.29
= 1.5 × 103
Stress 2  1010  1.5  105  1.5  106
 Modulus of rigidity =  M=
Strain 0.29  9.8
 Shearing stress = Modulus of Rigidity × Shearing 4.5  101
strain =
2.842
 Shearing stress = 4.5 × 1010 × 1.5 × 103 = 0.1583 kg
= 6.75 × 107
 Shearing force = Shearing stress × Area
= 6.75 × 107 × 0.25
= 1.688 × 107N

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Explain the behaviour of metal wire under increasing load. (Oct 2013)
(2) Discuss the behaviour of wire under increasing load. (Oct 2015)
(3) Within the elastic limit, find the work done by a stretching force on a wire.
Problems:


Surface Tension 71
CHAPTER
6
Syllabus:
Surface Tension on the basis of Molecular Theory, Surface Energy, Surface Tension, Angle of Contact, Capillarity and
Capillary action, Effect of Inpurities and Temperture on Surface tension of Liquid.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The mutual force of attraction between the 6. The surface tension of a lubricating oil is kept low
molecules of the same substance is called so that
(a) a cohesive force (b) an adhesive force (a) there is reduction in contact area
(c) the surface tension (d) the tensile force (b) the oil gives a good shine
2. The radius of the sphere of influence for cohesive (c) the oil can spread over a large area
force is called the (d) the oil gets absorbed into the surface
(a) critical range (b) yield point 7. If for a liquid in a vessel, the force of cohesion is
(c) molecular range (d) molecular diameter more than the force of adhesion
3. The surface tension acts (a) the liquid does not wet the solid
(a) perpendicular to the surface and vertically (b) the liquid wets the solid
upwards (c) the surface of the liquid is plane
(b) perpendicular to the surface and vertically into (d) the angle of contact is zero
the liquid 8. A liquid spreads over solid surface, it’s angle of
(c) tangential to the surface contact with the solid surface is
(d) only at the liquid-solid interface (a) 1800 (b) 900 (c) 450 (d) 00
4. The dimensions of surface tension are 9. If a liquid does not wet a solid surface, it’s angle of
(a) [M1 L1 T2] (b) [M1 L0 T2] contact with the solid surface is
1 2 0
(c) [M L T ] (d) [M1 L1 T1] (a) zero (b) acute (c) 900 (d) obtuse
5. The work done in breaking a spherical drop of a liquid 10. The work done in blowing a bubble of radius R is W.
(surface tension T) of radius R into 8 equal drops is The work done in blowing a bubble of radius 2R is
(a) R2T (b) 2R2T (c) 16R2T (d) 4R2T (a) W (b) 2W (c) 4W (d) 8W

ANSWERS
1 - (a), 2 - (c), 3 - (c), 4 - (b), 5 - (c), 6 - (c), 7 - (a), 8 - (d), 9 - (d), 10 - (c)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Why does surface tension decreases when Q.4. Ho w do es surface t ensi on c hange with
temperature is increased? temperature?
Ans. When temperature is increased, the distance Ans. Surface tension decreases with increase in
between molecules increases, therefore cohesive temperature.
force decreases, hence surface tension decreases.
Q.5. Which has a larger excess pressure, smaller
Q.2. What are the exceptions to the rule that surface or larger bubbles? Why?
tension lowers as temperature is increased?
Ans. Excess pressure inside a bubble is
Ans. In most of the liquids, as temperature increases, 4T
surface tension decreases. Only in the case of Pi  P o  , where r is the radius of bubble.
r
molten copper and molten cadmium, the surface
1
tension increases with increase of its temperature.  Excess pressure P 
r
Q.3. What is the difference between cohesive and Hence smaller bubble has larger excess pressure.
adhesive forces?
Q.6. Give any two application of capillary action.
Ans. Cohesive force is the force of attraction between
the molecules of the same substance, while the Ans. Applications of capillary action:
adhesive force is the force of attraction between (i) Blotting paper absorbs ink due to capillary action.
the molecules of different substances.
(ii) Ink rises in a pen due to capillary action.
(71)
72
Q.7. What is effect of impurity on surface tension?
Ans. When insoluble impurity is added to water its
surface tension decreases, whereas by adding
soluble impurity to water surface tension increases.
Q.8. Tents are coated with a thin layer of aluminium
hydroxide, why?
Ans. (i) Tents and umbrella cloths are made of tightly
woven fabric so that water with its high surface
tension cannot easily penetrate.
(ii) Aluminium hydroxide is water insoluble and water
repellent. Thus it drains off the raindrops before
they can wet the fabric. Hence tents are coated
with a thin layer of aluminium hydroxide.
Short Answer Type Questions - I
Q.1. Define (i) Cohesive force (ii) Adhesive force
Give one example of each.
Ans. (i) Cohesive force: The force of attraction
between the molecules of the same substance is
called cohesive force.
e.g. The force of attraction between two water
molecules is cohesive force.
(ii) Adhesive force: The force of attraction between
the molecules of the different substances is called
adhesive force.
e.g. Force of attraction between water and solid
molecules is adhesive force.
Q.2. Define (i) Range of molecular attraction
(ii) Sphere of influence
Ans. (i) Range of molecular attraction:
The maximum distance between two molecules
upto which intermolecular forces are effective is
called range of molecular attraction.
(ii) Sphere of influence:
An imaginary sphere drawn, with given molecule
as centre and radius equal to the molecular range
is called the sphere of influence.
Q.3. Define surface tension. State its S.I. unit and
dimension.
Ans. Surface tension: The force per unit length acting
at right angles to an imaginary line drawn on the
free surface of liquid is called surface tension.
If l is the length of line and F is force acting on
line, the surface tension T is given as
F  -
T =
l
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
Q.9. What will happen to the rise of a liquid in a
capillary tube if its top end is closed?
Ans. (i) When the capillary tube is closed at its top
end, air is tapped between the closed end and
liquid meniscus.
(ii) Now, if the tube is further pushed into the liquid,
the trapped air gets compressed and exerts a
pressure P such that the pressure difference
across the meniscus is gh + P. Thus h will
decrease in magnitude even change sign if the
tube is immersed deep enough.
Q.10. When a chalk stick is immersed in water,
bubbles are emitted, why?
Ans. (i) When chalk is dry, the pores of chalk are filled
with air. If a piece of chalk is dipped into water,
water is sucked into the fine pores.
(ii) The air is displaced from these fine pores gets
released from the larger pores which open to the
chalk surface. Thus air comes out as bubbles.
(2 marks each)
S.I. Unit is N/m or joule/m2 and C.G.S. unit is
dyne/cm.
Dimensions are [L0 M1 T2]
Q.4. Define surface energy. State its S.I. unit and
dimension.
Ans. Surface Energy: It is defined as the extra (i.e.
increased) potential energy of a liquid surface
with an isothermal increase in the surface area.
S.I. unit of surface energy is joule.
C.G.S. unit is erg.
Dimension of surface energy [L2M1T2]
Q.5. Draw neat labelled diagram to show the angle
of contact between
(a) pure water and clean glass
(b) mercury and clean glass
Ans. (a)
Sphere of influence
Glass A of molecule of liquid

T
P
Water
Fig. (a) Angle of contact between water and glass
AP - tangent to the solid surface
AT - tangent to the liquid surface
A - Sphere of influence of molecule of liquid
Angle of contact (acute)
Surface Tension 73

(b) at  0 C and 0 0 C respectively, then over a

Glass certain range of temperature T = T0 (1 – ),
where  is temperature coefficient which
T
depends on the nature of liquid.
Q.8. Draw a neat labelled diagram showing forces
acting on the meniscus of water in a capillary
tube.
A
Ans.

T cos  T cos 
R=T T=R
Mercury 

Fig. (b) Angle of contact between mercury and glass

T sin  r T sin 
AP - tangent to the solid surface A B
C
AT - tangent to the liquid surface  
A - Sphere of influence of molecule of liquid Walls of T T
h
 - Angle of contact (obtuse) capillary

Q.6. What is capillarity? Give some applications

of it.
Ans. The phenomenon of rise or fall of a liquid inside
a capillary tube when it is dipped in the liquid is liquid
called capillarity.
Fig. Rise of liqid in capillary tube
 Applications of capillarity:
(i) Blotting paper absorbs ink due to capillary Notations:
action. T = Surface tension
(ii) Ink rises in a pen due to capillary action. R = Opposite reaction R
(iii) Oil rises up the wick of lamp due to capillary T cos  = Vertical component of surface tension
action. T sin  = Horizontal component of surface
(iv) Cloth rag soaks water due to capillary action tension
Q.7. Ex plain the effect of impurities a nd r = Radius of capillary
temperature on surface tension h = Rise of water in capillary.
Ans. (1) Effect of impurities on surface tension: Q.9. A liquid rises to a height of 5 cm in a glass
(i) When highly soluble impurity like common capillary of radius 0.02 cm. What will be the
salt or sodium chloride is dissolved in water, height of the same liquid in a glass capillary
it is found that surface tension of water of radius 0.04 cm?
increases. Solution: Data:
(ii) When a sparingly soluble substance like r1 = 0.02 cm, r2 = 0.04 cm, h1= 5 cm, h2= ?
phenol or alcohol is dissolved in water,
 h 2 r2 = h 1 r1
surface tension of water decreases.
h1r1
(iii) If insoluble impurity is added into water, h2 = r
surface tension of water decreases. Addition 2
of detergent in water reduces surface tension 5  0.02 0.1
of water. = =
0.04 0.04
(2) Effect of temperature on surface tension : = 2.5 cm
(i) In most of the liquids, as the temperature
increases, surface tension decreases. Only Q.10. The surface tension of water at 0oC is 75.5
in the case of molten copper or molten dyne/cm. Find the surface tension of water
cadmium, the surface tension increases with at 25oC ( = 0.0021/oC)
rise increase of its temperature. The Solution: Data:
temperature at which surface tension of liquid  for water = 0.00210C
becomes zero is called the critical temperature  = 25 – 0 = 25 0C
of the liquid.
 = 75.5 dyne/cm = 75.5  103 N/m
(ii) The surface tension of almost all liquid
decreases with rise in temperature. If T and  T = T0(1 – )
T0 are the values of surface tension of liquid = 75.5  103 (1  0.0021  25)
74 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

= 75.5 103 (1  0.0525) Q.13. A rain drop of diameter 4 mm is about to fall on

the ground. Calculate the pressure inside the
= 75.5  10  0.9475
3
raindrop. (Surface tension of water T = 0.072 N/m,
= 71.54  103 N/m Atmospheric pressure = 1.013  105 N/m2)
Q.11. A soap bubble of radius 12 cm is blown. Surface Solution: Data:
tension of soap solution is 30 dyne/cm.
r = 2 mm = 2  103 m
calculate the work done in blowing the soap
bubble. excess pressure = ?
Excess pressure inside the raindrop
Solution: Data:
r = 12 cm = 12 × 102 m 2T
Pi  P0 =
T = 30 dyne/cm = 30 × 103 N/m r
Soap solution has two free surfaces 2T
Work done = Surface area  T P i = P0 +
r
= 2  4r2  T 2  0.072
= 8r2  T P i = 1.013  105 +
2  10  3
= 8  3.142  (12  102)2  30  103 = 1.013  10 + 0.072  103
5

= 108.587.52  104  103

= (1.013 + 0.00072) 105
= 1.0858  105  107
= 1.01372  105 N/m2
= 1.086 × 102 J
Q.14. The energy of the free surface of a liquid is 5
Q.12. Water rises to a height of 3.2 cm in a glass
times the surface tension of the liquid. Find
capillary tube. Find the height to which the
the diameter of the drop
same water will rise in another glass capillary
having half area of cross section. Solution:
Solution: Data: dw = 5 T ... (1)
A1 But d w = T dA ... (2)
h1 = 3.2 cm, h2 = ?, A2 =
2  TdA = 5 T
r12 r1 5 T
  r22 =  r2 = dA =
2 2 T
h 2 r2 = h 1 r1  dA = 5
h1r1
h2 = r 4r2 = 5  4r2 = 5
2
5 5
3.2  r1  r =  r2 =
h2 = 2 2
r1
2
d = 2r = 5 cm

h2 = 3.2  2 = 4.5248 cm

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Explain the phenomenon of surface tension The sphere of influence of molecule A lies
on the basis of molecular theory. completely inside the liquid. Therefore, it will be
Ans. Consider three molecules in a liquid, in a vessel, completely acted upon by an equal and opposite
such that the molecule A is well inside the liquid, cohesive forces in all directions. Thus net
the molecule B just below the free surface of cohesive force acting on molecule A is zero.
liquid and molecule C is on the free surface as The sphere of influence of molecule B is just
shown in figure. within the surface film and just below free surface
C such that the number of molecules of air in sphere
B
of influence is very small as compared to liquid
K L molecules. As a result the molecule B gets
N M attracted inside the liquid by cohesive forces of
liquid. Thus there is net downward resultant
A cohesive force acts on molecule B, trying to pull
it inside the liquid.
The sphere of influence of molecule C has its
upper half lying in air and lower half lying in liquid
Fig. Molecular forces on different molecules in a liquid but the number of air molecules in a sphere of
Surface Tension
influence is very small as compared to liquid
molecules. As a result the molecule C gets
attracted inside the liquid molecules within
liquid. Thus molecule C experiences net
downward resultant unbalanced cohesive force.
Thus all molecules in the surface film are acted
upon by unbalanced cohesive force in the
downward and therefore they all are pulled inside
the liquid. This minimises the total number of
molecules in surface film. Hence surface film
shrinks. Since it cannot shrink any further,
beyond a limit, it remains under tension. Thus,
the surface film of liquid behaves like a stretched
elastic membrane under tension. This is known
as surface tension, in terms of energy of surface
film.
To increase the area of free surface of liquid,
molecules from inside must be brought to the
surface. To do this work must be done against
the cohesive forces. This work done is stored in
the form of P.E. at the surface film. This P.E
increases with increase in area and decreases
with decreases in area. Liquid has tendency to
have minimum P.E. so the molecules move to
the interior of liquid and minimise its P.E., which
reduces the surface area. Thus free surface of
liquid has tendency to reduce its surface area.
In order to minimise the surface area, the forces
due to surface tension always act tangentially to
the liquid surface.
Q.2. What is surface energy? Obtain relation
between surface tension and surface energy.
OR
Derive relation between surface tension and
surface energy per unit area
Ans. Surface energy : Work done in increasing area
of a surface film is called surface energy
Relation between surface tension and surface
energy :
Consider a rectangular frame of wire ABCD on
which wire CD can slide without friction. Suppose
soap film is formed on the frame. If l is the length
of wire CD and T is surface tension of soap
solution. Then the force acting of the wire due to
surface tension is
F = 2T l due to each side of surface film.
The factor 2 arises as the film has two free
surfaces.
B C C
l
F
F
Soap film dx
A is shown in fig. Forces acting on the liquid
D D
75
Due to this force, film will move towards side AB,
so as to decrease its surface area.
To increase the surface area work is done against
this force.
Work done = Force × displacement
dw = Fdx
= 2Tl × dx
= T(2l × dx)
dw = TdA
where dA = 2ldx = increase in area of two free
surfaces of film.
This work done in stretching the film is stored in
area dA of the film, in the form of potential energy
which is called surface energy.
Surface energy = dw = TdA
dw
Surface energy per unit area is = =T
dA
Thus surface tension is numerically equal to
surface energy per unit area.
Q.3. De fine ang le o f co nta ct. Stat e it s four
characteristics
Ans. Angle of contact: When a liquid is in contact
with a solid, the angle between tangent drawn to
the free surface of the liquid and the surface of
solid at the point of contact measured inside the
liquid is called angle of contact.
Characteristics of angle of contact.
(1) The angle of contact is acute for liquids which
wet the solids.
(2) The angle of contact is obtuse for liquids which
do not wet the solids.
(3) The angle of contact is constant for a given solid
– liquid pair.
(4) The value of angle of contact depends upon nature
of liquid and solid in contact.
(5) It depends upon the medium which exists above
the free surface of liquid.
(6) It changes due to impurity.
(7) It changes with temperature.
Q.4. Explain the formation of concave and convex
surface of liquid on the basis of molecular
forces.
OR
Why angle of contact is acute in the case of
water and glass and obtuse in case of mercury
and glass pair
OR
The shap e of imp ure water meniscus is
co ncave whereas the shap e of m ercu ry
meniscus is convex. Explain.
Ans. Consider a liquid molecule A is in contact with
solid at the free surface. The sphere of influence
molecule are as follows,
76 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

In equilibrium state, the tangent to the liquid

Solid surface, must be perpendicular to the resultant
force. Therefore liquid molecules at the point of
Air contact moves downwards.
Fa A Hence the liquid surface in contact with solid is
P convex upwards and angle of contact is obtuse.

Fc Q.5. Explain the shape of liquid drop on solid

surface in terms of interfacial tensions
Q
Liquid Ans. When a small quantity of mercury or water is
poured on glass, the surface tension forces acts
Fig. Molecular forces along three interfaces namely, solid – air, solid
Net adhesive force exerted by the solid molecules liquid and liquid – air.
act along AP is Fa Let  is the angle of contact of given solid – liquid
Net ahesive force exerted by the liquid molecules pair.
act along AQ is Fc T1 = Force due to surface tension at the liquid –
solid interface,
Shape of meniscus depends on the magnitudes
of these forces. T2 = Force due to surface tension at the air –
solid interface,
Case I :
In a case of liquid (e.g. kerosene in contact with T3 = Force due to surface tension at the liquid –
glass), which wets partially the solid, the resultant air interface.
adhesive force is acting on a molecule greater For equilibrium of the drop the net force acting
than the resultant cohesive force. Therefore on the drop is zero.
resultant force of Fa and Fc lies inside the solid.  T2 = T1 + T3 cos 
In equilibrium state, the tangent to the liquid where  is the angle of contact of given solid –
surface, must be perpendicular to the resultant liquid pair.
force. Therefore liquid molecules at the point of T2  T1
contact moves upwards. [Fig. (a)]  cos  = T3 ... (1)

Case I : In case of water

Air
T2 > T1, and T2  T < T3 ,
P A Then cos  is positive i.e. 0 <  < 900
In this case liquid T3
R Q wets the surface of
Solid  T (Liquid) solid. The meniscus air
is concave. If a drop air
of liquid is put on T2  Water T1
X
the surface of solid. Solid
Fig. (a) The liquid tends to Fig. (a)
Hence the liquid surface in contact with solid is spread.
concave upwards and angle of contact is acute. In this case molecules of liquid are strongly
Case II : attracted to those of solid, this will reduce T1 and
therefore cos  may increase or  may decrease.
In a case of liquid (e.g. mercury in contact with In this case  is acute angle and liquid will spread
glass), which wets partially the solid, the resultant on the surface.
adhesive force acting on a molecule smaller than
the resultant cohesive force. Therefore resultant Case II : In case of mercury
force of Fa and Fc lies inside the liquid. [Fig. (b)] T2 < T1 ,and T1  T2 < T3 ,
Then cos  is negative, angle of contact  is obtuse
1800 > > 900
T T3
In this case liquid
Air air
P A does not wet the
air
 solid. The liquid 
Mercury
meniscus is convex. T2 T1
(Liquid) a small liquid drop Solid
Solid
R Q placed on the Fig. (b)
X surface of sold does
not spread in this case hence forms a drop.
Fig.(b)
Surface Tension 77

In this case molecules of liquids are strongly dW = TdA = dW = T (8rr) … (2)

attracted to themselves and weakly to those of This work done is also equal to force into
solid. Therefore liquid does not wet the solid displacement
hence it forms a drop
 dW = dF  r
Case III :
But dF = Excess pressure × area
When, T1 = T2
= (Pi  Po)  4r2 … (3)
cos  = 0 ,  = 90o the liquid meniscus is horizontal
The increase in radius of bubble is r
and drop takes semi spherical
dW = dF  r
Case IV :
= (Pi  Po) 4r2r ... (4)
When, T2 > T1 + T3 or T2  T1 > T3
By comparing equation (2) and (4), we get
cos > 1
 (Pi  Po) 4r2r = T (8rr)
T2  T1 > T3
2T
T2  T1  Pi  Po =
r
T3 > 1
This is the excess pressure inside a spherical
From (1), cos  > 1 drop.
This is not possible and hence there will be no This is also called Laplace’s law of spherical
equilibrium in such case. The liquid in this case membrane.
spreads completely over the solid surface and drop
In case of soap bubble there are two free surface.
shall not be formed.
Hence total increase in surface area is 2 × 8rr
Q.6. Derive an ex pression of excess pressure dW = 16rr T … (4)
inside a dropof liquid
Work done due to excess pressure is
OR = (Pi  Po)  4r2 = 16rr T
Derive Laplace’s law for a spherical membrane
of bubble due to surface tension 4T
 Pi  P o =
r
Ans. Due to surface tension free liquid drops and
bubbles are spherical. This is the excess pressure inside a soap bubble.
Q.7. Explain pressure difference across a curved
P0 surface

Pi Ans. (1) Plane Surface: The surface tension acts

r tangential to the surface of
r
liquid. If the free surface of
T M T
liquid is plane, the forces due
to surface tension act on the
horizontal plane and cancel
each other effect. So the Fig. (a)
As it is spherical in shape, the inside pressure
will be greater than that of outside. Let outside resultant force on the
pressure is PO and inside pressure is Pi , molecule is zero. Therefore the pressure
difference on two sides of a plane surface is zero.
Therefore excess pressure is Pi  Po
(2) Concave Surface: If the free surface of liquid is
Let the radius of drop increases from r to
concave, the force due to surface tension molecule
r + r, where r is very small so that the inside on the free surface acts as shown in fig b. in this
pressure remains constant. case force of surface tension
Initial surface area A1 = 4r2 can be resolved into Excess pressure
Final surface area A2 = 4r + r)2 horizontal and vertical
= 4 (r2 +2rr +r2) components. The horizontal R
components will balance out T T
 A2 = 4r2 + 8rr + 4r2
each other. But the vertical M
As ris very small, r2 is neglected. (i.e.4rr2  0) components add together so
 A2 = 4r2 + 8rr that there is a resultant force Fig. (b)
Increase in surface area normal to the surface acting
dA = A2  A1 vertically upwards. Therefore the pressure on the
concave side must be greater than pressure on
= 4r2 + 8rr  4r2
the convex side in order to keep the surface in
dA = A2  A1 = 8rr … (1) equilibrium.
Work done to increase the surface area 8rr is
equal to extra surface energy.
78 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(3) Canvex surface : If the free M Q.9. Obtain an expression, for the rise of a liquid
surface of liquid is convex, in a capillarity.
the force due to surface T T
OR
tension on a molecule on the R
Derive an expression of height of liquid
free surface acts vertically column when a capillary is vertically dipped
downwards, and pressure Excess pressure
in a liquid
inside the liquid increases
(cohesive force is greater Fig. (c) Ans. When a capillary, open at both ends, is dipped
than adhesive force). vertically in water, the water rises into it. The
Therefore, the pressure on the concave side is shape of the free surface of the water called
greater than the pressure on the convex side. meniscus is spherical and concave upwards. At
the point of contact near the walls of the tube
Q.8. Explain capillary action. the adhesive force between the glass molecules
OR and water molecules is greater than the cohesive
Explain the rise of liquid in the capillary on force between the water molecules. This surface
the basis of pressure difference tension force acts inwards along the tangent to
the water meniscus at every point of its contact
Ans. with the inner surface of the tube. According to
Newton’s third law of motion, an equal and
opposite reaction exerted by the glass on the
A C water meniscus at all the points. This reaction
on the meniscus acts upwards at an angle 
B D between tangent to the concave meniscus and
tangent to the glass. The surface tension force T
is resolved into two components.
Fig. Action of rise of liquid T cos  T cos 
R=T T=R
Suppose a capillary tube is dipped into a liquid 

like water which wets the capillary. The liquid rises
inside the capillary. The shape of free surface of
water meniscus inside the capillary is concave T sin  r T sin 
A B
upwards. Let us consider four points A, B, C, D as C
shown.  
Walls of T T
(1) The point A is above the concave surface inside capillary
h
the capillary.
(2) The point B is below the concave surface inside
the capillary.
(3) The point C is above the plane surface outside
the capillary. liquid
(4) The point D is below the plane surface outside
the capillary. Fig. Rise of liquid in capillary tube

PA , PB , PC and PD be the pressures at the points
A, B, C and D respectively.
We observe the following observations:
(i) The pressure on the concave side of free surface
of water is greater than that on the convex side.
PA > PB
(ii) PA = PC (Atmospheric pressure)
(iii) PC = PD as pressure is same on both sides of plane
surface.
Then, PA = PD and PD > PB
Thus even though points B and D are at the same
horizontal level inside of the liquid, the pressure
at D is greater than at point B. therefore liquid
cannot remain in equilibrium and it flows into
capillary and rises above the point B, till the
pressure at B becomes the same as that at point
D. This is the reason why there is a rise of liquid
inside the capillary tube.
(i) T cos per unit length along the vertical and (ii) T
sin per unit length along the horizontal.
(ii) Taking the whole meniscus into consideration,
the diametrically opposite pairs of horizontal
components cancel out.
(iii) The total force due to surface tension acting vertically
upwards on the line of contact of length 2r is
= T cos  × 2r ... (1)
(iv) This vertical force pulls the water up into the
tube. The water rises in the capillary till the
upward force on the meniscus is balanced by the
downward force due the weight of the liquid
column in the capillary tube.
(v) If we neglect the weight of the liquid contained
in the meniscus in comparison with the liquid in
the column, the volume of the liquid raised in
the column of height h is
V = r2h.
Surface Tension 79

Therefore the weight of the liquid is w = mg = hg  R = 100 r

= r2hg ... (2) R
r = ... (3)
(vi) In the equilibrium, 100
 Upward force due   Weight of the liquid in    R 
2 
  =   Now, W = T 106  4  2
  4(R ) 
 to surface tension   the column of height h   100 
 
T cos  2r = r hg
2
= T [102 × 4R2  4R2]
rhg
 T = = T [100 R2 R2
2 cos 
Here  = density of liquid = 4R2T (100  1)
g = acceration due to gravity = 4R2T  99
 = angle of contact = 4 × 3.14 × (1 × 103)2 × 0.5 × 99
r = radius of capillary
= 621.72 × 106 J
h = height of water column it the capillary.
Q.11. Calculate the density of paraffin oil, if glass
Q.10. Calculate the work done when a spherical drop
cap illary of diameter 0.25mm dip ped in
of mercury of radius 2 mm falls from some
paraffin oil of surface tension 0.0245 N/m
height and breaks into a million droplets,
rises to a height of 4 cm.
each of the same size. The surface tension of
mercury is 0.5 N/m. (= 28oC and g = 9.8 m/s2)

Solution: Data: Solution: Data:

R = 1 mm = 1  103 m, T = 0.0245 N/m
T = 0.5 N/m, W = ? d = 0.25 mm = 0.25  103 m
P.E. = mgh Single drop r = 0.125  103 m
 =?
g = 9.8 m/s2
h
 = 28oC
h = 4 cm = 4  102 m
W = T dA Millions droplets
rhg
T =
W = T dA 2 cos 
W = T (A2  A1) ... (1) 2T cos θ
A2 = Area of millions droplets   = rhg
= 106  4r2 2  0.0245  cos 28
 =
A1 = Area of single drop 0.125  10  3  4  10  2  9.8
= 4R2 0.049  0.8829
=
W = T(106  4r2  4R2) ... (2) 4.9  10 5
As mass is constant, 4.326  102
=
Volume of single drop = Volume of millions droplets 4.9  105
4 4 = 8.829  102
R3 = 106  r3
3 3 = 882.9 kg/m3
R3 = 106  r3

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory:
(1) Derive the relation between surface tension and surface energy per unit area. (March 2013)
(2) Show that the surface tension of a liquid is numerically equal to the surface energy per unit area. (Oct 2013)
(3) Explain the rise of liquid in the capillary on the basis of pressure difference. (Feb. 2014)
(4) Derive an expression for excess pressure inside a drop of liquid. (Feb. 2015)
(5) Define Surface Tension and Surface Energy. (July 2017)
(6) Derive Laplace’s law for a spherical membrane. (March 2018)
Problems :
(1) Two soap bubbles have radii in the ratio 4:3. What is the ratio of work done to blow these bubbles? (July 2017)
(2) Calculate the work done in increasing the radius of a soap bubble in air from 1 cm to 2 cm. The surface
tension of soap solution is 30 dyne/cm. ( = 3.142) (March 2018)


80 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
7
Syllabus:
Simple Harmonic Progressive Wave, Reflection of Transverse and Longitudinal waves, Change of Phase, Superposition of
Waves, Formation of Beats, Doppler effect in Sound

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. A simple harmonic wave of frequency 20 Hz is 6. When sound wave are reflected from a denser
travelling along the positive X-axis with a velocity medium, there is a phase change of
of 30 m/s. Two particles in the path of the wave, (a) 0 rad (b) /4 rad (c) /2 rad (d)  rad
0.45 m apart, differ in phase by 7. In a reflection of sound waves from a rarer medium,
(a) /3 rad (b) /2 rad (c) 0.6  rad (d)  rad there is a phase change of
2. When a progressive wave is passing, two particles (a) 0 rad (b) /4 rad (c) /2 rad (d)  rad
of a medium vibrate with a phase difference of  8. When a sound wave is reflected from a rigid wall, a
rad. The distance between these particles is compression is reflected as
(a)  (b) /2 (c) /4 (d) /8 (a) a compression without a change of phase
3. The relation between the phase difference and the (b) a compression with a phase reversal
path difference when a progressive wave passes (c) a rarefaction without a change of phase
through a medium is given by
(d) a rarefaction with a phase reversal
2
(a) phase difference = × path difference 9. A transverse wave travelling in a denser medium is
 reflected from a rarer medium, then
2 (a) an incident crest is reflected as a crest.
(b) path difference = × phase difference
 (b) an incident crest is reflected as a trough
2 (c) there is a phase reversal of 2 rad
(c) path difference = × phase difference
T (d) there is a phase reversal of /2 rad
 10. One beat means that the intensity of sound should be
(d) path difference = × phase difference
 (a) once maximum
4. The equation of a simple harmonic progressive wave (b) once minimum
travelling along the negative direction of X-axis is (c) once maximum and once minimum
t x 2 (d) twice maximum and twice minimum
(a) y = A sin 2    (b) y = A sin (vt  x)
T    11. The frequency of sound heard by an observer when
the observer and the source of sound moves towards
 x t x
(c) y = A sin   nt   (d) y = A sin     is other is .......................the true frequency
  T   (a) greater than
5. The angle between the particle velocity and wave
(b) less than
velocity in a transverse wave is
(c) the same as
(a) zero (b) /4 rad (c) /2 rad (d)  rad
(d) greater than or less than

ANSWERS
1 - (c), 2 - (b), 3 - (a), 4 - (d), 5 - (c), 6 - (d), 7 - (a), 8 - (b), 9 - (a), 10 - (d), 11 - (a)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Under which condition does a sudden phase
reversal of waves on reflection takes place?
Ans. On reflection from a denser medium a wave
suffers sudden phase reversal.
Q.2. How do wave velocity and particle velocity
differ each other?
Ans. Wave velocity is constant for a given medium.
But particle velocity changes harmonically with
time and it is maximum at mean position and
zero at extreme position.
(80)
Q.3. Under what condition, the Doppler Effect will
not be observed, if the source of sound moves
towards the listener?
Ans. Doppler Effect will not be observed, if the source
of sound moves towards the listener with a
velocity greater than the velocity of sound. The
same is also true if listener moves with velocity
greater than the velocity of sound.
Q.4. What physical change occurs when a source
of sound moves and listener is stationary?
Wave Motion
Ans. When a source of sound moves and listner is
stationery, wavelength of sound changes.
Q.5. What physical change occurs when a source
of sound is stationary and listener moves?
Ans. When a source of sound is stationary and listner
moves, the number of sound waves received by
the listener changes.
Q.6. State the conditions under which beats are
formed.
Ans. Two sounds waves should have nearly equal
amplitude and slightly different frequency. This
is the condition for formation of beats
Q.7. State two applications of beats.
Ans. Applications of beats :
(i) Beats are used to detect the presence of
dangerous gases in mines
(ii) The phenomenon of beats is used to determine
an unknown frequency.
Short Answer Type Questions - I
Q.1. Define:
(i) Period (ii) Frequency of wave
Ans. (i) Period: The time taken for any particle to
complete one vibration is called period (T) of the
wave.
(ii) Frequency: The number of vibrations per second
by a particle is called frequency (n) of the waves.
or
Number of waves passing per second across any
point of medium.
Q.2. Define:
(i) Wavelength (ii) Velocity of wave
Ans. (i) Wavelength: The distance between two
successive particles of the medium which are in
the same phase or which differ in phase by 2
radians is called wavelength ( of the wave.
(ii) Velocity: The distance travelled by the wave in
one second is called the velocity (v) of wave.
Q.3. Obtain the relation between velocity of wave,
wavelength and frequency
Ans. A wave covers a distance equal to one wavelength
 in one period. Hence, the velocity of wave is
Wavelength
v =
Period

i.e. v =
T gases. Hence reservoir with different
1 concentrations than air will sound slightly
 v = n, as n =
T different frequencies. If no dangerous gases are
i.e. Velocity of wave = frequency × wavelength
This is the relation between the v,  and n
81
Q.8. State two application of Doppler effect.
Ans. Applications of Doppler effect :
(i) It is used in RADAR
(ii) It can be used to determine the speed of a star.
Q.9. Name the experiment which demonstrates the
superposition of two sound waves
Ans. Quincke’s tube experiment demonstrates the
Superposition of two sound waves.
Q.10. What happen to the frequency of tuning fork,
when its prongs are loaded with wax and on
filling its prongs?
Ans. On loading the prongs of a tuning fork with wax,
its frequency decreases. While on filling its
prongs, frequency increases.
(2 marks each)
Q.4. State four properties of progressive wave
Ans. Properties of progressive waves:
(i) Progressive waves travel continuously in a given
direction
(ii) All particles of a medium perform simple harmonic
motion.
(iii) Amplitude, frequency and period are same for all
particles.
(iv) Phase is different for different particle.
(v) It transfer energy from one place to another place
Q.5. State and explain applications of beats.
Ans. (i) The phenomenon of beats is used to determine
an unknown frequency.
The unknown frequency is sounded with a note
of known frequency which can be changed. The
known frequency is so adjusted that beats are
produced. The further adjustment is made till the
beats reduce to zero. i.e. the frequency of the
two notes become equal.
(ii) The phenomenon of beats can be used to produce
low frequency notes used in jazz orchestra or
western music.
(iii) Beats can be used to detect the presence of
dangerous gases in mines.
Air from a reservoir is blown through a pipe. Air
from the mine is blown through another similar
pipe. The speed of sound is different in different
present in air from the mine, the pipe will produce
sound of same frequency and beats will not be
heard. However if the air from the mine is
82 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

polluted with presence of dangerous gases two Q.8. A simple harmonic progressive wave of
pipes will produce sound of slightly different frequency 5 Hz is travelling along the positive
frequencies, giving rise to beats. X-direct ion with a velocity of 4 0 m/ s.
Calculate the phase difference between two
(iv) It is used to tune musical instrument to standard
points separated by a distance of 0.8 m
frequency.
Ans : Data: n = 5 Hz, V = 40 m/s,
Musical instrument can be tuned by noting the
beats produced when two different instruments Path difference, x = 0.8 m, = ?
are sounded together. By adjusting the frequency
V 40
of one of the instruments, the number of beats  V=n  = = =8m
reduced to zero.When this is done both n 5
instruments are emitting the sound of same 2x
frequency. The instruments are then in unison Phase difference,  =

with each other.
2(0.8 )
Q.6. Explain the applications of Doppler effects =
8
Ans. (i) It is used to determine the speed of rotation 2  3.14  0.8
of the sun. =
8
(ii) It can be used to determine the speed of star. = 0.628 rad
If a star is moving towards the earth, the lines in
Q.9. The frequency of tuning fork is 256 Hz and
the spectrum of light get displaced towards the
velocity of sound in air is 350 m/s. Find the
violet end of the spectrum and if the star is
distance covered by the wave when the fork
moving away from the earth, the lines in the
completes 16 vibrations.
spectrum of light get displaced towards the red
end of the spectrum. This displacement of spectral Ans: Data : n = 256 Hz,  = 350 m/s,
lines called Doppler shift is measured to No. of vibrations = 16
determine the speed of the star. We know,  = n 
(iii) The working of RADAR is based on the Doppler
 350
Effect.   = = = 1.3671 m
n 256
The radar continuously emits high frequency
 Distance convered in 16 vibrations
electromagnetic waves called radio waves. When
these waves are incident on an object such as = 16 = 16  1.3671 = 21.875 m
an aeroplane, they get reflected. Due to the Q.10. The driver of a stationary car is blowing its
superposition of the incident and reflected waves, horn and emitting a note of frequency 700 Hz.
beats are produced. Knowing the frequency of Another car, directly behind the stationary car
beats, the speed of the object can be determined. is approaching it at a speed of 36 km/hr. The
(iv) The traffic police use speed guns which are fixed driver of the moving car hears the horn and
for a certain speed. If the vehicle passes at a brings air car to a shop just behind the
higher speed, then beats are produced and an stationary car. What is the difference in the
alarm is initiated. The Doppler Effect is used for frequencies of the initial and final notes heard
speed detection on highways. by him? [Speed of sound in air = 350 m/s]
Q.7. Write down the equation of a progressive wave Ans: Data: n = 700 Hz,  = 350 m/s,
having a frequency of 56 Hz, wavelength 6 m
and an amplitude 1 cm. 36  1000
L = 36 km/hr = = 10 m/s
60  60
Ans : Data: Frequency, n = 56 Hz,  = 6 cm,
Since, listner is moving towards the source and
Amplitude, a = 1 cm = 0.01 m
source is at rest
We know the equation of progressive wave,
   L 
 x  n a = n   
y = a sin 2  nt    
 
 350  10 
Substituting the value in above equation, we get =   = 720 Hz
 350 
 x
 Difference between the frequencies
y = 0.01 sin 2  56t   m
 6
= 720  700
This is the required equation of progressive wave.
= 20 Hz
Wave Motion 83

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Define simple harmonic progressive wave. Different forms of simple harmonic progressive
Derive an expression of S.H. progressive wave. wave:
State its different forms.
1
Ans. Simple harmonic Progressive waves: If n is the frequency of the wave, n =
T
Progressive waves are waves which continuously Using in equation (4), we get,
travel in a given direction. When these waves
travel through a medium, particles of the medium  x
y = a sin 2  nt   ... (5)
vibrate about their mean positions. If these  
vibrations are S.H. vibrations, then the waves
 x 
are called simple harmonic progressive waves.  y = a sin 2n  t  
 n 
Derivation: But v = n, velocity of wave.
Suppose that the particle at the origin is at the
 x
mean position. Then at any instant of time t, the  y = a sin 2n  t  v  … (6)
displacement of the particle at the origin O is,  
y = a sin t ... (1) As  = 2n
where a is the amplitude and  is the angular  x
 y = a sin   t   ... (7)
velocity of S.H.M.  v
Y 2
 y = a sin (vt  x) ... (8)

All above equations represent simple harmonic
progressive wave, travelling in the positive
A X-direction.
X
O B
x If the wave is travelling in the negative
X-direction, then in the above equations –ve sign
 is replaced by + sign.
t x
Consider a particle A at a distance x from the e.g. y = a sin 2  T   
origin O. This particle lags behind in phase as  
compared with particle at O. Therefore the Q.2. Explain the reflection of transverse wave.
displacement of the particle A at any instant t is
Ans. (a) Reflection of transverse wave from denser
y = a sin ( t  ) ... (2) medium :
where,  is the phase difference between the Consider a string whose one end is fixed to a
particles at O and A. rigid wall (denser medium) while other end is free.
Since, a path difference of ‘’ corresponds to a phase A pulse consisting only one crest is propagated
difference of 2 radians, a path difference of ‘x’ along the string by moving its free end up and
down. The crest reaches the fixed end and exerts
2x a force in the upward direction.
will correspond to a phase difference of

2x Crest
Thus,  =
 Incident wave Rigid
 Equation (2) becomes, wall
2 
y = a sin  t  x ... (3)
  
Reflected wave
2
But  = , where T is the period of the wave
T
Trough
 2 2 
 y = a sin  T t   x 
  Fig. Reflection of Transverse wave

t x Due to the equal and opposite reaction, the

 y = a sin 2  T    ... (4)
 
This equation gives the displacement of any
particle of the medium at any instant. Hence it
is called the equation of S.H. progressive wave.
velocity of the particle of the string is reversed. A
trough travels in the opposite direction. (Fig.)
Similarly if instead of a crest, a trough is incident
on the wall it reflects as a crest. Thus there is a
phase change of 1800 or  radian on reflection of
transverse wave from denser medium.
84 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(b) Reflection of Transverse wave from rarer rarefaction due to one wave falls on the
medium : rarefaction due to other wave, then the resultant
If a transverse wave is travelling in a denser amplitude at that point become maximum. As the
medium is incident on the boundary of a rarer intensity of wave is directly proportional to the
medium, there is practically negligible resistance. square of amplitude, therefore the intensity of
Thus on reflection, a crest is reflected as crest sound becomes maximum. This is called
and a trough is reflected as trough. As there is no constructive interference. [Fig. (a)]
change in the direction of particle velocity, (b) Destructive interference:
therefore there is no change of phase on reflection. When two sound waves travelling through a
Q.3. Explain reflection of longitudinal wave from medium arrive at a point in phase such that,
denser medium. compression due to one wave falls on the
rarefaction due other or vice versa, then the
Ans. (a) Reflection of longitudinal wave from denser
resultant amplitude at that point become
medium:
minimum. As the intensity of wave is directly
Consider a longitudinal wave travelling towards proportional to the square of amplitude, therefore
a rigid wall. Let a compression is incident on the the intensity of sound becomes minimum. This is
wall (denser medium). The wall being rigid, stands called destructive interference. [Fig. (b)]
in equilibrium. When pressure increases due to y y
compression, the compression is pushed back by
the wall as a compression in the opposite A1 A1
direction. Thus a compression is reflected as a 0 0
A1 t A1 t
compression and similarly rarefaction is reflected
back as a rarefaction. As the velocity of a particle A2 A2
is reversed, therefore there is change of phase 0 0
t t
by 1800 or  radians on reflection. A2 A2
C A A
Denser A = A1 + A2
Longitudinal medium
incident wave R 0 0
T 2T t T 2T t
A A
(a) (b)

Longitudinal R C Fig. Superposition of waves: (a) Constructive

reflected wave interference (b) Destructive interference
Fig. Reflection of longitudinal wave
Q.5. Describe Quincke’s experiment.
(b) Reflection of longitudinal wave from rarer
Ans. The superposition of two sound waves can be
medium:
demonstrated by Quincke’s tube experiment:
When a longitudinal wave travelling in a denser
Construction: It consists of a U-tube ABC, about
medium is incident on the boundary of rarer
2 cm in diameter which has two side openings at
medium, there is practically negligible resistance.
D and E. A second U-tube, MNQ closely fits into
Thus a compression is reflected as rarefaction
ABC and can be pushed into or pulled out of ABC.
and a rarefaction is reflected as a compression.
Thus the effective length of the right branch DNE
There is no change in the direction of particle
can be altered. The frequency generator is held
velocity, therefore there is no change of phase
at the opening D. The sound waves travel along
on reflection.
the two branches DBE and DNE and meet at E.
Q.4. State and explain principle of superposition The ear of a listener is situated at E.
of waves. Working: Initially, the tube MNQ, is so adjusted
Ans. Statement: When two or more waves travelling that the paths DBE and DNE are of equal lengths.
through a medium arrive at a point of the medium Therefore the intensity of sound heard by the
simultaneously, each wave produces its own listener at E is maximum. The moving tube MNQ
displacement at that point independently of the is then slowly pulled out of ABC. It is found that
others. Hence the resultant displacement at that the intensity of sound heard by the listener at E
point is equal to the vector sum of the becomes zero when the path difference between
displacements due to all the waves. the waves travelling along the two branches
Explanation : becomes /2. On further pulling out of the tube
MNQ, the sound intensity again become maximum
(a) Constructive interference: When two sound when the path difference between the waves
waves travelling through a medium arrive at a travelling along the two branches becomes .
point in phase such that, compression due to
one wave falls on the compression due other, or
Wave Motion 85

Frequency We get,
generator
  n  n2     n1  n 2  
y = 2a sin 2  1  t  cos 2   t 
D   2     2  
A
n1  n 2  n1  n 2 
M Let n = and 2a cos 2   t = R
2  2 
 y = sin (2nt)  R
B
y = R sin [2nt] ... (3)
This shows that the resultant motion is S.H.M.
Q
where,
E C
 n  n2 
R = 2a cos 2  1  t is the resultant amplitude.
Ear  2 
Intensity of wave is directly proportional to the
Fig. Quincke’s Tube Experiment
square of the amplitude. Therefore the resultant
In general, whenever the path difference becomes intensity will be maximum when the amplitude
0 , 2, 3, 4, etc or n. is maximum. i.e.
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 ,… , etc, the intensity of For waxing, R = ± 2a
sound at E becomes maximum   n1  n 2  
 i.e. when cos 2   t  = ±1
and whenever the path difference becomes ,   2  
2
3 5 7  1  n  n2 
, , , or  n  2  , i.e. when 2  1  t = 0, , 2 34, ...
2 2 2    2 
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 ….., the Intensity of sound  n  n2 
at E becomes minimum (zero) i.e. when 2  1  t = p,
 2 
Q.6. What are beats? Derive an expression of beat where p = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
frequency.
p
OR i.e. t = n  n , where p = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
1 2
What are beats? Prove that beat frequency is
equal to the difference between the frequencies 1 2 3
of two sound waves giving rise to beats. i.e. when t = 0, , , …….
n1  n 2 n1  n 2 n1  n 2
Ans. Beats : The alternate waxing and waning of sound Thus the time interval between two successive
after definite intervals of time, due to
1
superposition of two sound waves of equal maxima of sound is .
amplitude but slightly different frequencies, is n1  n 2
called production of beats. 1
Therefore the period of beat T =
The time interval between two successive waxing n1  n 2
or two waning is called period of beats. Hence, the frequency of beat is
The reciprocal of the period of beats is called N = n1  n2 ... (4)
frequency of beats. Now, the resultant intensity will be minimum
Expression of beat frequency: when the amplitude is minimum.
Consider two sound waves of equal amplitude and For wanning, R = 0
different frequencies n1 and n2 arrive at a point of
  n1  n 2  
the medium. The displacement due to each wave i.e. when cos 2   t  = 0
at an instant t is represented by   2  
y1 = a sin 2n1t ... (1)  n  n2   3 5  7 
y2 = a sin 2n2t ... (2) i.e. when 2  1  t = , , , , ...
 2  2 2 2 2
By the principle of superposition of two waves,
 n  n2  
the resultant displacement at that point is, i.e. when 2  1
2  t = (2p +1) 2
y = y1 + y2  
where, p = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
= a sin 2n1t + a sin 2n2t
2p  1
Using, i.e. t = 2 (n  n ) where, p = 0, 1, 2, 3, ...
1 2
C  D  C  D 
sin C + sin D = 2 sin   cos   1 3 5
 2   2  i.e. t = 2 (n  n ) , 2 (n  n ) , 2 (n  n ) , ...
1 2 1 2 1 2
86 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Thus, the time interval between two successive Applications of Doppler effect:
minima of sound is (i) It is used to determine the speed of rotation of
3 1 1 the sun.
 
2 (n1  n 2 ) 2 (n1  n 2 ) n1  n 2 (ii) It can be used to determine the speed of star.
Thus the time interval between two successive (iii) The working of RADAR is based on the Doppler
1 Effect.
minima or maxima is equal i.e. (n  n )
1 2 (iv) The Doppler Effect is used for speed detection on
i.e. The period, highways.

1 83
T = Q.8. Wavelengths of two notes in air are m
(n1  n 2 ) 170
83
1 and m. Each of these produce 4 beats
 Beat frequency = = n1  n2 ... (5) 172
T per second with the third note of fix ed
Thus, beat frequency is equal to the difference frequency. Calculate the velocity of sound in
between the frequencies of two sound waves. air.
Q.7. State and explain Doppler Effect. Solution: Data:
83 83
OR 1 = m, 2 = m, v = ?
170 172
Explain what is Doppler Effect in sound and
state it’s any four applications. As 1 > 2 , n2 > n1
Ans. Doppler effect: Whenever there is a relative If n is the frequency of third note then
motion between a source of sound and an n2 > n > n1
observer, there is apparent change in frequency
n2  n = 4
of sound emitted by a source and heard by the
observer. This effect is called Doppler Effect. n  n1 = 4
The apparent frequency is given by n 2  n1 = 8
 n2  n1 + 8
 v  v0 
na   n
  n11 = n22
 v  vs   n11 = n22
where, v = velocity of sound
83 83
v0 = the velocity of the observer  n1 = (n1 + 8) 
170 172
vs = the velocity of source.
n1 1
n = the frequency of source. = (n1 + 8) 
170 172
Case I: If the observer is at rest (i.e. v0 = 0) and
172n1 = 170n1 + 1360
the source is moving towards the observer then
the apparent frequency increases. 2n1 = 1360
n1 = 1360/2
 v 
na   n
  n1 = 680 Hz
 v  vs 
 v = n11
Case II: If the observer is at rest and the source
is moving away from the observer then the 83
= 680  = 332 m/s
apparent frequency decreases. 170

 v  Q.9. A simple harmonic progressive wave is given

na   n
 by y = 0.1 sin 4 (50t  0.1x) in S.I system.
 v  vs  Find amplitude, wavelength and frequency
Case III: If the source is at rest and the observer velocity of the wave.
is moving (i.e. vs = 0) towards the source then Solution:
the apparent frequency increases.
y = 0.1 sin 4  (50t  0.1x)
 v  v0 
na   n This equation can be written as
 v  y = 0.1 sin 2 (100t  0.2x) ... (1)
Case IV: If the source is at rest and the observer
is moving away from the source then the apparent t x
y = a sin 2  T    ... (2)
frequency decreases.  
 v  v0  Comparing the above equations, we get
na   n
 v 
Wave Motion 87

Amplitude, a = 0.1 m n5 = n1 + Y  4
1 90 = n1 + Y  4
 = 100 Hz
T 90 = 11Y + 4Y
 Frequency, n = 100 Hz 90 = 15Y
1 Y =6
 = 0.2 m
  n1 = 11Y
 Wavelength,  = 5 m  n1 = 11  6
Velocity = v = n n1 = 66 Hz
v = 1005  n12 = 2n1
= 500 m/s  n12 = 2  66 = 132 Hz
Q.10. A set of 32 tuning forks are arranged in Q.12. The equation of simple harmonic progressive
descending order of frequencies. If any two
consecu tives tu ning for ks are sound ed  x
wave is given by y = 0.05 sin   20t   cm.
together 8 beats per second are heard. The  6
Find the displacement of the particle at a
frequency of the first tuning fork is octave
distance of 5 m from the origin and at the
that of the frequency of the last. Find the
instant speed 0.1 second (all quantities are
frequency of the first, last and 21 st tuning
in S.I.units)
forks.
Solution: Data:
Solution
Frequency of first tuning fork = n1  x
y = 0.05 sin   20t  
Frequency of last tuning fork = n32  6
t = 0.1s, x = 5 m, y = ?
n1 = 2n32 ... (1)
y = 0.05 sin   20t  
n32 = n1  8  31 ... (2) x

n1 = 2n32  6
 n1 = 2n1  8  31  5
y = 0.05 sin   20  0.1  
n1 = 2n1  248  6

n1 = 248Hz  5
y = 0.05 sin   20  
 6
From (1),
 7 
n1 /2 = n32 y = 0.05 sin  
 6 
248/2 = n32
 
n32 = 124 Hz y = 0.05 sin    
 6
Frequency of 21st tuning fork is
 1
n21 = n1  8  20 y =  0.05 sin   =  0.05 sin 
6
  2
n21 = 248  160
 y =  0.025 m
n21 = 188 Hz
Q.13. A transverse wave of amplitude 0.01 m and
Q.11. A set of 12 tuning forks are arranged in fre quency 5 00 Hz is travelling alon g a
increasing order of frequencies. Each tuning stretched string with a speed of 200m/s. Find
for k pr oduces Y beats p er second wi th the displacement of a particle at a distance
previous one. Last tuning fork is an octave 0.7m from the origin after 0.01s. Also find the
that of th e first. Fifth t uning fo rk has phase difference between the point where wave
frequency 90 Hz. Find the Y and also find the reaches from the origin.
frequency of the last fork.
Solution: Data:
Solution:
n = 500 Hz,  = 200m/s,
Frequency of first tuning fork = n1
t = 0.01s, x = 0.7m, a = 0.01 m
Frequency of last tuning fork = n2

n12 = 2n1  = n  =
n
Frequency of the last tuning fork is
200
n12 = n1 + Y 11   = = 0.4 m
500
 2n1 = n1 + 11Y
t x
 n1 = 11Y y = a sin 2   
T  
Frequency of fifth tuning fork is
88 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

 x  340 
y = a sin 2  nt   n =   × 640
   340  20 

y = 0.01 sin 2  500  0.01 

0.7   340 
 =   × 640
 0 .4   320 

y = 0.01 sin 2  5  
7  85 
=   × 640
 4  80 
13
y = 0.01 sin  17 
2 =  16   640
 
y = 0.01 sin  6    = 680 Hz
 2 Apparent frequency of sound when train is moving
y = 0.01 m away from the stationary observer
  v 
 Phase difference = n2 =  n
2 
 v  vs 
Q.14. A train blows a whistle of frequency 640 Hz
in air . Find t he difference i n ap pare nt  340 
=  340  20  × 640
frequencies of the whistle for a stationary  
stationary observer when train moves towards
and away from the observer with speed of  340 
=  360  × 640
72 km/hr. (Speed of sound in air is 340m/s)  
Solution: Data:  85 
v = 340 m/s, n = 640 Hz =  90  × 640
 
72  1000  17 
vs = 72km/hr = = 20 m/s
60  60 =  18  × 640
 
Apparent frequency of sound when train is moving
= 604.4 Hz
towards the stationary observer

 v 
n =  n

 v  vs 

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Problems :
(1) A set of 48 tuning forks is arranged in a series of descending frequencies such that each fork gives 4 beats per
second with preceding one. The frequency of first fork is 1.5 times the frequency of the last fork, find the
frequency of the first and 42nd tuning fork. (Feb. 2016)
(2) The speed limit for a vehicle on road is 120 km/hr. A policeman detects a drop of 10% in the pitch of horn of
a car as it passes him. Is the policeman justified in punishing the car driver for crossing the speed limit?
(Given : Velocity of sound = 340 m/s) (July 2016)

83 83
170 172

81 81
173 170


Stationary Waves 89
CHAPTER
8
Syllabus
Study of vibrations in a finite medium, Formation of stationary wave on string, Study of vibration of Air coloumn, Free and
forced vibrations, Resonance

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Which of the following statements about stationary 6. A stretched string of length l vibrates in it’s third
waves is correct? overtone. The wavelength of stationary wave formed
(a) They transfer energy through the medium is
(b) The phase of the vibrating particles of the (a) l/2 (b) l/4 (c) l (d) 2l
medium changes from particle to particle 7. The fundamental frequency of vibrations of a
(c) They travel continuously away from the source stretched wire is inversely proportional to
(d) The amplitude of vibrations of the particles of (a) the radius of the wire
the medium changes from particle to particle. (b) the tension in the wire
2. When stationary waves are produced in a medium, (c) the mass of the wire
the particles of the medium (d) the ratio of the tension in the wire to the linear
(a) are stationary density of wire
(b) perform SHM with different frequencies 8. A sonometer wire of length l , radius r and density 
(c) perform SHM with different amplitudes is subjected to a tension T. It’s fundamental
(d) perform SHM with the same amplitude frequency is given by
3. At a given instant two vibrating particles in the same 1 T 1 T
loop of a stationary wave have (a) (b)
2l r l r
(a) the same phase
(b) opposite phase 1 T 1 rT
(c) (d)
(c) slightly different phases 2lr  4l 
(d) opposite velocities 9. The frequency of the first overtone of an organ pipe
4. Two vibrating particles in the adjacent loops of a closed at one end is the same as that of an organ
stationary wave have ________ at a given instant pipe open at both ends. If the length of the open
(a) the same phase organ pipe is L, that of the closed organ pipe is
(b) opposite phases (a) 2L (b) L (c) 3L/4 (d) L/2
(c) slightly different phases 10. In an open organ pipe, the first overtone produced
(d) the same velocity is of such frequency that the length of the pipe is
5. The speed of a transverse wavev along a stretched equal to
string is given by v = ...... (a) /4 (b) /3 (c) /2 (d) 

T m P
(a) (b) (c) (d) Tm
m T E

ANSWERS
1 - (d), 2 - (c), 3 - (a), 4 - (b), 5 - (a), 6 - (a), 7 - (a), 8 - (c), 9 - (c), 10 - (d)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. The frequency of the first overtone of a closed Frequency of first overtone for a pipe open at both
pipe is the same as that the first overtone of ends
an open pipe. What is the ratio between their
  
lengths? n2 = 2  4L  ... (2)
 2
Ans. Frequency of first overtone for a pipe closed at
one end Since, n1 = n2 ... (Given)

 v  3 2
 =
n1 = 3  4L  ... (1) 4L1 2L 2
 1
(89)
90 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

3 1 1 T
i.e. 4L =  3L2 = 4L1 or N = 2n =
1 L2 l m
L1 3
 Q.8. State the formula of frequency of vibration of
L2 = 4 i.e. L1: L2 = 3 : 4
string. What is its relation with the frequency
Q.2. If the radius of a stretched wire is reduced to of tuning fork in perpendicular position?
half, how is the wave speed affected? 1 T
1 Ans. n =
2l m
Ans. Since, n  But  n
r In the perpendicular position,
1 Frequency of vibration of string is equal to the
 
r frequency of tuning fork
r1 n = N
1 r2 1 r
 = = 2 = ... (  r2 = 1 )
2 r1 r1 2 2 1 T
or N = n =
 2 = 21 2l m
Therefore, the wave speed becomes twice the Q.9. Give two applications of resonance.
initial. Ans. Applications of resonance:
Q.3. Why is a stationary wave so named? (1) By using principle of resonance, unknown
frequency of vibrating tuning fork can be
Ans. A stationary wave is so called because there is
determined.
no propagation of energy.
(2) Radio receiver can be tuned to a desired frequency
Q.4. What is the distance between a node and an by using principle of resonance.
adjacent antinode?
Q.10. Give any two disadvantages of resonance.
Ans. It is one quarter of the wavelength (i.e. /4)
Ans. Disadvantages of resonance:

4 (1) When speed of an aircraft increases different parts
are forced to vibrate. Resonance is undesirable.
N (2) Soldiers are ordered to break their regular stepping
N A N
N in marching, while crossing a suspension bridge.
 Because the frequency of their steps may become
equal to the natural frequency of the bridge. Thus
at resonance, difference in frequencies becomes
Q.5. What is fundamental note and overtone? zero and amplitude of vibration of bridge becomes
Ans. (i) The fundamental note is the lowest frequency maximum. Hence bridge may collapse.
that can be produced by the source of sound.
Q.11. What is the main difference between forced
(ii) The higher frequency that can be produced by the vibration and resonance?
source are called overtones.
Ans. In the case of forced vibration, the frequency of
Q.6. Why do two organ pipes of same length, open external periodic force is different from the natural
at both ends, produce sounds of different frequency of the oscillation, whereas in resonance
frequencies, if their radii are different? two frequencies are equal.
v v Q.12. Why is sonometer box is hollow and provided
Ans. n = 2(l  2e )  2(l  1.2r ) ... (e = 0.6r )
with holes?
Due to different radii, the frequencies are Ans. When the stem of a tuning fork gently pressed
different. against the top of sonometer box, the air enclosed
in box also vibrates and increases the intensity
Q.7. State the formula of frequency of vibration of
of sound.
string. What is its relation with the frequency
of tuning fork in parallel position? Q.13. Differentiate between closed pipe and open
Ans. Frequency of vibration of string is given by pipe at both ends of same length.
Ans. (i) A pipe open at both ends, the fundamental
1 T
n = frequency is twice as that produced by a closed
2l m pipe of same length.
In the parallel position, (ii) An open pipe produces all the harmonics, while
Frequency of vibration of string (n) is half the in a closed pipe, even harmonics are absent.
frequency of tuning fork (N)
N
i.e. n =
2
Stationary Waves 91

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Distinguish between stationary waves and Ans. Modes of vibration of stretched string:
progressive waves

Ans:
N Second harmonic
Stationary wave Progressive wave N N or
A A first overtone
(i) Wave remains localised (i) Wave travels l = 1
continuously in a
given direction through N N Third harmonic
N N or
a medium A A A second overtone
(ii) It does not transfer (ii) It transfer energy from l = 3 2/2
energy through a one place to another
medium though a medium Q.4. Draw neat labelled diagram for the modes of
(iii) Nodes and antinodes (iii) In case of transverse vibrations of air column in a pipe open at one
are formed in a medium progressive wave, end.
crests and troughs are Ans. Different modes of vibration of air column in
(iv) Amplitude is different formed. a pipe closed at one end:
for different particles. (iv) Amplitude is same for A A A
(v) All particles in one all particles
loop have same phase (v) Phase is different for
different particles

/4 A
Q.2. Distinguish between stationary wave and l 31/4 52/4
beats.
A
Ans:
Stationary wave Beats A
(i) Two identical waves (i) Two sound waves of N
both either sound equal amplitude but First harmonic Third harmonic Fifth harmonic
waves or transverse slightly different or or
waves travelling frequency travelling first overtone second overtone
through a medium along the same path Q.5. Draw neat labelled diagram for the modes of
along the same path in through a medium vibrations of air column in a pipe open at both
opposite directions forms beats ends.
interfere each other, Ans. Different modes of vibration of air column in a pipe
produce stationary wave open at both ends:
(ii) Nodes and antinodes (ii) Waxing and waning A A A
are formed. are formed.
(iii) It does not transfer (iii) It trmansfer energy.
energy. A

(iv) Interfering waves (iv) Interfering waves A N

L N /2 1 32/2
must have the same must have the
frequency different frequency A
N
(v) The resultant wave (v) The resultant wave N
does not travel in any travels in forward
direction. direction. A A A
First harmonic Second harmonic Third harmonic
Q.3. Draw neat labelled diagrams for modes of or or
vibration of a stretched string in second first overtone second overtone
harmonic and third harmonic.
92 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.6. Distinguish between harmonics and overtone. It is calculated by the formula, e = 0.3 d
Ans. where, d is the inner diameter of the tube.
Harmonics Overtones (1) For a pipe or tube closed at one end, end correction
is applied at one end
(i) The word harmonic is (i) The word overtone is
used to indicate the End correction e = 0.3d = 0.6r
used to indicate only
fundamental frequency those multiples of the where r is the radius of tube and d = inner
and all its integral fundamental frequency. diameter of the tube.
multiples. (2) For a pipe or tube open at both ends, end
(ii) Harmonics may be (ii) Overtones are actually correction is applied at both end
present in given sound present in the given End correction e = 0.3d + 0.3d
or not. sound = 0.6d = 1.2 r
(iii) The fundamental (iii) The first higher where r is the radius of tube and d = inner
frequency is called first frequency greater than diameter of the tube.
harmonic. the fundamental
frequency is called Q.9. How to determine the velocity of sound by
first overtone. resonance tube? State the formula of velocity
(iv) In a vibration of air (iv) In a vibration of air of sound with end correction. What is the
column closed at one column closed at one cause of end correction?
end third harmonic is 3n. end third harmonic is Ans. In this case there is a tube whose one end is
Only odd harmonics are called first overtone. dipped vertically in water in a jar and other end
present. is outside the water. Therefore air column is
formed inside the tube above the surface of water.
Q.7. Distinguish between free vibration and forced This acts as air column closed at one end and
vibrations. open at other end.
Ans: Length of air column is L = length of air column
Free Vibrations Forced Vibrations + end correction
(i) Free vibrations are (i) Forced vibrations are =l+e
produced when a body produced by an external i.e. L = l + 0.3d
is disturbed from its periodic force.
Fundamental frequency of air column closed at
equilibrium position
one end is
and released
v
(ii) Frequency of free (ii) Frequency of forced n =
4L
vibrations depends on vibrations is equal to
the body. the frequency of applied v = 4nL = 4n (l + e)
periodic. = 4n (l + 0.3d)
(iii) Amplitude of free (iii) Amplitude of forced Hence velocity of sound can be determined at
vibrations is large vibrations depends on room temperature.
the difference between Cause of end correction:
the natural frequency of
It arises because air particle in the plane of the
body and frequency of
open end of tube, are not free to vibrate in all
periodic force.
directions. Hence reflection takes place at the
(iv) The energy of a body (iv) The energy of the body plane, at small distance outside the tube.
remains constant in is maintained constant
the absence of air by the external periodic Q.10. A cylindrical glass tube is 35 cm long. If both
resistance. force. ends of the tube are open. What is fundamental
frequency of vibration of air column? Neglect
Q.8. What is end correction? Is the end correction end correction.
same for a pipe open at both ends and closed (Velocity of sound in air is 350 m/s)
at one end? Solution: Data:
Ans. End correction: l0 = 35 cm = 0.35 m, v = 350 m
In modes of vibration of air column (in pipe open Fundamental frequency of pipe open at both ends
at both ends or closed at one end), there is
antinode at open end and node at the closed end v
n0 = 2l
of the pipe or tube. The antinode is not formed 0
exactly at the open end, but it is formed at a 350
little distance above the open end of the pipe. n0 = = 500 Hz
2  0.35
This distance between open end and antinode is
called end correction.
Stationary Waves 93

Q.11. A pipe which is open at both ends is 47 cm 24.5

long and has an inner diameter 5 cm. If the m =
4  0.36  0.36  78400
speed of sound in air is 348 m/s, calculate
the fundamental frequency of air column in 24.5
=
the pipe. 40642.56
Solution: Data: = 6.027  104 kg/m
l = 47 cm = 0.47 m, d = 5 cm Q.13. The fundamental frequency of an air column
e = 0.6 d = 0.6 × 5 = 3.0 cm, v = 348 m/s in a pipe closed at one end is in unision with
third overtone of an open pipe. Calculate the
Fundamental frequency of pipe open at both ends ratio of their lengths of air column.
v v Solution: Data:
n0 = 2L =
0 2l  e 
l0
348 nc = 4n0 , l = ?
c
n0 = 2 (0.47  0.03)
Neglecting end correction,
348 v
n0 = 2 (0.50) = 348 Hz n0 = 2(l ) ... (1)
0

Q.12. A 36 cm long sonometer wire vibrates with v

nc = 4(l ) ... (2)
frequency of 280 Hz in fundamental mode c
when it is under tension of 24.5 N. Calculate From (1) and (2)
linear density of the material of the wire.
nc = 4n0
Solution: Data:
v v
T = 24.5 N, n = 280 Hz, =4×
4(lc ) 2(l 0 )
l = 36 cm = 0.36 m, m = ?
1 2
1 T =
n = 4l c l0
2l m  8lc = lo
1 T
n2 =  lc 1
4l 2 m  l =
o 8
1 24.5
(280)2 = 4m  (0.36)2  lc : lo = 1 : 8

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. State any six characteristics of stationary (7) All particles in one loops are vibrating in the same
waves phase.
Ans. Characteristics of stationary waves: (8) The particles in adjacent loops are vibrating in
(1) Two identical waves both either longitudinal or opposite phase.
transverse wave travelling through a medium
(9) Stationary waves are doubly periodic.
along same path in opposite directions, interfere
with each other, produce resultant wave in the (10) Stationary wave is standing wave, therefore the
form of loops is called stationary wave. resultant velocity of the wave is zero. The wave
remains localised.
(2) When stationary wave is set up in a medium
nodes and antinodes are formed. (11) It does no transfer energy through a medium.
(3) The distance between two successive nodes or Q.2. Show that the fundamental frequency of
 vibrations of the air column in a tube open at
antinodes is .
2 both ends is equal to double the fundamental
(4) The distance between node and adjacent antinode frequency in a tube of the same length and
 closed at one end.
is .
4 Ans. (a) Pipe open at both ends: In fundamental mode
(5) In stationary wave, particles of medium except of vibration of air column open at both ends, there
those at the nodes perform S.H.M. of the same are two antinodes and one node formed as shown
period as that of the component waves but of the in Fig. (a)
different amplitude
(6) Amplitude is different for different particle. It is
minimum for nodes and maximum for antinodes
94 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

A Q.3. A tube open at both the ends has fundamental

frequency n. If one end of the tube is dipped
in water to half of its length, what would be
its frequency?
Ans. Consider a tube of length L is open at both the
N L =  /2 ends. When air column is vibrated, its fundamental
frequency is given by
A

A
Fig. (a) Fundamental mode of vibration of air coloumn
open at both ends
 N L =  /2
Length of air column is L =
2
Wavelength of wave is  = 2L
v
Frequency of vibration is n0 =
 A
v
i.e. n0 = … (1) Fig. (a) Fundamental mode of vibration of air coloumn
2L open at both ends
This is the fundamental frequency of air column
open at both ends. 
Length of air column L =
(b) Pipe closed at one end: 2
Wavelength of wave is  = 2L
A
v
Frequency of vibration is n0 =

v
i.e. n0 = … (1)
2L
L =  /4
This is the fundamental frequency of air column
open at both ends.
When one end of the tube is dipped in water to half
of its length, it becomes an air column closed at
one end (water surface) and open at the other end.
N Fundamental mode of vibration of an air column
Fig. (b) Fundamental mode of vibration of an air of length L/2 closed at one end is given by
column closed at one end
A
In this case, there is one node at the closed end
and one antinode at the open end.
Length of air column,
 L/2 =  /4
L =
4
Wavelength of wave is  = 4L
v
Frequency of vibration is nc =

v N
i.e. nc = … (2)
4L Fig. (b) Fundamental mode of vibration of an air
This is the fundamental frequency of air column column closed at one end
closed at one end.
From equation (1) Length of air column in this case,
L 
 v  =
no = 2  4L  2 4
 
Wavelength of wave is  = 2L
no = 2nc ... [From (1) and (2)]
Frequency of vibration is
It shows that the fundamental frequency of
v v
vibrations of the air column in a tube open at nc = = … (2)
both ends is equal to double the fundamental  2L
frequency in a tube of the same length and closed This is the fundamental frequency of air column
at one end. when one end of the tube is dipped in water.
Stationary Waves 95

From (1) and (2) This is the fundamental frequency of air column
no = nc when one end of the tube is dipped in water.
 Frequency remains the same From (1) and (2)
n0 = nc
Q.4. Prove that a pipe open at both ends of length
2L has same fundamental frequency as another Hence proved.
pipe of closed at one end of length L Q.5. Explain the terms:
Ans. Consider a pipe of length 2L is open at both the (i) Free vibration
ends, when air column is vibrated, its
(ii) Forced vibrations
fundamental frequency is given by
A
(iii)Resonance
Ans. (i) Free vibrations:
When a body, is displaced from its stable
equilibrium position and released, it makes
oscillation which are called free vibrations and
N 2L =  /2 frequency of free vibrations is called its natural
frequency. The natural frequency of vibration
depends on the dimensions, mass, elastic
properties and mode of vibration of the vibrating
body.
A
Fig. (a) Fundamental mode of vibration of an air If there is no resistance force acting on the
column open at both ends vibrating body, the amplitude of free vibrations
will be constant.

Length of air column 2L = e.g. Oscillations of simple pendulum in vacuum.
2
(ii) Forced vibrations:
 Wavelength of wave is  = 4L
The vibrations of body under the action of
v external periodic force in which body vibrates with
Frequency of vibration is n0 =
 frequency equal to frequency of external periodic
v force other than its natural frequency are called
 no = … (1) forced vibrations.
4L
This is the fundamental frequency of air column The amplitude of forced vibrations depends upon
open at both ends. difference between the frequency of external
periodic force and natural frequency of vibration
Fundamental mode of vibration of an air column
of body. It also depends on the amplitude of
in a pipe closed at one end of length L is
applied force and damping force. If amplitude of
A forced vibrations is small then the difference
between frequencies of vibration of body becomes
large and vice versa. In oscillations of pendulum
in a clock, amplitude of oscillations is constant.
L =  /4 (iii) Resonance:
In forced vibrations of a body, as difference
between the frequency of the driving periodic force
and the natural frequency of the driven body
decreases, the amplitude of vibration of the body
increases. When the difference between frequency
N of applied periodic force and natural of body
Fig. (b) Fundamental mode of vibration of an air becomes zero (i.e. frequency of external periodic
column closed at one end force and natural frequency of vibration of body
are equal) the amplitude of vibrations becomes
Length of air column, maximum. This condition is called resonance.
 Resonance is a special case of forced vibrations.
L =
4 The phenomenon in which the body vibrates
 Wavelength of wave is  = 4L under action of external periodic force, whose
frequency is equal to the natural frequency of
Frequency of vibration is
the driven body, so that the amplitude becomes
v maximum is called resonance.
nc =
 If the difference between the natural frequency
v and frequency of external periodic force is large
i.e. nc = … (2) then the amplitude of forced vibrations is small.
4L
96 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

If the difference is gradually decreased, the 150 + 25mp = 168 + 16mp

amplitude of forced vibrations increases and at a
9mp = 18
certain stage amplitude becomes maximum.
 mp = 2 g
B
When there are no weights in pan, number of
loops are p3
T1 p12 = T3 p32
Amplitude

(6 + mp) × (5)2 = (mp) (p3)2

(6 + 2) × (5)2 = (2) (p3)2
A C 200 = (2) + (p3)2
100 = p32
O FA Fb Fc
Frequency  p3 = 10
Q.8. A sonometer wire is in unision with a tuning
Q.6. Velocity of sound in air at room temperature
fork when stretched by a weight of specific
is 350 m/s. An air column is 35 cm in length.
gravity 9 on completely immerging the weight
Find the frequency of the third overtone in a
in water, wire produces 4 beats per second
pipe, when it is
with the fork. Calculate the frequency of the
(a) Closed at one end (b) Open at both ends
fork.
Solution: Data: Solution: Data:
v = 350 m/s, l = 35 cm = 0.35 cm n2 < n1, n1  n2 = 4, w = 1 gm/cc,  = 9 gm/c.c
Fundamental frequency of pipe open at both ends m = ?
v n
n0 = By law of tension = constant
2l 0 T
350 n1
= = 500 Hz T1
2  0.35  n = ... (1)
2 T2
Frequency of third overtone in a pipe open at both
ends is As T2 < T1, n2 < n1
n = 4n0 = 2000 Hz  n1  n2 = 4
Fundamental frequency of pipe closed at one end  n2 = n1  4 ... (2)

v n1 T1
nc =  =
4lc n2 T2
350 n1 
n0 = = 250 Hz  =
4  0.35 n2  1
Frequency of third overtone in a pipe closed at
one end is n1 9
 =
n = 7nc n1  4 9 1
= 7  250 n1 9
 =
= 1750 Hz n1  4 8
Q.7. In Melde’s experiment, when 6 gram weights n1 3 3
are added to the pan, number of loops is 5 = =
n1  4 2 2 2.828
and when 10.5 gram weights are added to the
pan the number of loops is 4. Find the number  2.828n1 = 3 (n1  4)
of loops when there are no weights in the pan 2.828n1 = 3n1  12
Solution: Data:  3n1  2.828n1 = 12
p1 = 5, p2 = 4, 0.172n1 = 12
T1 = 6 + mp, T2 = 10.5 + mp  n1 = 69.77 Hz
mp = mass of pan Q.9. The consecutive harmonics of an air column
 Tp2 = constant closed at one end are 405 Hz and 675Hz
 respectively. Find the frequency of similar air
T1 p12 = T2 p22 ... (1)
column but open at both ends.
(6 + mp) × (5)2 = (10.5 + mp) (4)2
(6 + mp) 25 = (10.5 + mp) 16
Stationary Waves 97

Solution: Data: 2.2

=
n1 405 3 2
 n2 = = e = 1.1 cm
675 5
 n1 = 3 and n2 = 5 Q.11. A stretched wire emits fundamental note of
Frequency of third harmonic is frequency 256 Hz. Keeping the stretched force
constant and reducing the length of wire by
3n = 405 10 cm, the frequency becom es 3 20 Hz.
 n = 135 Hz Calculate the original length of the wire.
Fundamental frequency of air column closed at Solution: Data:
one end is 135 Hz
l2 = l1 – 10 cm, n1 = 256 Hz, n2 = 320 Hz
Fundamental frequency of air column open at both
Fundamental frequency of stretched wire
ends is
n0 = 2n = 2  135 = 270 Hz 1 T
n1 =
2l1 m
Q.10. In a resonance tube experiment, a tuning fork
resonates with a air column 10 cm long and 1 T
again resonates when it is 32.2 cm long. 256 =
2l1 m
Calculate the wavelength of the wave and the
end correction. 1 T
and n2 =
Solution: Data: 2l2 m
l1 = 10 cm, l2 = 32.2 cm, e = ? ,  = ? 1 T
At first resonance,  320 =
2 (l1  10) m
Resonating length
256 l1  10
  = l1
l1 + e = ... (1) 320
4
At second resonance, 256 l1 = 320 (l1 – 10)
64 l1 = 3200
Resonating length
3 3200
l2 + e = ... (2) l1 = = 50 cm
4 64
 3   Q.12. A sonometer wire is in unision with a tuning
(l2 + e)  (l1 + e) =      fork of frequency 125 Hz when it is stretched
 4  4
by a weight. When the weight is completely
 3   immerged in water, 8 beats are heard per
l2  l1 =   
 4 4 second. Find the specific gravity of the
2  material of the weight.
l2  l1 = =
4 2 Solution: Data:
 n 2 < n 1,
 32.2  10 =
2 n1 = 125 Hz, n2 = 117 Hz

22.2 = n
2 By law of tension = constant
T
  = 44.4 cm
From (1) n1 T1
n2 = T2 ... (1)

l1 + e =
4 As T2 < T1
44.4 n2 < n1
10 + e =
4 n1  n 2 = 8
10 + e = 11.1 n2 = n1  8
 e = 1.1 cm
n1 T1
Alternative method n2 = T2
l 2  3l1
e = n1 
2
n2 =  1
32.2  3  10
= 125 
2
=
117  1
98 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

2 1.141  1.141 = 
 125  
  = 1.141
 117   1
 =
0.141
 = 8.092
1.141 =
 1

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. What are stationary waves? Ex plain the i.e. y = A sin [2nt]
formation of stationary waves by analytical But  = 2nt
method. What are nodes and antinodes?
 y = A sin t ... (3)
Show that t he distance between two This shows that the resultant motion is S.H.M.
successive nodes or antinodes is /2.
OR 2x
where, A = 2a cos

Derive expression of for the formation of
stationary wave by analytical method. Show is the amplitude of the resultant stationary wave.
that nodes or antinodes are equally spaced. The amplitude of the wave is not constant but
varies with position of the particles.
OR
Because of the absence, of term ‘x’ in equation
Explain analytically how stationary waves are
(3), the resultant wave does not move in either
formed. Hence show that the distance between
direction. Therefore the wave does not transfer
nodes and antinodes is /4.
energy in a medium, so it is called stationary wave.
Ans. Stationary waves:
Antinodes: The points of medium, which vibrate
When two identical progressive waves both with maximum amplitude, are called antinodes.
travelling along the same path in opposite
At antinodes amplitude is maximum,
directions, interfere with each other, by super
position of waves resultant wave obtained in the A = ±2a
from of loops, is called a stationary wave. 2x
Analytical method :  A = 2a cos becomes

Consider two simple harmonic progressive waves 2x
of equal amplitude and frequency, travelling along ±2a = 2a cos

the string in opposite directions. The displacement
of wave travelling along positive X-direction is 2x
cos = 1
given as 

 x 2x
y1 = a sin 2  nt   ... (1) = 0, , 2, 3, 4, .....
 

Similarly, displacement of the wave travelling 2x
= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, .....
along negative X-direction is given as 
 x  3 5
y2 = a sin 2  nt   … (2) x = 0, , , , , 2, ... ... (4)
  2 2 2
These waves interfere to produce stationary wave. Thus these are the points at which antinodes
The resultant displacement of stationary wave is are formed.
given by principle of superposition of waves. The distance between any two successive antinodes
y = y1 + y2 
is .
2
 x  x
 y = a sin 2  nt   + a sin 2  nt   Nodes: The points of medium, which vibrate with
    
minimum amplitude, are called nodes.
Using,
At nodes amplitude is minimum,
C  D  C  D 
Sin C + sin D = 2 sin  2  cos  2  A =0
   
2x
  2x   A = 2a cos becomes
 y = 2a sin (2nt ) cos   
    2x
0 = 2a cos
 2πx  
y =  2a cos   sin (2nt) 2x
  cos =0

Stationary Waves 99

2x  3 5 7 Let n and  be the frequency and wavlength of

= , , , , ... correoponding wave on string.
 2 2 2 2
 3 5 7 Length of string is
x = , , , , ... ... (5) 
4 4 4 4
l =
Thus these are the points at which nodes are 2
formed. The distance between any two successive Wavelength of wave is
  = 2l
nodes is . Frequency of vibration of the string is
2
From (4) and (5),
 T 
The distance between a node and adjacent  
v  m 
antinode is  
n = =
 2l
 
= 0 =
4 4 1 T
n =
Q.2. State the formula for velocity of transverse  m
wave on stretched string. Hence with neat
diagram, explain various modes of vibration 1 T
n =
of a stretched string. 2l m
OR This is the lowest frequency of vibration of string.
Show that even as well as odd harmonics are Therefore called fundamental frequency or
present as overtones in modes of vibration frequency of first harmonic.
of string. (All harmonics are present) (2) Second mode of vibration or second harmonic.
A sonometer wire 100 cm long produces a In this case the string vibrates in two loops.
resonance with a tuning fork. When its length Therefore three nodes and two antinodes are
is decreased by 10 cm, 8 beats per second are formed. as shown in fig. (b). Let n1 and  be the
heard. Find the frequency of the tuning fork. frequency and wavelength of corresponding wave
Ans. Consider a long string which is in under tension on string.
(T). Let l is the length of string and m is the mass Length of string is
per unit length of string or linear density of string.
Then velocity of transverse wave travelling on 1 1
l = + = 1
stretched string is given by 2 2
Wavelength of wave is
T
v = 1 = l
m
Frequency of second mode of vibration of the
Modes of vibrations of string:
string is
l v
n1 = 
N N First harmonic 1
A
1 T
l =  /2 n1 =
(a) 1 m
 1 T
N Second harmonic n1 =
N N or l m
A A first overtone
l = 1 1 T 
(b) n1 = 2  
N
 2l m 
N Third harmonic
N N or  n1 = 2n
A A A second overtone It means frequency of this mode is twice the
l = 3 2 /2 fundamental frequency called second harmonic.
(c) It is front frequency which is higher than
Fig. Modes of vibration of stretched string fundamental frequency, so it is called first
overtone.
(1) First mode of vibration or fundamental mode
of vibration: (3) Third mode of vibration or third harmonic:
In this case the string vibrates in one loop. In this case the string vibrates in three loops.
Therefore two nodes are formed at the support Therefore four nodes and three antinodes are
and one antinode is formed at the centre. [Fig.(a)] formed as shown in fig (c). Let n2 and 2 be the
frequency and wavelength of corresponding wave.
100 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

 Length of string is Ans. Consider a long string which is in under tension.

2 2 2 3 2 Let l is the length of string and m is the mass
l = + + = per unit length of string or linear density of string.
2 2 2 2
Then velocity of transverse wave travelling on
Wavelength of wave is stretched string is given by
2l
2 = T
3 v = ... (1)
m
Frequency of third mode of vibration of the string is
l

n2 = 
2 N N
A
1 T
n2 =  /2
2 m
Fig. Fundamental mode of vibration
3 T
n2 =
2l m First mode or fundamental mode of vibation:
If the string is placed at centre, it vibrates in the
1 T  manner as shown as shown in figure. The two
n2 = 3   nodes are formed at the support and one antinode
 2l m 
is formed at the centre.
n2 = 3 n

It means is the frequency of this mode is thrice Length of string is l =
the fundamental frequency called third harmonic 2
or second overtone. Wavelength of wave is
Hence it is concluded that stretched string can  = 2l
vibrates with all odd as well as even harmonics. Frequency of vibration of the string is
Frequency of pth overtone is (p + 1)n harmonic. v
n =
Problem : 
l1 = 100 cm, l2 = 90 cm 1 T
n = ... [From (1)]
 l2 < l1 ,  n1 < n2  m
n2  n1 = 8, N = ? 1 T
 n 1 l1 = n 2 l2 n = ... (2)
2l m
n 1 l1 = (n1 + 8) l2 This is the fundamental frequency of vibration.
n1100 = (n1 + 8) 90 Young’s modulus of the material of the wire is
100n1 = 90n1 + 720 stress
Y =
10n1 = 720 strain
 n1 = 72 Hz = N T 
 
 N = 72 Hz  A
= l 
Q.3. A wire of density  and Young’s modulus Y is  
L
st retched between two rigi d su pp or ts T l
separated by a distance l under tension T.  = Y = stress
A L
Derive an expression for its fundamental
frequency. Hence show that 2 l
 T = Yr ( A = r2)
L
1 Yl
n = Since, m = mass per unit length = r2
2l L
Substituting the values of T and m in equation,
Hence deduce the relation as we get
1 Yl l
n = Yr 2
2l  1 L
n =
where, Y = Young’s modulus of the material
2l r 2
of wire.
1 Yl
 = is the coefficient of linear n =
2l L
... (3)
expansion of solid.
l
 = density of material of wire. Now, strain = = t
L
Stationary Waves 101

where, t is rise in temperature mass

 m = length of wire
1 Yl
n = Volume of wire  density of wire
2l L =
L
1 Y  stain V
 n = =
2l  L
But thermal stress = Y × strain = Yt LA  
=
L
1 stress
 n = = A
2l 
Substituting in equation (1), we get,
1 Yt
 n = ... (4) 1 T
2l  n = ... (2)
2l A
Q.4. State the laws of vibrating string. Hence show
that t he frequ ency of vibrating wire is 1 T
n = 2l r 2
inversely proportional to radius of wire and
inversely proportional to square root of
density of wire. 1 T
n = ... (3)
2 lr 
In Melde’s experiment, number of loops on a
string changes from 7 to 5 by addition of From (2) and (3)
0.015 kg wt. Find the initial tension applied 1 1
to the string n  and n  r
Ans. (1) Law of length: The fundamental frequency of
vibration of a stretched string is inversely Since, T and  are Constant.
proportional to vibrating length (l) of the string if
the tension (T) in the string and linear density Frequency of vibrating wire is inversely
(m) or mass per unit length of the string are kept proportional to radius of wire and inversely
constant. proportional to square root of density of wire.
1 Problem:
n  , if T and m are constant
l p1 = 7, p2 = 5
In general, nl = constant T1 = 0.015 kg-wt, T2 = ?
(2) Law of tension: The fundamental frequency of  Tp2 = constant
vibration of a stretched string is directly
proportional to the square root of tension (T) in T1 p12 = T2 p22
the string if linear density (m) or mass per unit 0.015 (7)2 = T2 (5)2
length of the string and vibrating length (l) are 0.015  49 = T2 25
kept constant.
0.015  49
n T , if l and m are constant  T2 =
25
n
In general, = constant 0.735
T =
(3) Law of linear densit y: The fundamental 25
frequency of vibration of a stretched string is T2 = 0.0294 kg-wt
inversely proportional to square root of the linear
density of the string, if vibrating length (l) and Q.5. Show that only odd harmonics are present as
tension (T) in the string are kept constant. overtones in case of a pipe (or air column)
closed at one end and open at the other end
1
n  , if T and l are constant Show that for a pipe closed at one end, the
m end correction is
In general, n m = Constant. n1l1  n2l2
Derivation: Frequency of vibration of string or e = (n  n )
2 1
wire is
1 T
n = ... (1)
2l m
where m = mass per unit length of wire
102 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Ans: Frequency of vibration n2 is

A A A v 5v
n2 = =
2 4L
N
n2 = 5 
N v 
 = 5n
A  4L 
L  /4 3 1/4 5 2/4
This is the frequency of third mode of vibration
A N of air column closed at one end. This frequency
is called fifth harmonic or second overtone
A
Thus only odd harmonics are present as overtones
N N N in the case of air column closed at one end.
(a) (b) (c) In general for pth overtone np = (2p + 1)n
Fig. Modes of vibration of air coloum in a pipe closed where p = 0, 1, 2, 3, …… and n is fundamental
at one end. frequency
Let air column in a pipe closed at one end is
(1) First mode of vibration: vibrated with frequency n1, then
In this case, there is one node at the closed end Fundamental frequency of air column is
and one antinode at the open end as shown in
fig. (a) v
n1 = 4L
Length of air column. 1

 i.e. v = 4L1n1 … (1)

L = The air column is made to vibrate with another
4
frequency of tuning fork of frequency n2, then
 Wavelength of wave is = 4L
Fundamental frequency of the air column is
Frequency of vibration n is
v v v
n = = n2 = 4L
 4L 2

This is the fundamental frequency of air column i.e. v = 4L2n2 … (2)

closed at one end. Since velocity of sound is same in both the cases,
From (1) and (2)
(2) Second mode of vibration:
4L1n1 = 4L2n2 … (3)
In this case, two nodes and two antinodes are
formed, as shown in fig. (b) (l1 + e)n1 = (l2 + e)n2
31 where, e = end correction
Length of air column L =  l1 n 1 + n 1 e = n 2 l2 + n 2 e
4
4L l1n1  l2n2 = n1e  n2e
Wavelength of wave is  =
3  e (n1  n2) = l1n1  l2n2
Frequency of vibration n1 is n1l1  n 2l 2
v 3v  e = n 2  n1
n1 = =
1 4L
Q.6. Show that even as well as odd harmonics are
 v  present as overtones in a pipe (or air column)
 n1 = 3   = 3n
 4L  open at both the ends.
This is the frequency of second mode of vibration Draw neat labelled diagram for the modes of
of air column closed at one end. vibrations of air column in a pipe open at
This frequency is called third harmonic or first both ends in each case.
overtone. Show that for a pipe open at both ends, the
(3) Third mode of vibration: end correction is
In this case, three nodes and three antinodes n1l1  n 2l 2
e = 2 (n  n )
are formed. as shown in fig. (c) 2 1
Length of air column Ans: Different modes of vibration of air column in a
5 2 pipe open at both ends is shown in following
L = figure.
4
Wavelength of wave is
4L
2 =
5
Stationary Waves 103

A A A (3) Third mode of vibration:

N In this case, three nodes and four antinodes are
N formed. as shown in fig. (c)
A
3 2
A N Length of air column L =
L N l/2 1 3 2/2 2
A 2L
N Wavelength of wave is 2 =
3
N
Frequency of vibration n2 is
A A A
v 3v
First harmonic Second harmonic Third harmonic n2 = =
or or 2 2L
first overtone second overtone
(a) (b) (c)  v 
= 3 
 2L 
(1) First mode of vibration:  n2 = 3n
In fundamental mode of vibration of air column This is the frequency of third mode of vibration
open at both ends, there are two antinodes and of air column closed at one end. This frequency
one node is formed as shown in fig. (a) is called Third harmonic or second overtone.
 Thus even as well as odd harmonics are present
Length of air column , L =
2 as overtones, in the case of air column open at
Wavelength of wave is  = 2L both ends.
v v For pth overtone np = (p + 1) n,
Frequency of vibration n is, n = = where p = 0, 1, 2, 3, ……
 2L
This is the fundamental frequency of air column n = fundamental frequency
open at both ends. Let air column in a pipe open at both ends is
(2) Second mode of vibration: vibrated with frequency n1, then fundamental
In this case, two nodes and three antinodes are frequency of air column is
formed. as shown in fig. (b) v
Length of air column is n1 = 2L
1
1 1
L =  = 1  v = 2L1n1 ... (1)
2 2
The air column is made to vibrate with another
Wavelength of wave is
frequency of tuning fork of frequency n2, then
1 = L Fundamental frequency of the air column is
Frequency of vibration n1 is
v
v v n2 =
n1 = = 2L2
1 L  v = 2L2n2 … (2)
 v  Since velocity of sound is same in both the cases,
i.e. n1 = 2   = 2n
 2L  From (1) and (2)
This is the frequency of second mode of vibration 2L1n1 = 2L2n2 … (3)
of air column closed at one end.
L1n1 = L2n2
This frequency is called second harmonic or
(l1 + 2e)n1 = (l2 + 2e)n2
first overtone.
l1n1 + 2n1e = l2n2 + 2n2e
 n1l1  n2l2 = 2n2e  2n1e
n1l1  n2l2 = 2e (n2  n1)
n1l1  n 2l 2
 e = 2 (n  n )
2 1
104 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Differentiate between free and forced vibrations (March 2013)
(2) With a neat labelled diagram, show that all harmonics are present in an air column contained in a pipe open
at both the ends. Define end correction (March 2013)
(3) Draw neat labelled diagrams for modes of vibrations of an air column in a pipe when it is
(a) open at both ends (b) closed at one end.
Hence derive an expression for fundamental frequency in each case. (Oct 2013)
(4) A wire of density ‘r’ and Young’s modulus ‘Y’ is stretched between two rigid supports separated by a distance
‘L’ under tension ‘T’. Derive an expression for its frequency in fundamental mode.
1 Yl
Hence show that n = , where symbols have their usual meanings. (Feb. 2014)
2L L
(5) Distinguish between forced vibrations and resonance. Draw neat, labelled diagrams for the modes of vibration
of a stretched string in second harmonic and third harmonic. (Oct. 2014)
(6) What are forced vibrations and resonance? Show that only odd harmonics are present in an air column
vibrating in a pipe closed at one end. (Feb. 2015)
(7) Show that all harmonics are present on a stretched string between two rigid supports. (Oct. 2015)
(8) Explain analytically how the stationary waves are formed. Hence show that the distance between node and

adjacent antinode is . (Feb. 2016)
4
(9) Explain the formation of stationary wave by analytical method. Show that nodes and antinodes are equally
spaced in a stationary wave. (July 2016)
(10) Explain the formation of stationary waves by analytical method. Show the formation of stationary wave
diagramatically. (March 2017)
(11) Discuss different modes of vibrations in an air column of a pipe open at both the ends. State the cause of end
correction. Find the end correction for the pipe open at both the ends in fundamental mode. (July 2017)
(12) What is meant by harmonics? Show that only odd harmonics are present as overtones in the case of an air
column vibrating in a pipe closed at one end.(March 2018)
Problems:
(1) In Melde’s experiment, the number of loops on a string changes from 7 to 5 by addition of 0.015 kg.wt. Find
the initial tension applied to the string. (Oct 2013)
(2) A pipe which is open at both ends is 47 cm loag and has an inner diameter 5 cm. If the speed of sound in air
is 348 m/s, calculate the tundamental frequency of air column in that pipe. (Feb. 2014)


Kinetic Theory of Gases 105
CHAPTER
9
Syllabus:
Concept of an Ideal Gas, Assumptions of Kinetic Theory of Gases, Mean free path (), Derivation for the Pressure of a Gas,
Derivation of Boyle’s Law, Maxwell Distribution, Degrees of freedom and Law of Equipartition of Energy, Application of
Specific Heat Capcities of Gases, Thermodynamics, Absorption, Reflection and Transmission of Heat Radiation, Perfectly
Black Body, Spectrum of Black body Radiation in terms of Wavelength, Emissive Power and Absorptive Power, Kirchoff’s
Law of Radiation and Theoretical Proof, Stefan’s Law of Radiation, Newton’s Law of Cooling.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. A real gas obeys the ideal gas equation at 5. A molecule of an ideal gas has _________ degree (s)
(a) high temperatures and high density of freedom
(b) high temperatures and low density (a) 1 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 7
(c) low pressure and high temperature 6. If f be the number of degrees of freedom of a gas
(d) high pressure and low temperature molecule, then d ratio CP/CV for the gas is
2. The rms speed of a gas molecule is directly 1 2
2 1
proportional to (a) 1  (b) 1  (c) 1 + (d) 1 +
f f f f
(a) it’s absolute temperature
7. For a certain gas,  = 5/3. Then, its molecules have
(b) the square root of its absolute temperature
__________ degrees of freedom
(c) the square of its absolute temperature
(a) 3 (b) 5 (c) 7 (d) 9
(d) the fourth power of its absolute temperature
8. A body which transmits heat radiation is called
3. The kinetic energy per unit volume of a gas is
(a) an athermanous body (b) a blackbody
3 P 2 3 3 P
(a) (b) P (c) P (d) (c) a diathermanous body (d) a reflecting body
2 V 3 2 2 N
9. The amount of energy radiated per second by a body
4. If the temperature of a gas becomes three times
does not depend upon
the initial absolute temperature, the rms speed of
(a) nature of surface
the gas molecules
(b) area of surface
(a) becomes 1/3 times the initial rms speed
(c) mass of the body
(b) becomes 1/ 3 times the initial rms speed
(d) temperature difference of the surface and
(c) becomes 3 times the initial rms speed surroundings
(d) becomes 3 times the initial rms speed

ANSWERS
1  (c), 2  (b), 3  (c), 4  (c), 5  (b), 6  (d), 7  (a), 8  (c), 9  (c)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q. 1. What is heat engine? Q.4. If the number of molecules in a container is

doubled. What will be the effect on the rms
Ans. It is a device which convert heat energy into
velocity of the molecules?
mechanical energy.
Ans. No effect, Since rms velocity of the gas is
Q.2. Under what ideal condition the efficiency of
independant of number of molecules of gases.
heat engine is 100% ?
Q.5. Name the factors on which the degree of
Ans. If the temperature of sink is 0 K
freedom of gas depends?
Q.3. Write two conditions when real gases obey the
Ans. Atomicity and temperature
ideal gas (PV = nRT) equation.
Q.6. What is an ideal gas?
Ans. The real gases obey the ideal gas equation
(PV = nRT), Ans. A gas which obeys all gas laws at all temperature
and pressure is called ideal gas.
If (i) the pressure of gas should be low.
(ii)the temperature of gas should be high.

(105)
106 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.7. The absolute temperature of a gas is increased Q.11. What i s the value of the coefficient of
3 times. What is effect on the root mean square transmission for athermanous substance?
velocity of the molecules?
Ans. We know that,
Ans. It becomes 3 times. a+r+t=1 ... (1)
 Crms  For athermanous substance
T
a+r=1
 C1  T1 and C2  3T1
Put in equation (1)
C1 T1  1+t =0
1
 = =  t =0
C2 3T1 3
 C2 = Q.12. Wha t is perfectly black body? Give one
3 C1
example.
Q.8. What is the mean translational kinetic energy
Ans. Perfectly black body: A body which absorbs all
of a perfect gas molecule at temperature T?
the radiant energy incident on it is called perfectly
3 black body.
Ans. Average K.E. = RT
2 e.g. Lamp black
Q.9. On what factors does the mean free path depend? Q.13. Does perfectly black body exist in nature?
How can it be realised in practice?
Ans. Mean free path () depends upon diameter of
molecule and pressure of gas. Ans. No. Perfectly black body does not exist in nature.
However lamp black can absorb approximately
Q.10. What happens to the temperature of an ideal
98% of the radiant energy incident on it. For all
gas when its pressure and volume are kept
practical purposes lamp black can be treated as
constant?
perfectly black body.
Ans. Since, PV  T, therefore, temperature does not
Q.14. State Avogadro’s hypothesis. What is its
change.
value?
Ans. The number of molecules per unit volume is same
for all gases at a fixed temperature and pressure.
Avogadro’s number NA = 6.023 × 1023

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. What is an ideal or perfect gas? State equation (3) All the molecules of the same gas are identical
of ideal gas. Under what condition does a real in shape, size and mass.
gas obey ideal gas equation? (4) Actual volume occupied by gas molecules is very
Ans. Ideal gas: A gas which obeys all the gas laws at small compared to the total volume occupied by
all temperature and pressure is called ideal gas the gas.
or perfect gas. Q.3. Define (i) Free path (ii) Mean free path
Practically, no gas is ideal gas. Real gases obey
Ans. (i) Free path:
the gas laws at low pressures and at high
temperatures. The distance travelled by the molecule between
two successive collisions is called free path.
Relation between temperature, pressure and
volume is (ii) Mean free path:
PV = kT or PV = RT ... (for one mole) The average distance travelled by a gas molecule
between two successive collisions is called as
The perfect gas equation is
mean free path ().
PV = nRT ... (for n moles)
If 1, 2, 3 ... N are free paths, then mean free
Q.2. State four assumptions of kinetic theory of path
gases.
1  2   3  ....   N
Ans. Assumptions:  =
N
(1) A gas consists of a large number of particles where, N is the number of collisions.
called molecules.
(2) The molecules are rigid and perfectly elastic
spheres of very small diameters.
Kinetic Theory of Gases 107

Q.4. Explain: Ans.

(i) Mean square velocity Double walled
hollow metal sphere
(ii) Root mean square velocity Nickel
polished
Ans. (i) Mean square velocity (C 2 ) :
The average value of the squares of the velocities Incident
of all the molecules is known as mean square Radiation
velocity.
Aperture
Let C1, C2, C3, ..... CN be velocities of N molecules
enclosed in a container of volume V. Lamp
Conical black
Then the mean of the square velocity is Projection
C12  C22  C 32  ...  C N2 Evacuated space
C 2 = Fig. Perfectly black body
N
 2  Q.8. What is perfectly black body? How can it be
(ii) Root mean square velocity  C  : realised in practice?
 
It is defined as the square root of the mean OR
square velocity. Explain the construction of perfectly black
If N molecules of an ideal gas enclosed in a body.
container of volume V. Ans. Perfectly black body: It is a body which absorbs
Let C1, C2, C3, ..... CN be their velocities, then all the radiant heat incident on it.
For perfectly black body a = 1, r = 0 and t = 0
C12  C22  C32  ...  CN2
CRMS = C 2 = Nobody is perfectly black body. However lampblack
N
absorbs approximately 98% of the radiant heat
Q.5. State Charles’s law and Dalton’s law. incident on it. For all practical purposes, lamp
black can be regarded as perfectly black body.
Ans. (a) Charles’s Law: At a fixed pressure, the volume
of a gas is proportional to its absolute Ferry’s perfectly black body:
temperature. Ferry’s perfectly black body is an artificial black
i.e. V  T, at constant pressure. body. It consists of a double walled hollow metal
sphere having a small aperture. The inner surface
(b) Dalton’s law: The total pressure of a mixture of of the sphere is coated with lamp black, outer
an ideal gas is the sum of partial pressures. surface is nickel polished and it has a conical
Perfect gas equation is projection diametrically opposite to the aperture.
PV = nRT The space between the two walls is evacuated,
PV = (n1 + n2 + n3 …) RT to avoid loss of heat by conduction and convection.
Double walled
RT RT RT hollow metal sphere
P = n1 + n2 + n3 +… Nickel
V V V polished
 P = P1 + P2 + P3 + …
Q.6. Define athermanous substanc es and Incident
diathermanous substances. Give one example Radiation
each.
Aperture
Ans. (i) Athermanous substances:
The substances which do not transmit any Lamp
Conical
incident heat radiations (i.e. opaque to heat Projection black
radiations)are called as athermanous substances. Evacuated space
e.g. Water, wood, iron, copper, lampblack, water
Fig. Perfectly black body
vapours are some examples.
(ii) Diathermanous substances: The radiant heat enters the sphere through a small
The substances which are transparent to heat aperture. The radiant heat entering the sphere
radiations (through which heat radiations can suffers multiple internal reflections. Whenever the
pass) are called as diathermanous substances. radiant heat falls on lampblack, about 98% of the
e.g. Glass, quartz, sodium chloride, hydrogen, incident heat is absorbed. Hence after a large
oxygen, dry air, rock salt, are some examples. number of reflections, almost all the radiant heat
is absorbed by the sphere. Thus the aperture acts
Q.7. Draw a neat labelled diagram of artificial as a perfectly black body. The effective area of
perfectly black body perfectly black body is equal to area of the aperture.
108
Q.9. Explain spectrum of black body radiations in
terms of wavelength.
OR
Show graphical representation of energy
distribution spectrum of perfectly black body.
Ans. The variation of intensity of radiation with
wavelength at different constant temperature is
shown in fig.
From the curve it is observed that -
(i) Intensity of radiations emitted increases with
increase of wavelength.
(ii) For a particular wavelength,max the intensity of
radiation emitted is maximum and then
decreases with further increase in wavelength.
1650 K
Intensity
of radiation
(E)
1450 K
1250 K
1000 K
O Wavelength ()
(iii) Area under the curve (E) against wavelength()
represents the total energy emitted per second
per unit area by the black body including all the
wavelengths.
(iv) At higher temperature the total energy emitted
per second per unit area corresponding to all
wavelengths increases.
(v) As temperature increases, value of max shifts
towards the left, it means as temperature
increases, max decreases.
Q.10. State Wien’s displacement law for black body.
Define absorptive power.
Ans. Wien’s displacement law: It states that the
wavelength for which emissive power of black body
is maximum is inversely proportional to the
absolute temperature of the black body.
1 = K( - 0),
max 
T where K is constant of proportionaly
1 Q.14. Three molecules having velocities 2 m/s, 3 m/s
max = b 
T
where, b is called Wien’s constant
Absorptive power: Absorptive power of a body at
a given temperature is defined as the amount of
radiant energy absorbed per unit area per unit
time by a surface at that temperature.
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
Q.11. Define (i) Emissive power (ii) Coefficient of
emission or emissivity (e).
Ans. (i) Emissive power (E):
Emissive power of a body at a given temperature
is defined as the quantity of radiant energy
emitted by the body per unit time per unit surface
area of the body at that temperature.
Q
 Emissive power, E =
At
(ii) Coefficient of emission or emissivity (e) :
Coefficient of emission or emissivity of a body is
defined as the ratio of emissive power of the body
at a given temperature to the emissive power of
a perfectly black body at the same temperature.
E
 Coefficient of emission e = E
b
Q.12. State the dimension and S.I. unit of emissive
power. On what factors does it depend?
Ans. S.I. unit of emissive power is J/m2 s or W/m2
It has Dimensions [M1L0T3]
It depends on 
(i) Temperature of the body
(ii) Nature of the body
(iii) Surface area of the body
(iv) Nature of surroundings.
Q.13. State (i) Stefan’s law of radiation and
(ii) Newton’s law of cooling.
Ans. (i) Stefan’s law of radiation:
It states that the amount of radiant energy
emitted per unit time per unit surface area of a
perfectly black body is directly proportional to the
fourth power of its absolute temperature.
Eb  T4
 Eb = T4
where,  is known as Stefan’s constants.
(ii) Newton’s law of cooling:
It states that the rate of loss of heat by the body
is directly proportional to the excess of
temperature of the body over the surroundings
provided the excess is small.
dQ
 ( 0)
dt
dQ
dt
and 4 m/s. Find mean and r.m.s velocity of the
molecules
Solution: Data:
C1 = 2 m/s, C2 = 3 m/s, C3 = 4 m/s,
CR.M.S = ?, Cmean = ?
Kinetic Theory of Gases 109

C1  C 2  C 3  d 
(a) Mean velocity Cmean =   = K(  ) ... (2)
N  dt 2  

234 Dividing (1) by (2)

= = 3 m/s
3
 d 
 
C12  C 22  C 32  dt 1 (1  0 )
(b) CR.M.S = =
N  d  ( 2  0 )
 
 dt 2
(2)2  (3)2  (4)2
= 4 (60  30)
3 = (40  30)
 d 
4  9  16  
=  dt 2
3
4 30
29 =
= = 3.109 m/s  d  10
3  
 dt 2
Q.15. If the R.M.S. velocity of oxygen molecule at 4  d 
N.T.P. is 460m/s. Determine the R.M.S. =  dt 
3  2
velocity of hydrogen molecules at N.T.P.
(Molecular weight o f oxygen is 32 and  d 
molecular weight of hydrogen is 2)   dt  = 1.330 C per minute
 2
Solution: Data: MO = 32, MH = 2, Q.17. Calculate K.E. of helium molecule in 1 cm3
C0 = r.m.s. speed of oxygen at N.T.P. = 460 m/s at pressure 2 atmosphere.
C H = r.m.s. speed of hydrogen at N.T.P. = ? (1 atm = 1.013 × 105 N/m2)
Solution: Data:
3RT
 C rms = V = 1 cm3 = 106 m3,
M
P = 2 atm = 2  1.013  105 N/m2
CH 3RT M0 3
 C = MH  K.E. = PV
0 3RT 2

CH M0 3
=  2  1.013  105  106
= 2
C0 MH
= 3.039  101
CH 32 = 0.304 J
C0 =
2
Q.18. Compare rates of loss of heat by the body at
CH temperatures 5270C and 1270C. Temperature
C0 = 16 = 4 of surrounding is 270C.
CH = 4C0 = 4  460 Solution: Data:
 CH = 1840 m/s T1 = 527 + 273 = 800 K
Q.16. A metal sphere cools at the rate of 4 C per o T2 = 127 + 273 = 400 K
Minute at the temperature of 60oC. Calculate T3 = 27 + 273 = 300 K
the rate of cooling at 40oC if temperature of
The ratio of rate of loss of heat is
surrounding is 30oC
R1 T14  T04
Solution: Data: =
R2 T24  T04
 d 
  = 40 C/min at 1 = 60oC R1 (800)4  (300)4
 dt 1
=
0 = 30 C0
R2 (400)4  (300)4

 d  R1 (8)4  (3)4 4096  81

  = ? at 2 = 40 0C  = =
 dt 2 R2 (4)4  (3)4 256  81
Rate of cooling is R1 4015
 R2 =
 d  175
  = K(  ) ... (1)
 dt 1   = 22.94
110 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. State Boyle’s law. Deduce it from the expression As R, M0 are constant,
of pressure exerted by the gas on the basis of
kinetic theory of gases. CRMS  T
Ans. Boyle’s law: It states that, at constant Thus R.M.S. velocity of molecules of gas is directly
temperature, the pressure exerted by a fixed mass proportional to square root of its absolute
of gas is inversely proportional to volume temperature.
occupied by the gas. Q.3. Show that R.M.S. velocity of molecules of an
1 ideal gas at an absolute temperature is
P 
V 3K BT
 PV = constant CRMS = where m is the mass of a gas
m
Consider a fixed mass of gas is enclosed in a molecule and KB is Boltzmann constant
container of volume V,
Ans. Pressure exerted by gas is
Nm 2
Pressure exerted by the gas is P = C mN 2
3V RMS P = C
3V RMS
1 2
PV = NmC RMS 1 2
3  PV = mNC RMS
3
2 1 2  1
PV = N  mCRMS  ... (1) PV = M C2 ... (1)
3 2  3 0 RMS
For a given mass of gas, where, M0 = mN = mNA mmolecular weight of a gas
(i) Number of molecules N of gas is constant. For an ideal gas, for one mole,
1 2  PV = RT ... (2)
(ii) The quantity  mCRMS  is the average kinetic
2  From (1) and (2)
energy of gas which is constant at constant
1
temperature. M C2 = RT
3 0 RMS
 From (1)
3RT
1 2
C RMS = M
PV = constant i.e. P  , which is Boyle’s law 0
V
Q.2. Show that R.M.S. velocity of molecules of gas 3RT
 CRMS = M0
is directly proportional to square root of its
absolute temperature. where, M0 = molecular weight of gas = mNA
Ans. Pressure exerted by gas is 3RT
mN 2 CRMS = mN A ... (2)
P = C
3V RMS where, m is mass of a molecule and
1 2 N A is Avogadro’s number
 PV = mNC RMS
3
3K BT
1  CRMS = ... (3)
PV = M C2 ... (1) m
3 0 RMS
where, M0 = mN = molecular weight of a gas R
where, N = KB = Boltzmann’s constant
For an ideal gas, for one mole, A

PV = RT ... (2) Q.4. Explain Maxwell distribution of molecular

From (1) and (2) speeds with graph.

1 Ans. Maxwell’s speed distribution of molecular speed

M C2 = RT is a relation that describes the distribution of
3 0 RMS
speeds among the molecules of a gas at a given
3RT temperature
2
C RMS = M
0 All molecules do not have the same speed. At
any instant some molecules move slowly and
3RT some molecules very rapidly. Molecular speed may
CRMS = M0 vary over the range from 0 to . Since the
molecules constantly collide with each other and
Kinetic Theory of Gases 111

with walls of container and change their speeds,
as the number of molecules under consideration
is very large, so there is an equilibrium
distribution of speeds
Let dN(v) represents the number of molecules
having speeds between v and v + dv which is
proportional to dv. This is Maxwell distribution
The graph of fraction of molecules (nv) having
speeds v and v+dv against v is shown in fig. The
area of the shaded part gives the fraction of the
molecules with speeds between v and v + dv.
nv
Eb is the emissive power of perfectly black body.
Both bodies attain same temperature by thermal
exchange.
Suppose Q is the radiant energy incident on per
unit time per unit area of each body.
The total radiant energy incident per unit time
on perfectly black body = AQ.
It absorbs all this radiant energy incident on it.
Energy emitted per unit time by the perfectly black
body B = AEb.
Energy emitted per unit time by the perfectly black
body B = radiant energy absorbed per unit time
by perfectly black body.
 AEb = AQ
i.e. Eb = Q … (1)
Total radiant energy incident per unit time on
ordinary body O is AQ.
The energy absorbed by it per unit time = aAQ.

0 0.5 1 dv 1.5 2  Energy emitted per   Radiant energy 

v
2.5  unit time by the   absorbed per unit 
 ordinary body O  =  time by body O 
   
Q.5. State and prove Kirchhoff’s law of radiation.
 AE = aAQ
Ans. Statement: Kirchhoff’s law of radiations states
that, the coefficient of absorption of a body is  E = aQ
equal to its coefficient of emission at any given
temperature. E
 =Q … (2)
i.e. a = e a
E From Equation (1) and (2)
But, Coefficient of emission, e =
Eb E E
= Eb  =a
E E a Eb
 a = or Eb =
Eb a E
The ratio of the emissive power of body to the But Coefficient of emission is e = E
b
coefficient of emission is constant for all bodies
 a =e
and this constant is equal to emissive power of
perfectly black body at the same temperature. Coefficient of absorption = coefficient of emission.
Proof: Q.6. State Newton’s law of net loss of heat, hence
Consider a constant temperature enclosure which d
show that  (  0)
is thermally insulated from the surroundings. dt
Suppose that an ordinary body O and perfectly Ans. Statement: It states that the rate of loss of heat
black body B both having same surface area A, by the body is directly proportional to the excess
are placed in the constant temperature enclosure. of temperature of the body over the surroundings
E and e is the emissive power and coefficient of provided the excess is small.
emission of ordinary body.
Let be the temperature of the body and
0be the temperature of the surroundings
Then, the rate of loss of heat (  0)
dQ
 = K (  0) … (1)
dt
where K is the constant of proportionality.
O
If ‘m’ is the mass of the body,
B
d
‘s’ be the specific heat of body and is the rate
dt

Fig. Constant temperature enclosure of fall of temperature

112 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Then, (iii) Due to this, the intensity of radiation increases,

Rate of loss of heat = Mass  Specific heat  rate from the earth surface. The above process is
repeated until no radiation is available for
 of fall of temperature absoption.
dQ d (iv) This heating up of earth‘s surface and atmosphere
= ms … (2)
dt dt is known as greenhouse effect.
From (1) and (2), It keeps greenhouse warm in cold weather.
 d  (v) Glass and certain other materials allows visible
ms  dt  (  0) light to pass through them while they absorbs or
 
reflect the longer wavelength (IR).
d K
 = (  0) (vi) A glass wall or roof of a building allows visible
dt ms
light to enter and warm its interior.
As K, m and s are constant.
(vii) As temperature of things inside increases, they
d emit more IR, without the glass, this IR would
 (  0)
dt escape from the enclosure and carry away the
Thus the rate of fall of temperature of the body is added energy.
directly proportional to the excess temperature (viii) But glass blocks the IR, so the added internal
of body over the surroundings. energy is trapped and the enclosure is warmed.
Q.7. State Zeroth law, first law and second law of (ix) A car parked in the sun with windows up is much
thermodynamics. warmer than the air outside because of this
heating .
Ans. (i) Zeroth law of thermodynamics: It states that
if two bodies P and Q are in thermal equilibrium (x) Greenhouse effect occurs naturally in the earth’s
and also P and R are in thermal equilibrium then atmosphere.
Q and R are also in thermal equilibrium. (xi) Water vapour, carbon dioxide and other gases in
All bodies in thermal equilibrium are at equal the air act like glass that allows visible light from
temperature. Heat flows from the body at higher the sun to pass through to the earth surface,
temperature to the body at lower temperature. when the surface of the earth gets heated it emits
IR radiation.
(ii) First law of thermodynamics:
(xii) Part of the IR emitted by the warmed earth
It states that heat supplied to a system is equal surface are absorbed by these gases. As a result
to increase in the internal energy of system and atmosphere gets heated by IR.
work done by the system to the surroundings.
i.e. Q = U + W Q.9. A heated metal ball is placed in cooler
surrounding. Its rate of cooling is 2 o C per
Let Q  heat supplied to the system by the minute when its temperature is 60oC and 1.2oC
surroundings. per minute when its temperature is 52 o C.
Let W  work done by the system on the Determine the temperature of surroundings
surroundings. and the rate of cooling when the temperature
Let U  change in internal energy of the system of the ball is 48oC. Also find the temperature
at which the rate of cooling is 0.6oC per minute.
 By the principle of conservation of energy
Q = U + W Solution: Data:
(iii) Second law of thermodynamics:  d 
  = 20C/min at  = 60oC
Mechanical work can be converted completely into  dt 1 

heat but heat cannot be completely converted into  d 

mechanical work, i.e. work and heat are not equivalent.   = 1.20 C/min at  = 52oC
 dt 2 

Q.8. Write a note on Greenhouse effect.  = ?

Ans. (i) Earth’s surface absorbs thermal energy from  d 
sun and becomes a source of thermal radiation.   = ? at  = 48oC
 dt 3 3
The wavelength of this radiation lies in infrared
region.  d 
  = 0.6oC/min at  = ?
(ii) A large portion of this thermal radiation is  dt 4 4

absorbed by greenhouse gases, namely carbon Rate of cooling is

dioxide (CO 2 ), methane (CH 4 ), nitrous oxide d
(N 2 O 2 ) chlorofluorocarbons and tropospheric = K()
dt
ozone (O3), which heats up the atmosphere and
gives more energy to earth, resulting in warmer  d 
  = K(  ) ... (1)
surface.  dt 1  
Kinetic Theory of Gases 113

 d  Q.10. Calculate the kinetic energy of 10 g of Argon

  = K(  ) ... (2) molecules at 1270C. (Atomic weight of argon =
 dt 2  
40 and R = 8320 J/kmole K)
Dividing (1) by (2)
Solution: Data:
 d 
  T = 127 + 273 = 400 K, R = 8320 J/k mole K,
 dt 1 (1  0 )
= M = 10 g, M0 = 40
 d  ( 2  0 )
 
 dt 2 M 10 1
n = = =
(60  0 ) M0 40 4
2
= (52   ) Average K.E for n moles of gas is
1 .2 0

2 (52 0) = 1.2 (60 0) 3nRT 3 1

104  20 = 72  1.2 0 K.E. = =   8320  400
2 2 4
104  72 =  1.2 0 + 20
9984000
 32 = 0.8 0 =
4
i.e. 0.8 0 = 32
= 1248000 J = 1.248  106 J
 0 = 400C
Room temperature is 400C Q.11. The kinetic energy of nitrogen per unit mass
at 300 K is 2.5 × 106J/kg. Find the kinetic
 d  energy of 4 kg of oxygen at 600 K.
Also,  dt  = K() ... (3)
 3
(Molecular weight of nitrogen = 28
Dividing (1) by (3)
Molecular weight of oxygen = 32)
 d  Solution: Data:
 
 dt 1 (1  0 )
= KN = 2.5  106 J of 1 kg T1 at 300 K,
 d  ( 3   0 )
  K O = ? of 4 kg at T2 600 K, mN = 1 kg, mO = 4kg
 dt 3
MN = 28, MO = 32
2 ( 60  40 )
= Average K.E for n moles of gas is
 d   ( 48  40 )
  3nRT 3mRT
 dt 3 K.E. = =
2 2M O
2 20 3mO RT1 3m N RT2
=  KO = 2M and KN = 2M
 d  8
  O N
 dt 3 KO MN T m0
 =  1 
 d  28 KN MO T2 mN
  =
 dt 3 20 KO 28 600 4
=  
 d  KN 32 300 1
   = 0.80 C/min KO
 dt 3  =7
KN
 d 
Again  dt  = K( ) ... (4)  K O = KN  7
 4
K O = 2.5  106  7
Dividing (1) by (4)
= 17.5    J
 d 
  Q.12. Calculate the average molecular kinetic
 dt 1 (1  0 )
= energy (i) Per kmole (ii) Per kilogram of oxygen
 d  ( 4   0 )
  at 270C. (R = 8320J/ k-mole K, NA = 6.03  1026
 dt 4 molecules/kmole)
2 (60  40) Solution: Data:
= (  40)
0 .6 4 R = 8320J/ k-mole K
2 20 N A = 6.03 1026molecules/kmole
= (  40)
0 .6 4 T = 270C = 300 K
0.6  20 (i) Average K.E. per kilo mole at 270C
 4  40 = 3 3
2 = RT = × 8320 × 300
2 2
 4  460 C/min
= 3.744 106 J
114 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(ii) Average K.E. per kilogram Q.15. A copper ball cools from 600Cto 500C in 10
minutes and to 42 0 C in next 10 minutes.
Average kinetic energy per mole Calculate temperature at the end of next 8
=
Molecular weight of gas minutes.
3.744  106 Solution: Data:
=
32 60  50
= 1.17 155 J 1 = = 55oC
2
Q.13. A pinhole is made in a hollow sphere of radius 50  42
2 = = 46oC
5 cm whose inner wall is at 7270C. Find the 2
power radiated per unit area.  d  60  50
  = = 1C/min
Ans.  = 5.67  108 watt/m2K4  dt 1 10
e = 0.2, A = 4r2, r = 5 cm = 0.05 m  d   50  42
  = = 0.8C/min
t = 1 min = 60 sec  dt 2 10
T = 727 + 273 = 1000 K, P = ? 3 = ?
Rate of cooling is
Q
 = eAT4  d 
t   = k(  ) ... (1)
 P = eAT4  dt 1  

= 0.2  4  3.142  (0.05)2  5.67  10-8  (1000)4  d 

  = k(  ) ... (2)
= 0.0356  108  1012  dt 2  

= 0.0356  104 = 356 W Dividing (1) by (2)

 d 
Q.14. A metal sphere cools at the rate of 40C/min  
 dt 1 (  0 )
when temperature is 500C. Find the rate of = 1
 d   ( 2  0 )
cooling at 45 0 C if t he t emp erat ure of  
surroundings is 250C.  dt 2
1 (55  0 )
Solution: Data: = (46   )
0 .8 0
 d 
  = 40C/min at  = 500C 5(46 0) = 4(55 0)
 dt 1 1
230 = 5 0 = 220  40
0 = 25 C.
0

10 = 0
 d 
  = ? at  = 450C 0 = 10oC
 dt 2 2

Rate of cooling is Let 3 be the temperature in the next 10 min

 d 
 d    = K(  )
  = K(  ) ... (1)  dt 3  
 dt 1 1 0
From (1)
 d  5
  = K(  ) ... (2) = K(56  10)
 dt 2 2 0
4
Dividing (1) by (2), 5
= K  46
 d  4
 
 dt 1 (1  0 ) 42  3 5  42  3 
 d 
= =   10  ... (3)
( 2  0 ) 8 46  4  2 
 
 dt 2 42  3 5  42  3 
=   10 
4 (50  25) 8 4  46  2 
= 42  3
 d  (45  25) 50
  = (42 + 3  20)
 dt 2 8 176
4 25 50
= (42  3) = (22 + 3)
 d  15 22
  25
 dt 2 (42  3) = (22 + 3)
11
 d  4  15 11(42  3) = 25(3 + 22)
   =
 dt 2 25
462 = 100 3 = 25 3  550
 d  1012 = 36 3
   = 2.40 C/min
 dt 2 3 = 28.110C
Kinetic Theory of Gases 115

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. On the basis of the kinetic theroy of gases, The change in momentum per collision of the
derive an expression of pressure exerted by surface PQRS = +2mu1 ... (2)
an ideal gas. After collision, the molecule travels to the
Ans. Consider a fixed mass of a perfect gas enclosed opposite wall and after making collision with it
in a cubical container each of side l and with returns to the wall PQRS with same speed.
perfectly elastic walls. The distance travelled by the molecule, between
Let N be the total number of molecules of the two successive collisions with the wall PQRS is
gas. equal to 2l.
m be the mass of each molecule Therefore, Time interval (t) between two
successive collisions with the wall PQRS is
M = mN= mass of the gas
distance 2l
V = l3 = volume of the cubical vessel. Time = t = =
velocity u1
M mN
Density of gas = = 2 Force exerted on the wall by this molecule
V l
Z f1 = rate of change of momentum of the wall
change of momentum of the wall
Q
1
Q  f1 =
time

1
Y f1 = 2mu 1
P 2l
w1 P u1
v1
u1
2mu12 mu12
u1 w1 f1 = = ... (3)
m 2l l
v1 R
1 This is the force exerted by the molecule of mass
R
m moving with speed. u1 on the wall.
1
S S Similarly the forces the exerted by the molecules
X moving along the X-axis with speed u2, u3 … uN
O l
are given as
Let C1, C2, C3, .... CN be their velocities of the
molecules. Each velocity can be resolved into mu22 mu32 muN2
f2 = , f3 = , ... , f N=
three components along x, y, and z direction. l l l
Let u1 , v1 , w1 be the components of velocity C1 Resultant force on the wall is
along x, y, and z direction respectively. fx = f 1 + f 2 + f 3 + ....... + f N
Similarly mu12 mu22 mu32 muN2
fx = + + + ...
u2 , v2 , w2 be the components of velocity C2,... l l l l

uN , v N  wN be the components of velocity CN fx =

m
l

u12  u22  u32  ... ...  uN2  ... (4)
Then, Similarly the resultant force
C12 = u12 + v12 + w12
f y and f z perpendicular to Y and Z axes respectively
2
C21 = u22 + v 22 + w22 on the walls are given as
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. fy =
m 2
l
 
v1  v 22  v 32  ... ...  v N2 ... (5)
. . . . .
CN2 = uN2 + vN2 + wN2 ... (1) .
.
Consider a molecule of mass m moving with
velocity C1 moving towards the wall PQRS. It
moves with velocity u1 along the positive x-axis.
fz =
m
l
w12  w22  w32  ... ...  wN2 
... (6)

Initial momentum of the molecule = mu1 Pressure exerted by the gas molecule on the walls
of the vessel is
Final momentum of the molecule after collision
Force
= mu1 Pressure =
Area
Change in momentum of the molecule in one
Pressure acting on the wall perpendicular to
collision
X- axis is
=  mu1 mu1 = 2mu1
116 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

fx fx Ans. (i) Kinetic energy of a gas:

Px = = 2 Pressure exerted by gas is
A l
M
 Px =
m
l3 1

u 2  u 22  u 32  ... ... ... u N2 From (4)  P = C2
3V RMS
Similarly, py and pZ acting on the walls perpendicular 2
3PV = M C RMS
to the Y and Z axes respectively are
3 1
fy 2
Py =
l2
m

= 3 v12  v 22  v 32  ...
l
2
... ... v N  ... From (5) 2
PV =
2
M C RMS

1 2
But, M C RMS = K.E of gas
fz
m

Pz = 2 = 3 w12  w22  w32  ... ... ... wN2 ... From (6)
l l
 2
3
As the pressure exerted by the gas molecules is  Kinetic energy of gas = P
2
the same in all directions,
(ii) Kinetic energy per unit volume:
P x = Py = PZ = P
Kinetic energy of gas
Px + Py + Pz = 3P = Volume of a gas
Px  Py  Pz 3
P = PV
3 2 3
= = P
V 2
P =
m
3l 3
u  u  u  ...  u  +
2
1
2
2
2
3 ... ...
2
N (iii) Kinetic energy per mole of gas:
v  v  v  ...  v  +
2
1
2
2
2
3 ... ...
2
N
For an ideal gas, PV = nRT

w  w  w  ...  w 
2
1
2
2
2
3 ... ...
2
N  Kinetic energy of gas =
3
2
PV

P =
m
3V
C  C  C ...  C 
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
N
... (7)  Kinetic energy of gas =
3
2
nRT

C12  C 22  C 32...  C N2 This is the average kinetic energy of n moles of

But, CRMS = C2 = gas. For one mole of gas n = 1
N
3
Average kinetic energy per mole of gas = RT
2
C12  C22  C 32  ...  C N2 2
C RMS =
N (iv) Kinetic energy per molecule of gas:

 N C RMS
2
= C12 + C 22 + C 32 + ... + CN2 Kinetic energy per mole
= Avogadrs number
Using this in equation (7)
3
RT 3RT
m 2
P = 2
(NC RMS ) = = 2N
3V NA A

Nm 2
P = C RMS 3 R
3V = K T (KB = = Boltzman constant)
2 B NA
M
P = C2 (v) Kinetic energy per unit mass:
3V RMS
where M = Nm = mass of the gas Kinetic energy per mole
M = molecular weight of gas
P = = density of gas
V
3
1 RT 3RT
 P =  C RMS = 2
2
... (8) =
3 M M
Equation (8) is expression for pressure.
Q.3. What is degree of freedom? State and explain
Q.2. Using expression of pressure of gas deduce Law of equipartition theorem.
expression of
Ans. Degree of freedom:
(i) Kinetic energy of a gas
The number of independent ways in which a system
(ii) Kinetic energy per unit volume of gas
may possess translational, rotational and vibrational
(iii) Kinetic energy per mole of gas energy or motion is called degree of freedom.
(iv) Kinetic energy per molecule of gas or the minimum number of independent variables
(v) Kinetic energy per unit mass of gas or coordinates are required to specify the state
of the system is called degree of freedom.
Kinetic Theory of Gases 117

Explanation: Theorem states that, in equilibrium, the total

For a gas in equilibrium at temperature T, energy is equally distributed in all possible energy
modes, with each mode having an energy equal to
the average energy of a gas is
1/2 kT
1 2 1 2 1 2 i.e. the energy associated with a molecule for one
EAV =  2 mv x  +  2 mv y  +  2 mv z 
  AV   AV   AV degree of freedom is 1/2 kT.
3 Total energy = Etra + Erot + Evibra
= k T
2 B 1 1 1 1 1
Since there is no preferred direction above = m v x2 + m v y2 + m v Z2 + I 2 + I 2
2 2 2 2 1 1 2 2 2
equation implies that 2
1  dy  1
1 2 1 + m  + ky2 ... (1)
 mv x  = k T 2  dt  2
 2  AV 2 B
In the above equation, each translational and
1 rotational has contributed only one squared term.
2 1
 mv y  = k T But one vibrational mode contributes two squared
2  AV 2 B
terms i.e. kinetic and potential energies.
1 Therefore each translational and rotational degree
2 1
 mv z  = k T 1
2  AV 2 B of freedom contributes k T to the total energy
2 B
If a molecule is constrained to move along a while each vibrational mode contributes
straight line, it requires one coordinates to locate 1
it i.e., it has one degree of freedom. 2 k T = kBT
2 B
If a molecule is constrained to move in a plane,
Q.4. What is law of equipartition energy? Find the
it requires two coordinates to locate it. i.e. it has
value of expression for average kinetic energy
two degree of freedom.
for monoatomic, diatomic and polyatomic gas
Similarly for a molecule to locate in space, it
requires 3 coordinates to locate. It has three Ans. Law of Equipartion energy :
degree of freedom. Theorem states that, in equilibrium, the total
Therefore a molecule free to move in space has energy is equally distributed in all possible energy
three degree of freedom. modes, with each mode having an energy equal
1
A molecules of monatomic gas has three to kT
translational degree of freedom. 2
(1) Monoatomic gas: Molecules of monoatomic gas
A molecule of diatomic gas has two rotational and have only three translational degree of freedom.
three translational degree of freedom.
Average kinetic energy per degree of freedom is
For diatomic molecule has five degree of freedom.
1
total energy of diatomic molecule is k T.
2 B
Total energy = Etra + Erot
There are three degree of freedom, so average
1 1 1
Et = m v x2 + m v y2 + m v Z2 1 3
2 2 2 kinetic energy per molecule is 3x kBT = k T
1 1 2 2 B
Erot = I 2 + I 2 In one mole of gas there are NA atoms, so total
2 1 1 2 2 2
energy per mole of gas
1 1 2
Etra+ Erot = m v x2 + m v y 1
2 2 = 3  kBT  NA
1 1 1 2
+ m v Z2 + I1 12 + I2 22 3 3
2 2 2 = k NT = RT
2 B A 2
At a moderate temperature a diatomic molecule
like CO has a vibrational motion. Therefore it where KBNA = R
contributes a vibrational energy to the total energy. (2) Diatomic gas: Diatomic molecules have three
translational and two rotational degree of
Total energy = Etra + Erot + Evibra
freedom. Therefore a diatomic gas has 5 degree
2 of freedom. The average kinetic energy per degree
1  dy  1
Evibra =m   + ky2 1
2  dt  2 of freedom is k T.
In equilibrium the total energy is equally 2 B
distributed in all possible energy modes, with There are 5 degree of freedom, average kinetic
1 energy per molecule is
each mode having energy equal to k T. This is 3 5
2 B
called as law of equipartition energy. = 5x kBT = kBT
2 2
118 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

In one mole of gas there are NA atoms, so average The ratio of specific heats
5 Cp
energy per mole of gas k T × NA
2 B  =
CV
5 5
= k NT = RT 5
2 B A 2 R 5
 = 2 =
(3) Polyatomic gas: For polyatomic gas molecule has 3 3
R
3 translational, 3 rotational degree of freedom 2
and a certain number fof vibrational degree of (ii) For diatomic gas:
freedom. It has three translational and two rotational
Average energy per molecule is degree of freedom. Therefore the average kinetic
1 1 5
=3× k T+3× k T + f × kB T energy per molecule of diatomic gas is k T.
2 B 2 B 2 B
3 3 For one mole of diatomic gas there are N A
= kB T + k T + f kB T molecules, therefore average kinetic energy per
2 2 B
mole of gas is
= (3kBT + f kBT )
5 5
For one mole of polyatomic gas there are NA U = k NT= RT (KBNA = R)
2 B A 2
molecules, therefore average kinetic energy per
If C V molar specific heat of gas at constant
mole of gas is (3kBT + fkBT)NA
volume, then
kBNA= R
dU 5
So average energy per mole of diatomic gas is CV = = R
dT 2
= (3 + f)RT For ideal gas
Q.5. What is law of equipartition energy? Find the Cp  CV = R
Cp C P = CV + R
value of  = for monoatomic and diatomic
CV
5 7
and polyatomic gas. CP = R+R = R
2 2
Ans. Law of equipartion energy: It states that, in The ratio of specific heats
equilibrium the total energy is equally distributed
Cp
in all possible energy modes, with each mode  =
1 CV
having an energy equal to kT
2 7
(i) Monatomic Gas: R
2 7
It has three translational degree of freedom  = 5 =
R 5
Average. kinetic energy per molecule of 2
3 (iii) For polyatomic gas:
monoatomic gas is k T .
2 B Polyatomic gas molecule has 3 translational, 3
For one mole of monoatomic gas there are NA rotational degree of freedom and a certain number
molecules, therefore average kinetic energy per fof vibrational degree of freedom.
mole of gas is
Average energy per molecule is
3 3
U = kB N A T = RT (R = KBNA) 1 1 1
2 2 =3× k T+3× k T+f × k T
2 B 2 B 2 B
If CV is molar specific heat of gas at constant
volume, then 3 3 f
= k T+ k T+ k T
2 B 2 B 2 B
dU 3
CV = = R 3 3 
dT 2
=  kB T  k B T  fk B T 
For ideal gas 2 2 
Cp  CV = R = (3kBT + f kBT)
where, Cp is molar specific heat of gas at constant For one mole of gas, there are NA molecules.
pressure Therefore average kinetic energy per mole of gas is
 Cp = CV + R U = (3kBT + f kBT)NA
3 = (3T + f T) R (kBNA = R)
Cp = R+R dU
2
Now, CV = = (3 + f) R
5 dT
Cp = R
2
Kinetic Theory of Gases 119

CP = CV + R = (3 + f) R + R (iii) Coefficient of transmission (t)

 CP = (4 + f ) R The coefficient of transmission of a body is defined
as the ratio of quantity of radiant energy
The ratio of specific heats
transmitted by the body in a given time to the
CP
 = C quantity of radiant energy incident on the body
V in the same time.
(4  f ) R
 = (3  f ) R Qt
 Coefficient of transmission. t = ... (3)
t
(4  f ) Relation between a, r and t:
  = (3  f )
By conservation of energy
Q.6. Define coefficient of absorption, coefficient Q = Qa + Qr + Qt
of reflection and coefficient of transmission.
Qa Qr Qt
Obtain the relation between them. What are = + +
athermanous and diathermanous substances? a r t
Give one example each. 1 =a+r+t
Ans. When radiant energy Q is incident on the surface (i) Athermanous substances:
of any body, part of this energy Qa is absorbed, The substances which do not transmit any incident
part is reflected Qr and the remaining part is heat radiations (i.e. opaque to heat radiations) are
transmitted Qt by the body. called as athermanous substances.
(i) Coefficient of absorption (a): Water, wood, iron, copper, lampblack, water
The coefficient of absorption of a body is defined vapour are some examples of athermanous
as the ratio of quantity of radiant energy absorbed substances.
by the body in a given time to the quantity of (ii) Diathermanous substances:
radiant energy incident on the body in the same
The substances which are transparent to heat
time.
radiations (through which heat radiations can
Qa pass) are called as diathermanous substances
 Coefficient of absorption, a = … (1)
a e.g. Glass, quartz, sodium chloride, hydrogen,
(ii) Coefficient of absorption (r): oxygen, dry air, rock salt, are some example.
The coefficient of reflection of a body is defined
as the ratio of quantity of radiant energy reflected
by the body in a given time to the quantity of
radiant energy incident on the body in the same
time.
Qr
 Coefficient of reflection r = … (2)
r

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Define ‘emissive power’ and ‘coefficient of emission of a body’. (Feb. 2016)
(2) Prove Kirchhoff’s law of radiation theoretically. (July 2017)
(3) State any ‘four’ assumptions of kinetic theory of gases. (March 2018)
Problems:
(1) Compute the temperature at which the r.m.s. speed of nitrogen molecules is 832 m/s.
[Universal gas constant, R = 8320 J/k mole K, molecular weight of nitrogen = 28.] (Oct. 2015)
(2) A metal sphere cools at the rate of 4oC/min. when its temperature is 50oC. Find its rate of cooling at 45oC if
the temperature of surroundings is 25oC. (Feb. 2016)
(3) A body cools from 62oC to 54oC in 10 minutes and to 48oC in the next 10 minutes. Find the temperature of the
surroundings. (July 2016)
(4) A body cools at the rate of 0.5oC/ minute when it is 25oC above the surroundings. Calculate the rate of
cooling when it is 15oC above the same surroundings. (March 2017)
(5) At what temperature will average kinetic energy of gas be exactly half of its value at N.T.P.? (July 2017)
(6) A body cools from 80oC to 70oC in 5 minutes and to 62oC in the next 5 minutes. Calculate the temperature of
the surroundings. (March 2018)


120 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
10
Syllabus
Wave Theory of Light, Wave Front and Wave Normal, Huygen’s Principle, Construction of plane and spherical wavefront,
Reflection at a plane surface, Refraction of a plane wavefront at a plane surface, Polarisation, Plane Polarised Light,
Brewster’s Law, Polariod, Doppler Effect in Light

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. If the polarising angle for a given medium is 60o, 6. The angle of incidence at which the polarisation of
then the refractive index of the medium is light reflected from the surface of glass is 58 o. Then
1 3 refractive index of glass is?
(a) 1 (b) 3 (c) (d) (a) 1.9 (b) 1.8 (c) 1.7 (d) 1.6
3 2
2. A ray of light passes from a vacuum to a medium of 7. Which of the following quantities does not change
refractive index. The angle of incidence is found to when a wave enters from air into glass ?
be twice the angle of refraction. The angle of (a) Velocity
incidence is (b) Wavelength
  (c) Frequency and wavelength
(a) cos1   (b) 2 sin1   (d) Frequency
2 2
 8. Light of a certain wavelength has a wavenumber 
(c) cos1 () (d) 2 cos1   in vacuum. Its wave number in a medium of
2
refractive index n is
3. Huygen’s wave theory of light could explain
(a) Rectilinear propagation of light  n 1
(a) n  (b) (c) (d)
(b) Polarisation of light n  n
(c) Photoelectric effect 9. Which of the following phenomenon is used in
(d) Simultaneous reflection and refraction of light construction of polaroids?
(a) Reflection (b) Refraction
4. The equation related to polarising angle and
refractive index is (c) Selective absorption (d) Polarisation
(a)  sin ip = 1 (b)  tan ip = 1 10. Critical angle for water – air media is (refractive index
(c)  cot ip = 1 (d)  cosec ip = 1 of water is  = 4/3 )
5. A ray of light of frequency n and wavelength  travelling 3 4
(a) sin 1   (b) sin 1  
with velocity c in air enters a glass of refractive index 4 3
. the frequency and wavelength in glass will be
3 4
 n   (c) cos1   (d) cos1  
(a) n, 2 (b) n , (c) , (d) n , 4 3
   

ANSWERS
1  (b), 2 (d), 3 (a), 4 (c), 5 (b), 6 (d), 7 (d), 8 (a), 9 (c), 10  (a)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Define wave front Ans. Polarisation of light proves transverse nature of
Ans. A locus of all the points of medium to which the light.
wave reach simultaneously so that all the points
Q.4. Write two uses of Polaroid
are in the same phase is called wave front
Ans. Polaroid is used in 
Q.2. When monochromatic light travels from one
(i) Three dimensibnal movie comeras.
medium to another its frequency remains
constant. Why? (ii) Window of aeroplanes to control amount of
light
Ans. Because, frequency of light depends on source
and not on the medium in which it travel. (iii) Motor car head lights to remove headlight
glare.
Q.3. Name the phenomenon of light which proves
transverse nature of light
(120)
Wave Theory of Light 121

Q.5. State Brewster‘s law Ans.

Ans. Statement: The tangent of the polarizing angle T1
is equal to the refractive index of the material A T2
medium at which partial reflection takes place.
Q.6. The value of Brewster’s angle for transparent
medium is different for different colours. Give No light
reason B Plane
Ordinary polarised light
Ans. As Brewster’s angle depends on the refractive light Analyser
Polariser
index and wavelength of light, so it is different
for different colours Q.8. State Huygens’s principle
Q.7. Using suita ble diag ram show tha t when Ans. (1) Every point on a wave front acts as a
unpolarised light is passed through polaroid secondary source of light sending secondary waves
gets polarised. in all possible directions.
(2) The new secondary wavelets are more effective
in the forward direction only.
(3) The resultant wave front at any position is given
by the tangent drawn to the wave front at that
instant.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. What is a Polaroid? State its two uses. Q.3. Draw a neat labelled diagram of the refraction
Ans. Polaroid: It is a large sheet of synthetic material of a plane wave front on the basis of Huygens
packed with tiny crystals of a dichroic substance wave theory of light.
oriented parallel to one another, so that it Ans: Diagram:
transmits light only in one direction of the electric Q
vector.
Uses of Polaroid: P
(i) In calculators, Movie cameras. N B
(ii) In watches and LCD screens.
i
Q.2. Draw a neat labelled diagram of reflection of X i C Y
A r
light from a plane reflecting surface on the r
basis of Huygens wave theory of light.
D S
Ans: Diagram:
Q N R

S
Fig. Refraction of light
P
D Labelings:
B R
PA and QC – incident rays
SC and AR – refracted rays
i r
M r C N – Normal
A AB – incident wave front
Fig. Reflection of light CD – refracted wave front
Labelings: i – angle of incidence
PA and QC - incident ray r – angle of refraction
CR and AS - reflected ray XY – refracting surface
N – Normal Q.4. Draw neat labelled diagram showing the plane
AB – incident wave front of vibration and plane of polarisation for
CD – reflected wave front polarised light.
i – Angle of incidence = PAN
r – Angle of reflected = NAD
M – Plane mirror
122 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Ans: secondary wavelets. This common tangent

Plane of P1Q1represents the new position of the wave front
A vibration B after time t.
E F
Plane polarised P P1
light Plane of
polarisation
A

Unpolarised
light H G B
D C
Wave normal
ABCD – plane of vibration C
EFGH – plane of polarisation
Q.5. Explain Huygens construction of spherical
Q Q1
wave front
Ans. Construction of spherical wave front: Q.7. How will you distinguish between polarized
Let PQ be the spherical wave front due to a point and non-polarized light?
source S situated in air. Consider points A, B, C Ans.
and D on the wave front PQ. These points act as
secondary source of light and emit secondary Unpolarised light Plane polarized light
wavelets with speed of light ‘c’ in air as per (i) In a beam of (i) In polarized light
Huygens principle. After time ‘t’ each wave will unpolarised light, the electric vibrations are
cover a distance ‘ct’. Draw secondary wavelet, vibrations of light only along one direction
with A, B, C and D as centers of circles and radius vectors are in all confined in one plane
equal to ct. Draw a common tangent P1Q1 to all directions in a plane which is perpendicular
these secondary wavelets. This common tangent perpendicular to the to the directions of
P1Q1represents the new position of the wave front directions of propagation.
after time t. propagation.
P1 (ii) Intensity of (ii) Intensity of polarized
unpolarised light light transmitted by
P transmitted by Polaroid changes from
A maximum to minimum
Polaroid cannot
change when Polaroid when Polaroid is
is rotated about its rotated about its axis.
B axis.

S Q.8. Explain the terms plane of polarization and

plane of vibration.
C
Ans: Plane of vibration:
The plane in which the vibrations of polarized
light take place is called plane of vibration. In
D
figure, plane of vibration is ABCD
Q
Plane of polarization:
Q1 The plane perpendicular to the plane of vibration
Fig. Spherical wavefront in which there are no vibrations of polarized light,
is called plane of polarization.
Q.6. Explain Huygens construction of plane wave In figure, plane of polarization is EFGH
front. Plane of
A vibration B
Ans. Construction plane wave front:
E F
Let PQ be the spherical wave front due to a point Plane polarised
light Plane of
source S situated in air. Consider points A, B polarisation
and C on the wave front PQ. These points act as
secondary source of light and emit secondary
wavelets with speed of light c in air as per Huygens
Unpolarised
principle. After time t each wave will cover a light H G
distance ‘ct’. Draw secondary wavelet, with A, B, D C
C, as centers of circles and radius equal to ct.
Draw a common tangent P 1 Q 1 to all these
Wave Theory of Light 123

Q.9. A ray of light is incident on a water surface of  vw  vg = 0.25 × 108 ... (Given)
refractive index 4/3 making an angle of 400
9
with the surface. Find the angle of refraction.  v  vg = 0.25 × 108
8 g
Solution: Data:
1
 = 4/3, i = 90o  40o = 50o v = 0.25 × 108
8 g
sin i  vg = 2 × 108 m/s
 
sin r
Q.12. For a glass plate as a polarizer with refractive
sin 50 index 1.633, calculate the angle of incidence
 sin r = 4 3
at which light is polarized.
sin 50 Solution: Data:
=
1.33  = 1.633, ip = ?
0.7660   = tan ip
=
1.33  1.633 = tan ip
 r = sin1 (0.5759)  ip = tan1 (1.633)
 r = 35 16 0
= 58051
Q.10. The number of waves in 6 cm of vacuum is Q.13. If the difference in velocities of light in glass
same as the number of waves in x cm of a and water is 2.7 × 108m/s, find the velocity of
medium. If the refractive index of the medium light in air.
is 3/2, find x.
Solution: Data:
Solution:
vw  vg = 2.7 × 108 m/s.
Number of waves in 6 cm of vacuum = number of
g = 1.5 = 3/2, w = 4/3, c = ?
waves in x cm of medium
1 1 c
 6 = x Velocity of light in glass is vg = 
v m g

6  c
=  Velocity of light in water is w = 
x m w

6  c
= c 
x  vw  vg =  
 w  g 
 
6
x = 6/ = 3 / 2  1 
1 
vw  v g = c  
 w  g 
x = 4 cm  
Q.11. If the difference in velocities of light in glass  1 1 
vw  vg = c   
and water is 0.25 × 108m/s, find the velocity  4 /3 3 /2 
of light in glass.
3 2
Solution: Data: vw  v g = c   
4 3
g = 1.5 = 3/2 1
w = 1.33 = 4/3 2.7  108 = c 
12
vw  vg = 0.25 × 108 m/s  c = 3.2  108 m/s
Velocity of light of in water is o
c Q.14. A red light of wavelength 6400 A in air has
o
vw =
w wavelength 4000 A in glass. If the wavelength
o
Velocity of light in glass is of violet light in air is 4400 A , what is
c wavelength in glass?
vg =
g Solution: Data: o o
vw g 32 (r)a = 4000 A , (r)g = 4000 A ,
o
= = 43
vg w (v)a = 4400 A , (v)g = ?
Refractive index of red colour is
vw 9
= (r )a
vg 8  r = ( )
r g
9 Refractive index of violet colour is
vw = × vg
8
124 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(v )a 4400 6400

r =
(v )g (v )g = 4000
Assuming, v = r 4400  4000
 (v)g =
(v )a (r )a 6400
o
= ( )
(v )g r g (v)g = 2750 A

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. With the help of a neat diagram, explain the (3) The incident ray and reflected ray lie in the same
reflection of plane wave front from a plane plane. Hence laws of reflections are proved. (½ m)
reflecting surface on the basis of Huygens
wave theory of light. Q. 2. With the help of a neat diagram, explain the
refraction of plane wave front light on the
Ans. Diagram: basis of Huygens wave theory of light.
Q N OR
S On the basis of Huygens wave theory of light ,
prove that the velocity of light in a rarer
P
medium is greater than velocity of light in a
D
B R denser medium.
Ans. Snell’s law:
i r The ratio of sine of angle of incidence to the sine
M r C of angle of refraction is constant. This constant
A
is called refractive index of second medium with
Fig. Reflection of light
respect to first medium. (½ m)
Explanation:
Consider a plane wave front AB is incident sin i
i.e. = constant
obliquely on the plane mirror M at A. The point A sin r
on the wave front acts as a secondary source and sin i 2
emits a secondary wavelet in the same medium. = 
sin r 1
Let the wave front at point B moves to the point
C in time t. If c is the speed of light in the medium where 2  refractive index of second medium.
then the distance BC = ct. During this time   refractive index of first medium.
secondary waves from A will cover a hemisphere Diagram:
of radius ct. This becomes secondary wave front.
Q
Draw a tangent CD to from C to this wave front.
Thus the tangent CD represents the reflected
wave front. P
Proof: N B
i = BAC … (1) i
X i C Y
From triangle BAC A r
r =DCA … (2) r
From triangles ABC and ADC D S
ABC = ADC = 900 … (1)
R
AD = BC = ct
AC = AC ... (common side)
 Triangles ABC and ADC are congruent Fig. Refraction of light
Explanation:
i.e. ABC  DCA
BAC = DCA ... (2) Consider a plane wave front AB is incident
obliquely on the plane surface XY separating a
From (1) and (2) rarer medium of refractive index 1 and a denser
i =r medium of refractive index 2 at A. The point A on
Thus, the wave front acts as a secondary source and
(1) The angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emits a secondary wavelet in the denser medium.
reflection. Let the wave front at point B moves to the point
C in time t. If c1 is the speed of light in the rarer
(2) From the fig., it is seen that the, incident ray,
medium.
reflected ray and normal to the surface are in the
same plane.
Wave Theory of Light 125

Then the distance BC = c1t. During this time

secondary waves from A will cover a hemisphere
of radius AD = c2t in the second medium, where
c2 is the speed of light in the second medium. Direction of
Draw a tangent CD to this wave front. Thus the Propagation
tangent CD represents the refracted wave front.
From triangles ABC and ADC Fig. Unpolarized light
BC AD (b) Plane polarized light:
sin i = and sin r =
AC AC 1. A light, in which electric vibrations are in confined
sin i BC c1t c1 in one plane which is perpendicular to the
= = c t = c ... (1) directions of propagation, is called as polarized light.
sin r AD 2 2
By definition of refractive index, 2. Intensity of polarized light transmitted by Polaroid
changes from maximum to minimum when
2 velocity of light in rarer medium Polaroid is rotated about its axis.
1 = velocity of light in denser medium
3. Linearly polarized light is shown either by doubled
2 c1 head arrows or dots.
1 = c ... (2)
2

From (1) and (2) Direction of

Propagation of light
sin i 2
=  ... (3)
sin r 1 Plane polarised light containing changing electric
Hence, Snell’s law is proved. vector perpendicular to direction of propagation.
Also from the diagram Direction of
Propagation
sin i sin r Plane polarised light with vibrations of light
sin i perpendicular to the plane of the
1 paper
sin r Fig. Plane polarised light
2
1  1 ... (4) Q.4. State the Brewster’s law and show that when
light is incident at polarizing angle, the
From (3) and (4)
reflected and refracted rays are mutually
c1 perpendicular to each other.
c2  1
Ans. Brewster’s Law: The tangent of the polarising
 c1  c 2 angle is equal to the R.I. of the refracting medium
Thus the speed of light in rarer medium is greater at which partical reflection takes place.
than the speed of light in denser medium. When a beam of unpolarised monochromatic light
Q.3. What do you mean by polarization of light? is incident on a transparent medium at a certain
How will you distinguish between polarized angle, the reflected light is completely plane
and non-polarized light? polarized in the plane of incidence, and the reflected
and refracted rays are separated by 900 from each
Ans. Polarization of light:
other. This angle of incidence is called polarizing
The phenomenon of restriction of the vibrations angle (ip) From figure,
of light waves in a particular plane perpendicular
1800 = ip + rp + 900 ... (1)
to the direction of wave motion is called
polarization of light waves. Angle of refraction rp = 900 ip … (2)
(a) Unpolarised light: P

1. A light in which electric vibrations are in all R

Plane polarised
possible directions (in all planes), which are light
perpendicular to the directions of propagation, is
called as unpolarised light. ip ip
o
2. Intensity of unpolarised light transmitted by 90
Polaroid cannot change when Polaroid is rotated P1
rp
about its axis.
3. An unpolarised light is represented by both dots
and arrows as shown in figure. Doubled head Partially
arrows shows the vibrations in the plane of the Polarised
figure and dots represent vibration of electric Light S
vector perpendicular to the plane of the figure. Fig. Brewster’s law
126 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

From Snell’s law Q.6. Explain Doppler Effect in light.

2 sin i p Hence explain the red and blue shift. State
1 =
sin r p its two applications
2 sin i p Ans. Doppler Effect in light:
1 = An apparent change in frequency of source of light
sin (90  i p )
due to relative velocity between the source of light
2 sin i p and observer is called Doppler Effect.
1 = = tan ip
cos i p Apparent frequency of light,
If first medium is air  = 1 for second medium = 
 V 
 = tan ip 0 1  r 
 c 
 =
Q.5. Describe briefly, with the help of suitable 2
V 
diagram, how the transverse nature of light 1  r 
can be demonstrated by the phenomenon of c 
polarization. When Vr << c
Ans. Explanation:  Vr 
 = 0 1  c 
Two Polaroid’s P1 and P2 are kept such that their  
axis are parallel. When the unpolarised light is
 Vr 
incident on Polaroid P1, the emergent light gets   0 = ± 0  c 
polarized. This plane polarized light is now  
incident on the second polaroid P2 which is kept  Vr 
so that its axis is parallel to the first polaroid P 1. Doppler shift   c  ... (1)
 
(i) When the first Polaroid P1 is rotated in the path    Vr 
 
of an unpolarised light, there is no change in the 0 =  0 = ±  c  ... (2)
intensity of of light transmitted by fixed polaroid
P2 is observed. where,  is true wavelength of light and
T1 T1 is Doppler shift in wavelength
A A Vr is the radial component of the velocity of the
source relative to the observer.
(a) Red shift:
When the source of light and the observer move
B B away from each other, due to Doppler Effect a
Ordinary Plane Plane
polarised polarised wavelength in the middle of the visible spectrum
light
Polariser light Analyser light will be shifted towards red. This increases the
T1 apparent wavelength (decreases apparent
A T2 frequency of source of light as observed by the
observer). This is called as red shift.
(b) Blue shift:
No light When the source of light and the observer move
B towards each other, due to Doppler Effect a
Ordinary wavelength in the middle of the visible spectrum
light Analyser
Polariser will be shifted towards blue. This decreases the
(ii) When the first Polaroid P1 is kept fixed and second apparent wavelength (increases apparent
Polaroid P2 is rotated about its axis in the path of frequency of source of light as observed by the
light transmitted by P1 , it is observed that the observer). This is called as blue shift.
intensity of light transmitted byP 2 decreases Applications of Doppler Effect:
gradually and finally becomes zero when the axis 1. It is used to measure the speed of rotation of
of Polaroid P1 and P2 are perpendicular. the sun.
(iii) If polaroid is rotated further, then the intensity 2. It is used to measure the plasma temperature.
of light transmitted by the second Polaroid
becomes maximum, when their axes are parallel Q.7. Give an account of Huygens’s wave theory of
to each other. In one complete rotation of the light.
Polaroid P 2 with its axis, the intensity of Ans. Assumptions:
transmitted light by it becomes twice maximum 1. Light travels in the form of longitudinal wave.
and twice minimum. (Later on it was proved to transverse wave).
Since light can be polarized, this shows that light 2. Different colours of light are due to different
has transverse nature. wavelengths of waves.
Wave Theory of Light 127

3. When light enters our eyes we get the sensation In other words,
of light. Wave front carries a light energy in a direction
4. To explain the propagation of light through perpendicular to the surface.
vacuum, Huygens’s suggested the existence of
‘luminiferous ether ‘medium which was to pervade Q.9. State types of wave front. Give their origin
in space. Ether supposed to have zero density Ans. (i) Spherical wave front:
and perfect transparency. A point source of light gives rise to spherical wave
Success: front.
1. It could explain the law of reflection, refraction, e.g. A light emitted by the bulb at a finite distance.
interference, diffraction, etc. Wavefront
2. According to wave theory of light, the speed of
light in denser medium is less than the speed of
light in rarer medium which was experimentally
proved by Foucault.
Drawbacks: S Wavenormal
Point
1. It could not explain rectilinear propagation of light. source
2. It could not explain phenomenon like polarization,
photoelectric effect and Compton Effect.
3. Experimentally proved that ether does not exist.
Fig. Spherical wavefront
Q.8. Define and explain concept of wave surface,
wave front and wave normal. (ii) Plane wave front:
Ans. Wave surface: If a point source of light is placed at the focus of
Consider a point source S of light is situated in air, a convex lens, plane wave front is emerged from
the waves emitted by the source travel in all direction the lens.
with speed c. After time t each wave will cover a Also if a spherical wave front is at a very large
distance ct, therefore each wave will reach the distance from a point source then, a small part
surface of a sphere of radius ct with the source S as of the surface can be regarded as a plane wave
a Centre. Such a surface is called wave surface. front.
Wave front: e.g. Wave fronts due to sunlight
A locus of all the points of medium to which the
wave reach simultaneously so that all the points
are in the same phase is called wave front. Wavenormals
Source of light at
infinite distance
ct

S Wave
S normal

Wave front Fig. Plane wavefront

Fig. (a) Fig. (b) Convex Plane wave front

lens
Wave normal: Spherical wavefront
A perpendicular drawn to the surface of a wave
front at any point of a wave front in the direction
of propagation of light is called wave normal.
S
Wave front

Wave Point source

normal is at focus of
convex lens
(iii) Cylindrical wave front:
If a source is a linear e.g. slit it gives rise to
cylindrical wave front
e.g. Light emitted by a fluorescent tube.
Fig. (c)
128 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Wavefront c
vv = 
v

Difference in velocities of light in water

c c 
vr  vv =     
S  r v 

 1 1 
= 3  108   
 1.325 1.334 
 0.009 
= 3  108  
Fig. Cylindrical wavefront  1.334  1.325 

Q.10. Determine change in wavelength of light = 0.0153 × 108

during its passage from air to glass if the
refractive index of glass with respect to air is  vr  vv = 1.53 × 106 m/s
1.5 and frequency of light is 4 × 1014 Hz. Find
Q.12. If the critical angle of medium is sin1(3/5).
the wave number of light in glass
Find the polarizing angle.
(c = 3 × 108m/s)
Solution: Data:
Solution: Data:
3
n = 4 1014 Hz, c = 3  108m/s C = sin1 (3/5)  sin C =
5
g = 1.5, a  a = ?
1
c 3  108 Critical angle C = sin1   
 
a = =
n 4  1014 1
= 0.75 × 106 m  = sin C
o

  a = 7500 A 1 3
 =
a  5
 g =  5
g
  = = 1.667
3
7500
=   = tan ip
1.5
o 1.667 = tanip
= 5000 A
ip = tan1 (1.667)
 a  g = 7500  5000 = 59o2
o
= 2500 A Q.13. The parallel beam of light is incident on glass
1 slab at an angle of incidence 60 0. Find the
Wave number in glass =  ratio of width of the beam in glass to that in
g air if the refractive index of glass is 1.5.
1 Solution: Data:
=
5  107 CD
= 2 × 106/m i = 60o,  = 1.5, =?
AB
Q.11. The refractive indices of water for red and sin i
violet colours are 1.325 and 1.334 respectively. =
sin r
Find the difference between the velocities of
light for theses colours in water (c = 3 × 108m/s)
Solution: Data:
 r = 1.325, v = 1.334 B Rarer medium
c = 3  10 m/s
8
i
Difference in velocities of light in water i C
A r
vr  vv = ?
r
Velocity of light of red colour in water is
D
c
vr = 
r

Velocity of light of violet colour in water is

Denser medium
Wave Theory of Light 129

From diagram, r = sin1 (0.5773)

sin 60 r = 35o16
 =
sin r CD cos 35o16
sin 60 =
AB cos 60
sin r =
 0.8164
=
sin 60 0 .5
=
1.5 CD
 = 1.633
0.8660 AB
=
1.5
= 0.5773

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) On the basis of Huygens’ wave theory of light prove that velocity of light in a rarer medium is greater than
velocity of light in a denser medium. (March 2013)
(2) Draw a neat labelled diagram showing the plane of vibration and plane of polarisation for polarised light.
(Oct. 2014)
(3) What is a poloroid? State its ‘two’ uses. (Feb. 2015)
(4) With the help of neat diagrams, explain how the non-polar dielectric material is polarised in external electric
field of increasing intensity. Define polarisation in dielectrics. (Oct. 2015)
(5) Explain the construction of plane wavefront using Huygens’ principle. (July 2017)
Problems:
(1) The refractive indices of water for red and violet colours are 1.325 and 1.334 respectively. Find the difference
between the velocities of rays for these two colours in water. (c = 3 × 108 m/s) (Oct 2013)
(2) For a glass plate as a polarizer with refractive index 1.633, calculate the angle of incidence at which light is
polarised. (Feb. 2014)
(3) If the difference in velocities of light in glass and water is 2.7 × 10 7 m/s, find the velocity of light in air.
(Refractive index of glass = 1.5, Refractive index of water = 1.333) (Feb. 2014)
(4) A red light of wavelength 6400 in air has wavelength 4000 in glass. If the wavelength of violet light in air

is 4400 , find its wavelength in glass. (Assume that mr  mv) (Oct. 2014)

3
(5) If the critical angle of a medium is sin–1   find the polorising angle. (Feb. 2015)
5
(6) A parallel beam of monochromatic light is incident on a glass slab at an angle of incidence 60 o. Find the ratio
3
of width of the beam in the glass to that in the air if refractive index of glass is . (Oct. 2015)
2
(7) Determine the change in wavelength of light during its passage from air to glass. If the refractive index of
glass with respect to air is 1.5 and the frequency of light is 3.5 × 10 14 Hz, find the wave number of light in
glass. [Velocity of light in air, c = 3 × 108 m/s] (Feb. 2016)
(8) Determine the change in wavelength of light during its passage from air to glass, if the refractive index of
glass with respect to air is 1.5 and the frequency of light is 5 × 10 14 Hz. Find the wave number of light in glass.
[Velocity of light in air, c = 3 × 108 m/s] (July 2016)
(9) The width of plane incident wavefront is found to be doubled on refraction in denser medium. If it makes an
angle of 65o with the normal. Calculate the refractive index for the denser medium. (March 2017)
3 4
(10) The refractive indices of glass and water w.r.t. air and respectively. Determine the refractive index of
2 3
glass w.r.t. water. (July 2017)
4
(11) The refractive indices of water and diamond are and 2.42 respectively. Find the speed of light in water and
3
diamond. (c = 3 × 108 m/s) (March 2018)


130 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
11
Syllabus:
Interference of light, Conditions for producing steady Interference Pattern, Young’s Experiment, Analytical Treatment of
Interference Bands, Measurement of Wavelength by Biprism Experiment, Diffraction due to single slit,Rayleigh’s Criterion,
Resolving Power of Microscope and Telescope, Difference between Interference and Diffraction.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. In a biprism experiment two interfering waves are 6. In interference with two coherent sources of light,
produced due to division of the fringe width is
(a) amplitude (a) inversely proportional to the square of the
(b) wave front wavelength
(c) amplitude and wave front (b) inversely proportional to the wavelength
(d) neither amplitude nor wave front (c) directly proportional to the wavelength
2. The numerical aperture of objective of a microscope (d) directly proportional to the square of the
is 0.12. The limit of resolution when light of wavelength
o
wavelength 6000 A is used to view an object is 7. The ratio of the amplitudes of two interfering wave
is 3:1 then the ratio of maximum to minimum
(a) 0.25 × 107 m (b) 2.5 × 107 m intensities is
(c) 25 × 107 m (d) 250 × 107 m (a) 4:1 (d) 4:3 (b) 1:4 (c) 3:4
3. If numerical aperture of a microscope is increased, 8. Resolving power of an optical instrument is related
then its with
(a) resolving power decreases (a) interference of light
(b) resolving power remains same (b) polarisation of light
(c) limit of resolution decreases (c) diffraction of light
(d) limit of resolution increases (d) simultaneous reflection and refraction of light
4. Resolving power of telescope of aperture 100 cm for 9. The condition for destructive interference is that
light of wavelength 5500A0 is the path difference should be
(a) 0.149 × 107 (b) 1.49 × 107 (a) integer multiple of wavelength
7
(c) 14.9 × 10 (d) 149 × 107 (b) integer multiple of half wavelength
5. In the diffraction pattern due to a single slit of width (c) even multiple of half wavelength
d with incident light of wavelength  at an angle of (d) odd multiple of half wavelength
diffraction the condition for the first minimum is
10. The condition for constructive interference is that
(a) sin  = d (b) d cos  =
the path difference should be
(c) d sin  =  (d)  cos  = d
(a) odd multiple of wavelength
(b) integer multiple of half wavelength
(c) odd multiple of half wavelength
(d) even multiple of half wavelength

ANSWERS
1  (b), 2  (c), 3  (c), 4  (c), 5 (c), 6  (c), 7  (a), 8  (c), 9  (d), 10  (d).

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. What is diffraction of light?
Ans. Diffraction of light: The bending of light near
the edges of an obstacle or slit and spreading
into the region of geometric shadow is known as
diffraction of light.
Q.2. How does the fringe width get affected, if the
entire experimental apparatus of Young’s is
immerged in water?
Ans. Fringe width will decrease in water.
Q.3. How does the angular separation between
fringes in a single slit experiment change
when the separation between the slit and
screen is doubled?
Ans. No change.

(130)
Interference and Diffraction 131

Q.4. If monochromatic source of light is replaced Q.6. On which factors diffraction of light depends on?
by white light, what change would you observe
Ans. (i) Size of slit
in the diffractionpattern?
(ii) Wavelength of light
Ans. The central maximum is white but other bands
are coloured. Q.7. State the factors by which resolving power of
telescope can be increased.
Q.5. For a given single slit, the diffraction pattern
is obtained on a screen first by using red and Ans. Resolving power of telescope can be increased
then by blue light. In which case, will the by -
central maxima, in the observed diffraction (i) increasing the diameter of the objective.
pattern have a larger angular width? (ii) decreasing the wavelength of light used
Ans. Width of central maximum is Q.8. State the factors by which resolving power of
2 microscope can be increased?
2 =
a Ans. The resolving power of microscope can be
   increased by
Wavelength of red colour is greater than that of (i) increasing its numerical aperture
blue colour, so the angular width of red colour is (ii) decreasing the wavelength,  of light used to
larger. illuminate the objects.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. State the conditions to get constructive and Labelings:
destructive interference of light. D - Distance between sources and screen.
Ans. (a) Constructive interference or for bright points: B - Biprism
The path difference between two waves arriving R - Interference region
at a point should be equal to integer multiple of S1 S2 - coherent sources (virtual images of S)
wavelength or even multiple of half wavelength. S - Monochromatic source of light
Path difference = n Q.4. Draw neat labelled ray diagram for magnified
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 … is an integer and diminished images formed by convex lens
(b) Destructive interference or for dark points in biprism experiment.
The path difference between two waves arriving
Ans. Ray diagrams showing magnified and diminished
at a point should be equal to odd multiple of half
images of two virtual sources (virtual source)
wavelength.
using convex lens
 3 5  B1
Path difference = , , ..., (2m  1) L1
2 2 2 2
where m = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 … is an integer S1
Q.2. State the conditions for steady interference
d d1
Ans. Conditions for stedy interference pattern:
(i) Two sources of light must be coherent.
(ii) Two sources of light must be monochromatic. S2
(iii) The two sources of light must emit light of equal A1
intensity or amplitude. u v
(iv) The sources of light must be narrow. D
Q.3. Draw neat labelled ray diagram of biprism Fig. (a) Magnified images
ex periment showing clearly two virt ual L2
sources and the region of interference. S1
B2
Ans. Diagram: d2
d
S1 B A2
S2
v u
d S R
D
Fig. (b) Dimagnified images
S1 B
D
132
Labellings:
S1 S2 - virtual sources
L1L2 - convex lenses
B1A1 - magnified images of sources S1S2
B2A2 - diminished images of sources S1S2
D - Distance between the slit and eyepiece.
Q.5. Di stinguish betwee n interference a nd
diffraction.
Ans. (i) Interference pattern is formed by the
superposition of waves from two different
coherent sources whereas diffraction pattern is
formed by the superposition of waves from the
different parts of the same wave front.
(ii) Interference fringes have equal width whereas
diffraction fringes are not of the same width.
(iii) Interference fringes have equal intensity where-
as in diffraction pattern intensity is maximum
for central maximum and goes on decreasing as (ii)
we go from centre
(iv) The dark fringes are perfectly dark in interference
pattern but in diffraction pattern they are not
perfectly dark.
Q.6. What is difference between Fraunhofer and
Fresnel Diffraction?
OR
What is diffraction of light? Explain its two
types
Ans. Diffraction: The bending of light near the edges
of an obstacle or slit and spreading into the
region of geometric shadow is known as diffraction
of light.
Types of diffraction:
(i) Fraunhofer diffraction:
The source of light and the screen are kept at
infinite distance from the diffraction aperture. In
this case, we consider plane wave front.
The diffraction pattern is obtained by using convex
lens.
(ii) Fresnel diffraction: Q.8. Draw a neat labelled diagram of Fraunhofer
The source of light and the screen are kept at finite
distance from the diffraction aperture. In this case,
Ans. Diagram:
we consider cylindrical or spherical wave front.
Q.7. What is interference of light?
Ex plain co nstr uctive and destr ucti ve
interference of light.
Ans. Interference of light:
The modification in the intensity of light
(redistribution of light energy) produced by the
superposition of two or more light waves is called
interference of light.
(i) Constructive interference of light:
When two light waves of same wavelength and
same intensity emitted by two coherent sources
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
arrive at a point simultaneously in phase such
that, the crest of one wave falls on the crest of
the other wave or trough of one wave falls on the
trough of other wave, the resultant amplitude
increases and the energy becomes maximum. The
point becomes bright. This interference is called
constructive interference of light.
Bright
(constructive
interference)


Fig. (a)
Destructive interference of light:
When two light waves of same wavelength and same
intensity emitted by two coherent sources arrive at
a point simultaneously in out of phase such that,
the crest of one wave falls on the trough of the other
wave or vice versa, the resultant amplitude decreases
and the energy becomes minimum. The point
becomes dark. This interference is called destructive
interference of light.
Dark
(destructive
interference)


Fig. (b)
Thus due to interference of light dark and bright
bands are formed in the region of interference.
diffraction due to single slit
L X
S
 P
A
 x
a 
C O
B E

Screen
Plane D
wavefront Y
Fig. Diffraction due to single slit
Interference and Diffraction 133

Labellings: X = 0.8 mm = 0.8  103 m.

AB – slit of width a Wavelength () = ?
L – Convex lens D
The fringe width, X =
XY – screen d
D – Distance between slit and screen Xd
  =
D
x – Position of secondary minimum from the
central maximum 0.8  103  0.75  103
  =
Q.9. Two slits in Young’s experiment have width 1
o
in the ratio 49:1. What is the ratio of the = 0.6  106 m = 6000 A
amplitude of light wave coming from them?
Solution: Data: Q.12. In biprism experiment, the wave length of
o
w1 : w2 = 49 : 1 monochromatic light is 6000 A . The distance
a1 : a2 = ? betwwen the two virtual sources is 6 mm. Find
the number of fringes formed per mm on a
Width of slit  Intensity
screen placed 1 m away from source.
i.e. w  I
Ans: Data:
and Intensity  (amplitude)2 o
i.e. I  a2  = 6000 A = 6  107m,
 w  a2 d = 6 mm = 6  107m, D = 1 m.
No. of fringes in 1mm = ?
w1 a12
 = d 6  107  1
w2 a22 We have, X = =
D 6  103
49 a12  X = 104 m
= 2
1 a2
103
a1 7  No. of fringes formed per mm =
 = 10 4
a2 1
= 10
a1 : a2 = 7 : 1 Q.13. In a biprism experiment, the distance between
Q.10. In Young’s experiment wave length of light the slit and the focal plane of the eye-piece
o
5000 A is used. One of the slit is convered was 1m and the wavelength of light used was
o
by a tranparent sheet of thickness 18 m, 4800 A . When a convex lens was interposed
made of material of refractive index 1.5. Find between the biprism and the eye-piece, the
the number of fringes shifted due to the distance between the images of the two
induction of sheet. virtual souces was found to be 1.6 mm and
3.6 mm, respectively, for two different
Solution: Data:
o
positions of the lens. Compute the fringe
 = 5000 A = 5  107, width.
 = 1.5, t = 18 m = 18 106m Solution: Data:
D=1m
  1 t o
No. of fringes =  = 4800 A = 4.8  107 m,

(1.5  1)  18  106 d1 = 1.6 mm = 1.6  103 m,
= d2 = 3.6 mm = 3.6  103 m,
5  10 7
0.5  18 Fringe width (X) = ?
=
5  10 5 We have, d = d1d2 = 1.6  3.6
= 18
= 16  36  10 2
Q.11. In a biprism experiment, the distance between
the slit and the screen is 1 m and the distance = 4  6  101 = 2.4 mm
betwwen the two virtual images of the slit is D 4.8  107  1
0.75 mm. If the fringe width is 0.8mm, Find Now, X = =
the wavlength of light used.
d 2.4  10 3
= 2  10 m = 0.2 mm.
4

Solution: Data:
D = 1 m,
d = 0.75 mm = 0.75  103 m,
134 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.14. In a Fraunhofer diffraction pattern due to a

f  1  5  107
single slit of width 0.05 mm the fourth dark  d1 = =
band occurs in a direction making an angle
D 10 4
 = 5  103 m = 5 mm
of 2o40 with the normal to the plane of the
slit. Find the wavelength of light used. Q.16. Find the resolving power of a microscope
which has a numerical aperture of 0.15.
Solution: Data: o

d = 0.05 mm = 5  105 m, Wavelength of light used is 6000 A .

 = 2o40 , m = 4 Solution: Data:
Wavelength () = ? Numerial aperture (N.A.) = 0.15,
o
m Wavelength () = 6000 A = 6  107 m,
We have, sin  =
d Resolving power (R.P.) = ?
4 2  N .A. 2  0.15
 sin 2o40 = We have, R.P. = =
5  10 5  6  10 7
4 = 0.05  107 m = 5  105 m
 0.0466 =
5  10 5 Q.17. The two headlights of an ap proaching
0.0466  5  105 automoblie are 1.22 m apart. At what maximum
  = distance will eye resolve them? Assume a pupil
4
  = 5.825  107 m diameter of 5.0 mm and  = 5500 A.U. Assume
o also that this distance is determined only by
= 5825 A diffraction effect at the circular apperature.

Q.15. The Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a slit of Solution: Data:

o
width 0.1 mm is formed on a screen by
x = 1.22 m, a = 5 mm = 5  107 m,  = 5500 A .
keeping a convex lens of focal length one
metre just behind the slit. If the light used is Maximum distance resolved (d) = ?
o
of wavelength 5000 A , find the distance of the x 1.22
We have, =
fir st dark band fro m the ce ntre of the d a
diffraction pattern formed on the screen. 1.22 1.22  5500  1010
 =
Solution: Data: d 5  103
f = 1m, D= 0.1 mm = 0.1  103 m = 1  104 m,
5  103
o
 d =
 = 5000 A = 5  10 m, 7
5500  1010
Distance of 1st dark band from center of pattern = ?  d = 9090.9 m
d1 
We have, f =
D

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Wha t is resolving p ower of an o ptical
instrument? Explain Rayleigh’s criterion for
central maximum.
Ans. Resolving power of an optical instrument:
The smallest angular or linear separation between
the two point objects at which they appear be
just resolved is called limit of resolution of an
optical instrument and the reciprocal of the limit
of resolution is called resolving power of an optical
instrument.
Rayleigh’s criterion for central maximum:
(i) The images of two point objects close to each
other are considered to be just resolved if the Fig. Images of two objects are just resolved
central maximum of one falls on the first
minimum of the other. (ii) The two objects are said to be well resolved, if
the separation between the central maximum of
the two objects is greater than the distance
Interference and Diffraction 135

between the central maximum and first minimum Therefore,

of any of the two objects. 2d sin  = 
or

d = ... (1)
2 sin 
v
But  

For non-luminous objects
A v
Fig. Images of two objects are well resolved d = ... (2)
2  sin 
(iii) Two objects are said to be unresolved, if the where,
separation between the central maximum of the v = wavelength of light in vacuum.
two objects is less than the distance between
 = refractive index of medium between the
the central maximum and first minimum of any
objective lens and the object and
of the two objects.
 = semi vertical angle of a cone.
Equation (2) gives the limit of resolution of
microscope
d = /2 (N.A)
where, N.A. =  sin  is called the numerical
aperture of the microscope.
Fig. Images of two objects are unresolved
The resolving power of a microscope is the
reciprocal of limit of resolving power
Q.2. Explain the resolving power of a microscope
with the help of a neat diagram. 1
 R.P. of microscope =
d
On what factors does it depend?
2 sin  2N .A 
Ans. The limit of resolution of a microscope: = =
 
It is defined as the minimum linear distance
between the two objects so that their images are Resolving power of a microscope depends on-
just resolved. The reciprocal of limit of resolution (i) The numerical aperture of the objective.
is called resolving power of microscope (ii) Wavelength of the light used to illuminate the
M object.
Q.3. Explain the resolving power of a telescope
B with the help of a neat diagram.
d 
A
A 
On what factors does it depend?
O
Ans. Resolving power of telescope:
B
Resolving power of telescope is defined as the
reciprocal of the smallest angle subtended at the
N
Fig. Resolving power of microscope objective by the two distance point objects which
can be distinguished just resolved in the focal
Fig- MN is the aperture of the objective of a
plane of the telescope.
microscope and Aand B are two point objects at a
distance d apart. Let a be the diameter of objective of the telescope.
Consider the rays of light from two neighbouring
A is the position of the central maximum of A
points of a distant object. The image of each is
and B’ is the central maximum of B.
afraunhofer diffraction pattern.
A and B are surrounded by alternate dark and
bright diffraction rings. The two images are said d A
to be just resolved if the position of central P2
maximum of first image coincide with the position
of the first minimum of the second image. P2
d
The path difference between the extreme rays P1
from the points A and Band reaching A is given 0
P1
as path difference = 2d sin 
C
If this path difference 2d sin  =
Then A corresponds to the first minimum of
image B and two images appear just resolved. B
136 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Let P 1 and P 2 be the positions of the central B1

maximum of the two images. According to L1
Rayleigh, these two images are said to be resolved S1
if the position of central maximum of second
object coincides with the first minimum of the d d1
first object and vice-versa.
The path difference between the AP1 and BP1is S2
zero and hence P 1 is the position of central
maximum of the image of the first object. A1
u v
The Secondary waves travelling in the directions
D
AP2 and BP2 will meet at P2 on the screen. Let
Fig. (a)
angle P2AP1 be d.
L2
The path difference between the Secondary waves
S1
travelling in the directions AP2 and BP2 is equal B2
to BC. d2
d
Therefore ABC A2
BC = AB sin d S2

= ABd v u
= a d D
If this path difference is = , then Fig. (b)
The position of P 2 corresponds to the first
minimum of the first image. But P2 is also the D
position of the central maximum of the second S1 S2 - virtual sources
image. L1, L2 - convex lens
Thus Rayleigh’s condition of resolution is B1A1 - magnified images of sources S1S2
satisfied if a d= B2A2 - diminished images of sources S1S2
i.e. d= /a D - Distance between the slit and eyepiece.
The equation holds good for rectangular aperture. The convex lens is introduced between the
For circular aperture this equation can be written biprism and the eyepiece. The lens is moved
1.22 towards the biprism and its position is so
as d= adjusted that two magnified images A1 and B1 of
a
S1 and S2 are formed in the focal plane of the
Where,  is the wavelength of light and a is the
eyepiece. The distance d1 between A1 and B1 is
diameter of aperture.
measured by the micrometer.
This is the limit of resolution of telescope.
From fig. (a)
The reciprocal of limit of resolution d is Resolving
power of the telescope. Size of image Distance of image
Size of object = Distance of object
1
R.P. = v
d d1
= ... (1)
a d u
= Now the lens is moved towards the eyepiece and
1.22
Resolving power of telescope depends on- its position is so adjusted that two magnified
images and of and are formed in the focal plane
(i) Diameter of the objective lens of the eyepiece. The distance d2 between and is
(ii) Wavelength of light measured by the micrometer.
Q.4. In biprism experiment, explain how distance From fig. (b),
between the two sources can be measured by In this method object and image distance gets
using conjugate foci method. Draw the necessary interchanged.
diagrams and derive the necessary formula.
d2 u
Ans. Ray diagrams showing magnified and diminished = ... (2)
d v
images of two virtual sources using convex lens Multiply (1) and (2), we get
is as follows:
d2 d2 v u
 = 
d d u v
d1 d2
 =1
d d
Interference and Diffraction 137

d2 = d1 d2  2 d 2 
=  D  x 2
 xd 
 4 
 d = d1d2
(S2P  S1P) (S2P + S1P) = 2xd
This is distance between the two virtual sources.
2xd
Q.5. Using analytical method, obtain an expression (S2P  S1P) = (S P  S P )
2 1
for path difference between two interfering
Since x and d are very small compared to D.
light waves.
S 2P = S 1P = D
Ans. Suppose a narrow slit is illuminated by
2xd
monochromatic source of light of wavelength . (S2P  S1P) =
S1 and S2 are two parallel narrow slits separated 2D
by distance d. Let D is the distance between the xd
Path difference =
slits and screen. D
X This is the expression of path difference.
Q.6. State and explain the conditions for steady
P
interference
Ans. (i) Two sources of light must be coherent:
x The two sources are said to be coherent if they
S1 M1 emit light waves of equal frequency or wavelength
d/2 and waves emitted from them are always in same
M phase or have constant phase difference.
S O
d d/2 It is necessary that the two sources should be
derived from same original source. The changes in
S2 M2
the phase of the original source are simultaneously
D produced in the secondary or virtual sources and
hence a constant phase difference is maintained.
Y This condition must be satisfied to obtain steady
Fig. Theory of interference bands interference pattern.
Draw S1M and S2N perpendicular to XY. O is the (ii) Two sources of light must be monochromatic:
midpoint of the screen. Since S1O = S2O, the path A monochromatic source of a light is a source
difference between waves reaching point O from which emits light waves of only one wavelength.
S1 and S2 is zero. When light sources are not monochromatic, then
i.e. S1O = S2O = 0 (½m) the sources emit light waves of more than one
wavelength. There may be constructive
Therefore point O is central bright band. interference at one point due to one wavelength
The path difference between the waves reaching and destructive interference at the same point
the point P from. S1 S2 is due to another wavelength. This gives indistinct
S 2P – S1P = ? interference pattern. (1m)
In S2NP (iii) The two sources of light must emit light of
equal intensity or amplitude:
(S2P) = (S2N) + (NP)
2 2 2
(½m)
2
The intensities of bright and dark fringes are given
 d as (a1 + a2)2 and (a1  a2)2 respectively
= (D) +  x  
2

 2 Where a1 and a2 are the amplitudes of the two

d2 waves. If a1 = a2, then the maximum contrast
= D2 + x2 + xd + ... (1) (½m) would be obtained, as the dark fringes will have
4
In S1MP zero intensity. If a1 a2 then the intensity in the
interference pattern will vary from maximum to
(S1P)2 = (S1M)2 + (MP)2 minimum but not become zero. Therefore the
2
 d contrast will be reduced and the interference
= (D)2 +  x   pattern will become less sharp. (1m)
 2
(iv) The sources of light must be narrow:
d2
= D2 + x2  xd + ... (2) (½m) If the two sources are broad, the wave starting
4
from different points on the sources travel
Subtracting (1) and (2) different distances to reach the same point on
(S2P)2  (S1P)2 the screen. These waves will interfere with one
 2 d2  another and their own interference pattern will
=  D  x  xd  4 
2
be obtained. The resultant interference pattern
 
138 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

so obtained will not be clear and distinct. On the Q.8. In Young’s double slit experiment the slits
contrary there may be uniform illumination. are 0.5 mm apart and interference is observed
(v) The separation between the two light sources on a screen placed at a distance of 100 cm
should be as small as possible: from the slits. It is found that the 9th bright
fringe is at a distance 8.835 mm from the
If the sources are sufficiently close to each other,
second dark fringe from the centre of the
then the interference fringes are widely spaced
fringe pattern. Find the wavelength of light
and can be seen clearly.
used.
(vi) Distance of the screen from the two sources
should be large: Solution: Data:
If the screen is quite far from the sources, then d = 0.5 mm = 0.5  103 m = 5  104 m,
the fringe width should be appreciable and widely D = 100 cm = 1 m,
spaced fringes are obtained. Distance between 9th bright and 2nd dark fringe
Q.7. M onochromat ic light fr om a narro w slit = X9  X2 = 8.835 mm = 8.835 × 103 m
illuminates two narrow slits 0.3 mm apart Wavelength of light () = ?
producing an interference pattern with bright We know, distance of nth bright band from central
fringes 1.5 mm apart on a screen 75 cm away. band is
Find the wavelength of the light. How will the
fringe width be altered if (a) the distance of Dn
xn =
the screen is doubled and (b) the separation d
between the slits is doubled? For 9th band n = 9
Solution: Data: 9D
 x9 = ... (1)
3
d = 0.3 mm = 0.3 × 10 = 3 × 10 m 4 d
X = 1.5 mm = 1.5 × 103 = 15 × 104 mm Distance of nth dark from central band is
D = 75 mm = 75 × 102 m (2n  1)D
xn =
(i) Wavelength () = ? 2d
(ii) Fringe width = ? For 2nd band n = 2
(i) Wavelength is given by
(2  2  1)D
Xd  x2 =
 = 2d
D
3 D
15  104  3  104  x2 =  ... (2)
  = 2 d
75  102
= 0.6  106 From equation (1) and (2)
= 6  107 m 9D 3D
o x9  x 2 = 
  = 6000 A d 2
(ii) To Find fringe width = ? 15D
 x9  x 2 =
2d
Case I: If distance of screen is doubled then D= 2D
15  1  
D  (2D ) 8.835 × 103 =
 X1 = = 2  5  10 4
d d
8.835 × 103 × 10 × 104 = 15
6  107  2  75  102
= 8.835  106
3  10 4   =
15
= 2 × 2 × 75 × 105
  = 0.589 × 106 m
= 300 × 105 o
= 3 × 103 m   = 5890 A
 X1 = 3 mm Q.9. In biprism experiment, the slit is illuminated
o
Case II: The separtion between the slit is doubles by red light of wavelength 6400 A and the
i.e. d = 2d cross wire of eyepiece is adjusted to the centre
D D of 3rd bright band. By using blue light it is
 X2 = = found that 4 bright band is at the centre of
d 2d
the cross wire. Find the wavelength of blue
6  107  75  102
= light.
2  3  10 4
= 75 × 105 m Solution: Data: Wavelength of red light,
o
 X2 = 0.75 mm (R) = 6400 A = 6400  1010 m
Interference and Diffraction 139

Wavelength of blue light, (B) = ? 1.6  546  106

We know, distance of nth bright band =
5.2
Dn = 168 × 106 m
xn =
d  d = 0.168 mm
For 3rd band of red colour, n = 3
3D R Q.11. Find the ratio of intensities at two points x
 x3 = ... (1) and y on a screen in Young ’ s double slit
d experiment where waves from S1 and S2 have
For 4th band of red colour, n = 4 path difference of
4D B
 x4 = ... (2) 
d (i) 0 and (ii)
4
But x3 = x4
Solution: Data: For point X, P.D. = 0
3D R 4D B
=
d d  Ix
For point Y, P.D. = , =?
3R = 4B 4 Iy
3 For point X, path difference is 0 corresponds to
 B = 
4 R phase difference is zero.
3 i.e.  = 0
B =  6400  1010
4
Intensity is given by
B = 4800  1010 m
o
 B = 4800 A Ix  a12 + a 22 + 2a1a2 cos 

Q.10. In a single slit diffraction pattern the distance Ix = k ( a12 + a 22 + 2a1a2cos 0)

between the first minimum on the right and
the first minimum on the left is 5.2 mm. The Ix = k ( a12 + a 22 + 2a1a2)
screen on which the pattern is displayed is Ix = k (a1 + a2)2 ... (1)
80 cm from the slit and the wavelength is
o 
5460 A . Calculate the slit width. For point Y, path difference is of
4
Solution: Distance between 1st minima on right side  1  
 P.D = = = 0.5
and 1st minima on left side = 5.2 mm 4 2 2 2
i.e. x1 + x1 = 5.2 × 103 mm  
 P.D. corresponds to phase difference  
Distance between slit and screen (D) 4 2
= 80 cm = 0.8 m 
i.e.  =
o 2
Wavelength () = 5460 A
 Iy  a12 + a 22 + 2a1a2cos 
= 5460  1010 m
 
d=? I x = k  a12  a 22  2a1a 2 cos 
 2
For nth minima,
I x = k ( a12 + a 22 ) ... (2)
Dn
xn = Divide equation (1) by (2)
d
For 1st minima n = 1 x1 x1 Ix (a1  a2 )2
1st 1st
x1 =
D minima minima Iy =

a12  a22 
d
If a1 = a2 = a
 Distance between 1st minima on left side and
1st minima on right side is Ix (2a )2 4a 2 2
= x1 + x1  = 2 = =
Iy 2a 2a 2 1
= 2x1  I x :I y = 2 : 1
D Q.12. Two coherent sources, whose intensity ratio
= 2.
d is 81:1 produce interference fringes. Calculate
2  5460  1010  0.8 the ratio of intensity of maxima and minima
 5.2 × 103 = in the fringe system.
d
1.6  546  109 Solution: Data:
 d =
5.2  103 I1: I2 = 81 : 1, Imax : Imin = ?
140 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

I max (a1  a2 )2 a1 9
 = ... (1)  =
I min (a1  a 2 )2 a2 1
 a1 = 9a2
We know, Intensity  (amplitude)2
 Puting this value in equation (1)
i.e. I  a2
I max (9a 2  a 2 )2 (10a 2 )2 100
I1 a12  = 2 = =
 I2 = a22
I min (9a 2  a 2 ) (8a 2 )2 64
I max 25
81 a12  =
= a2 I min 16
1 2
 Imax : Imin = 25 : 16

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. In Young’s double slit experiment, deduce the where R is the resultant amplitude
condition for
Squaring and adding (2) and (3) we get
(a) constructive and (b) destructive interference
at a point on the screen. Draw a graph showing R2 cos2 + R2 sin2  = (a1 + a2cos )2 + a 22 sin 2
variation of intensity in the interference = a12 + 2a1a2cos  + a 22 cos2 
pattern against position x on the screen.
Compare the interference pattern in Young’s + a 22 sin2 
double slit experiment with single diffraction R2 [cos2 + sin2 = a12 + 2a1 + a2cos  +
pattern.
a 22 [cos2 + sin2]
Solution:
R2 = a12 + 2a1 + a2cos  + a 22
P
R= a12  2a1a2 cos   a22 ... (5)
This is to resultant amplitude
The resultant intensity is proportinal to the
square of amplitude.
A
 I  R2
O  IR  a12 + 2a1 + a2cos + a 22

I R = I1 + 2 I1  I 2 cos + I2 ... (6)

B
Fig. Interference due to two light sources Resultant intensity of light at point on the screen
is given by
Let two waves originating from two coherent
sources of light A and B in fig. Their displacement I R = I1 + I2 + 2 I1I 2 cos 
at a point P are represented as if I 1 = I2 = I0
y1 = a1 sin t and

y2 = a2 sin (t + ) I B = 4I0cos2 ... (7)
2
where  is the phase difference between the two Conditions :
waves.
(a) For constructive interference, intensity is
The resultant displacement at P due to these maximum
waves is
IR = 4I0
y = y1 + y2

= a1 sin t + a2sin (t + ) i.e. cos = ±1
2
= a1 sin t + a2 [sin t cos  + cos t sin 
or  = 0 , 2, 4 ..... 2n 
= a1sin t + a2 sin t cos  + a2 cos t sin 
where n = 0, 1, 2, ........
= (a1 + a2cos ) sin t + a2 cos t sin  ... (1)
(b) For destructive interference, intensity is
Put R cos  = a1+ a2 cos  ... (2) minimum
And IR = 0
R sin a2sin  ... (3) 
Equation (1) becomes i.e. cos =0
2
y = R sin (t + ) ... (4) or  = , 3, 5 ... (2n + 1) 
Interference and Diffraction 141

where n = 0, 1, 2, ... Draw S1M and S2N perpendicular to XY. O is the

Graph: midpoint of the screen. Since S1O = S2O, the path
difference between waves reaching point O from
Intensity S1 and S2 is zero.
i.e. S1O = S2O = 0
Therefore point O is central bright band.
The path difference between the waves reaching
the point P from. S1 and S2 is (S2P – S1P)
In S2NP
O  (S2P)2 = (S2N)2 + (NP)2
3 2  2 3
a a a a a a 2
sin   d
= (D)2 +  x  
 2
Fig. Graph of intensity against sin 
d2
= D2 + x2 + xd + ... (1)
Diffraction due to single slit: 4
(i) Diffraction is produced due to superposition of In S1MP
waves from different part of same wave front. (S1P)2 = (S1M)2 + (MP)2
(ii) Width of central bright band is double than the 2
 d
width of secondary maxima = (D)2 +  x  
 2
(iii) Intensity of bands decreases as we go away from
centre. d2
= D2 + x2  xd + ... (2)
Interference due to double slit : 4
(i) It is produced due to superposition of two Subtracting (1) from (2)
different wave front. (S2P)2  (S1P)2
(ii) Fringe width is same for all bands  2 d 2   2 d 2 
 D  x 2
 xd  D  x 2
 xd 
(iii) All bands have same intensity. = 
 4    4 
Q.2. Using analytical method, obtain an expression (S2P  S1P) (S2P + S1P) = 2xd
for path difference between two interfering
light waves. Hence show that bright and dark 2xd
(S2P)2  (S1P) = (S P  S P )
bands are p rodu ced alte rnat ely in t he 2 1
interference pattern
Since x and d are very small compared to D
The ratio of intensity at the maxima and
S 2P = S 1P =D
minima in the interference pattern is 25:9.
What will be the ratio of widths of the two slit? 2xd
 (S2P  S1P) =
2D
Ans. Suppose a narrow slit is illuminated by
monochromatic source of light of wavelength . xd
Path difference = ... (3)
S1 and S2 are two parallel narrow slits separated D
by distance d. Let D is the distance between the This is the expression of path difference.
slits and screen. (i) Condition for constructive interference or
X bright band:
Path difference = n ... (4)
P
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3 …
From (3) and (4)
x
xd
S1 M1 = n
D
d/2
M nD
S O x =
d
d d/2 For first bright band n = 1
S2 M2
D
D x1 =
d
nD
Y  xn =
d
Fig. Theory pf interference bands
This gives the distance of nth bright band.
142 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Distance for (n +1)th bright band is I1 a12

I2 = a2
D 1
xn+1 = (n + 1)
d = 16
Distance between two successive bright band is Since intensity of the wave is directly proportional
to the width of slit
X = xn + 1  xn
D w1 I1
D = = 16
= (n + 1)  n w2 I2
d d
Q.3. Describe with neat diagram, the fraunhofer
D diffraction pattern due to single slit. Hence
X = ... (5)
d show that the angular width of first diffraction
This is band width for bright band fringe is half that of the central maximum.
Represent variation of intensity of diffraction
(ii) Condition for Destructive interference or
due to a single slit.
dark band:
Path difference for destructive interference or Ans.
dark band is L X
S

Path difference = m  1 2   ... (6)  P
A
From (5) and (6)  x


xd
D

= m  12   a
C
 O

 1  D E
xm =  m   ... (7) B 
 2 d Screen
This gives the distance of m dark band distance
th
Plane D
between the (m +1)th dark band is wavefront Y
D
xm+1 = m  1  1 2  Suppose a plane wave front is incident on slit AB
d
D of width a. Diffracted light is focused by convex
= m  12 ... (8) lens L on the screen XY which is kept at a
d
distance D from the slit.
 Distance between two successive dark band is
Let C be the center of the slit AB. The secondary
D D
xm+1  xm = m  12  m  1 2 waves from points equidistant from center C of
d d the slit lying on portionCB of wave front travel
D the same distance in reaching O and hence the
= ... (9)
d path difference between them is zero. Therefore
the point O is a point of maximum intensity.
D (central maximum).
 X = ... (10)
d Condition for position of secondary minima:
From (5) and (10), We now consider the intensity at point P. Draw a
it proves that band width is same for bright and perpendicular from point A to E,
dark band. From, ABE,
Problem : BE
sin  =
I max AB
25
BE = AB sin 
I min = 9
BE = a sin 
w1 Path difference between the secondary waves
w2 = ? starting from A and B is
2 Path difference = a sin 
I max  a1  a 2  25
 
I min =  a1  a 2  =
9
where, a is slit width
The wave front can be divided into two half’s CA
a1  a 2 5 and CB If path difference between the secondary
a1  a 2 = 3 waves starting from A and B is . Then the path
a1 difference between the secondary waves from A
=4 and Cis /2. Wavelets from the corresponding
a2
points of the two halves of the slit will have path
difference of /2. Therefore these waves will reach
Interference and Diffraction 143

at the point P in opposite phase. Thus destructive Explanation:

interference takes place or point P is of minimum In the fig. continuous circular lines represent
intensity if crests and dotted circular lines represent troughs
Path difference is , 2, 3… n of waves.
Thus Position for secondary minimum intensity is,
a sin  = n
D
n
sin  = ... (1)
a
If  is small then sin= 
B
n
 =
a
D
For first minimum S1
n =1
S B

 = ... (2) S2
a
D
This is the angular width of first minimum
Width of central maximum
B
2
2 = ... (3)
a
Thus angular width of central maximum is double
than the width of first minimum. D
Variation of intensity of diffraction pattern with
Fig. Young’s Experiment
sin , is shown in fig.
At the points marked by cross (x), the crests of
Central one wave falls on the crests of the other wave, or
I0 maximum
the troughs of one wave falls on the troughs of
the other. Therefore the brightness is produced
First at these points. A similarly
minimum
Second First Second
minimum At the points marked by dots, the crests of one
wave falls on the troughs of the other wave, and
vice versa. Therefore the darkness is produced
3  O  3 at these points.
 
a a a a a a
In young’s double slit experiment, the pinholes
sin 
S1 and S2 are replaced by narrow slits and sunlight
Q.4. Describe Young’s double slit experiment to by monochromatic light. The number of alternate
observe an interference of light and write two bright and dark fringes is formed on the screen.
points of importance of the experiment. These fringes are of equal width and parallel to
the slits.
In Young’s double slit experiment the slits
are 0.5 mm apart and interference is observed Importance of Young’s double slit experiment:
on a screen placed at a distance of 100 cm (i) It was the first experiment to show the interference
from the slits. It is found that the 9th bright of light waves.
fringe is at a distance 8.835 mm from the (ii) From this experiment, it is possible to
centre of t he fringe pa tter n. Find the calculate wavelength of monochromatic light by
wavelength of light used. using formula
Ans. Experimental arrangement: Xd
=
Experiment arrangement is shown in fig. In this D
experiment sunlight was allowed to pass through where, X is fringe width and d is distance between
a pinhole S. The light emerging from S was the screen & source, d is the distance between
allowed to pass through two pinholes S1 and S2 the two slits.
kept very close to each other and considerable Problem:
distance away from the source S. These two
x9 = 8.835 mm = 8.835 103 m
pinholes S1 and S2 act as two coherent sources.
The two sets of spherical waves emerging from S 1 D = 100 cm = 1 m
and S2 interfere with each other and produce a d = 0.5 mm = 5 m
symmetrical interference pattern on the screen. = ?
144 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Distance of nth bright band is same line. The slit is made narrow and is
D illuminated by sodium vapor lamp (monochromatic
xn = n  source). The slit is kept vertical. The biprism is
d
D now rotated slowly about a horizontal axis, so that
x9 = 9  its refracting edge becomes parallel to the slit.
d
The interference pattern consists of alternate
 1
8.835  103 = 9  bright and dark fringes parallel to the slit are
5  10  4 observed in the field of view of the eyepiece.
8.835  103  5  104 Wavelength of monochromatic light can be
 =
9 calculated by using formula
o
= 5890 A Xd
 =
D
Q.5. Describe biprism experiment to find the Measurement:
wavelength of monochromatic light. Draw the
necessary ray diagram for magnified and (i) The distance between the slit and eyepiece
diminished images of virtual sources. D can be measured directly from the scale marked
on the optical bench.
Ans. Ray diagram :
(ii) Band width (X):
S1 B
It is measured with the help of micrometer
eyepiece. The vertical cross wire in the eyepiece
S R is adjusted at the center of a bright band. The
d micrometer reading is noted. Now the eyepiece
is moved horizontally until cross wire is adjusted
S1 B to a known number N of the bright fringes. The
corresponding micrometer reading is noted. Then
D
the average distance between two adjacent bright
Fig. Biprism experiment
fringes is
Labelings: difference between two readings
X =
D - Distance between sources and screen. N
B - Biprism (iii) The distance between two virtual sources (d):
R - Interference region The convex lens is introduced between the
S1S2 - coherent sources (virtual images of s) biprism and the eyepiece. The lens is moved
towards the biprism and its position L 1 is so
S - Monochromatic source of light.
adjusted that two magnified images A1 and B1 of
Block diagram: S1 and S2 are formed in the focal plane of the
S B L1 L2 eyepiece. The distance d1 between A1 and B1 is
measured by the micrometer.
E
B1
L1
x
Monochromatic S1
source of light

d d1
Biprism experimental arrangement

Labellings: S2
S - Slit A1
u v
B - Biprism
D
L1 and L2 - convex lens Fig. (a) Magnified images
E - Eyepiece
L2
Experimental arrangement:
S1
Biprismexperiment consists of an optical bench B2
about one and half meter long and scale is marked d2
d
along its length. Four adjustable stands carrying A2
the slit S, biprism B, lens L and the micrometer S2
eyepiece E are mounted on the optical bench as v u
shown in fig.
Initially the slit, the biprism and eyepiece are kept D
at the same height such that their centers are in Fig. (b) Dimagnified images
Interference and Diffraction 145

size of image distance of image Multiply (1) and (2), we get

=
size of object distance of object d1 d2 v u
 = 
d1 v d d u v
= ... (1)
d u d1 d2
 =1
Now the lens is moved towards the eyepiece and d d
its position L2 is so adjusted that two magnified d2 = d1 d2
images A2 and B2 of S1 and S2 are formed in the
focal plane of the eyepiece. The distance d 2  d = d1d2
between A2 and B2 is measured by the micrometer.
This is distance between the two virtual sources
From fig. (b)
In this method object and image distance gets X d1d2
interchanged.  =
D
d1 u Thus the wavelength of monochromatic source
= ... (2) of light can be determined by using above formula
d v

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Describe biprism experiment to find the wavelength of monochromatic light. Draw the necessary ray diagram
for magnified and diminished images of virtual sources. (Feb. 2014)

(8) Obtain an expression for path difference and fringe width of interference pattern in Young’s double slit
experiment. Show that the fringe width is same for consecutive bright and dark bands.
(9) State the conditions to get constructive and destructive interference of light.
Problems :
(1) A point is situated at 6.5 cm and 6.65 cm from two coherent sources. Find the nature of illumination at the
o
point, if wavelength of light is 5000 A . (July 2016)
o
(2) In a biprism experiment, light of wavelength 5200 A is used to get an interference pattern on the screen. The
fringe width changes by 1.3 mm when the screen is moved towards biprism by 50 cm. Find the distance
between two virtual images of the slit. (March 2018)


146 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
12
Syllabus
Gauss’ Theorem, Mechanical force acting on Unit Area of a charged Conductor, Energy Density of a medium, Dielectrics
and Polarization, Concept of Capacitor, Capacity of Parallel Plate Capacitor, Effects of Dielectrics on Capacity, Energy of a
charged capacitor, Capacitors in Series and Parallel, van de Graaf Generator.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Electric intensity due to a charged sphere at a point qV dV dm qm
outside the sphere decreases with (a) (b) qm (c) qV (d)
dm dV
(a) increase in charge on sphere.
6. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser is
(b) increase in dielectric constant. inversely proportional to
(c) decrease in distance from the centre of sphere.
(a) area of each plate
(d) decrease in square of distance from the centre (b) dielectric constant
of sphere.
(c) permittivity of medium
2. The electric intensity in free space at a distance r (d) distance between two plates
outside the charged conducting sphere of radius R
in terms of surface charge density  is 7. Condenser is a device used to store
2 2 (a) large charge at large potential
σ R  0  R  (b) large potential at low charge
(a)   (b)  
0  r  σ r  (c) large charge at low potential
2 2
R  σ  R r  (d) low potential at low charge
(c)   (d)  
r   σ  0  8. Farad is a unit of
 0
(a) self-inductance (b) mutual inductance
3. If the radius of a sphere is doubled without changing
(c) capacitance (d) conductance
the charge on it, then the electric flux originating
from the sphere is 9. If  is the surface charge density, then electric field
(a) double (b) half (c) same (d) zero at a point near the surface of a charged conductor
kept in a dielectric medium of constant k is given by
4. The intensity of electric field at a point close and
outside a charged conducting cylinder is proportional 2 
to (a)  k (b)  k
0 0
1 1 1
(a) (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) r0 2 k
r r r (c) (d)
0 k 0
5. Two parallel plates are separated by a distance d are
kept apart at potential difference V volt. A charge q is 10. A parallel air plate capacitor has capacity C. If it is
of mass m enters in parallel plates with some velocity. filled completely with dielectric constant k, then its
The acceleration of the charged particle will be new capacity will be
(a) k + C (b) C/k (c) kC (d) k/C

ANSWERS
1 - (d), 2 - (a), 3 - (c), 4 - (d), 5 - (a), 6 - (d), 7 - (c), 8 - (c), 9 - (b), 10 - (c)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Define normal electric induction.
Ans. The number of tubes of induction passing
normally through unit area around a point in an
electric field is called normal electric induction.
 N.E.I. = E
Q.2. Why does a charged conducting sphere behave
as a point charge for any point outside the
sphere?
Ans. The surface of charged conductor is an
equipotential surface so that the electric field
just outside it must be normal to the surface of
the conductor. For spherical charged conductor,
it follows that the field is radial, and because
the net charge by symmetry, uniformly distributed
over its outer surface, the field is spherically
symmetric, the same as for a point charge.

(146)
Electrostatics 147

Q.3. What is the electric field intensity inside a
hollow charged conducting sphere? Why?
Ans. Because under electrostatics condition the net
charge of the charged conductor resides on its
surface. If we construct a Gaussian spherical
surface of radius less than radius R and
concentric with the conductor, then by Gauss law
the surface does not enclose any charge.
Therefore E is zero inside the conductor.
Q.4. Is it necessary that a charged conducting
cylinder be infinitely long?
Ans. When cylinder is infinitely long then the electric
field has cylindrical symmetry i.e. E is radially
outward or inward from the axis of the cylinder
and has same magnitude at every point at the
same distance from the axis of cylinder.
If the cylinder is short i.e. finite, then the field
will not have the same magnitude and direction
at all the points. Hence Gauss law cannot be
used to find the field.
Q.5. Mechanical force per unit area on a charged
conductor has the same value irrespective of
its shape ? Justify your answer.
Ans. N o
The surface charge is not distributed uniformly
on the conductors of arbitrary shape. Near sharp
points, the surface charge density and thus
electric field outside the points has large values.
Therefore mechanical force per unit area cannot
be the same at all the points on a conductor of
arbitrary shape.
Q.6. If a coin charged in air is placed in kerosene,
which of the following quantities will be
affected?
(i) charge (ii) charge density (iii) electric field
(iv) force per unit area (v) energy density
Ans. Charge and charge density will remain the same.
Electric field, force per unit area and energy
density will be affected.
Q.7. Which combination of four identical capacitors
has the maximum capacitance?
Ans. Parallel combination has the maximum capacitance.
Q.8. Which combination of four identical capacitors
has the minimum capacitance?
Ans. Series combination has the minimum capacitance.
Q.9. Which combination of four identical capacitors
has the maximum and minimum energy for
same P.D.?
Ans. The series combination has the minimum
capacitance. The charge stored in their parallel
combination is four times that in their series
combination. For the same P.D. V, the energy
1
stored in the parallel combination is (4Q)V and
2
1
energy stored in the series combination is (Q)V.
2
Thus the series combination will store minimum
energy
Parallel combination will store maximum energy.
Q.10. How does the T.N.E.I. due to a point charge
enclosed by a spherical Gaussian surface affect
when its radius is doubled?
Ans. Remains the same.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. State Gauss theorem and give it’s any two + +
applications.
Ans. Gauss theorem: Total normal electric induction + A

(T.N.E.I) over any closed surface is equal to algebraic B E
sum of the charges enclosed by that surface.
Applications: ds
+ +
(i) It is used to obtain the expression of electric intensity + +
at a point outside a charged conducting sphere. + +
(ii) It is used to obtain the expression of electric Fig. Electric intensity just outside the surface of
intensity at a point outside a charged conducting positively charged conductor of any shape
cylinder.
Since electric intensity inside the conductor is
Q.2. Derive an expression for the electric field zero, therefore T.N.E.I. over the inner part of
intensity at a point close and outside the cylinder is zero.
surface charged conductor of any shape. Let  is the surface charge density
Ans. Consider a positively charged conductor of any The charge enclosed by the cylinder = ds
shape. Let P be the any point just outside and near T.N.E.I over closed surface
the surface of charged conductor. Consider = Ecos ds
infinesimal area ds of the charged conductor around
= E ds ... (i) (As cos  = 1)
this point. Construct a Gaussian cylinder with half
of its part inside and half outside the conductor. By Gauss’s theorem,
T.N.E.I. =  ds ... (ii)
148 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

From equation (i) and (ii) Mechanical force acting on charge conductor of
 E ds =  ds area ds is
 σ
E = E=  k ... ( = 0 k)  E 2ds
 0 f = ... (1)
2
This is an expression for the magnitude of electric +
intensity at a point, outside a charged conductor. +
+
+
Q.3. Derive an expression for electric intensity due + dx
+
to uniformly charged infinite plane sheet.
Gaussian E
Ans. surface
+ + + + ds
+ +
+ +
P + +
+ +
+
+
E 1=E + E1=E + +
+ + PS
+ +
+ + Fig. Energy density of a medium in electric fiel
+
+
+
+ Work done to push the element through distance
+
dx under the action of this force in the outer
direction is,
Consider a uniformly charged thin infinite plane Work = force × displacement
sheet. By symmetry, electric intensity is
dW = f  dx
perpendicular to plane of the sheet and directed
outwards at every point. It has same magnitude  E 2ds
=  dx ... [From (1)]
at a given distance on either sides of the sheet. 2
Let P be the any point just outside and near the 1
=  E 2(ds dx )
surface of charged conductor. Construct a 2
Gaussian cylinder with half of its part left side
1
and half right side the conductor. The ends of = E 2dv
2
the cylinder are equidistance from the plane of
the sheet. Electric intensity is parallel to the where, dv = (ds × dx) is the volume swept by
curved surface of cylinder. element ds during the displacement dx.
Hence T.N.E.I over the curved surface is zero. This work done is stored in the electric field in
The electric intensity is perpendicular to the ends the form of electric energy.
of cylinder, hence 1
The T.N.E.I.over the ends face Thus, Electrostatic energy du =  E 2dv
2
= E (2ds) ... (1) Electrostatic energy per unit volume is called
The charge enclosed by the cylinder =  ds energy density in an electric field.
where,  is the surface charge density. du
By Gauss theorem Thus, Energy density =
dv
T.N.E.I =  ds ... (2)
1
From (1) and (2) =  E2
2
 (2ds) =  ds
σ 1
= k 0 E 2
E = 2
2
σ Q.5. What do you mean by polar and non- polar
E = 2 k ( = 0k) molecules? Give two examples each
0

This is the magnitude of the electric intensity at Ans. (1) Polar molecules: A polar molecule is one in
a point, outside a uniformly charged thin infinite which centre of gravity of positive nuclei and
plane sheet. revolving electrons do not coincide.
Polar molecules have permanent electric dipole
Q.4. Derive an expression for energy density in
moment.
electric field.
It behave as a tiny electric dipole.
Ans. We know that,
e.g., HCl, H2O, N2O molecules.
Mechanical force per unit area of a charged
1
conductor =  E2
2
Electrostatics 149

(2) Non-polar molecules: A non-polar molecule is Now another identical metal plate P2 is kept near
one in which centre of gravity of positive nuclei to it, then inner surface of metal plate P2 acquire
and revolving electrons coincide. charge –q and outer surface of metal palte P2
Non-polar molecules do not have permanent aquries charge +q by induction. [Fig a]
electric dipole moment The induced negative charge lowers the potential
e.g. O2, H2 , CO2 molecules of plate P 1 , while positive charge raises its
potential. However negative charge is nearer to
Q.6. Define polarisation and state its S.I. unit the plate P 1 , hence there is net decrease in
Ans. Polarisation: It is defined as the amount of potential of the plate P1. If the outer surface of P2
induced surface charge per unit area. is earthed [Fig.(b)], free positive charge +q on the
qp outer surface of P2 escapes to earth. Let V1 be the
Polarization P = = P electric potential due to charge on plate P2.
A
where, qp = polarization charges Net potential of the plate P1 is V – V1
p = charge density of polarization charges New Capacitance is
Q
A = surface area of dielectric. C2 = V  V ... (2)
1
S.I. Unit of polarisation is C/m2
From (1) and (2)
Q.7. Define capacitance. State and define S.I. unit
of capacitance of a condenser. C 2 > C1
Ans. Capacitance: It is defined as the ratio of Thus, capacity of metal plate is increased by
magnitude of charge on either of the conductors keeping earth connected conductor near to it. This
to the magnitude of potential difference between is the principle of parallel plate condenser.
two conductors.
Q.9. Draw a neat labelled diagram of a parallel plate
Q capacitor completely filled with dielectric.
C =
V
Ans. Diagram:
Capacitor is used to store energy. A
P1
S.I. Unit of capacitance is farad. + + + + + + + +
1 coulomb
1 farad =
1 volt E d
1C
1F=
1V        
A capacitance of capacitor is said to be one farad, P2
when a charge of 1coulomb is given to it, increases
its potential by 1 volt. Fig. Earthing
Q.8. Explain the concept of parallel plate capacitor. Labellings:
OR
P1 and P2 - Parallel plates
What is meant by the capacity of a conductor?
A - Area of each plate
Can it be increased? In what way can this be
achieved? d - Separation between the plates
Ans. A parallel plate capacitor consists of two parallel E - Intensity of electric field
metal plates each of area a separated by distance d. Q.10. A 10 F capacitor is connected to a 100 V
Consider a positive charge Q is given to the metal battery. What is the electrostatic energy
plate P1 when it is fully charged. Let V be the stored?
potential, then its capacitance is Solution: Data:
Q
C1 = ... (1) C = 10F = 10 F, V = 100 volt
V
Energy stored in condenser is
P1 P2 P1 P2
1
+  + +  W = CV2
+  + +  2
+  + + 
+  + +  1
+  + +  = × 10 × 106 × (100)2
+  + +  2
+  + +  = 0.05 J
+  + + 
+  + + 
Q.11. A metal sphere of radius 1 cm is charged with
(a) (b) 3.14 C. Find the electric intensity at a
distance 1 m from the centre of sphere.
Fig. Parallel plate capacitor
150 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Solution: Data:
σ2
R = 1cm = 1  102 m, f = 
2k 0
= 8.85  1012 C2/Nm2,
(10 2 )2
q = 3.14 C = 3.14  106 C, f =  10 2
2  8.85  10 12
r = 1m, E = ? 104  102
Surface density of sphere is =
17.7  1012
q f = 0.0565  106 N
 =
4R 2  f = 56500 N
6 6
3.14  10 10 Q.14. The energy density at a point in a medium of
= =
4  3.14 (1  10  2 )2 4  10  4 dielectric constant 8 is 26.55 × 10 6 J/m3 .
= 0.25  102 C/m2 Calculate electric field intensity at that point.
Electric intensity at a distance r from its centre is Solution: Data:
du
σR 2 = 26.55  106 J/m3, k = 8
E = dv
0 r 2
 = 8.85  1012 C2 /Nm2
0.25  102  (1  10 2 )2 du
 E =
8.85  10 12  12 Energy density =
dv
0.25  106 1
= Energy density = k 0 E 2
8.85  1012 2
= 0.02823  106 N/C 1
26.55  106=  8 8.85  1012  E2
Q.12. A long cylinder of radius 2 cm carries a charge 2
of 5 C/m kept in a medium of dielectric 2  26.55  106
constant 10. Find the electric field intensity  E2 =
8  8.85  1012
at point a distance 1m from the ax is of
cylinder. 53.1
 E2 =  1018
Solution: Data: 70.8
= 0.75  1018
R = 2 cm = 2  102 m
q = 5 C/m = 5  106 C/m, E = ?  E = 0.75  1018
1 = 0.866  109
4 0 = 9  10 Nm /C
9 2 2
= 8.66  108 N/C
k = 10, r = 1m Q.15. A capacitor carries a charge of 6 C at a
q 2q potential 500V . How much electrostatic
E = 2  r  4  r energy is stored in condenser?
0 0
Solution: Data:
9  109  2  5  106
 E = Q = 6C = 6  106 C, V = 500 volt, W =?
1  10
Energy stored in condenser is
 E = 9  103 N/C
1
Q.13. A metal sphere of area 0.01 m2 carries a charge W = QV
2
of 100 C. Calculate the outward pull on one
1
side of plate. =  6  106  500
2
Solution: Data:
= 15  104 J
A = 0.01 m2 = 1  102 m2
q = 100 C = 100  106 C
 = 8.85  1012 C2/Nm2 , f = ?
q
 =
A
100  106
 = = 102 C/m2
1  10  2
Mechanical force on one side of the plate is
f σ2
=
A 2k 0
Electrostatics 151

Short Answer Type Questions- II (3 marks each)

Q.1. State and prove Gauss theorem Ans. Consider a spherical conductor of radius R carrying
Ans. Statement: Total normal electric induction a positive charge +q placed in a dielectric medium
(T.N.E.I) over any closed surface is equal to of permittivity . Let P be the point at a distance r
algebraic sum of the charges enclosed by that from the centre O of the sphere. Construct a
surface. Gaussian sphere of radius r through a point P.
B
E cos  E
P
P  E r
ds A
+q r ds ++ ++
O + R +
d + +
+ O +q
+ ++
++ +
++
E=0

Fig. Gauss’ Theorem

Proof: Consider a positive charge is present at a

point O inside a irregular closed surface of any Fig. Concentric Gaussian spherical face is used to find
electric filed outside charged conducting sphere
shape.
Let infinitesimal area ds of a given closed surface. Total normal electric induction T.N.E.I. over
closed surface B is
The electric intensity at point P on ds due to
charge +q at point O is, T.N.E.I =  E  cos ds .
1 q  For every element ds on the surface  = 00
E =  
4   r 2 
 cos = cos 0 = 1
Let  be the angle made by normal drawn to the
area ds with direction of E. T.N.E.I. =  E  ds
Normal electric induction (N.E.I.) over area ds is Due to symmetry, E is constant over the surface
=  E cos  ds  T.N.E.I. = E   ds
 1 q  T.N.E.I = E(4r2) ... (1)
=  2  cos  ds
 4  r 
where,  ds = 4r is the total surface area of the
2
q  ds cos  
=   Gaussian surface B.
4  r 2 
By Gauss theorem,
q
= d T.N.E.I = q … (2)
4
where, From (1) and (2),
E  (4r2) = q
ds cos 
d = is the solid angle made by area at q 1 q
r2  2
E = 2 = ... (3)
point O. 4  r 4  r
Total normal electric induction (T.N.E.I.) over This is the expression of electric intensity at a
closed surface is point outside a charged conductor.
q
T.N.E.I =  4  d Q.3. Derive an expression of electric intensity at
a p oint out side an infi nitely charg ed
q conducting cylinder.
4 
= d
Ans. Consider a thin long positively charged cylinder
q a of radius R placed in a dielectric medium of
4 
= 4 permittivity. Let q be the positive charge per unit
length of the conducting cylinder A. Let P be the
=q
point at a distance r from the centre O of the
Where,  d is the total solid angle sustended conducting cylinder. Construct a Gaussian
by entire closed surface at point P. cylinder of length l and of radius r through a point
P. By symmetry, E is directed outwards at right
Hence proved.
angles to the axis of cylinder and its magnitude
Q.2. Obtain an expression for the electric intensity is same at all points on the Gaussian cylinder B.
at a point outside a charged conducting sphere.
152 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

B Consider a positively charged conductor kept in

ds
+ medium of permittivity . Let ds is an infinitesimal
P ++
ds + ++ surface of charged conductor. Let  is the surface
+ ++ + charge density over ds. Consider a point A which
++ ++
r ++ + ++
++ ++ is just outside and near the surface of the charged
++ ++
+
+ ++ ++ conductor. Let B be a point which is just inside
++ ++
++ ++ and near the surface of the charged conductor.
+ ++ + ++
A + ++ + ++ At a point A:
++ ++
+ ++ + ++ The resultant intensity at a point A is,
+ ++
++ σ
+ ++ E = … (1)
+
l 
Let E1 is the electric intensity due to charge on
the ds.
Fig. Co-axial Gaussian cylinder is used to find electric E2 is the electric intensity due to charge on the
field outside infinitely long charged conducting cylinder. rest part of the conductor
At the point A, E1 and E2 are in the same direction.
Total normal electric induction (T.N.E.I.) over
The resultant intensity at a point A is,
closed surface B is
E = E1 + E 2 … (2)
T.N.E.I =  E  cos ds .
σ
For every element ds on the surface B = E1 + E 2 … (3)

 = 0 , cos  = cos 0 = 1
0 
At a point B:
 T.N.E.I =  E  ds. E1 and E2 are in the opposite directions
Due to symmetry E is constant over the surface B The resultant intensity at the point B is,
 T.N.E.I =E (2rl … (1) 0 =  E 1 + E2 … (4)
As any point inside the conductor, resultant
where,  ds = 2rl intensity is zero
is the total surface area of the Gaussian cylinder E1 = E2 … (5)
of surface B
Substitute in (3)
By Gauss theorem
σ
T.N.E.I = q l … (2) 2E2 =

From (1) and (2) σ
E 2rl = ql E2 =
2
ql This is the electric field intensity due to rest part
E = of a charged conductor.
 2rl
q 1 q  The force acting on a charge  ds is
E = =   ... (3) Mechanical force
2  r 2 r2 
This is the expression of electric intensity at a = (charge on ds) × (electric intensity due to
point outside a charged cylindrical conductor. charge on the remaining part of conductor).
 F = ds  E2
Q.4. Derive an expression of mechanical force
acting on unit area of a charged conductor. σ
F = ds 
Ans. 2
+ F 2
+  f = = … (6)
+ + ds 2
+ + This is an expression for mechanical force per
E1 unit area of charged conductor.
E1
 f  2 (2,  are constant)
B A
+ E2
Since,  is always positive for positively or
2
E2
ds negatively charged conductor, hence f is always
E inside = 0 directed normally outwards
+
+ We know that electric intensity
+

Fig. Mechanical force acting on a charged conductor E =

  =E ... (7)
Electrostatics 153

From equation (6) Q.6. Explain the effect of a dielectric on the

capacity of a parallel–plate capacitor
 E  2
1
 E2
f = = Ans. Effect of dielectric on capacitance:
2 2
1 2 Without dielectric, the capacitance of the parallel
= k 0 E plate capacitor is
2
Q.5. Derive an expression of capacity of a parallel Q
C0 =
plate capacitor filled with dielectric. V
Ans. Q = C0V
Potential difference between the plates without
P1 + + + + + + + + + + dielectric is
 d V = E0d
E k M
Charge on the plates is
P2          
Q = C0E0d ... (1)
Let C be the capacitance with dielectric. Since
free charge on the capacitance remains the same,
Fig. Parallel plate capacitor Q = CEd ... (2)
[charge on the plate with dielectric]
Parallel plate capacitor consists of two large
parallel plates P 1 and P 2 separated by small From (1) and (2)
distance d and filled with dielectric of medium of CEd = C0E0 d
constant k. Let A be the area of each plate. Q be [here batten is disconnected from capacitor]
the magnitude of the charge on each plate. Plate
P 1 is given positive charge +q. This induces  E0 
C = C0  E  ... (3)
negative charge q on the inner surface of the  
plate P2. E0
E0
Let  is the surface charge density, But E = k=
k E
The intensity of electric field inside the capacitor  C = C0 k
is directed from positive plate to negative plate.
Thus capacitance increases by factor k
Its magnitude is given by
Q.7. Derive an expression of induced charge when
σ σ dielectric is inserted between the parallel
E = =  k
 0 plates capacitor.
But, Surface charge density Ans. Consider a parallel plate capacitor without
Q dielectric charged to potential V.
 = Suppose charges on the plates are +Q and –Q.
A
Let A = area of each plate
Q
E = A k … (1) d = separation between the plates
0
 Surface density of charge is
Since electric field is uniform between the plates
we get, Q
 =
V A
E = … (2) Electric field intensity inside the plates is
d
where, V is the potential difference between the V
E =
plates. d
From (1) and (2), σ
E0 = ... (1)
Q V 0
A 0 k = d
Q A 0 k P1 + + + + + + + + + +
=
V d  d
E k M
Q
By definition of capacitance, =C P2          
V
A 0 k
 C =
d
This is the expression of capacity of parallel plate
capacitor filled with dielectric Fig. Parallel plate capacitor
154 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Now suppose that a dielectric of dielectric Let Q be the charge on the capacitor and V be the
constant k is inserted between the two plates potential difference between the plates when it
completely, then charges Q P appears on the is fully charged. Then,
exterior surface of the dielectric nearer to the Q
positive plate, while + QP appears on its opposite V =
C
face nearer to the negative plate.
Let q and v be the charge and potential respectively
The net charge enclosed by Gaussian surface is
during the process of charging,
Q  Qp
q
By Gauss theorem v =
C
T.N.E.I = Total charge enclosed by the surface
Q  Qp The work is done in depositing an additional
charge dq on the plate is
Electric intensity in the dielectric is
dW = vdq
Q  Qp
E = A q
0 dW = dq
C
Q Qp
= A  A Total work done in charging the condenser from
0 0 q = 0 to q = Q is,
σ  Q
 p q
 C dq
= ... (2)
0 0 W =
Electric field inside the dielectric is 0

E0 Q
E = ... (3) 1 q2 
k W =  
C  2 0
E0  p
=    1 Q 2 
k
 2  0
0 0
W =
σ  p C  
k 0 =   0
0 Q2
σ W =
2C
=   p
k This work done is stored in the form of
The surface density of induced charge is electrostatic energy in the capacitor.
 Thus energy shared in charged capacitor is,
p =  
k
Q2
 1 U = ... (1)
p =  1  k  ... (4) 2C
 
Energy in different forms:
This is the expression of induced surface charge
density Q
 C =  Q = CV
Electric charge on plates of capacitor (without V
dielectric) is (CV )2
 U =
Q = C0 V0 2C
 V0  1
...  E 0   = CV 2 … (2)
d 
= C0 E0 d 2

when dielectric is inserted in the space between Q2
plates of capacitor, charge Q0 remains the same Also, U =
2C
and is given by
Q2
Q 0 = Cd V d = Cd E d  U 
Q 
where, Cd = Capacitance of capacitor with dielectric 2 
V 
Ed = Electric field in the space between 1
plates filled with dielectric. U = QV ... (3)
2
Q.8. Derive an expression of energy stored in a Equation (1), (2), (3) are expressions of different
charged capacitor. Obtain its different form. forms of energy stored in capacitor.
Ans. When a capacitor is charged, some work is done
Q.9. Derive an expression of effective capacitance
during charging. This work is stored in the electric
of three capacitor connected in series.
field of the capacitor in the form of electrostatic
energy.
Electrostatics 155

Ans. Capacitors are said to be connected in series, if If one plate of each capacitor is connected at one
they are connected one after other in the form of common potential and other plate of each
chain. capacitor is connected to other common potential,
then they are said to be connected in parallel.
In the series combination of capacitors, charge
on each capacitor is the same but the potential In the case of parallel combination of capacitors,
difference across each is different. the potential difference across each capacitor is
A B CD EF
same. But the charge on each capacitor is
Cs different.
+Q Q +Q Q +Q Q
Let V be the potential difference across each
v1 v2 v3 V capacitor. Let Q1, Q2 and Q3 be the charges on
the capacitors of capacitance C 1 , C 2 and C 3
V respectively.
K Q = Q1 + Q 2 + Q 3 … (1)
K C1, C2 and C3 respectively.
Now,
Fig. Series combination of capacitors
Q1 = C1V, Q2 = C2V and Q3 = C3V ... (2)
Let Q be the charge on each capacitor, V1, V2 and
If C p is the effective capacitance of parallel
V 3 be the potential differences across the
combination of the given capacitors,
capacitor of capacitance C1, C2 and C3 respectively.
Q = CpV ... (3)
 V = V 1 + V2 + V 3 … (1)
from (1),
Now,
CpV = C1V + C2V + C3V
Q Q Q
V1 = , V2 = , V3 = C p = C1 + C2 + C3
C1 C2 C3
Q Q Q This is the expression of the effective capacitance
 V = + + … (2) of the three capacitors connected in parallel.
C1 C2 C3
If C s is the effective capacitance of series Q.11. Describe the construction of Van de Graff
combination of the given capacitors, then generator. State its uses.
Ans. van de Graff generator is an electrostatic
Q
V = … (3) generator, that can produce high potential of the
Cs order of millions of volt. It is used to accelerate
Q Q Q Q charged particles such as proton, deuterons –
Thus, C = + + particles, which are then further used for artificial
s C1 C2 C3
transmutation.
1 1 1 1
  
Cs = C1 C 2 C 3
This is the expression for the effective capacitance + + C
of the three capacitors connected in series.
+
+ +
S +
Q.10. Derive an expression of effective capacitance
+
+
of three capacitor connected in parallel. +
C2 D
+ +
A B
Ans.
p2
+Q1 Q1 B

C D
X Y
+Q2 Q2

E F C1 p1
+Q3 Q3
T
V

Fig. van de Graaff generator

P1 – pulley rotated with motor

E K
P2 – pulley
Fig. Parallel combination of capacitors
B – An endless belt made up of insulating material
156 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

C1 – comb connected to high voltage supply and (a) Energy stored in condenser is
is used to spray positive charges
1
C2 – comb connected to dome W = CV 2
2
S – Metallic dome
1
D – Gas discharge tube =  600  106  (250)2
2
T – Target
= 300 × 6.25 × 104 × 106
Construction:
= 1875 × 102
van de Graff generator consists of a hollow metal
polished sphere S called dome which is supported = 18. 75 J
on an insulating column. An insulated fabric belt (b) When capacitor is disconnected from the battery
is made to run over two pulleys P1 and P2. Pulley and connected to another capacitor 600 F then
P1 is rotated using an electric motor. C1 is metal the capacitors are in parallel
comb with sharp metal spikes and is connected As charge remains the same
to high voltage supply. Comb C2 is called as
Q = Q 1 + Q2
collecting comb which is connected to dome. A
discharge tube D, acts as a source of positive C1V = C1VC + C2VC
ions such as protons, deuterons. Target nucleus VC is common potential across the combination
is kept at other end of discharge tube. The C1V = (C1 + C2)VC
generator is enclosed in a steel chamber filled
with nitrogen or methane at high pressure. C1V
VC =
Working: C1  C 2
When an electric motor is switched on, endless 600  250
VC =
belt wound over pulley P1 and P2 starts rotating. 600  600
a spray comb C1 is given positive potential of the 600  250
order of 104 volt with respect to earth by high VC =
1200
voltage rectifier(H.V.R.) supply. Charge from metal
= 125 V
comb is transferred to belt. The charge is
continuously carried up to large hollow sphere. a Capacitance in parallel combination is
negative charges are induced on the sharp ends Cp = C1 + C2
of comb C2 and an equal positive charges are Cp = 600 + 600
induced on the farther end of C2 collects these
= 1200 F
charges. Which are spread on the outer surface
of dome. The potential of the dome continuously = 1200 × 106 F
increases. The charges are crowded on outer 1
surface of dome which leaks to the surrounding W = C pVc2
2
in the form of spark. To avoid such a leakage, van
de Graff generator is enclosed in earth connected 1
W = × 1200 × 106 × (125)2445
steel tank filled with the air under pressure. 2
The positive ions are introduced from ion source = 600 × 106 × 125 × 125
in the upper part of the evacuated accelerator = 9.375 J
tube. These ions are accelerated in downward
Q.13. A network of four capacitors 5 F each are
direction. Due to very high fall of potential the
connected to a 240 V supply. Determine
positive ions acquire high energy. These charged
particles are directed towards target (T). (a) the equivalent capacitance of network
Uses: (b) the charge on each capacitor
(1) It is used to produce high potential of the order 5 F
of few millions of volt.
C2
(2) It is used to accelerate charged particles such as
protons, duetrons, -particles.
Q.12. A 600 F capacitor is charged by 250V battery 5 F C3
C1 5 F
(a) How much electrostatic energy is stored
in capacitor?
(b) The capacitor is disconnected from battery C4
and connected to another 600 F capacitor.
What is the energy of the system? 5 F
Solution: Data:
C = 600 F = 6 × 106 F, V = 250 volt 240 V
Electrostatics 157

Solution:  = 8.85  1012 C2 /Nm2

Capacitors C1, C2 and C3 are in series E =? C =? Q=? k=1
Their equivalent capacitance is A 0 k
C1 = C2 = C3 = 5 F = 5 × 106 F (a) C =
d
1 1 1 1 A 0
C = (for air k = 1)
Cs = C1 + C2 + C3 d
1 1 1 1 20  10 4  8.85  10 12
C =
Cs = 5 + 5 + 5 2  10  3
1 C = 8.85  1012 F
3
Cs = 5 C = 8.85 pF
(b) Charge on plate:
5
 Cs = μF Q = CV
3
Now Cs and C4 are in parallel = 8.85  1012  500
Their equivalent capacitance is = 4.425  109 C
Cp = Cs + C4 = 4.425 nC
5 V
= +5 (c) E =
3 d
20 500
= F = 6.667 = F =
3 2  10  3
Total charge stored is = 2.5  105 V/m
Q = Cp V Q.15. Two condenser each of capacity 10F and a
20 battery of e.m.f. 240 V is given to you. Which
= 106240 combination will give you minimum energy?
3
Solution: Data:
= 1600 106
C1 = 10C = 10  106 F
= 16  104 C
C2 = 10C = 10  106 F
This charge is divided into two branches Q1 and Q2
For series combination,
Since the capacitors C1, C2 and C3 are in series,
therefore, same charge Q1 is deposited on each 1 1 1
 
of them. CS C1 C 2
Q1 = Cs V 1 1 1
 
5 CS 10 10
= × 106 × 240
3
1 2
= 400 × 106 
CS 10
= 4 × 104 C
 CS = 5F
Q2 is deposited on the capacitor C4
For parallel combination,
Q 2 = Q  Q1
Cp = C1 + C2
Q2 = 16 × 104  4 × 104
= 10 + 10 = 20F
= 12 × 104 C
Cp > Cs
Q.14. A parallel plate air capacitor has rectangular Energy stored in series combination is
plates each of area 20 cm 2 separated by a
distance of 2mm. The potential difference 1
WS = C V2
between the plates is 500 volt. Calculate 2 S
(a) Capacitance of capacitor 1
WS =  10  106  (240)2
(b) Charge on each plate 2
(c) Electric field intensity between the two = 0.144 J
plates. As CP > CS
Solution: Data:  Energy stored in series combination is
A = 20 cm = 20  10 m
2 4 2 minimum.
d = 2 mm = 2  103 m
V = 500 V
158 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Draw a neat labelled diagram of a parallel plate capacitor completely filled with dielectric. (March 2013)
(2) What do you mean by polar molecules and non-polar molecules? Give one example each. (October 2013)
(3) With the help of a neat diagram, describe the construction and working of van de Graff generator. (July 2016)
(4) Obtain an expression for electric field intensity at a point outside uniformly charged thin plane sheet.
(July 2017)
Problems :
(1) Electrostatic energy of 3.5 × 10–4 J is stored in a capacitor at 700 V. What is the charge on the capacitor?
(March 2013)
(2) The energy density at a point in a medium of dielectric constant 6 is 26.55 × 10 6 J/m3. Calculate electric field
intensity at that point. (e0 = 8.85 × 10–12 SI units) (Oct 2013)  F

C2
(3) A network of four capacitors of 6 mF each is connected to a 240 V supply.  F C1 C3  F
Determine the charge on each capacitor. (Feb. 2014) C4
B
5F 5F  F

5F C 240 V
A
(4) Six capacitors of capacities 5, 5, 5, 5, 10 and X F are F
5F F X

connected as shown in the network given below. D 10
Find : (a) The value of X if the network is balanced,
and (b) The resultant capacitance between A and C. 5V (Oct. 2014)
(5) Two metal spheres having charge densities 5 C/m2 and –2 C/m2 with radii 2 mm and 1 mm respectively are
kept in a hypothetical closed surface. Calculate total normal electrical induction over the closed surface.
(Feb. 2015)
(6) A conductor of any shape, having area 40cm 2 placed in air is uniformly charged with a charge 0.2 C. Determine
the electric intensity at a point just outside its surface. Also, find the mechanical force per unit area of the
charged conductor. [e0 = 8.85 × 10–12 S.I. Units] (Feb. 2016)
(7) A cube of marble having each side 1 cm is kept in an electric field of intensity 300 V/m. Determine the energy
contained in the cube of dielectric constant 8.
[Given : e0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2] (March 2017)
(8) Three capacitors of capacities 8F, 8F and 4F are connected in a series and a potential difference of 120 volt
is maintained across the combination. Calculate the charge on capacitor of capacity 4F. (July 2017)
(9) A parallel plate air condenser has a capacity of 20F. What will be the new capacity if:
(a) the distance between the two plates is doubled?
(b) a marble slab of dielectric constant 8 is introduced between the two plates? (March 2018)


Current Electricity 159
CHAPTER
13
Syllabus:
Kirchhoff’s Laws, Wheatstone’s Network, Meter-Bridge, Potentiometer

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Select the WRONG statement: 6. Two Leclanche cells assisting each other could be
(a) Kirchhoff’s junction law is a statement of balanced on a length L of a potentiometer wire. If
conservation of charge. the current through the wire is halved, what will be
(b) Kirchhoff’s loop law is equivalent to the law of balancing length for one Leclanche cell ?
conservation of energy. (a) L/4 (b) L/2 (c) L (d) 2L
(c) If a charge is moved around any closed loop in a 7. A load resistance R is connected across a cell of
circuit, the sum of all the potential energy emf E and internal resistance r. In the closed-circuit
changes is zero. p.d. across the terminals of the cell is V, the internal
(d) Kirchhoff’s loop law is equivalent to saying that resistance of the cell is
a charge starts and ends at the same point.  E V  E V
(a) (E  V)R (b) (V  E)R (c)  R (d)
2. Kirchhoff’s junction law is equivalent to  V  R
(a) conservation of energy 8. In the open-circuit p.d. across the terminals of a
(b) conservation of charge cell balances on 150 cm of a potentiometer wire.
(c) conservation of electric potential When the cell is shunned by a 4.9 ohm resistor,
(d) conservation of electric flux the balancing length reduces to 147 cm. The internal
resistance of the cell is
3. Kirchhoff’s voltage law is the consequence of the
(a) 0.01  (b) 0.05  (c) 0.1 (d) 1
law of conservation of
(a) mass (b) energy 9. In potentiometer experiment, if l is the balancing
length for emf of cell of internal resistance r and l2
(c) charge (d) momentum
is the balancing length for it’s terminal potential
4. Two resistors, R1 and R2 are connected in the left difference when shunted with resistance R then
and the right gap of a metre bridge, and the balancing
length is obtained at 20 cm from the left. On R r   R 
(a) l1 = l 2   (b) l1 = l 2  
interchanging the resistors in the two gaps, the  R  R r 
balancing length shifts by  R  R r 
(a) 20 cm (b) 40 cm (c) l1 = l 2   (d) l1 = l 2  
R r   R 
(c) 80 cm (d) 60 cm 10. Instrument which can measure terminal potential
5. The SI unit of potential gradient is difference as well as electromotive force (emf) is
(a) V-cm (b) V/cm (a) Wheatstone’s meter bridge
(c) V-m (d) V/m (b) Voltmeter
(c) Potentiometer
(d) Galvanometer

ANSWERS
1  (d), 2  (b), 3  (b), 4  (d), 5  (d), 6  (c), 7  (c), 8  (c), 9  (a), 10  (c)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Why are the connections between the resistors
in a metre bridge made of thick copper wire?
Ans. This is done to ensure that the connections do
not contribute any extra, unknown, resistances
in the circuit.
Q.2. Why is it generally preferred to obtain the
balance point in the middle of the meter
bridge?
(159)
Ans. Balance point is obtained in the middle of meter
bridge wire to minimise the error involved due to
contact resistances and end resistances.
Q.3. Which material is used for meter bridge wire
and why?
Ans. Meter bridge wire is made of Manganin/
Constantan/Nichrome.
This material has low temperature of resistance
and high resistivity.
160 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.4. State the principle of a potentiometer wire.
Ans. Principle of Potentiometer: For a steady
current,the potential difference between any two
points of the potentiometer wire is directly
proportional to the length of wire between these
two points.
Q.8. A resistance R is connected across a cell of e.m.f
E and internal resistance r. A potentiometer
now measures the potential difference between
the terminals of the cell as V. State the
expression for internal resistance r in terms
of E, V and R.

Q.5. Define Potential gradient. State its S.I. unit.  E V 

Ans. Definition: The fall of potential per unit length
of potentiometer wire is called potential gradient.
Unit of potential gradient is V/m
Q.6. Does the resistance of a conductor depend on
the potential difference across it or the
current passed through it?
Ans. No.
The resistance of a conductor is independent of
the potential difference across it or the current
passed through it provided the physical state of
the conductor remains the same.
Q.7. Name the instrument which can measure the
terminal voltage as well as e.m.f of a cell.
Ans. Potentiometer can measure the terminal voltage
as well as emf of a cell.
Ans. r =  V R
 
Q.9. Why is there no way to separate the internal
resistance from the e.m.f of a cell?
Ans. The internal resistance of a cell is the opposition
to the motion of the ions in the electrolyte. Thus,
every cell has some internal resistance which is
inseparable.
Q.10. On what factors does the internal resistance
of a cell depend?
Ans. It depends on
(1) the nature of electrolyte
(2) its temperature.
(3) surface of area of electrodes
(4) current drawn from the cell

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. State and Explain Kirchhoff’s laws for electric (ii) Kirchhoff’s second law (Voltage law or loop law):
network In a closed loop of electric network, the algebraic
Ans. (i) Kirchhoff’s First laws (Current law) : sum of potential differences for all components plus
the algebraic sum of all e.m.f.s is equal to zero.
The algebraic sum of electric currents at any
junction is always equal to zero. i.e. IR + E = 0
i.e. I =0 Explanation:
Explanation: Currents entering the juction are (1) Potential difference across the registor is
considered to be positive and those leaving the considered to be negative in the direction of flow of
juction are negative. current and positive in the opposite to the direction
of current.
 I1 + I3 + I5  I2  I4 = 0
(2) e.m.f. is considered to be positive, if we traverse
 I1 + I3 + I 5  I 2  I 4
battery from negative terminal to positive
Sum of the currents entering the junction terminal and it is negative, if we traverse from
= sum of the currents leaving the junction positive to negative.
E1 R1
 
A F
I3
I2 I
I1 R2 E2
P  
B E
I1
I4
(I  I1)

I5
C D
R3
Fig. Current law Too loop ABEFA
The first law is in accordance with conservation  I1R2  E2  IR1 + E1 = 0
of charge, since there is no gain or loss of charge E1  E2 = I1R2 + IR1
at the function. E =  IR
It represents law of conservation of energy.
Current Electricity 161

Q.2. Draw neat labelled diagram to determine the (iii) A small p.d. can be measured accurately with the
resistance of galvanometer by using Kelvin’s help of potentiometer. A voltmeter cannot
method. measure small p.d. as the resistance of voltmeter
Ans. Diagram: is high.
R (iv) Internal resistance of a cell can be measured with
G the help of potentiometer as it does not draw
current from the cell. Voltmeter cannot measure
B
internal resistance of a cell as it draws current
from the cell.
J
D Q.5. State and explain the principle of potentiometer.
A lG lR C Ans. Principle of potentiometer:
The potential difference between any two points
  of the potentiometer wire is directly proportional
E K Rh to the length of wire between these two points.
Labellings: V
= constant.
G – Galvanometer L
R – Resistance from resistance box Explanation:
E – Cell Consider a potentiometer wire AB of length L and
K – Key resistance R is connected between the points A
D – Null point and B on wooden board. The source of e.m.f. E
J – Jockey and negligible internal resistance is connected to
the wire.
R h – Rheostat
AC – Wire of 1 meter length E K
+ 
l G – Balancing length of wire opposite to unknown
resistance
l R – Balancing length of wire opposite to known I
resistance R
Q.3. State any two possible sources of error in Meter- A P
B
Bridge experiment. How can they be minimised? l
L
Ans. Possible errors in Meter-bridge experiment:
(i) If the wire is not uniform then its resistance will R
Let, σ  is the resistance per unit length of
not be proportional to its length. So there will be L
an error in the value of unknown resistance X wire AB, and R = L is the resistance of the
potentiometer wire.
(ii) At the ends A and C of wire AC, where metal strips
are connected, contact resistances are developed. The potential difference across the potentiometer
wire AB is
(iii) The ends of wire may not coincide with zero and
100 cm mark on the metre scale. VAB = IR = IL
Minimization of these errors (or precautions): where, I is the current passing through the
potentiometer wire.
(i) The value of R should be so chosen that the null
point is obtained as near (close) to the centre of V AB
wire as possible. (Middle one third of wire i.e.  I =
σL
between 33.33 cm and 66.67 cm) Let P be the any point on the wire, such that
(ii) The experiment should be repeated by AP = l. The resistance of the wire of length l is
interchanging the positions of X and R to RAP = l.
minimize an error due to contact resistance. The potential difference VAP between the points A
Q.4. States the advantages of potentiometer over and P is
voltmeter. VAP = IRAP = Il
Ans. Advantages of potentiometer over voltmeter: V AB
(i) The potentiometer is used to measure the e.m.f. = × l
L
of cell, while the voltmeter is used to measure
 V AB 
terminal p.d. VAP =  L  l
 
(ii) The accuracy of potentiometer can be increased
by increasing the length of wire. Accuracy of V AB
or, = K = constant,
voltmeter cannot be increased beyond certain L
limit.
162 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

where K is called potential gradient along the From null condition,

potentiometer wire.
P X
 VAP = Kl =
Q R
i.e. VAP  l
5 X
Thus, the potential difference between any two i.e. =
10 15
points of the potentiometer wire is directly
proportional to the length of wire between these 1 X
=
two points. This is the principle of potentiometer 2 15
wire.
15
Q.6. In the meter bridge experiment, balanced  X = = 7.5 
2
point is obtained at J with AJ = L
Q.9. A potentiometer wire has a length of 2 m and
(i) The value of R and X were doubled and
resistance 10. it is connected in series with
then interchanged. What would be the
resistance 990 and a cell of e.m.f. 2V.
new position of the balance point?
Calculate the potential gradient along the
(ii) If the galvanometer and battery are wire.
interchanged at the balance point, how
will the balance point get affected? Solution: Data:

R X R = 10, L = 2 m, RS = 990 , E = 2V
Potential gradient
V IR
G
K = =
L L
 E R
L  K =  R  R 
L
A B
 S 
J
 2  10
  =  10  990  2
 

Ans. (i) When R and X are doubled and interchanged,  10 

=  10  990 
new balance point is  
10
R L =
 1000
X (100  L )
1
l1 = (100  L) =
100
(ii) No change in the position of balance point = 0.01 V/m
Q.7. Write the precautions to be taken in the Q.10. Two cells having unknown e.m.f.s E1 and E2
potentiometer experiments. (E 1 > E 2 ) are connected in potentiometer
Ans. Precautions: circuit so as to assist each other. The null
(i) The e.m.f. of battery must be greater than the point is obtained at 8.125 m from the higher
e.m.f.s to be compared i.e. E > E1, E > E2 and for potential end. When cell E2 is connected so
combination method E > (E1 + E2). as to oppose cell E1, the null point is obtained
at 1.25 m from same end. Compare the e.m.f.s
(ii) The positive terminal of E 1 or E 2 or of the
of two cells.
combination must be connected to the end of the
potentiometer wire where positive terminal of the Solution: Data:
battery is connected. l1 = 8. 125 m, l2 = 1.25 m
(iii) The potentiometer wire must be uniform. We have
(iv) The resistance of potentiometer wire should be E1 l1  l 2
very high. E2 = l1  l 2
Q.8. Four r esistan ces 5 , 10  1 5 a nd an E1 8.125  1.25
unknown X are connected in series so as to
E 2 = 8.125  1.25
form Wheatstone’s network. Determine the
unknown resistance X, if the network is 9.375
balanced. =
6.875
Solution: Data: = 1.364
P = 5, Q = 10, R = 15, X =?
Current Electricity 163

Q.11. The resistance of the potentiometer wire is 8   E R

and its length is 8m. A resistance box and a 2 V K =  R  r  R 
L
battery of negligible internal resistance are  S 
connected in series with it. What should be the  2 8
resistance in the box, if it is desired to have a 103 =  8  0  R 
8
potential drop of 1 V/mm?  S 
Solution:  2 
103 =  8  R 

L = 8m, R = 8 E = 2 V  S 
V 2
= 1 V/mm = 103 V/m, RS = ? 8 + RS =
L 10  3
Potential gradient K is 8 + RS = 2000
V IR  RS = 1992 
K = =
L L

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. What is Wheatstone’s bridge? Obtain balance By Appling Kirchhoff’s 2nd law to the loop ABDA
condition in case of Wheatstone network We get,
Ans. Wheatstone’s bridge: It is an arrangement of four I1R1 + 0 × G + I2 R3 = 0
resistances R1, R2, R3 and R4 which are connected
 I 1 R1 = I 2 R3 … (1)
to form a quadrilateral ABCD as shown in fig.
Similarly by applying Kirchhoff’s 2 nd
law to the
A source of e.m.f. E is connected between the
loop BCDB we get,
points A and C through key K. A galvanometer is
connected between the point’s B and D. I1R2 + I2 R4 + 0  G = 0
B I 1 R2 = I 2 R4 … (2)
R1 R2 By dividing (1) by (2)
I1 I1 R1 R3
A C
G R2 = R 4 … (3)
I2 I2
R3 This is the balanced condition of Wheatstone’s
R4
I I
network.
D Q.2. Explain with neat circuit diagram, how will
you determine the unknown resistance by
  using a metre–bridge.
E K
Wheatstone Bridge Write the necessary precautions to minimise
the error in the result.
Working:
Ans. Construction:
If points B and D are equipotential i.e.
Wheatstone’s meter bridge consists of a wire AC
V B = V D then no current flows through the
of one meter length connected between points A
galvanometer, Ig = 0. The Wheatstone network is
and C a Positive terminal of cell of e.m.f E is
said to be balanced. The balanced condition is
connected to the terminal a and negative terminal
R1 R 3 to the terminal C with a key and rheostat Rh in
R2 = R 4 X R

Proof: B C3
Let I be the current supply by the battery. At the C1 C2
junction A the current I is divided into two parts. K G
I1 through the resistance R1 and I2 through the
resistance R3. A C
D
When network is balanced, lX lR
VB = VD, i.e. Ig = 0
Therefore the current flowing through resistance Meter scale
 
R2 is I1 and the current flowing through resistance
R4 is I2. I E K Rh

Fig. Wheatstone’s meterbridge

164
series as shown. A fixed resistance X and variable
resistance R are connected in the left and right
gap of the meter bridge respectively. One terminal
of a galvanometer is connected to the terminal B
and other terminal to the jockey.
Working:
A suitable resistance R is taken in the resistance
box and the jockey is tapped near the terminals
A and C alternately. If the corresponding
deflections are in opposite directions, then the
connection is correct. Now the jokey is tapped at
different points on the wire AC and the point D
is obtained for which the galvanometer shows zero
(null) deflection. The point D is called null point.
Wheatstone bridge is said to be balanced.
If l X and l R are the balancing lengths of the
segments AD and CD of the wire and  is the
resistance per unit length of the wire.
Then, from the balancing condition,
X Resistance of the wire AD of length l X
R = Resistance of the wire CD of length lR
X  lX
= l
R R
X lX
=
R lR
 lX 
 X = R  

 lR  point. Thus Kelvin’s method is equal deflection
 lX 
 X = R  
 If lG and lR the balancing lengths of the segments
 100  l X 
The unknown resistance can be calculated by
using the above formula.
Precautions:
(i) The value of R should be so chosen that the null
point is obtained as near to the centre of wire
(between 33.33 cm to 66.67 cm).
(ii) The experiment is repeated by interchanging the
positions of X and R to minimize the error due to
contact resistances.
Q.3. Describe Kelvin’s method to determine the
resistance of galvanometer by using Metre
Bridge.
Ans. Construction:
Wheatstone’s meter bridge consists of a wire AC
of one meter length connected between points A
and C. A positive terminal of cell of e.m.f..E is
connected to the terminal A and negative terminal
to the terminal C with a key and rheostat Rh in
series as shown in fig. A galvanometer whose
resistance G is to be determined, is connected
in the left gap and variable resistance box R is
connected in the right gap of the meter bridge. A
jockey is connected to the terminal B.
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
R
G
B
D
A lG lR C
 
E K Rh
Fig. Resistance of galvanometer by Kelvin’s method
Working:
A suitable resistance R is introduced in the box
and without touching the jockey to the wire, the
current in the galvanometer is so adjusted with
the help of the rheostat, that it shows half the
full scale deflection (e.g. 15 divisions). Now place
the jockey at the terminals A and C and observe
the deflections in the galvanometer. If one of the
two deflections is more and other is less than the
15 division, which means the potential of the point
B is between the potentials of the points A and C
and we will get the balance point on the wire.
Now by touching the jockey to the different points
on the wire, the point D is obtained where the
galvanometer shows the same deflection as
before i.e. 15 division. The points B and D are
equipotential. The point D is called the balance
method. Wheatstone bridge is said to be balanced.
AD and CD of the wire, and  is the resistance
per unit length of the wire.
Then, from the balancing condition,
G Resistance of the wire AD of length lG
= Resistance of the wire CD of length l
R R
G  lG
= l
R R
G lG
= l
R R
 lG 
G = R  l 
 R
 lG 
G = R  100  l 
 G 
The unknown resistance of galvanometer can be
calculated by using the above formula.
Q.4. De fine p ot enti al g radi ent. Obt ain an
expression for potential gradient in terms of
resistivity of the potentiometer wire. State
the factors upon which it depends?
Ans. Potential gradient:
The fall of potential per unit length of potentiometer
wire is called potential gradient.
Current Electricity 165

  r Individual method:
C
E E1
+ 
K1
I Rs G
E2 K2
+ 
A B A
L
P
If r is internal resistance of source E and RS is I
resistance connected in series with potentiometer +
E P
wire of resistance R, then current in the circuit is B

E
I = r R R K
S

Potential gradient K is given by Rh

V AB
K = ... (1) Fig. Comparison of e.m.f.s of two cells by direct
L method
where, VAB is the potential difference between the
ends of the potentiometer wire and Let E1 and E2 be the e.m.f.s. of two cells to be
L is the length of the wire AB compared. The potentiometer wire AB is
connected in series with a battery of e.m.f. E
But VAB = IR (E1AE2), key K and rheostat Rh in series. The
From (1) e.m.f. E is greater than both E 1 and E2. The
IR positive terminals of E1 and E2 are connected to
K = ... (2) the end a of the wire AB and their negative
L
terminals are connected to the key K1 and K2 .
But, resistance of potentiometer wire The common terminal of keys K 1 and K 2 is
ρL connected to the galvanometer and then to the
R = ... (3)
A jockey.
where,  = resistivity of the material of the Working:
potentiometer wire. The key K is closed. Now the key K1 is closed so
I ρL that the cell of e.m.f. E 1 is closed. Jockey is
 K =  touched at the different points on the wire and
L A
the null point P is obtained for which the
ρI
 K = .... (4) galvanometer shows zero deflection. The
A balancing length l1 is measured from the positive
This is the expression of potential gradient. terminal A
Factors on which potential gradient depends: As no current flows through the cell of e.m.f. E1
(i) Resistivity of the material of the wire. the potential difference across AP is equal to the
(ii) Current through the wire. e.m.f. of cell E1
(iii) Area of cross section of the wire. E1 = Kl1 … (1)
where, K = potential gradient along the wire.
Q.5. Draw a neat labelled circuit diagram of a
potentiometer to compare the e.m.f. s of two Now the key K1 is kept open and the key K2 is
cells b y in dividual met hod. Der ive the closed so that the cell of e.m.f. E2 is closed. For
necessary formula. same setting of the rheostat the jockey is touched
at the different points on the wire and the null
Write two p ossible causes for one sided point Q is obtained for which the galvanometer
deflection in a potentiometer experiment. shows zero deflection. The balancing length l2 is
Ans. Principle of a potentiometer: measured from the positive terminal A.
For a uniform wire, and steady current, the As no current flows through the cell of e.m.f. E2
potential difference between any two points of the potential difference across AQ is equal to the
the potentiometer wire is directly proportional to e.m.f. of cell E2 .
the length of wire between these two points. E2 = Kl2 … (2)
Dividing the equations (1) and (2)
E1 l1
= … (3)
E2 l2
166 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

The e.m.f.s of the cells can be compared by using and the total e.m.f. Of the combination is E1  E2,
the above formula by using individual method. (Difference).
Two possible causes for one sided deflection By touching the jockey at different points of the
in a potentiometer experiment: wire AB, the null point Q is obtained for which
(i) When the battery has emf less than the emf of the galvanometer shows zero deflection.
cells to be compared. Balancing length l2 is measured.
(ii) When the positive terminal of the battery is As no current passes through the combination
connected to the end of the potentiometer wire E1  E 2, the potential difference across AQ is
where the negative terminal of the cell is equal to the e.m.f (E1  E2)
connected. E1  E2 = Kl2 … (2)
Q.6. State the principle of working of a Dividing (1) by (2)
potentiometer. Draw a neat labelled circuit
E1  E 2 l1
diagram of a potentiometer to compare the
E1  E 2 = l 2
e.m.f.s of two cells by sum and difference
method. Derive the necessary formula. Simplifying we get,
Ans. Principle of a potentiometer: E1 l1  l 2
For a uniform wire, and steady current,the E 2 = l1  l2 … (3)
potential difference between any two points of By using this formula e.m.f. of the cells can be
the potentiometer wire is directly proportional to compared sum and difference method.
the length of wire between these two points.
Q.7. Describe with the help of a neat circuit
Sum and difference method:
diagram how will you determine the internal
E2
resistance of a cell by using potentiometer.
+  Derive the necessary formula.
(a) (c) Ans. Diagram:
E1
K G
+  E
(d) (b) + 
P
R K1
A 5 volt
P battery
I  + A

+
E P K G
 B
Q
K

Rh Rh B
Fig Comparison of e.m.f.s of two cells by combination P
method

The circuit is used to compare the e.m.f. by sum E - battery of e.m.f

and difference method is shown in figure.
When the keys (a) and (b) are closed and (c) and
(d) are kept open, the cells is E1 and E2 are said
to assist each other and the total e.m.f. of the
combination is E1 + E2. (Sum)
By touching the jockey at different points of the
wire AB, the null point P is obtained for which
the galvanometer shows zero deflection.
Balancing length l1 is measured.
As no current passes through the combination
E1+ E2, the potential difference across AP is equal
to the e.m.f (E1 + E2)
E1 + E2 = Kl1
where, K is called potential gradient.
For same potential gradient, now the keys (a) and
(b) are kept open and (c) and (d) are closed, the
cells is E1 and E2 are said to oppose each other
E1 - cell whose internal resistance is determined
G - Galvanometer
R h - rheostat,
R - Resistance box
K and K1 - plug key
AB - potentiometer wire
r - Internal resistance of cell E1
Connections:
The potentiometer wire AB is connected in series
with a battery of e.m.f. E, key K and rheostat Rh
in series. The cell of e.m.f. E1 whose internal
… (1) resistance is to be determined is connected with
its + ve terminal to end A where +ve terminal of
battery is connected. The –ve terminal of cell E1
is connected to the jockey through the
galvanometer. The resistance box R and key K1
Current Electricity 167

are connected in parallel with the cell E1. Here E In the potentiometer circuit diagram shown
must be greater than E1 in fig, the balance point is obtained at X. State
Working: giving reason how the balance point is shifted,
when
Initially plug key K is closed and K1 kept open. By
touching the jockey to the different points of the (i) resistance R is increased
wire the point P is obtained on the wire, where (ii) resistance S is increased, keeping R
the galvanometer shows zero deflection. constant?
As no current flows through the cell of e.m.f. E1 R
+ 
the potential difference across AP of length L1is
E
equal to the e.m.f. of cell E1.
By principle of potentiometer, E1  L1
X
 E1 = KL1 ... (1) A B
where, L1 is balancing length of the cell when it S
is open, K = potential radient. +  G
Now a suitable resistance R is taken from the E1
resistance box and the plug key K1 is closed. By
touching the jockey to the different points of the Ans. Principle of a potentiometer:
wire the point Q is obtained on the wire, where Fall of potential difference across any length of a
the galvanometer shows zero deflection. wire is directly proportional to the length of the
As current flows through the cell of e.m.f. E1 the wire, provided that the wire has uniform area of
potential difference across AQ of length L2 is equal cross section and current passing through is
to the terminal potential difference of the cell E 1. constant.
If the L 2 is the balancing length when cell is V
K = = constant.
closed (shunted), then L
V = KL2 ... (2) There are two factors on which the sensitivity of
From (1) and (2) potentiometer depends on 
(i) Length of potentiometer wire (L)
E1 L1
= … (3) (ii) Potential drop, smaller the potential drop greater
V L2 the sensitivity.
Let I be the current in closed circuit formed by R,
(a) If the R is increased, the current decreases
r and E1 ,
so potential gradient decreases. Therefore
By Ohm’s law, the balancing length increases and point
E1 = I (R + r) … (4) shifts towards B.
The potential difference across R is (b) If S is increased, no change in the position of
V = IR … (5) balance point.
E1 R r Q.9. In a meter bridge experiment with resistance
V = … (4) R1 in the left gap and resistance X in the right
r
gap, null point is obtained at 40 cm from the
Comparing (3) and (4)
left end. With resistance R2 in the left gap
r R L1 and the same resistance X in the right gap,
= null point is obtained at 50 cm from the left
r L2
end. Where will be the null point if R1 and R2
r L1 are put in the series and then in parallel in
1+ =
R L2 the left gap and right gap still containing X?
r L1 Solution:
 = 1 Let the l1 be balancing from the left end of the
R L2
wire
 L1  l1 = 40 cm and l2 = 100  l2 = 100  40 = 60 cm
r = R  L 1
 2  From balancing condition,
This is formula for the internal resistance of a R1 l1
cell. = l
X 2
Q.8. State the principle of a potentiometer. Write R1 40
two factors on which the sensitivity of a =
X 60
potentiometer depends.
R1 2
=
X 3
168 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

2 Q.10. A potentiometer wire has a length 10m and a

 R1 = X ... (1) resistance 20 . Its terminal are connected
3
When R2 is in the left gap and X in the right gap to a battery of e.m.f 4V and internal resistance
5 .what are the distances at which null
then here l1 = 50 cm and l  l1 = 50 cm
points are obtained when two cells of e.m.f.s
R2 50
 = 1.5 V and 1.3 V are connected so as to -
X 50
(a) assist and (b) oppose each other?
R2
=1 Solution: Data:
X
R2 = X ... (2) L = 10 m , R = 20E = 4 V , r = 5
When R1 and R2 are connected in series in the E1 = 1.5 V, l1 = ?
left gap the resistance in the left gap becomes E2 = 1.3 V, l2 = ?
R S = R1 + R 2 Potential gradient K is
2 V IR
= X+X K = =
3 L L
5  E R
=
3
X K = R r  L
 
Let the l1 be balancing length from the left end of  4  20
the wire =  20  5  10
 
R1  R 2 l1 8
=  K = = 0.32 V/m ... (2)
X 100  l1 25
5
X l1 (a) Let l1 is balancing length when the cells assist
3
= 100  l each other
X 1
When cells assist each other
5 l1
= 100  l E1 + E2 = Kl1
3 1
1.5 + 1.3 = 0.32  l1
500  5l1 = 3l1
2.8 = 0.32  l1
500 = 8l1
 l1 = 8.75 m
l1 = 62.5 cm from the left end
(b) When the cells oppose each other, for same
When R1 and R2 are connected in parallel in the potential gradient
left gap, the resistance in the left gap becomes
Let l2 is balancing length when the cells oppose
1 1 1
 each other
R p = R1 R 2
When cells oppose each other
R1R 2 E1  E2 = Kl2
RP = R  R ... (3)
1 2 1.5  1.3 = 0.3 2 l2
2 2 2 0.2 = 0.32  l2
X X X
3 3
= 2 = 5 l2 = 0.625 m
X X X
3 3 Q.11. A potentiometer wire of length 4 m and
2 resistance 8  is connected in series with a
X 2X battery of e.m.f 2 V and negligible resistance.
= 3 = If the e.m.f of cell balances against length of
5 5
3 217 cm of the wire, find the e.m.f of cell. When
a cell is shunted by a resistance of 15 , the
Now let the l2 be balancing from the left end of
balancing length is reduced by 17 cm. Find
the wire
the internal resistance of a cell.
RP l2
= 100  l Solution: Data:
X 2
2X L = 4 m, R = 8, E = 2V, E1 = ?
5 l2
= 100  l l = 217 cm = 2.17 m
X 2
r =? ,R1 = 15 
2 l2 l2 = 217 – 17 cm = 200 cm = 2 m
= 100  l
5 2 Potential gradient K is
200  2l2 = 5l2
V IR
200 = 7l 2 K = =
L L
l 2= 28.6 cm from the left end.
Current Electricity 169

Solution:
 E R
K = R r  L Let X be the resistance that has to be connected
 
in parallel withS to balance the network
2 8 The effective resistance of S and X is
K = 84
 
1 1 1
K = 0.5 V /m ... (1)
Rp = X + S ... (1)
Let l is balancing length
E1 = Kl From null condition
= 0.5  2.17 P Rp
= 1.085 V =
Q R
Let l1 be balancing length when the cell is in open R
4 p
circuit and r be internal resistance of cell =
4 4
l 
r = R1  l  1 4 = Rp Rp = 4 
1 
From (1)
 2.17 
= 15   2  1 1 1 1
 
Rp = X + S
 2.17  2 
= 15   2
 1 1 1
  = +
4 X 12
 0.17 
= 15   2  1 1 1
  = 
X 4 12
= 15  0.085
1 8 1
= 1.275  = =
X 48 6
Q.12. Four resistances 4, 4, 4 and 12  form a  X=6 
Wheatstone’s network. Find the resistance
which when con nect ed across the 12 
resistance, will balance the network.
B

P=4 Q=4

A C
G
S =12
R=4

X
D

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Explain the principle of potentiometer. (Oct 2013)
(2) State the advantages of potentiometer over voltmeter. (March 2017)
(3) Explain with a neat circuit diagram how will you determine unkown resistance ‘X’ by using meter bridge.
(March 2018)
Problems:
 

a resistance of 12 ohm is connected across a cell, its terminal potential difference is balanced by 120 cm
length of poteniometer wire. When the resistence of 18 ohm is connected across the same cell, the balancing
length is 150 cm. Find the balancing length when the cell is in open circuit. Also calculate the internal resistanc
of the cell. (July 2017)


170 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
14
Syllabus
Ampere’s laws and its Applications, Moving coil Galvanometer (M.C.G), Ammeter, Voltmeter, Sensitivity and Accuracy of a
Moving Coil Galvanometer, Cyclotron

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Which one of the following particles cannot be (a) speed and radius of curvature
accelerated by cyclotron? (b) speed but not radius of curvature
(a) Electrons (b) Protons (c) radius of curvature but not speed
(c) -particles (d) Deuterons (d) the period of a.c. voltage applied across Dees
2. An ideal voltmeter has 7. To convert galvanometer into voltmeter
(a) low resistance (b) high resistance (a) large resistance should be connected in series
(c) zero resistance (d) infinite resistance (b) large resistance should be connected in parallel
3. An ideal ammeter has (c) low resistance should be connected in series
(a) low resistance (b) high resistance (d) low resistnce should be connected in parallel
(c) zero resistance (d) infinite resistance 8. To convert galvanometer into an ammeter
4. A solenoid oflength 1.5 m and 4 cm in diameter (a) large resistance should be connected in series
possesses 10 turns per metre. A current of 5 A is (b) large resistance should be connected in parallel
flowing through it. The magnetic induction at a point (c) low resistance should be connected in series
inside the solenoid along the axis is (d) low resistnce should be connected in parallel
(a)  105 T (b) 2 105 T
5
9. Cyclotron is a device generally used to
(c) 3 10 T (d) 4 105 T
(a) accelerate heavy positively charged particles.
5. If R is the radius of Dees and B is the magnetic (b) accelerate high negatively charged particle
field of induction in which positive charge q of mass
(c) accelerate electrons
m escapes from the cyclotron, then its maximum
speed is (d) accelerate neutral particles
m 10. The sensitivity of moving coil galvanometer can be
qR qm qBR
(a) (b) (c) (d) BqR increased by
Bm BR m
(a) increasing the surface area of the coil
6. The time taken by an ion (same mass and charge) (b) increasing the restoring torque per unit twist
to describe the semi-circular path inside the dee in
(c) decreasing the magnetic field
cyclotron is independent of
(d) decreasing the number of turns of the coil

ANSWERS
1  (a), 2  (d), 3  (c), 4  (b), 5  (c), 6  (a), 7  (a), 8  (d), 9  (a), 10  (a)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. What will happen, if the magnetic field in
moving coil galvanometer is not radial?
Ans: If the magnetic filed in M.C.G. is not radial then,
current in M.C.G. will not be directly proportional
to the angle of deflection of the coil. Hence we
cannot have a linear scale for measurement.
Q.2. What will happen if the shunt in an ammeter
has a large resistance?
Ans. If the shunt of an ammeter has a larger resistance
than a desired range, excessive current will pass
through the MCG. This may heat the coil and
strain the pointer.
(170)
Q.3. Why is it necessary to introduce a cylindrical
soft iron core inside the coil of a galvanometer?
Ans. Soft iron core makes the field radial within the gap.
It also increases the strength of the magnetic field.
Q.4. What are the functions of shunt in ammeter?
Ans. (i) It reduces the effective resistance of an
ammeter.
(ii) It increases the range of an ammeter
Q.5. What are the functions of s high value resistance
in voltmeter?
Ans. (i) It increases the effective resistance of an
voltmeter.
(ii) It increases the range of a voltmeter.
Magnetic effect of electric current
Q.6. Does the period of a positive ion in cyclotron
depend on radius of Dees?
Ans. No, it is independent of radius of dees and is same
for all ions with same mass and same charge.
2m
T =
qB
Q.7. What is the importance of a radial magnetic
field and how is it produced?
Ans. In a radial magnetic field, magnetic torque
remains constant for all positions of the coil.
It is produced due to cylindrical pole pieces and
soft iron core.
Q.8. Why is it that while using a moving coil
galvanometer as a voltmeter a high resistance
in series is required?
Ans. This ensure that a very low current passes through
the voltmeter and hence does not change (much)
the original potential difference to be measured.
Short Answer Type Questions - I
Q.1. State Ampere’s law and write its mathematical
expression
Ans. Ampere’s law:
The line integral of magnetic field of induction
B around any closed path in free space is equal
to absolute permeability of free space 0) times
the total current flowing through area bounded
by the path.
Mathematically,
 B  dl = 0I
where, B is magnetic induction.
dl is small element of a closed path.
I is the total current enclosed in close path.
0 is permittivity of free space.
Q.2. Explain why a voltmeter must have a very large
resistance?
Ans. A voltmeter is used to measure the P.D. between
the two points on the circuit. It is connected in
parallel to the resistance across which potential
difference is to be measured. When connected in
parallel it draws some current from the circuit. If
the voltmeter resistance is low, then it will draw
more current from the circuit, and hence reduce
the potential difference to be measured. Therefore
it will measure less potential difference than
what it would have been in the absence of
voltmeter.
171
Q.9. Why is it that while using a moving coil
galvanometer as an ammeter shunt in parallel
is required?
Ans. This ensure that the total resistance of the circuit
does not change much and the current flowing
through the circuit remains constant (almost) at
its original value.
Q.10. How a galvanometer is converted into an
ammeter?
Ans. A galvanometer is converted into an ammeter by
connecting a very low resistance called shunt in
parallel to the coil of galvanometer.
Q.11. How a galvanometer is converted into a
voltmeter?
Ans. A galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by
connecting a very high resistance in series with
the coil of galvanometer.
Q.12. What will happen if a voltmeter has a low
resistance?
Ans. If the series multiplier voltmeter has a resistance
smaller than a desired range, excessive current
will pass through the MCG. This may heat the
coil and strain the pointer.
(2 marks each)
Thus voltmeter must have high resistance, so
that it draws less current and hence does not
disturb the original P.D. much.
Q.3. Why an ammeter must have a very low resistance?
Ans. An ammeter is connected in series with a circuit
element through the current is to be measured.
When the ammeter is connected in series, the
effective resistance of the circuit increases as
the galvanometer has some its own resistance.
Therefore the current in that branch decreases.
The ammeter measure this lowered current. For
this reason, it is always desirable that the
resistance of an ammeter should be as low as
possible, ideally its resistance is zero.
Q.4. Define acuuracy of moving coil galvanometer.
Obtain its expression.
Ans. A galvanometer is said to be more acuurate, if
the relative error in the measurement of current
is less.
Acuracy is inversely proportional to relative error
in current.
1
Accuracy, 
 dI 
 
 I 
Current flowing through moving coil galvanometer
is
 c 
I =   ... (1)
 NBA 
172 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Differentiating, we get Q.7. Define the sensitivity of moving c oil

galvanometer and obtain its expression.
 c  OR
dI =   d ... (2)
 NBA
State the formula of sensitivity of a moving
Dividing (2) by (1), we get coil galvanometer. How can it be increased?
dI d Ans. Current sensitity:
= ... (3)
I  It is defined as change in deflection per unit
This is the condition for accuracy of M.C.G. change in current.
dI d
If the fractional erroris small, M.C.G. is said Si = ... (1)
I dI
to more accurate or accuracy is said to be Current flowing through a M.C.G. is given by
maximum. This is possible, if  is large for given  c 
value of d. I =  
 NBA 
Q.5. Draw a neat labelled diagram of M.C.G. Differenciating,
Ans. Diagram:  c 
dI =   d
 NBA 
I M d NBA
= ... (2)
dt c
W From (1) and (2)
n BA
P S Si =
c
This is the expression of the current sensitivity
N C S Sensitivity can be increased by -
1. Increasing the number of turns N of the coil (N)
Q R 2. Increasing magnetic induction (B)
3. Incresing area of the coil (A)
H
4. Decreasing the twist of phosphor broze wire (c)
I Q.8. State the priciple of cyclotron. State the
Fig. Suspended coil type moving coil galvanometer function of electric and magnetic fields in a
cyclotron.
Labellings:
Ans. Principle of cyclotron:
C - cylindrical core
When a positively charged particle moves with a
N-S – cylindrical concave poles of strong magnet. definate periodic time, again and again,
PQRS – rectangular coil perpendicular to uniform magnetic field and is
H – helical spiral spring accelerated by high frequency electric field, traces
a spiral path of increasing radius. The positively
M – Plane mirror.
charged particle is accelerated to high speed and
W – Phosphor bronze wire suspension gains sufficient large amount of energy.
Q.6. Draw a neat labelled diagram of construction Functions:
of cyclotron 1. The electric field in the gap between the dees of a
Ans. Construction of cyclotron: cyclotron accelerate the positively charged particles.
2. The magnetic field in the dees deflect the particles
Electromagnet in semicircular paths so that they return to the
(north pole)
gap in a fixed time interval. It makes the particle
Acceleration
gap to move in circular path inside the dees.
Particle’s
Hollow electrode path Q.9. State and explain two limitations of cyclotron
chambers
Ans. Limitation of cyclotron:
Dees
Charged particle 1. It cannot be used to accelerate electrons,
Target Because electrons have very small mass, they
quickly achieve relastivistic speed i.e. speed at
Alternating which their mass increases significanly with
current increase in speed. They cannot remain
source Electromagnet
(south pole) synchronous with the alternating electric field
Fig. Cyclotron between the dees.
Magnetic effect of electric current 173

2. For higher energies, with a given value of magnetic  Ig 

field strenght, the exist radius and thus the dees  S =  I  I  G
must be large. It is difficult to produce a magnetic  g 

field over a large area.  0.005 

=  5  0.005  40
Q.10. State the expression of magnetic force acting  
on a straight conductor carrying current I  0.005
placed in a uniform magnetic field. What is =   40
its maximum and minimum value ?  4.995
= 0.040  in parallel
Ans. When a conductor of length l carrying current I is
placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction B, Q.13. A resistance of 3 ohm is connected in parallel
the magnetic force acting on it is to a galvanometer of resistance 297 ohm. Find
   the fraction of current p assing through
F = Il B galvanometer.
Its magnitude is
Solution: Data:
F = IlB sin 
Ig
when the conductor is parallel or antiparalle l to G = 297 , S = 3 , %=?
the field I
Fraction of current through galvanometer is
 = 00 or 1800  sin  = 0
 F = 0 (minimum) Ig  S 
= G S 
when the conductor is perpendicular to the field I  
 = 900  sin  = 1 Ig  3 
=  
F = Il B (maximum) I  279  3 
Q.11. A rectangular coil in a moving coil galvanometer 3
=
has 50 turns each of length 5 cm and breadth 300
3 cm, which is suspended in a radial magnetic Ig 3
field of 0.050 Wb/m2. The twist constant of  % =  100 = 1%
I 300
suspension is 1.5  109 Nm/degree. Calculate
the current through the coil, which will deflect Q.14. The combined resistance of galvanometer of
it through 300. resistance 1000 ohm and its shunt is 25 .
Calculate the value of shunt.
Solution: Data:
Solution: Data:
l = 5 cm = 5  102m
G = 1000  ,R = 25  ,S = ?
b = 3 cm = 3  102m
Equivalent resistance of ammeter
A = l  b = 5  102  3  102
1 1 1
= 15  104m2 = +
R G S
B = 0.050 T = 5 × 102 T, N = 50, = 300, I = ?
1 1 1
c = 1.5  109 Nm/degree = 
S R G
 c 
I =   1 1
 N BA  = 
25 1000
 1.5  10 9  300 
1000  25
=  50  5  10  2  15  10  4 
975
  = =
25  1000 25000
45  109 25000
=  S = = 25.64 
3750  106 975
= 0.012  103 Q.15. A rectangular coil of a moving coil galvanometer
= 1.2  105 A contains 50 turns each having area 12 cm2. It
is suspended in radial magnetic field 0.025
Q.12. A galvanometer with a coil of resistance 40 ohm Wb/m2 by a fibre of twist constant 15 × 1010
gives a full scale deflection for a current of Nm/degree. Calculate the sensitivity of a
5 mA. How will you convert it into an ammeter moving coil galvanometer.
of range 0  5 A?
Solution: Data:
Solution: Data:
G = 40 , I = 5A A = 12  104 m2, B = 0.025 T = 25  103 T,
I g = 5 mA = 5  103 A, S = ? N = 50, c = 15  1010 Nm/degree
M.C.G. is converted into ammeter by connecting
low resistance S in parallel with galvanometer.
174 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Current sensitivity, 0NI

 B =
NBA 2r
 Si =
c 4  107  1000  I
0.05 =
50  25  103  12  104 2  101
=
15  1010 2  103  107  I
0.05 =
15  103  103  104 101
=
15  1010  0.05 = 20  104 I
= 10 div/A
6
0.05
 I =
Q.16. A solenoid  m long and 5 cm in diameter has 20  10  4
two layers of windings 1000 turns each and = 0.0025  104
carries a current of 5A. Find the magnetic  I = 25 A
induction at its centre along axis.
Q.18. A rectangular coil having length 15 cm breadth
Solution: Data:
10 cm, is kept in uniform magnetic field of
l = m, d = 5 cm = 5  102 m 2 × 105 Wb/m2. The coil carries a current of
I = 5A, B = ? , N = 1000  2 = 2000 100 mA. Com pute the torqu e acting on
0 = 4  107 Wb/A-m conduct or o f le ngth 15 cm, when it is
perpendicular to magnetic field.
0NI
 B = Solution: Data:
l
l = 15 cm = 15  102 m
4  107  2000  5
 B = b = 10 cm = 10  102 m

= 4 × 2000 × 5 × 107 I = 100 mA = 100  103 m
= 40 × 103 × 107 B = 2  105 Wb/m2
= 4 × 103 T d = ?
A =l  b
Q.17. The radius of narrow toroid is 101 m and has
1000 turns of wire on it. How large current = 15  102  10  102
must flow in it, if magnetic induction inside = 150  104 m2
it is 0.05 T? Torque on the coil
Solution: Data: d = NBIA
r = 101 m, N = 1000 = 1  2  105  100  103  150  104
B = 0.05 T = 3  104  1012
0 = 4  107 Wb/A-m, I = ? = 3  108 Nm

Short Answer Type Questions-II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Obtain an expression of magnetic induction 
X B
at a point near infi nitely long straight I
conductor carrying current by using Ampere’s
law. r 
Ans. Consider an infinitely long straight conductor dl
P
carrying current I as shown in fig. Let point P be
at a distance r from it. To determine magnetic I
induction at point P, choose an ampere loop as Y
an imaginary circle of radius r perpendicular to
straight conductor at the centre of loop. Fig. Amperian loop through point P
Let B be the magnetic induction at the point P
due to current I flowing through conductor. According to Ampere’s law
 
dl be the small length element of a circle around  B  dl =  I 0
... (1)
the wire.  
But  B  dl =  Bdl cos 
 
In this case the angle between B and dl is 0
cos = cos 0 = 1
Magnetic effect of electric current 175

Further due to symmetry, B is same at all points D 

along the close path.  B  dl = 0
C
... (3)
  B 

 dl
 

 B  dl =B   B  dl =  A
B  dl + 0 + 0 + 0
= B × 2r ... (2)   B 

From (1) and (2)   B  dl =  A

B  dl

B × 2r = 0I B

0 I
=  Bdl cos 
A
B =  
2r B

=
0  2I 
 
=  Bdl
A
4  r  B
= B  dl
This is the expression of magnetic induction due A
to straight conductor carrying current = BL ... (4)
Q.2. What is solenoid? Obtain an expression of where, dl = L = length AB of rectangular path.
magnetic induction at the centre of a solenoid From (1) and (4)
Ans. Solenoid: It is long wire wound in the form of BL = 0n IL
helix such that the length of solenoid is large B = 0n I
compared to the radius of the closely spaced turns
This is the magnetic induction at the centre of a
Consider a solenoid having n number of turns solenoid.
per unit length. Let I is the current passing
through it. The solenoid is long and its cross At a point near the one end of solenoid, the
1
sectional area is small compared to its length. magnetic induction is  nI
2 0
So that magnetic field inside it is uniform over
the cross section and nearly parallel to the axis. Q.3. What is toroid? Obtain an expression of
The field outside is nearly zero. magnetic induction along the axis of toroid.
Consider rectangular path ABCD as shown in fig. Ans. Toroid: It is a solenoid bent into a shape of hollow
AB = L, length of the rectangular path. The number doughnut. Toroid is a hollow circular ring on which
of turns enclosed by the rectangular path is nL. a large number of turns of a wire are wound.
Total current enclosed by the closed rectangular is Consider a toroidal solenoid of radius r having centre
Iencl. = nIL O carrying current I.
D C


B
r
A B Loop 1
O
Loop 2
F
Loop 3
I I

Fig. Amperian loop ABCDA for current carrying solenoid

From Ampere’s law, we have, I I

  Fig. A toroidal carrying current
 B  dl = 0Ienclosed In order to find the magnetic induction at the centre
= 0n I L ... (1) along the axis of toroid,
Now for closed loop ABCDA consider path 2. Total current enclosed by the
  B  C  D  A  path is NI, where N is no. of turns.
 B  dl =  A
B  dl +
B
B  dl +

C
B  dl +

D
B  dl According to Ampere’s law
 



Direction of B is perpendicular to BC and AD B  dl = 0I
C  A  Here, current I flows through the ring as many
B
B  dl =

D 
B  dl = Bdl cos  = 0 = 900) ... (2) times as there are number of turns. Thus, the
total current flowing through toroid is NI, where
Practically magnetic field outside the solenoid is N is the total number of turns.
nearly zero  

 B  dl = 0NI ... (1)

176 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

  Q.5. State the principle of M.C.G and show that

 B  dl = B.dl cos = Bdl ... ( = 0) the current flowing trough the moving coil
At all points along the circular path 2 the field is galvanometer is directly proportional to the
tangent to the circle and is constant at all points. angle of deflection of the coil
  Ans. Principle of moving coil galvanometer:
 B  dl = B dl When a coil carrying current is suspended in a
uniform magnetic field, a torque acts on it. This
 

 B  dl = B × 2r ... (2) torque tends to rotate the coil about the axis of
the suspension, so that the magnetic flux passing
where, dl = 2r through the coil is maximum.
= total length of closed path
Theory:
From (1) and (2) P S

B(2r) = 0NI

B
 NI
B = 0 l
2r
F
This is the magnetic induction due to toroid along
its axis F

Q.4. With the help of neat diagram, describe the

construction of a moving coil galvanometer. Q b R
Ans. Construction: It consists of a light rectangular Fig. (a)
coil PQRS of thin insulated copper wire. It is
wound on a nonmagnetic alluminium frame. The Consider PQRS is a rectangular coil of wire of
coil is suspended so that it can rotate freely in a legth l, breadth b having N number of turns, is
uniform radial magnetic field. The magnetic field suspended in a uniform magnetic field B. When
is produced by two strong cylindricaly concave a current flows through it, the conductors PQ and
pole pieces N–and S. The soft iron cylinder C is SR acted upon by forces each of magnitude
fixed within the coil. It makes field betwween the F = NBIl
gap radial. It also increases the strenght of the
magnetic field within the gap. The coil is These two forces are of equal magnitude but in
suspended by means of a thin phosphor bronze opposite deirection forms couple.
wire suspension (W). A small plane mirror M is The moment of couple (or torque) is
fixed on phosphor bronze fibre, which is used in = Magnitude of one of the forces  Perpendicular
lamp and scale arrangement. The other end of the distance between the two forces
coli is connected to phosphor bronze helical spring  d = NBIl  b
(H) and serve purpose of leading current in and
out of the coil. Also the elastic behaviour of the d = NBI (l  b)
helical spring helps the coil to bring back to its d = NBIA
original position when the current is cut off. where A = l  b = Area of the coil
This torque deflects the coil hence it is called
deflecting torque.
I M
Thus, Deflecting torque
d = NBIA … (1)
W
Since the coil is suspended in the radial magnetic
P S
field, therefore the deflecting torque is constant
at all positions of the coil.
N C S

F
Q R N S
F
H

I
Fig. (b) Radial magnetic field
Fig. Suspended coil type moving coil galvanometer
As the coil is deflected, the phosphor bronze wire
is twisted. The twist in the wire provides restoring
torque. This restoring torque is directly proportional
to the deflection of the coil.
Magnetic effect of electric current 177

Thus restoring torque Q.7. Derive the expression of fraction of the total
r = c  ... (2) current passing through the galvanometer
and shunt.
where, c is restoring torque per unit twist of the
suspension (n/rad or n/degree) Ans. Let G is the resistance of galvanometer and S is
the shunt connected parallel to the coil of
For equilibrium of the coil,
galvanometer
Deflecting torque = Restoring torque
Since the galvanometre and shunt are parallel
d = r
Potential difference across G = Potential difference
NBIA = c  across S
 c  I g G = IsS
 I =  
 NBA  I g G = (I  Ig)S
c IgG = IS  IgS
As = constant for given galvanometer
NBA IgG + IgS = IS
 I Ig (G + S) = IS
Thus the current flowing trough the moving coil
galvanometer is directly proportional to the angle  S 
Ig =  G  S  I ... (1)
of deflection of the coil.  
This is the fractional of total current passing
Q.6. Explain how a moving coil galvanometer is
through the galvanometer
converted into ammeter. Derive the necessary
formula. What is effective resistance of Fraction of the total current passing through the
ammeter? shunt is given by
Ans. Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter: A Since, IgG = ISS and Ig = I  IS
moving coil galvanometer is converted into an (I  IS)G = ISS
ammeter by connecting a small value of resistance IG  ISG = ISS
called shunt parallel to the coil of galvanometer
ISS = ISS + ISG
as shown in figure.
or, ISG + ISS = IG
G IS(G + S) = IG

I Ig Ig I  G 
 Is = G  S  I ... (2)
 
This is the equation which gives the fraction of
total current passing through the shunt.
Is S
Q.8. Explain how a moving coil galvanometer is
converted into voltmeter. Derive the necessary
formula.What is effective resistance of
Let I be the maximum value of the current to be voltmeter?
measured.
Ans. Conversion of galvanometer to voltmeter:
Let I g be the current passing through the
galvanometer for which the galvanometer shows A galvanometer can be converted into a voltmeter
full scale deflection. by connecting a high resistance in series with a
galvanometer as shown in fig.
Let G is the resistance of galvanometer and S be
is the shunt connected parallel to the coil of G
galvanometer RS
Since the galvanometer and shunt are parallel I Ig Ig I
 Potential   Potential 
   
  difference  =  difference  Vg VR
Ig
 across G   across S 
 IgG = ISS V
 
IgG = (I  Ig)S ... (I  Ig = Is)
Fig. Conversion of M.C.G. into Voltmeter
 Ig 
  Let,
 S =  I  I G ... (1)
 g  I g - is the current p assing through the
This is the value of the shunt that should be galvanometer for which the galvanometr shows
connected in parallel to the galvanometer in order full scale deflection.
to convert it into ammeter. Let G is the resistance of galvanometer
178
Rs - is the high value of resistance connected in
series to the coil of galvanometer
V - is the maximum potential difference to be
measured.
Since galvanometer G and resistance Rs are in series.
By Ohm’s law,
V = Vg + VR
= IgG + IgRS
= Ig(G + RS)
V the positive ions due to magnetic field is directed
G + RS =
Ig
V which it moves in semicircular path in the dee
RS = G
Ig
This is the value of high resistance that should
be connected in series with the coil of
galvanometer so as to convert it into voltmeter.
The total (effective) resistance of voltmeter
R S = G + RS
Q.9. State the principle of cyclotron. Describe the
construction and working of cyclotron.
Ans. Principle:
When a positively charged particle moves with a
definate periodic time, again and again,
perpendicular to uniform magnetic field and is
accelerated by high frequency electric field, traces
a spiral path of increasing radius. The positively
charged particle is accelerated to high speed and
gains sufficient large amount of energy.
Construction:
It consists of two D shaped semicircular hollow
metal boxes, which are called ‘dees’. The dees are
placed between two pole pieces of electromagnet,
which produces magnetic field of the order of 15000
gauss, (1 gauss = 104 t). The field is perpendicular
to the plane of dees. An alternating potential
difference of the order of 10,000 volt and frequency
107 cycle/sec is applied between the dees. Electric
field increases the energy of the charge particle
moving in the dees, whereas magnetic field changes
the direction of motion. Positive ions are produced
in the gap between the two dees by ionisation of
gas. Hydrogen gas is used to produce protons,
whereas helium gas is used to produce - particles.
Electromagnet
(north pole)
Acceleration
gap
Particle’s
Hollow electrode path
chambers
Dees
Charged particle
Target
Alternating
current
source Electromagnet
(south pole)
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
Working:
Positive ions are produced at the centre of the
gap between D 1 and D 2 since D 1 and D 2 are
connected to high frequency alernating potential,
its polarity changes periodicaly.
If D1 is at positive potential and D2 is at negative
potential, then the positive ions produced at the
gap moves away from D1, get attracted to D2 and
enters in dee D2 . The positive ions move in strong
magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of dees,
hence it experiences force. This force acting on
towards center, therfore in acts as cpf. Due to
D2 before arriving at the gap between the dees.
D1
ion source
T
P a.c.
W
dees
D2
The frequency of the applied a.c. voltage and the
strength of the magnetic field are chosen such
that the time required to complete the
semicircular path corresponds to one half cycle.
Due to this, after completion of semicircle in D2,
when the positive ion enters the gap , polarities
of the dees get reversed. Now D1 becomes positive
and D2 becomes negative. Therefore the ion is
attrceted towards the D1 and hence it moves in
larger circular path in the dee D 1. Since the
particle is moving with larger velocity, it moves
in a semicircular path of greater radius in D1.
This proces repeats itself again and again.
Ultimately highly energetic positive ions escape
from the window and finally it strike the target.
Q.10. Show that the period of a positively charged
particle moving in a cyclotron is independent
of the velocity of the charged particle and the
radius of dees.
OR
Show that the cy lotr on frequ ency is
independent of energy of the charged particle.
Is there an upper limit on the energy acquired
by the particle ?
Ans. When the charged particle moves inside the
semicircular dees in the magnetic field, the
necessary centripetal force is provided by the
magnetic force acting on the charged particle.
Centripetal force = Magnetic force
Magnetic effect of electric current 179

mv 2 M.C.G. is converted into ammeter by connecting

= qBv low resistance S in parallel with galvanometer.
r
mv  Ig 
r = qB ... (1) S =  I  I  G
 g 

This gives the radius of circular path traced by  0 . 05 

the positive ion in magnetic field. =   60
 5  0 .05 
Since q, m and B are constant 0.05
=  60
r  v 4.95
Velocity of positive ion is directly proportional to = 0.6061 in parallel
the radius of the circle traced by it. M.C.G. is converted into voltmeter by connecting
The time taken to traverse semicircular dees is high resistance R in series with galvanometer.

  r V
t = = v = ... (2) R = I G
 r v g

50
From (1) and (2) =  60
50  103
 mv = 100060
t =  qB
v = 940  in series
m
 t = qB Q.12. A galvanometer has a resistance of 16 and
gives a full scale deflection when a current
This shows that the time taken to describe of 20 mA is passed through it. The only shunt
semicircle is independent of radius r and velocity resistance available is 0.04 ohm which is not
v and is same for all ions with same mass and appropriate to convert galvanometer into an
charge. ammeter. How much resistance should be
Period T is given by, connected in series with a coil of galvanometer
so that the range of ammeter is 10 A?
2m
T = 2t = qB ... (4) Solution: Data:
G = 16 , I = 10A
Magnetic resonance frequency f is
Ig = 20 mA = 20 × 103 = 0.02 A
qB
f = ... (5) S = 0.04, R = ?
2m
M.C.G. is converted into ammeter by connecting
Kinetic energy of positively charged ion is
low resistance S in parallel with galvanometer.
mv 2 Since G and R in series
K.E. =
2
 Ig 
S =  I  I  (G  R )
2
1  qBr 
= m    ... from (1)  g 
2  m 
where, r is me radius of the dees.  20  10 3 
 0.04 =  
 3  (16 + R)
q 2B 2r 2  10  20  10 
K.E. =
2m  0.02 
0.04 =   (16 + R)
This is the exprerssion of K.E.  10  0.02 
Yes, there is an upper limit on the energy acquired  0.02 
by the charged particle. The charged particle gains 0.04 =   (16 + R)
 9.98 
maximum speed when it moves in a path of radius
equal to the radius of the dees.  1 
0.04 =   (16 + R)
 499 
Q.11. Calculate the value of resistance needed to
convert a moving coil galvanometer of 60   0.04 × 499 = 16 + R
into a ammeter of range 5 A which gives full  19.96 = 16 + R
scale deflection for a current of 50 mA and R = 19.96  16
into voltmeter of range 0-50 V.
R = 03.96 
Solution: Data:
 R = 3.96  in parallel
G = 60 , I = 5A
I g = 50 mA = 50 × 103 A
V = 50 V, S = ?, R = ?
180 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.13. In a cyclotron the value of B inside the dees = 7.628 × 106 Hz

is 0.5 Wb/m2. What should be the frequency = 7.628 MHz
of the oscillator used for correct operation
of the instrument? If the dees have a radius BqR
Since, Umax =
of 50 cm, find the kinetic energy of a proton m
beam produced by the accelerator. 0.5  1.6  1019  0.5
[Mass of proton = 1.67  1027 kg, Charge on =
1.67  1027
proton = 1.6  1019 C] = 2.395 × 107 m/s
Solution: Data:
1 2
B = 0.5 Wb/m2, r = 50 cm = 0.5 m,  K.E. = Mv max
2
Frequency (n) = ?, K.E. = ?
1
T m 2m = × 1.67 × 1027 × (2.395 × 107)2
2
Since, 2  Bq  T = Bq
= 4.7904 × 1013 J
1 Bq
But n = = 4.7904  1013
T 2m = eV
1.6  1019
0.5  1.6  1019
 n = = 2.994 Mev
2  3.14  1.67  1027

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Obtain the expression for current sensitivity of moving coil galvanometer. (March 2013)
(2) State Ampere’s circuital law. Obtain an expression for magnetic induction along the axis of toroid.
(Feb. 2014)

(8) State and explain Ampere’s Circuital law. (March 2018)

Problems :
(1) In a cyclotron, magnetic field of 3.5 Wb/m2 is used to accelerate protons. What should be the time interval in
which the electric field between the Dees be reversed?
(Mass of proton = 1.67 × 10–27 kg, Charge on proton = 1.6 × 10–19 C) (March 2013)
(2) A galvanometer has a resistance of 16W. It shows full scale deflection, when a current of 20 mA is passed
through it. The only shunt resistance available is 0.06W which is not appropriate to convert a galvanometer
into an ammeter. How much resistance should be connected in series with the coil of the galvanometer, so
that the range of ammeter is 8 A ? (Oct 2013)
(3) A rectangular coil of a moving coil galvanometer contains 50 turns each having area 12cm 2. It is suspended in
radial magnetic field 0.025 Wb/m2 by a fibre of twist constant 15 × 10–10 N–m/degree. Calculate the sensitivity
of the moving coil galvanometer. (Oct 2015)
(4) A coil of 100 turns, each of area 0.02 m2 is kept in a uniform field of induction 3.5 × 10–5 T. If the coil rotates
with a speed of 6000 r.p.m. about an axis in the plane of the coil and perpendicular to the magnetic induction,
calculate peak value of e.m.f. induced in the coil. (Oct 2015)
(5) The combined resistance of a galvanometer of resistance 500 W and its shunt is 21W. Calculate the value of
shunt. (Feb. 2016)
(6) A voltmeter has a resistance of 100 W. What will be its reading when it is connected across a cell of e.m.f. 2V
and internal resistance 20W ? (July 2016)
(7) A moving coil galvanometer has a resistance of 25W and gives a full scale deflection for a current of 10 mA.
How will you convert it into a voltmeter having range 0 – 100 V? (July 2016)
(8) A rectangular coil of a moving coil galvanometer contains 100 turns, each having area 15 cm 2. It is suspended
in the radial magnetic field 0.03 T. The twist constant of suspension fibre is 15 × 10 –10 N-m/degree. Calculate
the sensitivity of the moving coil galvanometer. (March 2017)
(9) In a cyclotron, magentic field of 1.4 Wb/m 2 is used. To accelerate protons, how rapidly should the electric
field between the Dees be reversed? ( = 3.142, Mp = 1.67 × 1027 kg, e = 1.6 × 1019 C) (March 2018)


Magnetism 181
CHAPTER
15
Syllabus
Circular Current Loop as a Magnetic Dipole, Magnetic Dipole Moment of a Revolving Electron, Magnetization and Magnetic
Intensity, Diamagnetism, Paramagnetism and Ferromagnetism on the Basis of Domain Theory.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Which one of the following is ferromagnetic 7. Susceptibility of a paramagnetic substance is
substance? (a) inversely proportional to absolute temperature
(a) Antimony (b) Bismuth (b) directly proportional to absolute temperature
(c) Nickel (d) Platinum (c) independent of temperature
2. Which one of the following is diamagnetic (d) small and negative
substance? 8. Dimensions of magnetic intensity is
(a) Water (b) Aluminium (a) [I1M0 L1 T1] (b) [I1 M0 L1T0]
(c) Gadolinium (d) Chromium (c) [I1M0L1 T1] (d) [I1M0L1T0]
3. Which one of the following is paramagnetic substance? 9. Dimensions of gyromagnetic ratio is
(a) Lithium (b) Sodium chloride (a) [I1 M0 L1 T1] (b) [I1 M0 L1 T1]
(c) Mercury (d) Dysprosium 1 0 1
(c) [I M L T ]
1
(d) [I1 M0 L1 T0]
4. Susceptibility of a paramagnetic substance is 10. Which of the following can be used to make a
(a) large and positive (b) small and positive permanent magnet ?
(c) small and negative (d) very large and positive (a) Diamagnetic substance
5. Susceptibility of a diamagnetic substance is (b) Paramagnetic substance
(a) large and positive (b) small and positive (c) Ferromagnetic substance
(c) small and negative (d) very large and positive (d) Ferrimagnetic substance
6. Susceptibility of a ferromagnetic substance is 11. When ferromagnetic substance is placed in an
(a) large and positive (b) small and positive external magnetic field the size of magnetic domains
(c) small and negative (d) Very large and positive (a) may increase
(b) may decrease
(c) may increase or decrease
(d) become zero

ANSWERS
1  (c), 2  (a), 3  (a), 4  (b), 5  (c), 6  (d), 7  (a), 8  (a), 9  (c), 10  (c), 11  (c)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Define magnetic dipole moment of a current Q.4. State its S.I. unit and dimensions of gyromagnetic
loop ratio.
Ans. Magnetic moment of a circular coil is defined as Ans. S.I. unit of gyromagnetic ratio is C/kg.
the product of current flowing through a coil and Its Dimensions are [L0M1T1I1]
area of the coil.
Q.5. Is the Gyromagnetic ratio same for electron
i.e. M = IA
and alpha particles?
Q.2. State S.I. unit and dimensions of dipole moment. Ans. No, it is different.
Ans. S.I. Unit of dipole moment is A-m2
Q.6. What happens when ferromagnetic substance
Its Dimensions are [L2M0T0I1]
is heated above Curie temperature?
Q.3. Define gyromagnetic ratio. Ans. When ferromagnetic substance is heated above
Ans. Gyromagnetic ratio: Curie temperature, it becomes paramagnetic.
It is defined as the ratio of magnetic dipole moment Q.7. In what way is the behaviour of a diamagnetic
to the angular momentum of revolving electron. substance different from that of a paramagnetic
M e substance when kept in an external magnetic
 Gyromagnetic ratio = =
L 2m field?

(181)
182 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Ans. Paramagnetic materials weakly move from weaker Q.10. Name the phenomenon which is present in all
to stronger part of the field where as diamagnetic substances
materials weakly move from stronger to weaker Ans. Diamagnetism is universal. It is present in all
part of the field. materials
Q.8. What happens when a rod of diamagnetic Q.11. How does intensity of magnet isatio n of
substance i s su spen ded in an ex ternal paramagnetic substance varies with external
magnetic field? magnetic field?
Ans. When a rod of diamagnetic substance is suspended Ans. It is directly proportional to the strength of the
in an external magnetic field it comes to rest with magnetic field.
its length perpendicular to the direction of the MzH  Mz = H
field.
Q.12. How does intensity of magnet isatio n of
Q.9. Relative permeability of a material, r = 0.5. paramagnetic substance varies with absolute
Identify the nature of material and write its temperature?
relation to magnetic susceptibility
Ans. It is inversely proportional to the strength of the
Ans. Relation between magnetic susceptibility and absolute temperature.
relative permeability of a material is
1 C
r = 1 +  Mz  , Mz =
T T
 0.5 = 1 + 
  = 0.5  1 =  0.5
For diamagnetic substances, magnetic susceptibility
is negative. Therefore, nature of material should
be diamagnetic.

Short Answer Type Questions - I ( 2 marks each )

Q.1. Out of two magnetic materials, A has relative
(ii) Graph:
permeability slightly greater than unity while
B has less than unity. Identify the nature of
the materials A and B. Will their susceptibilities
be positive or negative?
Intensity of
Ans. A: Paramagnetic magnetisation
(M Z)
B: Diamagnetic
For A: susceptibility is positive
for B: susceptibility is negative Temperature (T)

Q.2. The given graphs show the variation of intensity In paramagnetic materials, M Z decreases with
of magnetisation I with strength of applied Bext
magnetic field H for two magnetic materials P increase in temperature as Mz 
T
and Q. where, Bext is the external magnetic field.
(i) Identify the materials P and Q
Q.3. Show diagrammatically the behaviour of magnetic
(ii) For material P, plot the variation of field lines in the presence of 
intensity of magnetisation with temperature. (i) paramagnetic substances and
Justify your answer. (ii) diamagnetic substances.
Q
How does one explain this distinguishing feature?
Ans. (i) Paramagnetic substance in external magnetic
Intensity of field:
magnetisation
(M Z) P

Field intensity (H)

Ans. (i) P = paramagnetic material
Q = ferromagnetic material Fig. (a)
Magnetism 183

(ii) Diamagnetic substance in external magnetic (ii) If a thin rod of a diamagnetic material is suspended
field: in a uniform magnetic field, it comes to rest with
its length perpendicular to the field.
(iii) When placed in a non – uniform magnetic field, a
diamagnetic material is weakly repelled from the
region of strong field.
Q.6. Define magnetisation. State its S.I. units and
dimensions.
Ans. It is defined as the net magnetic dipole moment
per unit volume.
Fig. (b) Net magnetic moment
Magnetization =
Volume
(iii) A paramagnetic material tends to move from
Mnet
weaker to stronger region of the magnetic field MZ =
passing through it. Hence the number of lines Volume
through it increases. [Fig. (a)] It is a vector quantity. S.I. Unit is A/m.
(iv) A diamagnetic material tends to move from Dimension are [L1M0 T0 I1]
stronger to weaker region of the magnetic field
Q.7. Define magnetic intensity. State its S.I. unit
passing through it. Hence the number of lines
and dimensions
through it decreases. [Fig. (b)]
Ans. He strength of magnetic field at a point can be
Q.4. Give two points to distinguish between a given in terms of vector quantity is called as
paramagnetic and a diamagnetic substance. magnetic intensity (H).
Ans: Difference: Magnetic intensity, H = nI
where, n = number of turns per unit length
Diamagnetic Materials Paramagnetic Material
I = current
(i) A diamagnetic material (i) A paramagnetic material Magnetic intensity has unit A/m.
is weakly repelled by a is weakly attracted by a Dimension are [L1M0T0I1]
magnet. magnet.
Q.8. Distinguish betwee n p arama gnet ic and
(ii) If a thin rod of a (ii) If a thin rod of a
ferromagnetic substances.
diamagnetic material is paramagnetic material is
suspended in a uniform suspended in a uniform Ans. Difference:
magnetic field, it comes magnetic field, it comes
Paramagnetic material Ferromagnetic materials
to rest with its length to rest with its length
perpendicular to the field. parallel to the field. (i) A paramagnetic material (i) A ferromagnetic material
(iii) When placed in a non (iii) When placed in a non – is weakly attracted by a is strongly attracted by a
–uniform magnetic uniform magnetic field, magnet. magnet.
field, a diamagnetic a paramagnetic material (ii) If a thin rod of a (ii) If a thin rod of a
material is weakly is weakly attracted paramagnetic material is ferromagnetic material is
repelled from the region towards the region of suspended in a uniform suspended in a uniform
of stronger field. stronger field. magnetic field, it comes magnetic field, it comes
(iv) Not affected by (iv) Affected by temperature. to rest with its length to rest with its length
temperature. parallel to the field. parallel to the field.
(v) Susceptibility is less (v) Susceptibility is more (iii) When placed in a non – (iii) When placed in a non –
than one and negative. than one and positive uniform magnetic field, uniform magnetic field,
a paramagnetic material a ferromagnetic material
(vi) Relative permeability (vi) Relative permeability is
is weakly attracted is strongly attracted
is less than one. more than one.
towards the region of towards the region of
Q.5. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is strong field. strong field.
 0.26. Identify the type of material and state (iv) Domains are absent. (iv) Domains are present.
its two properties.
Q.9. Define gyromagnetic ratio. State its S.I. unit
Ans. For diamagnetic substance, the susceptibility is
and dimensions
less than one and negative. Therefore, given
material is diamagnetic. Ans. Gyromagnetic ratio: It is defined as the ratio of
magnetic dipole moment to the angular momentum
Properties of diamagnetic materials:
of revolving electron.
(i) A diamagnetic material is weakly repelled by a
magnet. M e
Gyromagnetic ratio = =
L 2m
184 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Unit of Gyromagnetic ratio is C/kg. Q.13. The suscep t ibility of annea led iron at
saturation is 5500. Find permeability of
It is dimensionless quantity.
annealed iron at saturation.
Q.10. A circular coil of 300 turns and diameter 14cm Solution: Data:
carries a current of 15 A. What is the magnetic
 = 5500, 0 = 4 107 Wb/A-m
moment associated with the coil?
 = (1 + )
Solution: Data:
= 4 × 107 (1 + 5500)
d = 14 cm  r = 7cm = 7 × 102 m
= 4 × 107 × 5501
I = 15 A, n = 300, M = ?
= 4 × 3.142 ×107 × 5501
Magnetic moment of coil
= 69136 × 107
M = n I A = nI(r2)
= 6.9136 ×103
= 300 × 15 × 3.142 × (7 × 102)2
= 14139 × 49 × 104 Q.14. The susceptibility of magnesium at temperature
300 K is 1.2 × 105. What temperature will the
 M = 69.28 Am2
susceptibility increase to 1.8 × 105?
Q.11. An electron in an atom revolves around the Solution: Data:
nucleus in an orbit of radius 0.5A0. Calculate
1 1.2 × 105 , 2 1.8 × 105
the equivalent magnetic moment, if the
frequency o f re volu tion of elec tron is T1 = 300 K, T2 = ?
1010 MHz. (e = 1.6 × 1019 C) We know that
Solution: Data: 1
o 1  ... (1)
r = 0.5 A = 0.5 × 1010 m, T1
f = 1010 MHz = 1016 Hz., 1
2  ... (2)
e = 1.6 × 1019 C, M = ? T2
Magnetic moment of loop 1 T2
 =
M = IA 2 T1
= ef A 1
 T2 = × T1
= efr 2 2
= 1.6 × 1019 × 1016 × 3.142 × (0.5 × 1010)2 1.2  10 5
T2 =  300 = 200 K
 M = 1.257 × 1023 Am2 1.8  105
Q.12. A bar magnet made of steel has magnetic Q.15. Find the magnetisation of a bar magnet of
moment of 2.5 A m2 and a mass of 6.6 × 103 kg. length 5cm and area of cross section 2 cm2, if
If the density of steel is 7.9 × 103 kg/m3. find the magnetic moment is 1 Am2.
the intensity of magnetization. Solution: Data:
Solution: Data: M net = 1 Am2
3
Mass M = 6.6 × 10 kg A = 2 cm2 = 2 × 104 cm2
Density  = 7.9 × 10 kg/m
3 3
L = 5 cm = 2  102 m
Mnet = 2.5 Am 2
Volume, V = AL
M = 2 × 104 × 5 × 102
Volume, V =
 = 10 × 106 m3
6.6  103 = 1 × 105 m3
=
7.9  103 M net
Magnetization Mz =
= 0.8354 × 106 V
Magnetization, 1
=
M net 4  10 5
M = = 1 × 105 A/m
V
2.5
=
0.8354  10  6
= 3 × 106 A/m
Note: Density of steel generally ranges
7750 to 8050 kg/m3.
Magnetism 185

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Show that a current loop behaves like a
  M B
magnetic dipole.
It experiences torque when placed in external
OR magnetic field.
Show that a current loop produces a magnetic
field and behaves like a dipole Q.2. What are domains? Explain ferromagnetism
on the basis of domain theory.
Ans. The magnetic induction at a point on axis at a
distance ‘x’ from the centre of circular coil of Ans. Domains: The regions of ferromagnetic material
radius ‘a’ carrying current ‘I’ is in which, all magnetic moments are aligned in
the same direction are known as domains.
0 Ia 2 The magnetic dipole moments of all the atoms in
B = 3
2 (a 2  x 2 )2 one domain have a resultant magnetic dipole
moment. The domains have irregular shape and
Its direction is perpendicular to the plane of the
large magnetic moment.
coil and along the axis of the coil.
(i) In absence of external magnetic field:
If x >>> a, then we neglect the term a2
In absence of external magnetic field, the
0 Ia 2 different domains are oriented at random so that
B = ... (1)
2x 3 the magnetic fields of the domains cancel each
But the area of the loop is A = a2 other. Therefore the substance does not show
magnetic properties. [Fig. (a)]
A
 a2 = Unmagnetised state

From (1),
0 IA
B = ... (2)
2x 3
Magnetic moment of a loop is M = IA
 0M
Hence B = Fig. (a) Magnetic material in absence of external magnetic
2x 3
filed
Similarly,
(ii) Weak external magnetic field is applied.
Magnetic induction due to the bar magnet at a
point on axis, at a distance x from its centre is When the external magnetic field is weak, then
the individual atomic dipoles tend to align their
0  2M  dipole moments parallel to the direction of the
B =   ... (3)
4  x 3  applied field. Therefore the domain wall shifts in
Electric field of a dipole moment of moment P at the direction of the applied field. With the removal
a point at a distance r from its centre is of the external field, the boundaries return to
2P their original positions and material loses its
E = 4  x 3 ... (4) magnetism.[Fig. (b)]
0

Comparing (3) and (4) it is seen that magnetic In a weak magnetic field Bext
field is analogous to electric field. Hence magnetic
moment M is analogous to electric dipole moment
P. Hence current loop produces magnetic field
and behaves like a magnetic dipole
Torque acting on magnetic dipole when placed in
external magnetic field is
  M  B = MB sin  ... (5) Fig. (b) Magnetic material in a weak external magnetic
field
Similary when a current currying coil (I) of N
(iii) Strong external magnetic field is applied.
number of turns placed in external uniform
magnetic field torque acting on it is given by When the external magnetic field is strong, the
dipole moments of non-aligned domains abruptly
 = NIAB sin  ... (6)
rotate in the direction of the applied field. This
From (5) and (6) process is called flipping or domain rotation. Here
 M = NIA ... (7) the removal of the external magnetic field does
Thus, current loop behaves as a dipole, having not set the domain boundaries back to their
dipole moment (m = NIA) original position and the material gets the
magnetic properties permanently. [Fig. (c)]
186
 When, a paramagnetic substance is kept in an
In a strong magnetic field Bext
Fig. (c) Magnetic material strong external magnetic field
Q.3. What is Curie temperature? What happens
above Curie temperature?
Ans. Curie temperature:
When ferromagnetic substance is heated, its
magnetisation decreases with rise in temperature.
At a particular temperature, it loses its
magnetisation completely. This temperature at
which the domain structure of ferromagnetic
substance is destroyed and ferromagnetic
substance loses its magnetism is called curie
temperature.
Explanation:
With increase in the temperature, the thermal
vibrations of the atoms in the given ferromagnetic
substance are increased and as a result, the
interatomic coupling becomes weak. At a higher
temperature, the exchange coupling between the
atomic magnets in each domain breaks
completely and all the atomic dipoles get oriented
randomly. Thus domain structure gets destroyed
completely.
Above the Curie temperature, ferromagnetic
substance is converted into paramagnetic
substance. Curie temperature is different for
different material.
Q.4. Explain the origin of paramagnetic substances
on the basis of its atomic structure. State
Curie law.
Ans. In paramagnetic substances magnetic dipole
moments of all the electrons in atom do not cancel
each other, resulting some magnetic moment for
each atom so that each atom of paramagnetic
substance is equivalent to tiny magnetic dipole,
called atomic magnets.
 
B B
S N
Fig. (a) Fig. (b) Fig. (c)
Absence of external Weak external Strong external
magnetic field magnetic field magnetic field
In the absence of external magnetic field, the
dipole moments of the atoms are randomly
oriented and hence the net dipole moment of the
substance is zero. [Fig. (a)]
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
external magnetic field, the tiny atomic dipoles
tend to align parallel to the applied field and show
temporary magnetization [Fig.(b)].
When the external field is removed the atomic
magnets again get randomly oriented and the
substance loses their magnetism. Therefore
they cannot be used to make permanent magnet.
[Fig. (c)]
Curie law: The magnetization of a paramagnetic
substance is directly proportional to the external
magnetic field and is inversely proportional to the
absolute temperature.
Bext
MZ 
T
Bext
MZ = Cx
T
where, C is Curie constant.
This relation is called Curie law.
Q.5. Explain the origin of diamagnetic substances
on the basis of its atomic structure. What is
Meissner effect? State two properties of
superconductors.
Ans. (i) In diamagnetic substance, magnetic dipole
moments of all the electrons in atom cancel each
other, the resulting magnetic moment of the atom
is zero.
(ii) When the diamagnetic materials are kept in
an external magnetic field. The electrons whose
orbital magnetic moments are in the same
direction as that of the external magnetic field
slow down and the electrons whose orbital
magnetic moments are in the opposite direction
to that of the external magnetic field, speeds up.
(iii) Thus developing magnetic moment in the direction
opposite to that of applied field. As a result, the
diamagnetic substance is repelled by the applied
field and sets itself at right angles to the direction
of the field when suspended in the external
magnetic field.
(iv) The most exotic diamagnetic materials are
superconductors. These metals when cooled
exhibits both perfect conductivity and perfect
magnetism.
(v) The phenomenon of perfect diamagnetism in
superconductors is called Meissner effect.
Q.6. In a hydrogen atom, an electron of charge e
revolves in an orbit of radius r with speed v.
Prove that the magnetic moment associated
evr
with the electron is
2
Hen ce o btai n the relati on between t he
magnetic moment and angular momentum in
vector form. State the vector form.
Ans. Consider an electron of charge –e and mass m,
moving around a nucleus in a circular orbit of
radius r, with period T.
Magnetism 187

Circumference Ans. Consider a toroidal coil of n number of turns per

Period T = unit length carrying current I.
Velocity
2r The magnetic field inside the toroid without iron
T = core inside it is
v
Circulating current B0 =nI
where n is number of turns per unit length and
e
I =  is permittivity of free space.
T
Magnetic moment of electron B0
μ0 = nI = H is magnetic intensity
 Primary winding
M
Secondary
I Iron core winding
r
O A
Rheostal
e G


L Switch

Angular momentum of electron

Fig. U.C.M of electron in an atom.
Battery
e B0 = H ... (1)
 I =
2r
If iron core is placed inside the toroid, then
v
ev Magnetic field inside the toroid with iron core is
 I = 2r ... (1) B = B0 + Bm … (2)
Magnetic moment of electron, The magnetic field due to the iron core is
M = IA B m = MZ … (3)
ev The magnetization M z is proportional to the
= × r2 magnetic intensity H,
2r
MZ = H … (4)
evr
 M = ... (2) where,  is magnetic susceptibility.
2
This is the expression of magnetic moment of From (3) and (4) we get
circulating electron. Bm =H … (5)
Angular momentum of the electron revolving From (5) and (1) equation (2) becomes
around the nucleus is B = H +  H
L = mvr … (3) B = H (1 +) ... (6)
Dividing (2) by (3), we get This is the expression of the magnetic field inside
M e the toroid with iron core placed inside it.
=
L 2m By definition of permeability of substance
In vector for ... (4) B
 =
e H
M =  L  B = H ... (7)
2m
This is the relation between the magnetic moment Form (6) and (7)
and angular momentum in vector form. H = H (1+ )
The negative sign in the above equation shows  =  (1 +)
that the, the orbital magnetic moment of electron

is opposite in direction to the orbital angular
momentum. 0 = 1 +  ... (8)

By defination of realtive permeability

Q.7. Obtain an expression of relative permeability
of substance. 
OR 0 = r

Discuss magnetisation of a ferromagnetic  Equation (8) becomes

material with the help of a Rowland ring. r = 1 + 
188 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

This is the expression of the permeability of the Q.9. Find the percent increase in the magnetic field
magnetic substance. and when the space within a current carrying
tor oid is filled wi th alumi nimu m. The
Q.8. The mag neti c field B and th e ma gnet ic susceptibility if A1 is 2.1 × 105
intensity H in a material are found to be 1.6 T
and 1000 A/m respectively. Calculate the Solution:
relative permeability and the susceptibility  = 2.1 × 10-5
of the material.
Percentage increase in magnetic field
Solution: Data:
B  B0
B = 1.6 T, H = 1000A/m, = × 100 ... (1)
B0
(i) r = ? (ii)  = ?
 B = H We know, magnetic field inside the toroid in the
B absence of Al is
  =
H B0 = 0H
1.6 When it filled with Al, B = 0(1 + )H
  =
1000  Increase in field = B  B0
  = 1.6 × 103 = 0 (1 + ) H  0H
But  = 0 . r = 0  H
  Equation (1) becomes,
 r =
0 0 H
% increase in magnetic field =  100
1.6  10 3 0 H
=
4  10  7 =  × 100
1.6  10 3 = 2.1 × 105 × 100
=
4  3.142  10  7 = 2.1 × 103
= 0.1273 × 104
= 1.273 × 103
Again, r = (1 + )
1.273 × 103 = 1 + 
1273 = 1 + 
 = 1  1273
  = 1272

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
eVr
(1) Show that the orbital magnetic dipole moment of a revolving electron is (Feb. 2014)
2
(2) Distinguish between diamagnetic and paramagnetic substances. (July 2017)
(3) Define magnetization. Write its SI unit and dimensions. (March 2018)
Problems :
(1) The susceptibility of magnesium at 200 K is 1.8 × 10 –5. At what temperature will the susceptibility decrease
by 6 × 10–6 ? (Feb. 2016)
(2) The susceptibility of magnesium at 300K is 1.2 × 10–5. At what temperature will the susceptibility
increase to 1.8 × 10–5 ? (July 2016)
(3) Find the magnetization of a bar magnet of length 10 cm and cross-sectional area 4 cm2, if the magnetic
moment is 2 Am2. (July 2017)


Electrons and photons 189
CHAPTER
16
Syllabus
Laws of Electromagnetic Induction, Eddy currents, Self and Mutual Inductron, Displacement Current, Transformer, Coil
rotating in uniform magnetic inducton, Alternating Current, Reactance and Impedance, L.C. Osillations, Power in A.C.
current with Resistor, Inductor, Capacitor and Resistor connected in series, Resonant Circuits.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Eddy currents are also called 7. The reactance of a coil is 157 . On connecting the
(a) Maxwell currents coil across a source of frequency 100 Hz, the current
(b) Faraday currents lags behind the emf by 450. The inductance of the
(c) Displacement currents coil is
(d) Foucault currents (a) 0.25 H (b) 0 .5 H (c) 4 H (d) 314 H
2. Which of the following SI derived units is given the 8. In a series LCR circuit, the power factor at resonance
special name, the henry? is
(a) The volt-second 1 1
(a) zero (b) (c) (d) 1
(b) The ohm-second 2 2
(c) The weber per square metre 9. In an LCR circuit, which of the following has the
(d) The joule per tesla dimensions of frequency ?
de Z L
3. If e denotes electric flux, then 0 , has the (a) ZC (b) (C) (d) LC
dt L Z
dimensions the same as that of (in the usual
10. In a series LCR circuit at resonance, the applied
notation)
emf and current are
(a) I (b) 0 I
(a) out of phase
(c) m (d)  0    dl (b) in phase

4. The core of a transformer is laminated so as to reduce (c) differ in phase by rad
4
(a) flux leakage (b) copper losses 
(c) eddy current losses (d) hysteresis losses (d) differ in phase by rad
2
5. Input power at 11000 V is fed to a step-down 11. A parallel LC resonant circuit is used as
transformer which has 4000 turns in it’s primary (a) a filter circuit
winding. In order to get output power at 220 V, the
(b) a tuning circuit in a television receiver
number of turns in the secondary must be
(c) a transformer
(a) 20 (b) 80 (c) 400 (d) 800
(d) a rectifier
6. In a purely resistive ac circuit, the current
12. A series LCR resonant circuit is used as
(a) leads the emf by  rad
(a) a potential divider

(b) leads the emf by rad (b) a tuning circuit in a television receiver
2
(c) and emf are in phase (c) a source of wattles current
 (d) a radiowave transmitter
(d) lags the emf by rad
2
ANSWERS
1  (d), 2  (b), 3  (a), 4  (c), 5  (a), 6  (c), 7  (a), 8  (d), 9  (b), 10  (b), 11  (a), 12  (b)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. A bar magnet is moved in the direction shown Between the two coils PQ and CD, write the
in fig. by the arrow. direction of induced current in each coil.
P Q C D Ans: Clockwise in both the coils or from P to Q and
L L from C to D
N S Q.2. Predict the polarity of the capacitor when a
magnet is moved towards it as shown in fig.

(189)
190
A not have any ohmic resistance, i.e. R = 0
S N
B
Ans. A has positive polarity
Q.3. Sate two applications of eddy currents
Ans. (i) Induction furnace (Induction heating)
(ii) Electric (Magnetic induction) brakes
Q.4. Will an induced current be always produced
in a coil whenever there is a change of magnetic
flux linked with it?
Ans. Yes, provided the circuit is closed.
Q.5. If a magnet is dropped through a long thick –
walled vertical copper tube, it attains a
constant velocity after some time, why?
Ans. Initially, as the magnet falls under gravity, its
speed increases. But quickly the vertically upward
force on the magnet due to induced current
becomes equal in magnitude to the gravitational
force on the magnet and the net force on the
magnet becomes zero. Hereafter its velocity
remains constant.
Q.6. For a rectangular coil rotating in a uniform
magnetic field, in which position of the coil
is the e.m.f. induced in the coil maximum?
What is the magnetic flux through the coil in
this position?
Ans. When the plane of the coil is parallel to the
magnetic field, the magnetic flux through the coil
in this position is zero.  = NAB
Q.7. Does an alt erna ting cur rent mea suring
instrument have a linear scale or non-linear
scale?
Ans. The heating effect of electric current is used in
the measuring of alternating current. In this case
the angular deflection of the moving element is
proportional to the square of the r.m. s. value of
the current. Hence scale is non-linear.
Q.8. In an LCR series circuit, can the e.m.f across
the inductor or the capacitor be greater than
the applied e.m.f.?
Ans. Yes, it is greater than the applied emf.
Q.9. Define wattless current.
Ans. Wattless current: Current flowing in a circuit
without any net dissipation of power is called
wattless current.
Q.10. In a series circuit state the condition under
which the impedance of the circuit is minimum
and wattless current flows in the circuit.
Ans. (i) The impedance of the circuit is minimum,
when the inductive reactance and capacitive
reactance are equal.
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
(ii) For wattless current to flow, the circuit should
Q.11. Define the term r.m.s. current. How is it
related to the peak value?
Ans. r.m.s. current: It is defined as that constant
current, which produces the same amount of heat
in a given resistance in a given time as is
produced by an alternating current, when flowing
through the same resistance for the same time.
Relation between ir.m.s. and i0 :
i0
ir.m.s. = = 0.7071 i0
2
Q.12. Define electromagnetic induction.
Ans. Electromagnetic induction: The phenomenon
of producing an induced e.m.f. In a coil or a
conductor due to changing magnetic flux is called
electromagnetic induction.
Q.13. State Fleming’s right hand rule to find the
direction of e.m.f. in a straight conductor
moved perpendicular to the magnetic field.
Ans. Statement: Stretch the thumb, the first finger
and middle finger of right hand so that they are
mutually perpendicular to each other. If the first
finger represents the direction of magnetic field
and thumb represents the direction of the motion
of the conductor, then the middle finger
represents the direction of induced e.m.f. in the
conductor.
Motion
Magnetic field
Induced
e.m.f.
Fig. Fleming’s right hand rule
Q.14. Define: 1 henry
Ans. 1 henry: The coefficient of self-induction is said
to one henry, if e.m.f. of one volt is induced in
the coil, when the current in the same coil changes
at the rate of one ampere per second.
Q.15. Figure shows the variation of resistance and
reactance against frequency. Identify the
curves which corresp ond to inductive
reactance, resistance and capacitive reactance.
A
B
R or X
C
Frequency f
Electrons and photons
Ans: Curve A = Capacitive reactance
Curve B = Inductive reactance
Curve C= Resistance
Q.16. How does mutual inductance of a pair of coils
change, when
(i) Distance between the coils is increased
(ii) Number of turns in each coil is decreased?
Short Answer Type Questions - I
Q.1. Define magnetic flux . St ate S.I. unit of
magnetic flux and magnetic induction.
Ans. Magnetic flux: The total number of magnetic
lines passing normally through a given area is
called the magnetic flux
Magentic flux () = B  A
S.I. unit is weber.
S.I. unit of magnetic induction is tesla or
weber/m2 or N/Am
Q.2. State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic
induction
Ans. First law: Whenever there is change in the
magnetic flux associated with a coil, an e.m.f. is
induced in the coil.
Second law: The magnitude of induced e.m.f. is
directly proportional to the rate of change of
magnetic flux through the coil.
If ‘e’ is the induced e.m.f. and
d
is the rate of change of magnetic flux, then
dt
d
e 
dt
Q.3. State and explain Lenz’s law in accordence
with the principle of conservation of energy.
Ans. Lenz’s law: The direction of induced e.m.f. in a
coil or conductor is such as to oppose the change
in the magnetic flux which produces it.
d
 e =-
dt
The negative sign indicates that the induced
e.m.f. opposes the change in the magnetic flux.
Explanation:
N
N
S
S
Fig. (a) Fig. (b)
(i) In Fig. (a), when the north-pole of the bar magnet
is moved towards the coil, the magnetic flux in
the coil increases and according to Faraday’s First
law, current is induced in the coil. But according
to Lenz’s law, induced current opposes the
increase in flux.
191
Ans. (i) When distance between the coils increases,
mutual inductance of a pair of coils
decreases.
(ii) When no. of turns in each coil decreases,
mutual inductance also decreases.
(2 marks each)
(ii) This is possible only if the current in the coil
flows in an anti-clockwise direction as seen by
an observer from the side of the magnet. The
current carrying coil acts as a magnetic dipole
with the side pointing towards the magnet
behaves like a north pole and tries to oppose or
repel the magnet, which opposes the movement
of the bar magnet towards the coil hence opposes
the increase in flux.
(iii) Therefore, work has to be done against the force
of repulsion in bringing the magnet closer to the
coil.
(iv) On the other hand, if the north-pole of the magnet
is moved towards the coil as shown in fig. (b),
the magnetic so induced as to oppose the
decrease in the magnetic flux.
(v) This is possible only if the current in the coil
flows in clockwise direction as seen by an observer
from the side of the magnet. This makes the face
of the coil pointing towards the magnet behave
like S-pole and tries to attract the magnet, which
opposes the movement of the bar magnet away
from the coil, hence opposes the decrease in flux.
(vi) Therefore, work has to be done against the force
of attraction in moving the magnet away from the
coil.
(vii) It is this mechanical work done in moving magnet
with respect to the coil that changes into electrical
energy producing induced current. Thus, energy
is being transformed. Thus Lenz’s law is in
accordance with the law of conservation of energy.
Q.4. What are eddy currents? State its applications.
Explain any one.
Ans. Eddy currents: When a metallic block is
subjected to a change in magnetic flux, the
electrons in the metal experience forces and
move in circular paths of different radii depending
upon their speeds. These circular paths of
electrons produce currents, which resembles
eddies or whirlpools in liquid, hence these
currents are called ‘eddy currents’ or ‘Foucault’s
current’
Applications:
1. Dead beat galvanometer
2. Induction furnace
3. Electric brakes
4. Speedometer
192 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(1) Dead beat galvanometer: In the dead beat The relation between impedance, resistance and
galvanometer, the coil of insulated wire is wound reactance is
on copper or alluminium frame. When current
stops, coil tends to oscillate. As the metal frame Z2 = R2 + (XL  XC)2 or Z = R 2  (X L  X C )2
moves through the magnetic field, eddy currents The S.I. unit of impedance is ohm ()
produced in it. It opposes the motion and bring
The term reactance is used when there a phase
the coil quickly to the rest position.
difference between the current and e.m.f is 90 0.
(2) Induction furnace: When a piece of metal is whereas the impedance is used when a phase
place in a rapidly changing magnetic field,large difference is not 900.
eddy currents are produced in the block of metal.
A large amount of heat is generated in the metal Q.8. Explain the term inductive reactance and
block and it melts. capacitive reactance.
Ans. (a) Inductive reactance: It is defined as the ratio
Q.5. What do you mean by peak value of current?
of R.M.S. value of voltage across the inductor to
Define r.m.s. value of alternating current. the R.M.S. value of current passing through it.
How is it related to its peak value?
er .m.s.
Ans. Peak value of current: The maximum value of XL =
current is called peak value current (i0) ir .m .s.
e0  XL = L = 2fL
 i0 = This shows that the inductive reactance is directly
R
R.M.S. value of current: It is defined as that proportional to the self-inductance of inductor
constant current, which produces the same and frequency of applied voltage.
amount of heat in a given resistance in a given XL L and XL f
time as it is produced by an alternating current, S.I. Unit of inductive reactance is ohm.
when flowing through the same resistance for the
(b) Capacitive reactance:
same time .
It is defined as the ratio of R.M.S. value of voltage
Relation between ir.m.s and i0:
across the capacitor to the R.M.S. value of current
i0 passing through it.
ir.m.s. = = (0.7071) i0
2 er .m.s.
XC =
Q.6. Define R.M.S. value of e.m.f. How is it related ir .m .s.
to its peak value? 1 1
Ans. RMS value of emf: The effective value or root  XC = =
C 2fC
mean square value of an alternating e.m.f. is
This shows that the capacitive reactance is
defined as the square root of the mean square
inversely proportional to the capacitance of the
value of the e.m.f. over one complete cycle.
capacitor and frequency of applied voltage.
Relation between er.m.s and e0:
1 1
e0 XC   and XC  f
er.m.s. = = (0.7071) e0 C
2
S.I. Unit of capacitive reactance is ohm ()
The maximum value of e.m.f. is called peak value
of e.m.f. (e0) Q.9. Distinguish between resistance and reactance.
Ans. Difference:
Q.7. Explain the term reactance and impedance.
Ans. (a) Reactance: The resistance offered by an Resistance Reactance
inductor or a capacitor to an alternating current (i) Resistance is a property (i) Reactance (pure inductor
is called the reactance (X). of a circuit which or pure capacitor) does
The reactance of an inductor is called inductive consumes electric not consume electric
reactance and it is given as power as heat. power i.e. no heat is
XL = L = 2  f L produced.
The reactance of a capacitor is called capacitive (ii) Resistance does not (ii) Reactance depends on
reactance and it is given as depend on the frequency the frequency of the
of the source. alternating source.
1 1
XC = = Q.10. Define power factor. What are its maximum
C 2fC
S.I. unit of reactance is ohm () and minimum values?
(b) Impedance: The total resistance offered by an Ans. Power factor: Power factor is defined as the ratio
ac circuit to the alternating current through it is of true power to the apparent power.
called the impedance of the circuit (Z).
Electrons and photons 193

True power Q.13. What is a transformer? State its principle of

Power factor = Apparent power working.
true power Ans. Transformer: A transformer is an electrical device
R
cos  = apparent power = which uses mutual induction to transform electrical
Z power at low voltage with high current or at high
(a) In pure inductive and pure capacitive circuit, voltage with low current at the same frequency.
 = 900  cos = 0 Principle of working of transformer: It works
 Power factor is zero in this case. on the principle of mutual induction. Whenever
No average power is consumed in pure inductive the magnetic flux linked with a coil changes, an
and pure capacitive circuit. Therefore current in e.m.f. is induced in the neighbouring coil.
this case is called wattless current or idle current. Q14. What is step up and step down transformer?
(b) For pure resistive circuit, Ans. (a) Step up transformer:
 = 0  cos = 1 When the number of turns of secondary coil is
Power factor is maximum in this case. greater than the number of turns in primary coil,
the output voltage is greater than the input
Q11. Distinguish between an Accepter and Rejector voltage. This type of transformer is called step
circuit. up transformer.
Ans. In this case, the current in the secondary coil
Acceptor circuit Rejector circuit (output) is less than the current in primary coil (input)
(i) An accepter circuit is (i) A rejector circuit is a i.e. In step up transformer,
a series L-C-R parallel L-C resonant N S > NP , eS > eP , iS < iP
resonant circuit. circuit. (b) Step down transformer:
(ii) For such a circuit with (ii) For such a circuit with When the number of turns of secondary coil is
small resistance, small resistance, less than the number of turns in primary coil,
resonance curve has a resonance curve has a the output voltage is less than the input voltage.
sharp peak at the sharp minimum at the This type of transformer is called step down
resonant frequency. resonant frequency. transformer.
(iii) At the resonant (iii) At the resonant In this case, the current in the secondary coil (output)
frequency, the frequency, the is more than the current in primary coil (input)
impedance is impedance is
i.e. In step down transformer,
minimum. maximum.
NS < NP , eS < eP , iS > iP
(iv) At the resonant (iv) At the resonant
frequency , the frequency, the current Q.15. Distinguish between step up and step down
current in L-C-R in L-C circuit is transformer.
circuit is maximum. minimum. Ans.
(v) At the resonance the (v) In parallel resonant
Step-up transformer Step-down transformer
circuit accepts the circuit, the circuit
current only at the rejects the current only (i) The output voltage is (i) The output voltage is
resonant frequency and at the resonant more than the input less than the input
rejects the current of frequency and allows voltage. voltage.
the other frequencies the current of the other (ii) The number of turns of (ii) The number of turns of
to pass through it. frequencies to pass the secondary coil is the secondary coil is
Therefore the series through it. Therefore more than that of the less than that of the
circuit is called the parallel circuit is primary. primary.
accepter circuit. called rejecter circuit.
(iii) The output current is (iii) The output current is
Q.12. What are acceptor and rejector circuit? less than the input more than the input
Ans. (a) Acceptor circuit: current. current.
In the series resonant circuit, the circuit accept (iv) The primary coil is (iv) The secondary coil is
current only at the resonant frequency and reject made of thicker copper made of thicker copper
the currents at the other frequency. Therefore wire than that of the wire than that of the
the series circuit is called acceptor circuit. secondary coil. primary coil.
(b) Rejector circuit:
Q.16. In a series L-C-R circuit, obtain the conditions
In parallel resonant circuit, the circuit rejects under which
the current only at the resonant frequency and
(i) Impedance of the circuit is minimum and
allows the current of the other frequencies to
(ii) Wattles current flows in the circuit.
pass through it. Therefore the parallel circuit is
called rejector circuit.
194 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Ans. (i) The impedance of the series L-C-R circuit is (ii) Since the spokes have common ends they are
given as connected in parallel. Hence the emf induced
between the end of a single spoke and other
Z = R 2  (X L  X C )2 common end of 10 spokes is also 4.5 × 105 V.
For Z to be minimum, XL = XC  Z = R Q.20. The primary of a transformer has 40 turns and
1 works on 100 volt and 100 watt. Find the
or f r = number of turns in the secondary to step up
2 LC
voltage to 400 V. Also calculate the current
(ii) For wattles current to flow, circuit should not have in the secondary and primary.
any ohmic resistance, i.e. R = 0
Solution: Data:
Q.17. State factors upon which mutual inductance NS = ? , NP = 40, ep = 100 V, es = 400 V
depend.
Pi = 100, iP = ? , iS = ?
Ans. Mutual-inductance of a coil depends on 
(i) The number of turns of both the coil es NS
 =
(ii) Area of each coil ep NP
(iii) Material of the core placed inside the coils. es
 NS = N
(iv) Shape of the coil. ep P
(v) The angular orientation between the coils. 400
NS =  40 = 160
It does not depend on the current in the primary 100
coil For ideal transformer
Q.18. State factors upon which self-inductance iSeS = iPeP
depend on.  iSeS = 100
Ans. Self-inductance of a coil depends upon 
100
(i) The number of turns of coil iS =
es
(ii) Area of the coil
100
(iii) Material of the core placed inside the coil iS = = 0.25 A
400
(iv) Shape of the coil
es
It does not depend on the current in the coil. iP = i
ep s
Q.19. A cycle wheel with 10 spokes each of length
400
0.5 m long is rotated at a speed of 18 km/hr  iP =  0.25 = 1 A
in a plane normal to the earth’s magnetic 100
induction of 3.6 × 105 T. Calculate the e.m.f. Q.21. The magnet ic flux thr ough a loop of
induced between the resistance 0.1 is varying according to the
(i) Axle and the rim of the cycle wheel. relation  = 6t2 + 7t + 1 where  is in milliweber
and t is in sec. What is the e.m.f. induced in
(ii) Ends of single spoke and ten spokes
the loop at t = 1 s and the magnitude of the
Solution: Data: current?
n = 10, l = 0.5 m, Solution: Data:
18  1000 m
v = 18 km/hr = 18  = 5 m/s R = 0.1,  = 6t2 + 7t + 1, t = 1 s
60  60 s
5
B = 3.6 × 10 T, e = ? Induced e.m.f.
(i) E.m.f. Induced between axle and the rim of wheel d
e =
we have dt
v = r = r × (2f) d (6t 2  7t  1)
v =
 f = dt
2r = 12t + 7 = 12 × 1 + 7
5 5 = 19 mV
= = Hz
2  0 . 5 
Induced current,
The induced e.m.f. across each spoke
e
d d dA i =
e = = (AB) = B = B × (r2f) R
dt dt dt
5 19
e = 3.6 × 105 ×  × (0.5)2 × = = 190 mA
 0.1
= 4.5 × 105 V
Electrons and photons 195

Q.22. A current 10 A in the primary of a transformer di

is reduced to zero at the uniform rate in 0.1 s. e = M dt
If the coefficient of mutual inductance be
3 H, what is the e.m.f. induced in the secondary 10
and change in the magnetic flux per turn in e = 3  0 .1 = 300 volt
the secondary if it has 50 turns?
Magnetic flux linked with secondary
Solution: Data:
s = Mip
dt = 0.1s, di = 10  0 = 10 A,
= 3  10 = 30
M = 3H, N = 50
Flux per turn = 30/50 = 0.6 Wb
E.m.f. induced in the secondary

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Explain the phenomenon of self induction. = ohm-second

Hence define coifficient of self induction. State = H (henry)
its S.I. unit and dimension.
Dimensions: [M 1L2T2I2]
Ans. Self Induction: The phenomenon of production
of an induced e.m.f. in a coil, due to change in Q.2. Explain the concept of mutual induction.
current in the same coil is called as self Hence define coifficient of mutual induction.
induction. State S.I. unit and dimensions of coefficient
Einduced
of mutual induction.
Einduced
Ans. Mutual induction: The phenomenon of
I Increasing I decreasing production of an induced e.m.f. In one coil, due
to change in current in a neighbouring coil is
called as mutual induction.
K K
K is closed K is open
a
Consider a coil carrying current i. The magnetic Break
flux linked with the coil is directly proportional S
E
to the current flowing through it. Make

i  = Li
where L is called coefficient of self-induction.
If the current changes with time, then the magnetic P
flux linked with the coil also changes. According
to Faraday’s law, e.m.f. e is induced in the coil. K
d Consider a primary coil carrying current ip. The
e = magnetic flux linked with the secondary coil is
dt
directly proportional to the current flowing through
d (Li ) di primary coil.
=  =L
dt dt
  iP  s = Mip
ve sign shows that e.m.f. opposes the rate of
change of current. where, M is called coefficient of mutual-induction.
di If the current in primary coil changes with time,
|e| = L then the magnetic flux linked with the secondary
dt
coil also changes. According to Faraday’s law,
e e.m.f. es is induced in the secondary coil.
 L =
di
ds d (Mi p )
dt es =  =
dt dt
Coefficient of self-induction (L): di p
 es = M
It is defined as the ratio of e.m.f. induced in the dt
coil to the rate of change of current in the same ve sign shows that e.m.f. opposes the change of
coil. current.
e di p dip
 L =
di |es| =  M dt  M dt
dt e
volt  second  M =
di p
S.I. unit of L is = ampere dt
196 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Coefficient of mutual-induction (M): e.m.f. Hence current and e.m.f. are said to be in
It is defined as the ratio of e.m.f. induced in one the same phase, or the pase difference between
coil to the rate of change of current in the other the e.m.f. and current in the pure resistance is
coil. zero
Phasor diagram:
e
 M = 
di p
dt IR VR

volt  second +
S.I. unit of M is = ampere
= ohm  second
Q.4. Explain the theory of a.c. circuit with inductor.
= H(henry)
Draw phasor diagram.
Dimensions: [M 1L2T2I2] OR
Q.3. Ex plain the th eory of a.c. circui t wi th Show that in an a.c. circuit containing a pure
resistor. Draw phasor diagram. inductor, the voltage is ahead of current by
OR /2 in phase.
Show that in an a.c. circuit containing a pure Plot a variation of current with voltage across
resistor, the current and voltage are in the the inductor.
same phase.
Ans.
Plot a variation of current with voltage across
the inductor. L
Ans.

R
e = e0 sin  t
Consider an alternating e.m.f. E is applied across
e = e0 sin t a pure inductor of self-inductance L.
Consider a resistor R connected across the source Let instantaneous current flowing through
of an alternating e.m.f. inductor is
 e = e0 sin t ... (1) i = i0 sin t ... (1)
At a particular instant, the current (i) flows As current is changing, back e.m.f. is induced in
through resistance R is given by Ohm’s law. the inductor which is equal to the instantaneous
value of the applied e.m.f.
e
i = By Kirchhoff’s law of electricity,
R
e + eback = 0
e 0 sin t
 i = ... [from (i)] di
R e  L =0
dt
This shows that the instantaneous current i
di
varies with time t.  e =L
dt
The maximum value of current is called peak value
d(i0 sin t )
e0 e =L ... from (1)
i0 = dt
R  e = L i0 cos t ... (2)
i = i0 sin t ... (2)
If cos t = 1, e = emax
Thus current varies sinusoidally with time t.
 emax = Lio
e0
Maximum value of emf is called peak value of
I0
e.m.f denoted by eo
T 3T
4
 e0 = Lio
2
O Equation (2) becomes,
T T Time
4 e = eo cos t
e0
This equation can be written as
I0
 
The peak value and zero value of the current e = eo sin  t   ... (3)
 2
occurs at the same time as the peak value of
From equation (1) and (3) we conclude that
Electrons and photons 197

 q
(i) e.m.f. leads the current by rad or the current  e =
2 C

lags behind the emf by rad q = Ce
2
(ii) e.m.f. and current both are sinusoidal of same i.e. q = C e0 sin t
frequency.
dq d
Variation of e.m.f. and current in an inductor is But i = = (C e0 sin t)
dt dt
shown below
e or i
 i = C e0 cos t
This is the equation of the instantaneous current
+e 0 If cos t = 1 Then i = imax = io = peak value of
e = e0 cos t current = eo C
+i0
 
i = i 0 sin t i = io cos t = i0 sin  t   ... (2)
 2
T/4 T/2 3T/4 T where, i0 = e0 C
t or  = t
0 /2  3/2 2
(i) Equation (1) and (2) shows that the in capacitor,
the voltage and current are not in phase.
i0
(ii) The current leads that of voltage by 90° or /2 rad.
e0 Variation of e.m.f. and current in a capacitor is
shown below
e or i
Phasor diagram:
I = i0 sin (t+ /2)
e +e0
+i0 e = e0 cos t

t
/2 0 T/4 T/2 3T/4 T
i
Q.5 Explain the theory of a.c. circuit with capacitor. i0
Draw phasor diagram. e 0
OR
Show that in an a.c. circuit containing a pure Phasor diagram
inductor, the voltage is ahead of current by i
/2 in phase. /2

Plot a variation of current with voltage across

the inductor.
Ans.
e
C

Q.6. Obtain an ex pression for average p ower

dissipated in a purely resistive A.C. circuit.
Define power factor of the circuit and state
its value for purely resistive A.C. Circuit
e = e0 sin t Ans.
R
Consider an alternating e.m.f.
e = e0 sin t … (1)
is applied across a capacitor of capacitance C. e = e0 sin t
Let q is a charge on capacitor at any instant t.
The potential difference across its plate is Let e = e0 sin t is an alternating e.m.f. applied
across resistor of resistance R. Current at any
q
V = instant is given by
C
This instantaneous value of potential difference i = i0 sin (t)
is equal to instantaneous value of applied The instantaneous power is
emf (e)
198 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

P = ei 88  7  10 2
= (e0 sin t)  (i0 sin t) =
2  22
Work done in one cycle = 14 × 102 m
Average power = Time for one cycle Now A1 = r2
T
= 22/7 × (14 × 102)2
 Pdt = 22/7 × 14 × 14 × 104
0
= = 22 × 2 × 14 × 104 m2
T
Perimeter of square of side a is
T


2 4a = 88 cm = 88 × 102 m
e 0i0 sin t dt
0
a = 22 × 102 m
=
T Area of square of side a is
T A2 = a2 = (22 × 102)2

eoio sin2 t dt
 P av = = 22 × 22 × 104 m2
T 0 Now, induced e.m.f.
T

 sin t dt = T d
2
But, e = dt
0
2
eoio  T  2  1
 P av =   e =
T 2 dt
ei B2 A2  B1A1
= oo e =
2 dt
eo io
 P av = × 3  22  22  10 4  2.5  22  28  10 4
2 2 e = 0.5
 Pav = er.m.s. × ir.m.s.
This is the expression of average power. 1452  10 4  1540  104
e = 0 .5
Power factor: It is defined as the ratio of true
power to the apparent power.
88  104
True power e =
Power factor = Apparent power 0.5

True power  e = 176 × 104 V

cos  = Apparent power
Q.8. When 100 V.d.c. is applied across a coil, a
For purely resistive circuit cur rent of 1 A flows through it . When
100 V a.c of frequency 50 Hz is applied to the
 = 0  cos = 1
same coil only 0.5 A current flows through it.
Power factor is maximum in this case. Power Calculate resistance, impedance and self-
dissipated in the circuit is due to resistance only. inductance of the coil.
Q.7. A wire of 88 cm bent into a circular loop is Solution: Data:
kept with plane of the coil perpendicular to V = 100 volt, I = 1A, f = 50 Hz
the magnetic induction 2.5 Wb/m 2. Within
er.m.s. = 100 volt, ir.m.s. = 0.5 A
0.5 s, the coil is changed to a square and magnetic
in duct ion is increased by 0.5 Wb/m 2 . Z = ? , R = ? , XL = ? , L = ?
Calculate the e.m.f. induced in the wire. Resistance,
Solution: Data: V
R = = 100 
B1 = 2.5 Wb/m2, B2 = 3 Wb/m2, I
Impedance,
dt = 0.5 s, L = 88 cm
Circumference of a circle = L er .m.s. 100
Z = = = 200 
 L = 2r = 88 cm = 88 × 10 m 2 ir .m .s. 0.5

88  102  Z = R 2  ( X L )2
 r =
2  (XL)2 = Z2  R2
2
88  10 = 2002  (100)2
=
2  22/7 = 40000  10000
= 30000
Electrons and photons 199

 Inductive reactance, (a) Resonant frequency,

XL = 30000 = 173.2 1 1
f =  f 2
=
 XL = L 2 LC 42LC
173.2 = 2fL  Capacitance,
173.2 = 2 × 50 × L 1
C =
 Inductance of a coil, 42Lf r2
173 .2 1
L = C = 42  0.2  (50)2
2  50
173 .2 = 50.6 × 106 F
= = 0.55 H
100  = 50.6 F
Q.9. A coil of resistance 5 and self-inductance (b) Inductive reactance,
0.2 H is connected in series with a variable XL = L
capacitor across 30 volt, 50 Hz supply. At what
= 2fL
value of capacitor resonance will occur? Find
the corresponding value of current. = 2 50  0.2
Solution: Data: = 10= 62.8
R = 5 , L= 0.2 H, At resonance Z = R = 5 
er.m.s. = 30 volt, f = 50 Hz, (c) R.M.S. current,
Z = ? , ir.m.s. = ? , C = ? er .m .s.
ir.m.s. =
R
30
= =6A
5

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. Prove theoretically, the relation between Consider a rectangular loop of conducting wire
e.m.f. induced and rate of change of magnetic ‘PQRS’ placed in uniform magnetic field of
flux of a coil moving in a uniform magnetic induction ‘B’ which is perpendicular to the plane
field. Hence show that e.m.f. induced across of paper and directed into the paper.
a straight conductor of length L moved at right Let ‘L is the length of the side PS and ‘x’ is the
angle to a uniform magnetic induction B with breadth of the loop within the field. Let the loop
velocity v is e =  BLv is pulled to the right through distance dx with
A conducting wire 20 cm long, bent into constant velocity v, the flux through the loop
rectangular loop 6 cm × 4 cm is placed changes. Due to this change in magnetic flux,
per pendicular t o the ma gnet ic field of current is induced in the coil. The direction of
induction 0.5 T. Within 0.1 s, the loop is the current is clockwise according to Lenz’s law.
changed to a square and magnetic induction Due to this, sides of the coil experiences forces
is increased to 1T. What will be the e.m.f. as shown in figure.
induced in the wire? The forces F1 and F2 are equal and opposite,
Ans. Proof: therefore they cancel each other. Only unbalanced
force acting on the coil of the side PS. Magnitude
Magnetic induction is perpendicular to
the plane of the and directed inwards of the force acting on the side PS is F = iLB.

F1 This force is opposite to the direction of the
velocity. Hence work done to pull the coil through
× × × × × × ×I × ×i× the distance dx, against this force is
B P Q
× × × × × × × × × × d w = Force × displacement
 × × × × × × × × × 
F= iLB L v dw = F  dx
× × × × × × × × × ×
× × × × × × × ×x× × =  F dx
S R =  (BiL) dx
× × × × × × × × × × dx
 =  iB(Ldx)
F1
=  iBdA
where dA = Ldx = change in area
 dw =  id ... (1)
200 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

This work done is converted in to electrical energy Ans. Principle of working of transformer:
which is used to maintain the induced current in It works on the principle of mutual induction.
the coil.
Statement: Whenever the magnetic flux linked
If e is the induced e.m.f. Then, with a coil changes, an e.m.f. is induced in the
Electric energy = dw = eidt ... (2) neighbouring coil.
eidt =  id Construction:
d It consists of two coils, primary coil P 1P 2 and
 e = secondary coil S1S2 insulated from each other.
dt
This is Faradays law. The coils are wound on a soft iron core. The A.C.
input voltage is applied across primary coil and
ve sign shows that the e.m.f. induced in the
output voltage is obtained across secondary coil.
coil opposes the rate of change of magnetic flux.
Core
From the above equation.
d Primary Secondary
e = coil coil
dt
dx
=  LB ep N1 N2 es
dt
 e =  LBv = BLv
This is the equation of the e.m.f. induced across
the ends of the conductor of length L, when it is
moved with velocity v in a magnetic field of Fig. (a)
induction B at right angle to direction of the P1 S1
magnetic field.
Problem:
A1 = 6 cm  4 cm = 24 cm2 = 24  10 4 m2
A2 = 25 × 104 m2,
B1 = 0.5 T, B2 = 1 T, dt = 0.1s P2 S2
Core
d Fig. (b)
 e = dt

2  1
e = dt Working:

B 2 A2  B1A1 When an alternating voltage is applied to the

e = primary coil, the current through the coil goes on
dt changing. Hence magnetic flux through the core
1  25  104  0.5  24  10 4 also changes. As this changing flux is linked with
e = 0.1 both the coils, an e.m.f. is induced in each coil.

= 13 × 103 volt The e.m.f. induced in the primary coil is

= 13 mV d p
ep =  ... (1)
dt
Q.2. State the principle of transformer. Explain its
working with construction. Derive an Magnetic flux linked with primary coil is
expression for e.m.f., current in terms of p = NP 
number of turns in primary and secondary coil. where,  = magnetic flux is linked per turn
OR N P = number of turns in primary coil.
State the principle on which a transformer Equation (1) becomes,
wo rks. Wit h ne at d iagr am,e x pla in t he
d (N p )
construction of a step up transformer. ep = 
dt
AND
d
A transformer converts 200 V A.C. to 50 V A.C. e p =  Np … (2)
The secondary has 50 turns and load across dt
it draws 300 mA. Calculate, Similarly, magnetic flux linked with secondary coil
(i) the number of turns in the primary is
(ii)the current in the primary S = Ns 
d
es = 
dt
Electrons and photons 201

d (N s ) A coil of 2000 turns, each of area 0.02 m2 is

es =  kept in a uniform field of magnetic induction
dt
4 × 102 T. If coil rotates with speed of 1200
d r.p.m. about an axis in the plane of the coil
es =  Ns … (3)
dt and perpendicular to the magnetic induction.
Dividing (3) by (2) calculate the peak value of the e.m.f. Also write
es Ns the equation of an instantaneous e.m.f.
generated in the coil.
ep = N p … (4)
Ans. Consider a coil of N turns with effective area NA
Ns is placed in a uniform magnetic field of induction
The ratio N is called turns ratio of the B. The magnetic induction is in the plane of the
p
transformer. paper. The coil is rotated with constant angular
velocity. The axis of rotation is perpendicular to
For an ideal transformer,
the magnetic induction.
Input power = Output power
Axis of rotation
 epip = esis
es ip P P1
 ep = is … (5)

From (4) and (5)

Ns ip Normal to the
B
Np = i = t plane of coil
s

es Ns ip
= N = i … (6) Q1
ep p s
Q
where,
Normal to the
ip and is are current in primary and secondary coils plane of coil
respectively.
At t = 0, initially, the plane of the coil is perpendicular
This is the expression of e.m.f. and current in to the magnetic induction B. The magnetic flux
terms of number of turns in primary and secondary passing through the coil is
coils.
 = NAB cos 
Problem:
or  = NAB cos t
N s = 50,
where  = t
is = 300 m A = 300 × 103 A
As t changes, the magnetic flux goes on changing,
ep = 200 V, es = 50 V hence e.m.f. is generated in the coil,
ip = ? , Np = ? d
es Ns e = 
dt
 e = N
p p d (NAB cos t )
e = 
ep dt
 N P = e Ns d
s
e = NAB (cos t)
dt
200
 NP =  50 = 200 e = NAB sin t
50
For ideal transformer e = 2  f NAB sin t ... (1)
ises = ipep This is the expression of induced e.m.f, generated
in the coil at any instant t. The e.m.f. induced is
es not constant but varies both with magnitude and
ip = e is
p direction with time sinusoidal, therefore it is
50 called sinusoidal e.m.f.
ip =  300  10 3 The maximum value of e.m.f. is
200
ip = 75 × 103 = 75 mA e0 = NAB  = NAB (2  f )
Q.3. Obtain an expression for e.m.f. induced in a This maximum value is called peak value (e0)
coil rotating with uniform angular velocity  Equation (1) beomes,
in uniform magnetic field. Show graphically  e = e0 sin t ... (2)
the variation of e.m.f. over one cycle.
202 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Variation of e.m.f against  = t is shown in fig. Phasor diagram shows 

(i) Voltage across resistance
e
e0 eR = iR is phase with current
(ii) Voltage across inductor XL is
eL = iXLi leads the current by /2 radian
0
  2  t or  = t (iii) Voltage across capacitor of capacitance C
2 2
e0
eC = iXC …. Lags behind the current by  /2
radian Resultant of eL , eC and eR gives the
Problem: applied voltage shown in figure.

N = 2000, Phasor diagram:

eL
A = 0.02 m2 = 2 102 m2 e L  eC e
e
B = 4  102 T o

90
f = 1200 r.p.m. = 1200/60 = 20 r.p.s.   eR
o eR 1
 e0 = NAB =2fNAB 90
 e0 = 2 × 20 × 2000 × 2 × 102 × 4 × 102 eC
= 64 = 201.1 volt From the phasor diagram
 e = e0 sin wt e2 = eR2 + (eL  eC)2
 e = 64 sin (2ft)
= (iR)2 + (iXL  iXC)2
= 64 sin (40t)
= i2[R2 + (XL  XC)2]
Q.4. Obtain an expression of impedance of resistor,
 2 2
pure inductor and capacitor connected in  e = i  R  (X L  X C ) 
series across alternating e.m.f. Also deduce  
the formula for phase difference e
= R 2  (X L  X C )2
OR i
e
An a.c. source of voltage e = e 0 sin t is  =Z
connected to a series combination of L, C and i
R. Use the phasor diagram to obtain the where, Z = R 2  (X L  X C )2 ... (1)
expressions for the impedance of the circuit
and phase angle between the voltage and This is the expression of impedance of the circuit.
current. Find the condition under which phase angle between the voltage and current is 
current will be in the phase with the voltage. From the diagram e leads the current by angle 
What is the circuit in this condition called? e L  eC
A capacitor of 25 F, inductor of 0.1 H and tan  = eR
resistor of resistance 25 are connected in
series with an A.C. source of e.m.f. iX L  iX L
=
e = 310 sin (314t) V. What is the impedance iR
and the current of the circuit? XL  XL
= ... (2)
Ans. Consider an alternating voltage is applied across R
a series combination of resistor, pure inductor  X L X L 
and capacitor.   = tan1  R 
 
L C R When XL  XL = 0
or XL = XL
1
i.e. L =
ωC
e = e0 sin t
It follows that tan  = 0 i.e.  = 0
In such case current and e.m.f. are in phase with
Let i be the r.m.s current flowing through the each other.
circuit. The same current flow through each
Also from 1, when the current and e.m.f. are in
element. But the voltage is different across each.
phase i.e. when
Let L, eC and eR be the voltage across inductor, When XL  XL = 0, the impedance is equal to R
capacitor and resistor respectively.
Z = R (minimum) and current in the LCR circuit
will be maximum. This condition is called as
resonance.
Electrons and photons 203

Problem: Let the phase difference between the applied

R = 25, e = 310 sin (314t) voltage and the current is .
C = 25 F = 25 × 106 F, e0 = 200 V Current at any instant is given by
f = 50 Hz, L = 0.1 H i = sin (t ± )
(i) Inductive reactance, The instantaneous power is
XL = L P = (e0 sin t) i0 sin (t ± )
= 2fL  P = e0i0 [sin t cos  ± cos t.sin ] sin t
= 2 50  0.1  P = e0i0[sin2t cos  ± cost.sint sin] ... (5)
= 10 This equation shows that the power ‘P’ varies
= 31.4  with time ‘t’, hence we consider averge power
dissipated in the circuit by integrating the
(ii) Capacitive reactance, equation (1),
1
XC = Work done in one cycle
ωC  Pav = Time for one cycle
1
= 2fC T

1  Pdt
0
= =
2  50  25  10 6 T

 e0i0 sin 
= 127.3  T
2
t cos   cos t sin t sin  dt
(iii) Impedance, 0
Pav =
T
Z = R 2  (X L  X C )2
T 
252  (31.4  127.3)2 = e0i0 cos    sin t dt 
2
=
 0 
= 625  (95.9)2 T 
+ e0i0 sin    cos t  sin t dt 
= 625  9107  0 
= 9822 T T

 sint dt = T and cos t  sin t dt = 0

2
= 99.1  But
0 2 
0
(iv) Current, T
e 0i0 cos    0
2
e e0 200  Pav =
T
i = = 2
= = 1.427 A
Z Z 2  99.1 eo i 0
= . cos 
Q.5. Obtain an expression for power consumed in 2
a L-C-R se ries cir cui t. Hence obt ain an e0 i0
= × cos 
expression for power factor of the circuit. 2 2
An a.c. source of voltage e = e 0 sin t is  P av = er.m.s. ir.m.s. cos 
connected to a series combination of L, C and This is the expression of average power
R. Derive an expression for the average power Conditions:
dissipated over one cycle. What happen when-
(i) No power dissipated when R = 0
(i) No power dissipated even though the
i.e. when the circuit is purely reactive in this case
current flows through the circuit
power factor is 0
(ii) Maximum power dissipated in the circuit?
= 90 or cos  = 0
Ans.
(ii) Maximum power dissipated when circuit is purely
L C R
resistive
In this case power factor is one
 = 0 or cos  = 1
Q.6. What is series resonance circuit? State
e = e0 sin t condition for series resonance. Obtain an
expression for resonant frequency.
Let e = e0 sin t is an alternating e.m.f. applied
across the series combination of pure inductor, Plot a graph showing the variation of current
resistor and pure capacitor as shown in figure. with applied frequency.
204 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

A coil of resistance 5 and self-inductance 0.2 1

H isconnec ted in s erie s with a variable  2 =
LC
capacitor across 30 volt, 50 Hz supply. At what
1
value of capacitor resonance will occur? Find  ω =
the corresponding value of current. LC
Ans. 1
L C R
2f = ... ( = 2f)
LC
1
 f =
2 LC
This is the formula of resonant frequency.
e = e0 sin t At the resonance the circuit accept current any
at the resonant frequency and reject the currents
In a.c. circuit with inductor capacitor and at the other frequency. Therefore the series
resistance, when the frequency of a.c.is gradually circuit is called acceptor circuit.
changed at certain frequency, the impedance
becomes maximum or minimum. This condition I max
is called resonance and such a circuit is called
resonant circuit. Current
(i )
A series combination of inductor of inductance
L, capacitor of capacitance C and resistor of
resistance R connected with source of alternating
e.m.f. forms a series L-C-R circuit
Let e be the applied e.m.f. and i is R.M.S. current
passing through the circuit. fr Frequency (f)

e Problem:
 i =
R  ( X L  X C )2
2
R = 5 , L = 0.2 H, er.m.s. = 30 volt,
The impedance of the circuit is
f = 50 Hz C = ?
e Resonant frequency,
Z = R 2  (X L  X C )2
i
1
1 f =
But XL = L and XC = 2 LC
2fC
1
Impedance is Z C = 42Lf 2
r
2
 1   Capacitance,
Z = R 2   L  
 C 1
Inductive reactance and capacitive reactance C = 42  0.2  (50)2
changes as frequency of the applied voltage is
= 50.6 106 F
changed. Therefore impedance varies with
frequency of the applied e.m.f. (voltage). Therefore = 50.6F
current also varies with the frequency. As the Q.7. What is p arallel resonant circuit? State
applied frequency is increased, the inductive condition for parallel resonance.
reactance increases and capacitive reactance
Obtain an expression for resonant frequency.
decreases.
Why the parallel circuit is called rejecter
At a certain frequency, circuit?
XL = XC . Then impedance, Z = R. The circuit Plot a graph of variation of current against
behaves like a pure resistive circuit. frequency. State its two characteristics.
The impedance of the circuit is minimum and Ans.
current is maximum. The current and e.m.f. of L iC
the source are in phase. This condition is called
series resonance. iC  iL
C
Resonant frequency:
The condition for series resonance is Z = Zmin e = eL = eC
i.e. XL = XC
e = e0 sin t iL
1
 L = Fig. (a) Fig. (b)
ωC
Electrons and photons 205

Consider a pure capacitor of capacitance C and At resonance frequency,

pure inductor of inductance L are connected in iL = iC
parallel. This combination is connected to across Impedance is minimum i.e. Z = 0
an alternating e.m.f. e as shown in fig. (a) 1
The current through inductor lags behind e.m.f. i.e. 1 =0
C 
 L
by phase rad.
2 1
The current through capacitor leads the e.m.f. by C  =0
ωL
 1
phase rad. The voltage drop is same across C =
2 ωL
the inductor and capacitor given by, 1
eL = iL . XL and eC = iC . XC   =
2
LC
where, XL and XC are the inductive and capacitive 1
reactances and eL = eC = e  ω =
LC
e e 1
 iL = and iC = X 2  fr =
XL C LC
Now frequency of an alternating source is adjusted 1
so that  fr =
2 LC
X L > XC  iL < iC
This is the expression of resonant frequency in
The net current of the circuit is given by parallel resonant circuit.
i = iC  iL At the resonance the circuit rejects the current
e e only at the resonant frequency and allows the
i =  current of the other frequencies to pass through
XC XL
it. Therefore the parallel circuit is called rejecter
  circuit.
 1 1   1 1  Variation of current against frequency is shown
= e    =e   
  1 L  in fig. (c)
 XC X L   
 C  At the resonance frequency, the current tends to
 1  zero and has finite minimum value. Hence the
i =e   C  
 L  impedance of the circuit is not infinite but will
By definition, impedance (Z) of the circuit is given have some maximum value. [Fig. (c)]
by Current
i
e
Z =
i
1
 Z =
 1 
 C   I min
 L 
0 fr Frequency
This is the expression of the impedance of the
parallel circuit. Fig. (c)
At particular frequency of the applied e.m.f. if
XL = XC , iL = iC and Q.8. Show that the series LCR circuit at resonance
behaves as a purely resistive circuit. Compare
Net rms current i of the circuit become zero, and
the phase relationship between current and
the impedance of the circuit is infinite. This
voltage in series LCR circuit for
condition is called condition of resonance.
(i) XL = XC (ii) XL > XC
In practice, the impedance of the circuit is
maximum and not infinite because of resistance using phase diagram
of the coil and hence the r.m.s. current (line) is What is an acceptor circuit ? Where it is used?
minimum. This condition is called condition of Ans.
parallel resonance. L C R
Resonant frequency (fr) :
The frequency of the applied voltage (e.m.f.) at
which the circuit current is minimum and
impedance is maximum is called resonance
frequency. e = e0 sin t
206 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

In a.c. circuit with inductor capacitor and (i) At a certain frequency

resistance, when the frequency of a.c.is gradually XL = XC, the impedance, Z = R
changed at certain frequency, the impedance
becomes maximum or minimum. This condition The circuit behaves like a pure resistive circuit.
(ii) For XL > XC, e L  eC e
is called resonance and such a circuit is called
resonant circuit. eL > eC

A series combination of inductor of inductance Phasor Diagram: I
L, capacitor of capacitance C and resistor of
resistance R connected with source of alternating J 
e.m.f. forms a series L-C-R.circuit
IR VR
Let e be the applied e.m.f. and i is r.m.s. current
passing through the circuit. +
e
i =
R  ( X L  X C )2 In the series resonant circuit, the circuit accept
The impedance of the circuit is current only at the resonant frequency and reject
the currents at the other frequency. Therefore
e
Z = = R 2  (X L  X C )2 the series circuit is called acceptor circuit.
i
It is used in radio tuning.
1
But XL = L and XC =
C
 Impedance is Z
2
2  1 
Z = R   L  
 C 

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) State the principle on which transformer works. Explain its working with construction. Derive an expression
for ratio of e.m.f.s and currents in terms of number of turns in primary and secondary coil. (Feb. 2016)

d
(2) What is electromagnetic induction? Prove theoretically e =  (July 2016)
dt
(3) Explain self induction and mutual induction. (March 2017)
(4) State the principle of working of transformer. Explain the construction and working of a transfer. Derive an
expression for e.m.f. and current in terms of turns ratio. (July 2017)
(5) Prove theoreticallyt the relation between e.m.f. induced in a coil and rate of change of magnetic flux in
electromagnetic induction. (March 2018)

(1) The co-efficient of mutual induction between primary and secondary coil is 2H. Calculate induced e.m.f. if
current of 4A is cut off in 2.5 × 10–4 seconds. (Feb. 2016)
(2) The magnetic flux through a loop is varying according to a relation  = 6t2 + 7t + 1 where  is in milliweber and
t is in second. What is the e.m.f. induced in the loop at t = 2 second? (March 2017)
(3) A capacitor of capacitance 0.5 F is connected to a source of alternating e.m.f. of frequency 100Hz. What is
the capacitive reactance? ( = 3.142)


Electrons and Photons 207
CHAPTER
17
Syllabus
Photoelectric Effect, Hertz and Lenard’s Observations, Experimental Study of Photoelectric effect, Elinstein’s Photoelectric
Equation, Photoelectric Cell and its Applications.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The energy of photon of wavelength  is 5. Photons of energy 1ev and is incident on metal
(h = Planck’s constant and c = speed of light) surface having work function 0.5eV. The k.E. of
emitted photoelectrons will be
hc h 
(a) h c  (b)
(c) (d) (a) 0.5 eV (b) 1.5 ev (c) 0.25 eV (d) 20 eV
 c ch
6. Photons of energies 1 eV and 2.5 eV are incident on
2. When radiations of wavelength 1 and 2 are incident
metal surface having work function 0.5eV. The ratio
on certain photosensitive material, the energies of
of maximum velocities is
electron ejected are E1 end E2 respectively, such that
E1 > E2. Then Planck’s constant h is (a) 1:2 (b) 2:1 (c) 1:4 (d) 4:1
(E1  E 2 )(1   2 ) (E1  E 2 )  2c 7. When an electron of mass m and charge e is emitted
(a) (b) from a filament and attracted towards the anode
c (1   2 )  2(1 2 )
through a potential difference V, the speed of the
(E1  E 2 ) 1 2 (2  1 ) c electron will be
(c) ( 2  1 ) (d) (E1  E 2 ) m 2eV 2e mV
3. Let p and E denotes the linear momentum and energy (a) (b) (c) (d)
2eV m mV 2e
of emitted photon respectively. If the wavelength of
8. Photons are deflected by
incident radiation is increased
(a) Both p and E increase (a) Electric field
(b) p increases and E decreases (b) magnetic field
(c) p decreases and E increases (c) electric and magnetic field
(d) both p and E decrease (d) Not deflected by electric and magnetic field
4. If the frequency of incident light on a photosensitive 9. When intensity of incident radiation is increased
material is doubled, then the kinetic energy of the then
emitted photoelectron will be (a) The K.E. energy of emitted photons increases
(a) same as its initial value (b) Stopping potential increases
(b) two times its initial value (c) Photoelectric current increases
(c) more than two times its initial value
(d) The energy of individual photons increases
(d) less than two times its initial value.

ANSWERS
1  (b), 2  (b), 3  (d), 4  (d), 5  (a), 6  (a) 7  (b), 8  (d), 9  (c)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. State two applications of photoelectric cell. Q.3. Show graphically how the stopping potential
Ans. (i) Sound reproduction from motion picture. for a given metal surface varies with the
frequency of incident radiations
(ii) Exposure meter
Ans.
Q.2. Show graphically the variation of photoelectric Y
current with intensity of radiation.
Photoelectric
Ans. current
Y
Photoelectric

Saturation
current

current

X X
V03 V 02 V 01 0 Collector plate
X potential
Intensity of light Retarding potential

(207)
208 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.4. The graph shows the variation of stopping Ans: Correct oder: I1> I2 > I3
potential with frequency of incident radiation
for two photo sensitive material A and B . Which Q.6. Why alkali metals are most suitable as
of them has higher value of workfunction? photosensitive surfaces?
Ans. They have low work function. Therefore they can
Y emit photoelectrons even when visible light is
Metal A
incident on them.
Stopping Q.7. Name the photosensitive substances
potential Metal B
(V0 )
Ans. Caesium, potassium and sodium are photosensitive
0 0 X substances
Frequency Q.8. Is photoemission possible for all frequency?
()
W Ans. No, photoemission is not possible for all
e
frequencies.
W
e Q.9. Can we get photoemission with an intense
beam of radio waves?
Ans: Metal B has higher work function
Ans. No. The frequency of incident radiation and not
Q.5. The graph shows the variation of photoelectric the intensity is the criterion for photoelectric effect.
current with collector plate potential at
different intensities of incident radiation. Q.10. What happens to photoelectric current when
Write the intensities in the increasing order intensity of incident radiation is increased?
Ans. Photoelectric current increases with incresing
Y intensity of incident radiation.
Q.11. What happens to photoelectric current when
Photoelectric

frequency of incident radiation is increased?

Ans. Photoelectric current remains the same.
I1
I2
Q.12. What happens to stopping potential when
I3 frequency of incident radiation is increased?
Ans. Stopping potential becomes more negative.
Stopping
potential

X X
V1 0 Collector plate
potential

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Draw a neat labelled circuit diagram, of Labellings:

ex perimental arrangement to study the
S – Source of light
photoelectric effect.
W – Quartz window
Ans. Diagram:
A – Anode
Quartz
window S C – Cathode
W
Evacuated V – Voltmeter
Photosensitive glass tube
plate A - microammeter
Electrons Q.2. Define Photoelectric effect and photoelectric
C A work function.
Ans. (a) Photoelectric effect: The phenomenon of
emission of electrons by certain metals, when it
Commutator is exposed to radiations of certain frequencies is
called as photoelectric effect and emitted
+
A electrons are called photoelectrons.
+  
V (b) Photoelectric work function: Minimum light
energy required to remove a free electron from
the metal surface is called photoelectric work
+  function.
Electrons and Photons 209

Q.3. Define threshold frequency and threshold Q.7. Write three basic properties of photons which are
wavelength used to obtain Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
Ans. (a) Threshold frequency: ( 0): The minimum Use this equation to draw a plot of maximum
frequency of incident radiations for which kinetic energy of the electrons emitted
photoelectrons are just emitted from the photo against the frequency of incident radiation
sensitive material is called threshold frequency. Ans. Properties of photons:
 0 = c/0 (i) Radiation consists of discrete photons.
(b) Threshold wavelength (: Threshold wavelength (ii) The energy of a photon is directly proportional
is defined as the maximum wavelength above to the frequency of radiation.
which there is no emission of photoelectrons from
 E = h
the material
c where h is Plank’s constant.
  =   = frequency of radiation.
0
(iii) The photons give all of its energy to the electron
Q.4. Explain saturation current and stopp ing with which it interacts.
potential.
Einstein’s photoelectric equation is
Ans. (a) Saturation current: At some stage for certain
1 2
positive potential of plate A all the emitted mv max = hv  
electrons are collected by the plate A and 2
photoelectric current becomes maximum. If we The plot is shown below
increase the positive potential of plate A further,
Y
photoelectric current does not increase. This
maximum value of photoelectric current is called
saturation current. K.E.max
0
(b) Stopping potential: The minimum negative X
potential V 0 given to the plate A for which Threshold Frequency
frequency ()
photoelectric current stops or becomes zero is (0)
called cut off or stopping potential. 

Q.5. State the characteristics of photoelectric

effect.
Ans. Characteristics:
(1) For a given photosensitive material, there exists
a certain minimum cut -off frequency of the
incident radiation, below which no emission of
photoelectrons takes place. This frequency is
called threshold frequency.
(2) Threshold frequency is different for different
materials (metals).
(2) For given photosensitive material and frequency
of incident radiation (threshold frequency), the
photoelectric current is directly proportional to
the intensity of the incident radiation.
(3) Above threshold frequency, the maximum kinetic
energy of the emitted photoelectrons increases
linearly with the frequency of the incident radiation,
but it is independent of intensity of radiation.
(4) The emission of photoelectron is an instantaneous
process.
Q.6. Define photoelectric cell. State the principle
of its working. State its two applications.
Ans. Photoelectric cell: A photoelectric cell is a device
which converts light energy into electrical energy.
Principle of working: It works on the principle
of photoelectric effect
Two applications: it is used in -
(1) Exposure meter
(2) Burglar alarm
Q.8. Two monochromatic radiations of frequencies
1 and 2 (1 > 2) and having the same intensity
are in turn, incident on a photosensitive
surface to cause photoelectric emission.
Explain, giving reason, in which case
(i) more number of electrons will be emitted
and
(ii) the maximum K.E. of the emitted electrons
will be more.
Ans. (i) Intensity of incident radiation = nh
where, n is the number of photons incident per
unit time per unit area.
For same intensity of two monochromatic
radiations of frequency 1 and 2,
n1h1 = n2h2
As 1 >2 , n2> n1
Therefore the number of photons emitted for
monochromatic radiation of frequency will be more
than that of radiation of frequency .
1 2
(ii) mvmax = h  0
2
For a given metal work function  is constant
Therefore K.E. max increases with increase in
frequency of radiation.
Thus the maximum K.E. of the emitted electrons
will be more for monochromatic radiation of
frequency  as >
210 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.9. Explain the observation made by Hertz and = 1.3 eV

Lenard about the phenomenon of photoelectric = 1.3  1.6 1019 J
emission.
1 2
Ans. The phenomenon of photoelectric effect was  mv max = 2.08 1019 J
2
observed by Hertz and Lenard.
(i) When ultraviolet radiations were allowed to fall 2.08  1019  2
on the emitter plate of an evacuated glass tube  v max =
m
enclosing two electrodes, current flow in the circuit.
(ii) As soon as ultra-radiations are stopped, the 2.08  1019  2
=
current flow also stopped. 9.1  10 31
Explanation:
4.16  10 19
(a) These observations indicate that when ultra- =
radiations falls on the emitter plate, electrons 9.1  10 31
are emitted from it which are attracted towards
= 0.457  1012
positive collector plate by the electric field. Thus
light falling on the surface of the emitter produces = 0.6761 106
the current in the external circuit.
= 676.1 103 m
(b) It was also found that certain metals like zinc,
= 676.1 km
cadmium, magnesium etc are responded only to
ultraviolet light, having short wavelength to cause Q.12. If the maximum kinetic energy of emitted
electron emission from the surface. electrons in photoelectric effect is 2 eV. Find
(c) However, some alkali metals such as lithium, the st op pi ng p otential and thr esho ld
sodium, potassium, caesium and rubidium were wavelength, if the work function for the metal
sensitive even to visible light. All these is 4.2 eV.
photosensitive substances emit electrons when Solution: Data:
they are illuminated by light. K.E.max = 2 eV = 3.2  J
Q.10. The energy required to remove electron from 0 = 4.2 eV = 4.2 × 1.6 × 1019 J
sodium is 2.3 eV. Does sodium show photoelectric V0 = ? ,  = ?
o
effect for orange light of wavelength 6800 A ? K.E.max = eV0
Solution: Data: K.E max
 = 2.3 eV = 2.3 1.6 1019 J = 3.68 1019 J V0 =
e
o
 = 6800 A 3.2  10 19
=
Threshold wavelength 1.6  10 19
 V0 = 2 volt.
hc
 =  hc
0
 = 
0
6.63  10 34  3  108
= hc
3.68  10 19  = 
0
19.89  10 26
= 6.63  10 34  3  108
3.68  1019 =
o
4.2  1.6  1019
= 5.405 107 m = 5405 A
19.89  10 26
As  >  , the sodium not show photoelectric =
effect. 6.72  1019
o

Q.11. The work function of tungsten is 4.5 eV. = 2.960  107 m = 2960 A
Calculate the speed of fastest electron ejected Q.13. The photoelectric work function for a metal
fro mtungste n su rface when light who se surface is 2.4 eV. If the light of wavelength
photon energy is 5.80 eV shines on the surface. 0
5000 A is incident on the surface of metal,
Solution: Data:
find the threshold frequency and incident
h = 6.63 1034 J-s, = 4.5 eV frequency. Will there be an emission of
h = 5.8 eV, vmax= ? photoelectrons or not?
1 2 Solution: Data:
mv max = h  
2  = 2.3eV = 2.3 × 1.6 × 1019 J = 3.68 × 1019 J
o
= 5.8 – 4.5
 = 5000 A = 3.0 × 107
Electrons and Photons 211

h = 6.63 × 1034 J-s Threshold frequency

c = 3 × 108 m/s, 0 = ? ,  = ? 0
Incident frequency 0 =
h
c 3.68  10 19
 = =
 6.63  10  34
3  108 = 5.792 × 1014 Hz ... (2)
=
5  10  7 As  is greater than 0, therefore photoelectric
= 6 × 1014 Hz ... (1) emission is possible.

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. With neat labelled circuit diagram, describe

the experiment to study the characteristics
of photoelectric effect

Photoelectric
Hence discuss any two characteristics of

photoelectric effect.
Ans. Experimental study of photoelectric effect: It
consists of an evacuated glass tube having
photosensitive plate C and another metal plate
A. Monochromatic light from the source of short
wavelength enters the tube through the quartz
window W and falls on the photosensitive plate C
(emitter). The electrons are emitted by the emitter
C and are attracted by the plate A (collector). The
emission of electrons causes flow of current in
the circuit. The variation of photoelectric current
is studied with the variation of frequency of
radiations, intensity of incident radiations and
potential difference between the plates. The
potential difference between the emitter and
collector plates is measured by the voltmeter (v)
whereas the photoelectric current flowing in the
circuit is measured by microammeter (A)
Quartz
window S photoelectric current increases linearly with the
W
Evacuated
Photosensitive glass tube
plate
Electrons
A
C
current
0 Frequency
Fig. (a) Variation of photoelectric current with
frequency of incident radiation.
reached .This minimum frequency of incident
radiations for which photoelectrons are just
emitted from the photo sensitive material is
called threshold frequency .
(ii) Effect of intensity of radiations:
The collector plate A is maintained at positive
potential with respect to emitter plate C. Keeping
the frequency of incident radiations and
accelerating potential fixed, the intensity of
radiation is varied and resultant photoelectric
current is measured. It is found that the
intensity of radiation as shown in fig. (b). The
photoelectric current is directly proportional to
the number of photoelectrons emitted per sec.
This shows that the number of photoelectrons
emitted per second is directly proportional to the
intensity of incident radiations.

Commutator
Photoelectric

+
current

A
+  
V

+  Intensity of light
(i) Effect of frequency of incident radiations:
A suitable positive potential is applied to collector Fig. (b) Variation of photoelectric current with
plate A. The intensity of incident radiations is intensity of light.
kept constant and the frequency of the incident
radiations is gradually increased from its
minimum value. It is observed that no electric
current is observed till a certain frequency is
212 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.2. Discuss the effect of potential difference on

photoelectric current

Photoelectric
(i) Stopping potential does not vary with

current
I1 < I2 < I3
intensity of incident radiations. Explain. I3
(ii) Show graphically how the stopping potential I2
for a given photosensitive surface varies I1
with frequency of incident radiations.
Ans. Effect of potential difference on photoelectric
current:
The threshold frequency and intensity of
radiations both are kept constant at suitable V0
values. The positive potential of plate A is  O +
gradually increased and resulting photoelectric
Collector plate potential
current is measured each time. It is found that
Fig. Variation of photoelectric current with collector plate
photoelectric current increases with increase in
potential for different intensities of incident radiation
positive potential.
(ii) Variation of photoelectric current for different
At some stage for certain positive potential of
frequencies:
plate A all the emitted electrons are collected by
the plate A and photoelectric current becomes Now intensity of radiation is kept constant and
maximum. If we increase the positive potential variation of photoelectric
of plate A, further, photoelectric current does not

Photoelectric
increase. This maximum value of photoelectric

current is called saturation current.
(i) Variation of photoelectric current for different
intensities:
Now negative potential is applied to the plate A
with respect to the plate C and it is gradually
increased till the photoelectric current is reduced
to zero.
The minimum negative potential given to the plate
A for which photoelectric current stops or becomes
zero is called cut off or stopping potential.
All the photoelectrons emitted from the metal
surface do not have same energy. Photoelectric
current becomes zero when the stopping potential
is sufficient to repel even the most energetic
photoelectrons, with the maximum kinetic energy.
1 2
mv max = eVs
2 variation of stopping potential with photoelectric
where,
v max = the maximum velocity of photoelectrons
e = charge on electron
Vs = stopping potential.
If the frequency of the incident radiations is kept
constant and the experiment is repeated for
different intensities I1  I2  I3 it is found that in
all cases V0 stopping potential remains constant.
Thus for a given frequency of incident radiatious,
the stopping potential and the maximum kinetic
energy of photoelectrons are independent of the
intensity of incident radiations.
current
1 < 2 < 3
Saturation
current
3 2 1
V03 V 02 V01 O
Collector plate potential
Fig. Variation of photoelectric current with collector
plate potential for different frequencies of incident
radiation
current with collector potential is studied with
different frequency of incident radiations. Graph of
current for different frequency of radiation is shown.
It is observed that the stopping potential
becomes more negative when the frequency of
incident radiation is increased but the saturation
current is same in each case.
This shows that the stopping potential and the
maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons
depend of the frequency of the incident radiations.
They are independent of intensity of radiations.
Q.3. State three characteristics of photoelectric
effect which cannot be explained on the basis
of wave theory of light but can be explained only
by using Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
Ans. (i) For a given photosensitive material, there
exists a certain minimum cut -off frequency of
the incident radiation, below which no emission
of photoelectrons takes place. This frequency is
called threshold frequency.
Electrons and Photons
(ii) For given photosensitive material and frequency
of incident radiation, the number of photoelectrons
emitted per second i.e. the photoelectric current
is directly proportional to the intensity of the
incident radiation.
(iii) The maximum kinetic energy of the emitted
photoelectrons increases linearly with the
frequency of the incident radiation, but it is
independent of intensity of radiation
(iv) The emission of photoelectron is an instantaneous
process.
Q.4. Write three basic assumptions regarding
photons which are used to obtain Einstein’s
photoelectric equation. Hence derive Einstein’s
photoelectric equation. Explain the terms
involved in it.
Ans. Assumptions:
(i) A radiation of frequency consists of a stream of
discrete quanta or photons
(ii) The energy of each photon depends on the
frequency of radiation. The energy of photon is
E = h, where h is the Planck’s constant.
(iii) When radiation of  is incident on photosensitive
surface, there are collisions between the photons
and electrons in the atoms of the emitter. During
such collision, the entire energy of photon is
transferred to the electron.
The energy absorbed by the electron from the
incident photon is used in two ways.
A part of this energy is used by the electron in
liberating itself from the atom.
(a) The minimum energy required to free the
electron from a given surface is called work
function of the material of the surface (0)
(b) The remaining energy (h0) appears as the
kinetic energy of photoelectron. If the electron
does not lose any part of this energy in
collision inside the metal, and at the surface,
escapes with maximum kinetic energy.
Derivation:
Maximum K.E. of photoelectron
= Energy of photon – Work function.
1 2
mv max = hv   ... (1)
2 increase of photoelectric current with intensity
or
1 2
mv max = eVs ... (2)
2
From (1) and (2)
 eVs = h  
This is the Einstein’s photoelectric equation
where,
 = Work function of metal
h = Energy of incident photon
1 2
mv max = Maximum K.E. of emitted electrons
2
213
Q.5. State Einstein’s photoelectric equation. Explain
characteristics of photoelectric effect with the
help of Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
Ans. Einstein’s photoelectric equation is given by
1 2
mv max = h   ... (1)
2
Explanation of characteristics of photoelectric
effect with the of Einstein’s equation:
(i) If the frequency of incident radiation is decreased,
the kinetic energy of photoelectrons decreases
and finally it becomes zero at threshold
frequency.
When = 0, then
1 2
K.E.max = mv max = 0
2
From above
0 = h  
h0= 
Thus, Einstein’s photoelectric equation beomes,
1 2
mv max = h h0 ... (2)
2
1 2
mv max = h ( 0)
2
From this equation,
(a) If   0, K.E. is positive and photoelectrons
are emitted with some velocity.
(b) 0, no photoelectrons are emitted. as K.E.
is negative
(c)  = 0, photoelectrons are just emitted with
zero kinetic energy.
(ii) As the photoelectric work function () is constant
for a given material, from equation (1).
1 2
The mv max  
2
i.e. maximum kinetic energy of the
photoelectrons increases with frequency of
incident radiation and it does not depend on the
intensity of the incident radiation.
(iii) According to quantum theory, a more intense
beam contains a greater number of photons.
Consequently the number of collisions between
photons and electrons increse and more
photoelectrons are emitted. This explains the
of incident radiations.
(iv) Emission of photoelectrons is a result of collision
between electrons and photons. As soon as the
radiation is incident on the photosensitive
surface, such collisions occur and photoelectrons
are emitted. The moment, incident radiations cut-
off, there is no emission of photoelectrons. Thus,
the photoelectric effect is instantaneous.
Q.6. What is p hotoelect ric cell? De scribe
construction and working of photoelectric
cell. State its two uses.
214 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Ans. Photoelectric cell: A photoelectric cell is a device photon having the same energy. Thus photon
which converts light energy into electrical energy. energy is independent of intensity of radiation.
It works on the principle of photoelectric effect. (iv) Photons are electrically neutral and are not
deflected by electric and magnetic fields.
A light (v) In a photon – particle collision, total energy and
C
total momentum are conserved. However, the
number of photons may not be conserved in a
collision. A photon may be absorbed or a new
photon may be created.
Q.8. A g rap h sho wing var iati on o f st opp ing
potential with frequency of incident radiations
for two photosensitive materials A and B
having threshold frequencies 0 and 0 .
(i) In which case stopping potential is more
 and why?
A (ii) What does the slope of graph gives? Does
+ the slope of graph depend on the nature
 + of the material used?
Fig. Photoelectric cell (iii) For which material emitted electrons
Construction: It consists of a semi cylindrical have greater K.E. for the same frequency
photosensitive metal plate C (emitter) and a wire of incident radiation?
loop A (collector) supported in an evacuated glass A
or quartz bulb. It is connected to the external Metal A B
circuit having high tension battery and a micro
ammeter A. Stopping
potential Metal B
Working: When light of suitable frequency falls
on the emitter C photoelectrons are emitted. These 0 0
photoelectrons are attracted towards anode A. A Frequency
small photoelectric current flows in the circuit is ()
recorded by micro ammeter in the circuit. If the
intensity of incident radiations is increased, the
rate of photoelectric emission increases causing
an increase in the current. Thus photoelectric
Ans. (i) Einstein’s photoelectric equation
current is directly proportional to the intensity of
incident radiation. eV0 = h  h
Applications: Photoelectric cell is used in- h h
 V0 =   0 ... (1)
(1) Exposure meter e e
(2) Burglar alarm For metal A,

Q.7. Explain particle nature of light, (photon) h h

VA =    ... (2)
e A e 0
Ans. (i) In interaction of radiation with matter,
radiation behave as if it is made up of particles For metal B,
called photons. h h
VB =    ... (3)
(ii) Each photon has energy E = h e B e 0
hc From graph B > A , stopping potential for metal
And momentum p = B is greater than stopping potential of metal A.

where, c is the speed of light. (ii) The slope of stopping potential against frequency
of incident radiation gives the ratio of Planck’s
(iii) All photons of a particular frequency , or constant and electronic charge.
wavelength  and have the same energy
h
hc h Slope = , it does not depend on the nature of
E = h = and momentum p = e
  the material used (metal).
Whatever may be the intensity of radiation, by (iii) Emitted electrons have greater energy for
increasing the intensity of radiation of given material A. This is because photoelectric work
wavelength, there is increase in the number of function is less for metal A
photons per second crossing given area, with each
Electrons and Photons 215

Q.9. If the work function for certain metal is hc hc

1.8 eV. eV2  eV1 = 
1 2
(a) What is the stopping potential for
electrons ejected from metal when light 1 1 
e (V2  V1) = hc     
of 4000 Å shines on the metal?  1 2 
(b) What is the maximum speed of the ejected 1 1 
electrons? e (1.1 – 0.6) = hc     
Solution: Data:  1 2 

h = 6.63 × 1034 J-s  1 1 

e × 0.5 = 6.63 × 1034 × 3 × 108   

 = 4000 Å = 4 × 107 m 
 1 4 .95  10 7 
0 = 1.8 eV = 1.8 × 1.6 × 1019 = 2.88 × 1019 J 1 1 
vmax= ? 0.8 × 1019 = 19.89 × 1026    
7 
 1 4.95  10 
hc 1 
(a)  eV =   1
 0.04020 × 107 =    
7 
 1 4.95  10 
6.63  10 34  3  108
=  2.88 × 1019 1 
4  10  7 0.0402 × 107 =    0.2020  10 
7

= 4.97 × 1019  2.88 × 1019  1 

 eV = 2.09 × 1019 J 1
0.2420 × 107 = 
2.09  1019
1
 V = 1
1.6  1019   =
0.2420  107
= 1.31 volt o
= 4.132 × 107 = 4132 A
1 2
(b)  mv max = eV
2 hc
 eV1 =  
2eV 1
v max =
m hc
  =  eV2
2
2.9  10 19  2
v max = 6.63  10 34  3  108
9.1  10 31 =  1.1 × 1.6 × 10-19
4.132  10  7
4.18  10 19 = 4.814 × 1019  1.76 × 1019
v max =
9.1  10 31 = 3.054 × 1019 J
= 0.4593  1012 3.54  1019
= eV
= 0.678 × 106 m 1.6  1019
= 1.91 eV
= 678 × 103 m/s (b) From Einstein’s equation
Q.10. When a surface is irradiated with light of hC
wavelength 4950, a photoelectric current eV2 =   0
2
app ears which vanis hes, if a re tard ing hC
potential greater than 0.6V is applied across = 0 + eV2
2
the phototube. When different source of light
is used, it is found that critical retarding 6.63  10 34  3  10 8
potential is changed to 1.1 V. Find the work 2 = 1.911 × 1.6 × 1019
function of the emitting surface and the + 1.6 × 1019 × 1.1
wavelength of the second source. 19.89  10 26
Solution: Data: 2 = (1.911 + 1.1) × 1.6 × 1019
V1 = 0.6 V , V2 = 1.1 V 19.89  10 26
 = 4950 A0 = 4.95107 m 2 = 3.011 × 1.6 × 1019
2 = ? , h = ? 19.89  1026
 2 =
hc 3.011  1.6  1019
(a) eV1 =   ... (1)
1 19.89  1026
=
eV2 =
hc
 ... (2) 4.817  1019
2 = 4.129 × 107 m
0
= 4129 A
216 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.11. A metal who se work func tion 4.2 eV is hc

irradiated by radiation whose wavelength is K.Emax =  ... (1)
0 1 1
2000 A . Find the maximum kinetic energy of
hc
emitted radiation. K.Emax =   ... (2)
2 2
Solution: Data:
1 1 
 = 4.2 eV = 4.21.6 1019 J = 6.72  1019 J K.Emax  K.Emax = hc   
0 1 2 
 1  2 
 = 2000 A , h = 6.63 1034 J-s 3 × 1019  0.972 × 1019
c = 3  108 m/s, K.Emax = ?  1 1 
= h × 3 × 108  7
 
1 2
mv max
hc  3.31  10 5  10  7 
=  
2 
 1 1
6.63  10 34  3  108 2.028 × 1019 = h × 3 × 1015  3.31  5 
=  6.72 × 10-19  
2  10 7
 1.69 
= 9.945 × 1019  6.72 × 1019 2.028 ×1019 = h × 3 × 1015  16 .55 
 
= (9.945  6.72) × 1019
= 3.225 1019 J 2.028  10 19  16.55
h =
3  1015  1.69
3.225  1019
= eV  h = 6.62 × 1034 Js
1.6  1019
= 2.015 eV hc 6.62  10 34  3  108
 = =  3 × 1019
1 3.31  10 7
Q.12. If photoelectrons are to be emitted from
= 6 ×1019  3 × 1019 = 3 × 1019 J
potassium surface with speed 6 × 10 5 m/s.
what frequency of radiation must be used? hc
Threshold frequency for potassium is 4.22 × 0 =
0
1014 Hz.
6.62  10 34  3  108
Solution: Data: =
3  10 19
h = 6.63 × 1034 J-s, max = 6 × 105 m/s. 0
0 = 4.22 × 1014 Hz, m = 9.1 × 1031 kg,  = ? = 6.62 × 107 = 6620 A
0
1 2 Q.14. Light of wavelengt h 3000 A falls on a metal
mv max = h ( 0)
2 su rface having wor k fu nction 2 .3 e V.
1 2 Calculate the maximum velocity of the ejected
mvmax
  = 2 + 0 electrons.
h Solution: Data:
1 9.1  1031  (6  105 )2 0 = 2.3 eV = 2.3 × 1.6 × 1019 J = 3.68 × 1019 J
= × + 4.22 × 1014
2 6.63  10 34  = 3000A0 , h = 6.63 × 1034 J-s
= 2.47 × 1014 + 4.22 × 1014 c = 3 × 108 m/s , vmax = ?
= (2.47 + 4.22) × 10 14
1 2 hc
mv max =  
= 6.69 × 1014 Hz 2 
0
Q.13. A photon of wavelength 3310 A falls on a 6.63  10 34  3  108
=  3.68 × 1019
photocathode and an electron of energy 3  10  7
3 × 1019 J is ejected. If the wavelength of the = 6.63 ×1019  3.68 × 1019
0
incident photon is changed to 5000 A . The = (6.63  3.68) × 1019
energy of the ejected electron is 9.72 × 1020J. = 2.95 ×1019 J
Calculate the value of the Planck’s constant
1 2
and threshold wavelength of the photon. mv max = 2.951019 J
2
Solution: Data:
K.Emax = 3 × 1019 J 2.95  1019  2
1 vmax =
K.Emax = 9.72 × 1020 J = 0.972 × 1019 J m
2
1 = 3310 A0 = 3.31 × 107 m 2.95  1019  2
vmax =
2 = 5000 A0 = 5 × 107 m 9.1  10 31
c = 3 × 108m/s , h = ? , 0 = ?  vmax = 8.052 × 105 m/s
Electrons and Photons 217

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) Draw a well labelled diagram of photoelectric cell. Explain the observations made by Hertz and Lenard about
the phenomenon of photoelectric emission. (Oct 2013)
(2) Describe the construction of photoelectric cell. (Feb. 2014)
(3) Draw a neat labelled circuit diagram of experimental arrangement for study of photoelectric effect.
(Oct. 2015)
(4) With the help of a neat circuit diagram, explain the working of a photodiode. State its any ‘two’ uses.
(Oct 2015)
Problems :
(1) The photoelectric work function for a metal is 4.2 eV. If the stopping potential is 3 V, find the threshold
wavelength and maximum kinetic energy of emitted electrons. (Velocity of light in air = 3 × 108 m/s,)
Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 10–34 J-s, Charge on electron = 1.6 × 10–19 C) (March 2013)
(2) Find the wave number of a photon having an energy of 2.072 eV.
Given : Charge on electron = 1.6 × 10–19 C, Velocity of light air = 3 × 108 m/s,
Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 10–34 J-s. (Feb. 2014)
(3) The photoelectric threshold wavelength of a metal is 230 nm. Determine the maximum kinetic energy in joule
and in eV of the ejected electron for the metal surface when it is exposed to a radiation of wavelength 180 nm.
[Planck’s constant : h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js, Velocity of light : c = 3 × 108 m/s.] (Oct. 2014)

(4) The threshold wavelength of silver is 3800 . Calculate the maxmium kinetic energy in eV of photoelectrons

emitted, when ultraviolet light of wavelength 2600 falls on it. [Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 × 10–34 J.s., Velocity

of light in air, c = 3 × 108 m/s] (Feb. 2015)

(5) The photoelectric current in a photoelectric cell can be reduced to zero by a stopping potential of 1.8 volt.
Monochromatic light of wavelength 2200 is incident on the cathode. Find the maximum kinetic energy of

the photoelectrons in joules. [Charge on electron = 1.6 × 10–19 C] (Oct. 2015)

(6) The photoelectric work function for a metal surface is 2.3 eV. If the light of wavelength 6800 is incident on
the surface of metal, find threshold frequency and incident frequency. Will there be an emission of
photoelectrons or not? [Velocity of light c = 3 × 108 m/s, Planck’s constant, h = 6.63 × 10–34 Js] (Feb. 2016)

(7) Light of wavelength 3000 falls on a metal surface having work function 2.3 eV. Calculate the maximum
velocity of ejected electrons.
(Planck’s constant h = 6.63 × 1034 J.s., Velocity of light c = 3 × 108 m/s, mass of an electron = 9.1 × 1031 kg)
(July 2016)
(8) The work functions for potassium and caesium are 2.25 eV and 2.14 eV respectively. Is the photoelectric
effect possible for either of them if the incident wavelength is 5180 ?
[Given : Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 10–34 J.s.;
Velocity of light = 3 × 108 m/s; 1 eV = 1.6 × 10–19J] (March 2017)
(9) If the total energy of radiation of frequency 1014 Hz is 6.63 J, calculate the number of photons in the radiation.
(Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 1034 J.s.) (July 2017)
(10) If the work function of a metal is 3 eV, calculate the threshold wavelength of that metal.
(Velocity of light = 3 × 108 m/s, Planck’s constant = 6.63 × 1034 J.s.; 1 eV = 1.6 × 1019 J) (July 2017)

(11) The work function for a metal surface is 2.2 eV. If light of wavelength 5000 is incident on the surface of the
metal, find the threshold frequency and incident frequency. Will there be an emission of photoelectrons or
not? (c = 3 × 108 m/s, 1 eV = 1.6 × 1019 J, h = 6.63 × 1034 J.s.) (March 2018)


218 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
18
Syllabus
Geiger-Marsden experiment, Rutherford’s model of atom. Bohr’s model, Hydrogen spectrum, Composition and size of
nucleus, Radioactivity, de Broglie hypothesis, Wavelength of an electron, Davisson and Germer experiment.

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The magnitude p of the electron momentum in the 6. The energy of an electron in the nth Bohr orbit is
nth Bohr orbit is proportional to proportional to
1 1 1
(a) n (b) (c) n2 (d) n3 (a) n2 (b) n (c) (d) 2
n n n
2. The angular momentum of the electron in successive 7. When an X-ray tube is operated with an accelerating
Bohr orbits differ by potential difference V, the cut-off wavelength is
nh proportional to
(a) (b) h 1
2
(a) (b) V (c) V (d) V2
h h V
(c) (d) (n  1) 8. The nuclei having the same number of protons but
2 2
3. The angular momentum of the electron in the second different number of neutrons are called
Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom is l. It’s angular (a) isobars (b) -particles
momentum in the third Bohr orbit is (c) isotopes (d) isotones
2 3 4 9. Isotones are atoms that have
(a) l (b) l (c) 3l (d) l
3 2 3 (a) the same atomic number but different mass
4. Which of the following quantities has the same numbers
units and dimension as that of Planck’s constant? (b) the same mass number but different atomic
(a) Moment of inertia numbers
(b) Angular momentum (c) both neutron and proton numbers even
(c) Linear momentum (d) the same neutron number but different atomic
numbers
(d) Rate of change of linear momentum
10. Isobars are the elements with the same
5. The potential energy of the electron in a hydrogen
atom in its ground state is (a) atomic mass number (b) atomic number
(a) 6.8 eV (b) 13.6 eV (c) neutron number (d) number of electrons
(c) 27.2 eV (d) 13.6 Ev

ANSWERS
1  (b), 2  (d), 3  (b), 4  (b), 5  (c), 6  (d), 7  (a), 8  (c), 9  (d), 10  (a).

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. How do kinetic and potential energies of the
electron in H - atom change when the atom is
raised from the ground state to an exited
state?
Ans. Kinetic energy decreases and Potential energy
increases (becomes less negative).
Q.2. What is the minimum angular momentum of
the electron in an H- atom?
Ans. h/2
Ans. Infinite spectral lines are possible in H-spectrum.
Q.5. Which hydrogen spectral series was found in
first?
Ans. Balmer series is the first spectral series.
Q.6. Name the constituent of particles of an atomic
nucleus.
Ans. Proton and neutron are the constituent particles
of an atomic nucleus.

Q.3. Which physical quantity of an atomic electron Q.7. State the S.I. unit of radioactive decay
has the dimensions same as that of h? constant.
Ans. Angular momentum. Ans. Per second i.e. s1

Q.4. How many spectral lines are possible in H- Q.8. In which region of hydrogen spectrum is H
spectrum? line obtained?
(218)
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 219

Ans. Visible region Q.12. Define isotopes.

Ans. The nuclei having same number of protons but
Q.9. What is the maximum number of spectral
different number (mass number) of neutrons are
lines are emitted by a H-atom when it is in
called isotopes.
the third excited state?
Ans. 6-number of lines are emitted. Q.13. Define isobar.
Ans. The nuclei having same mass number (A) but
Q.10. Define Radioactivity.
different atomic numbers (Z) are called isobar
Ans. Radioactivity: The phenomenon of spontaneous
emission of radiations from radioactive substance Q.14. Define isotones.
is called radioactivity. Ans. The nuclei having same number of neutrons
(A  Z) but different atomic numbers Z are called
Q.11. The spontaneous breaking of nucleus into
isotones.
new nucleus is called as
Ans. Radioactive disintegration.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Write the observations of the Geiger–Marsden h

made about the scattering experiment. i.e. mvr = n
2
Ans. Observations: de-Broglie hypothesis:
(1) The most of the scattered -particles passed The electron can revolves around the nucleus only
without deviation. in those circular orbits, which contain an integral
(2) Only few, about 0.14% scattered by more than 10. multiple of electron wavelengths.
(3) Few were deflected slightly and very few were Let, the electron moving in nth orbit of radius rn,
deflected by more than 900. the distance travelled in one trip is 2rn
(4) Some particles even bounced back with  = 1800. It should be integral multiple of wavelength
 2rn = n ... (1)
Q.2. Draw a neat labelled diagram describe Geiger
– Marsden experiment showing the scattering where, n = 1, 2, 3, ...
of -particles by a thin foil of gold. Why is it By de-Broglie hypothesis,
that the most of the -particles go straight
through the foil and only a small fraction gets h h
= = n mv
scattered at large angle? p n

Ans. For most of the alpha particles, suffer very small Substituting this value of  in equation (1)
repulsion due to the positively charged nucleus
so go straight without deviation. h h
2rn = n mv or mvnrn = n
n 2

Gold h
Screen i.e. Angular momentum = n
foil 2
Lead bricks
This is quantum condition proposed by Bohr for
angular momentum of the electron in 2 nd
postulate.

Source of Q.4. A proton and a deuteron are accelerated
 particles through the same accelerating potential.
Which one of the two has
Detector (i) Greater value of de-Broglie wavelength
associated with it and
Fig. Geiger Marsden Experiment (ii) Less momentum, Why?
Ans. (i) de-Broglie wavelength is given as
Q.3. St ate Bohr ’s q uant isa tion condition for
stationary orbi ts. How does de- Brog lie h
hypothesis explain the stationary orbits?  = 2mqV
Ans. The electron can revolves around the nucleus only As the mass of proton < mass of deuteron and
in those orbits for which the angular momentum of
qp = qd. Also the accelerating P.D. V is same.
h
the electron is equal to an integral multiple of . Thus p > d
2
220 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

h 1 e2
(ii) Momentum = v2 = 4  mr … (1)
 0
Therefore, the momentum of proton will be less From Bohr’s 2nd postulate,
than that of deuteron.
Angular momentum of revolving electron is
Q.5. A proton and an electron have same kinetic h
energy. Which one has greater value of de- integral multiple of .
2
Broglie wavelen gth asso ciat ed with it?
Show graphically the variation of the de- h
mvr =
Broglie wavelength with the potential through 2
which an electron is accelerated. nh
 v =
2mr
h
Ans. (i)   for same charge and accelerating P.D. Squaring we get
m
n 2h 2
h v2 = ... (2)
 , as k = same 42m 2r 2
2mk
From (1) and (2)
As the mass of electron is smaller than the mass
of proton, the electron has grater value of de- 1 e2 n 2h 2
Broglie wavelegth. 4 0 mr =
42m 2r 2
(ii) Graph:
n 2h 2 0
r =
me 2
Wavelength

 h 2 0  2
 
r =  me 2  n … (3)
 
This is the expression of radius of nth Bohr orbit.
Since, h, 0 , m, e are constants.
Accelerating P.D.
 r  n2 ... (4)
Q.6. Draw a neat labelled energy level diagram for Thus radius of nth Bohr orbit is directly proportional
first four series for hydrogen atom. to the square of principal quantum number
Ans. Q.8. Show that angular speed of electron and
E = 0 eV frequency of revolution in nth Bohr orbit is
n=
inversely proportional to principle quantum
E5 = 0.54 eV n=5 number.
pfund
E4 = 0.85 eV n=4 Ans. From Bohr’s 2nd postulate
Brackett
Angular momentum of revolving electron is
E3 = 1.5 eV n=3
Paschen h
integral multiple of .
2
E2 = 3.4 eV n=2 h
Balmer mvr =
2
nh
v = … (1)
2mr
Radius of nthBohr orbit is
E1 = 13.6 eV n=1  h 20  2
 
Lyman r =  me 2  n … (2)
 
Q.7. Obtain the expression for the radius of n th Substituting the value of r in equation (1),
Bohr or bit and show that the ra dius is we get,
pr op or tion al t o sq uar e of the pri ncip al
quantum number. nh
v =
Ans. Consider an electron revolving around the  h 2 0  2
2m  n
nucleus in circular orbit of radius r.  me 2 
 
From Bohr’s 1st postulate,
e2
Centripetal force = Electrostatic force v = ... (3)
2 0 nh
mv 2 1 e2
= 4  2 Since, e,  and h are constants.
r 0 r
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 221

1 Q.12. State any four properties of –rays.

 v 
n Ans. (1) -rays are not particles but they are
i.e. Velocity of electron in the nthbohr orbit is electromagnetic waves (photon) of very short
inversely proportional to principal quantum wavelength. Photon originating from the nucleus
number. are called -rays.
Q.9. Define half-life period. Obtain its expression. (2) They are neutral in charge and not affected by
electric and magnetic field.
Ans. Half-life period (T): half-life period of radioactive
(3) They travel with the speed of light.
substance is defined as the time in which the
half of the original value of substance is (4) They affect photographic plate, produce
disintegrated. fluorescence.
th
We have, N = N0et  1 
(5) They have very low ionising power about  
N0  1000 
At t = T, N = of that of -particle.
2
(6) They have very high penetrating than -particle.
N0
 = N0eT (7) When an -particle is emitted by an atom, its
2
atomic number and mass number do not change.
1
 = eT Q.13. State De Broglie’s hypothesis of matter waves
2
and der ive an e xp ressio n of de- Broglie
 eT = 2
wavelength.
 T = loge2
Ans. De Broglie’s hypothesis:
loge 2 The wavelength associated with a particle of mass
 T =
 m moving with speed v is given by
2
2  303  log10 h h
=  = p =
 mv
0.693 where, h is Planck’s constant, p is momentum.
=
 Expression of de-Broglie wavelength:
Q.10. State any four properties of -rays. According to Planck, the energy of photon is
Ans. (1) -rays are positively charged particles. It is hc
E = h = ... (1)
helium nucleus 42 He . 
(2) It is deflected by both electric and magnetic field. where,  is frequency of light,  is wavelength of
light and c is speed of light.
(3) They affect photographic plate, produce fluorescence.
According to Einstein‘s mass energy relation
(4) They ionise the gas when passed through gas.
E = mc2 ... (2)
(5) When an -particle is emitted by an atom, its
atomic number decreases by 2 and mass number From (1) and (2)
decreases by 4. hc
= mc2
e.g. 238
 234
 4 
92 U 90Th 2 He
h
Q.11. State any four properties of -rays.  =
mc
Ans. (1) -rays are fast moving electrons from nucleus. h
(2) Their speed ranges from 1% to 99% of the speed or  = p ... (3)
of light.
where mc = p is the momentum of photon
(3) It is deflected by both electric and magnetic field.
This is the expression of de-Broglie wavelength.
(4) They affect photographic plate, produce fluorescence. of matter wave
(5) They can ionise the gas when passed through gas.
Q.14. Explain Rutherford model of atom.
th
 1  Ans. According to Rutherford model of atom
(6) The ionising power is   of that of -particle.
 100  (1) The atom has a tiny positively charged core called
(7) They are more penetrating than -particle. nucleus.
(8) When an -particle is emitted by an atom, its (2) The total positive charge and entire mass of the
atomic number increases by 1 and mass number atom is confined in nucleus.
does not change. (3) Negatively charged electrons revolve in circular
32
e.g. 15 P 32
 01e orbits around the nucleus.
16 S
222 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(4) The necessary force required for the circular Solution:

motion of the electrons is provided by the o
electrostatic attraction between the positively For Lyman series, L= 912 A
charged nucleus and negatively charged electron. Series limit for Lyman series is p = 1 and n = 
(5) As an atom is electrically neutral, the positive 1  1 1 
charge on nucleus is equal to the total negative  = R  2  2 
 p n 
charge of all the orbiting electrons.
(6) As the size of the nucleus is about 1015 m, about 1 1 1 
 = R 2  2
100000 times smaller than the size of atom. Thus L 1  
the atom consists of empty space.
1
Q.15. State and explain drawback of Rutherford  =R
L
model of atom
1
Ans. (i) The atom should be unstable:  L = ... (1)
R
The circular motion of electrons is accelerated Series limit for Paschen series is
motion, and according to electromagnetic theory,
p = 3 and n = 
accelerated charge radiates energy. Therefore the
energy of accelerated electrons should continuously 1  1 1 
= R 2  2
decrease and follow inward spiral path and finally p 3  
fall into the nucleus. Thus no stable atom could
exist. 1 R
=
But experimentally found that atom is most p g
stable. 9
p = ... (2)
(ii) Hydrogen spectrum should be continuous R
spectrum: Divide equation (2) by (1)
According to classical electromagnetic theory, the
9
frequency of electromagnetic wave emitted by the p
revolving electron is equal to the frequency of R
= 1 = 9
L
revolution of electron. If electron spiral inwards,
their angular velocity and hence frequency, would R
increase continuously. Thus they would emit  p = 9L
energy with continuously increasing frequency (or o
continuously decreasing wavelength). i.e. Atom  p = 9 × 912 = 8208 A
should emit continuous spectrum. Similarly series limit for Bracket series
But experimentally found that atom emits line p = 4 and n = 
spectrum.
1  1 1 
Q.16. The energy of an excited hydrogen atom is = R 2  2 
p 4  
3.4 eV. Find the angular momentum of the
electron. 1 R
=
Solution: p 16
16
13.6 eV  p = ... (3)
E =  R
n2
Divide eqnation (3) by (1)
13.6
3.4 =  16
n2
p
13.6 R
= 1 = 16
n2 = =4 L
3.4
R
 n =2
p = 16L
nh o
Angular momentum =
2  p = 16  912 = 14592 A
2  6.63  10 34 Q.18. What is de Broglie wavelength of an electron
=
2  3.142 accelerated through 25000 volt?
= 2.11 1034 J-s Solution: Data:
o V = 25000 volt, = ?
Q.17. The series limit for Lyman series is 912 A .
o
Find the series limit for Paschen series and 12 .27
  = A
Bracket series. V
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 223

12.27 o 13 .6 eV
 = A En =
25000 n2
o
  = 0.07766 A Rch
E2 =
22
Q.19. Find the ratio of diameter of electron in Bohr’s Rch
1st orbit to that in 4th orbit  E2 =
4
Solution:
4E2
 r  n2 R =
ch
r1 n12  4  (3.4  1.6  10 19 )
 = R =
r4 n 42 3  108  6.63  10 34
12 1 4  5.44  10 19
= 2 = = = 1.094  107/m
4 16 19.89  10 26
d1 2r1 1 Q.22. Find the momentum of electron having de
 = = o
d4 2r4 16 Broglie wavelength of 0.5 A .
Q.20. Calculate the change in angular momentum Solution:
of electron when it jumps from 3rd orbit to 1st o
orbit in hydrogen atom.  = 0.5 A = 0.5  1010 m
Solution: h
nh   = p
Angular momentum =
2 h
Change in angular momentum  p =

h 6.63  1034
= (n2  n1) =
2
0.5  1010
h = 1.326  1023 kg m/s
= (3  1)
2
Q.23. Find the wavelength of a proton accelerated
2  6.63  10 34 by a potential difference of 50 V
=
2  3.142 Solution: Data:
= 2.11  1034 J-s e = 1.6 × 1019 C, m = 1.673 × 1027 kg
Q.21. Find the value of Rydberg’s constant if the h = 6.63 × 1034 Js, V = 50 volt
energy of electron in second orbit of hydrogen Wavelength of a proton
atom is – 3.4 eV.
h
Solution: Data:  =
2m eV
h = 6.63 1034 J-s, c = 3  108 m/s
E2 =  3.4 eV =  3.4  1.6  1019 J 6.63  1034
 =
n =2,R =? 2  1.673  10 27  1.6  10 19  50
Energy of electron in nth orbit is  = 0.04 × 1010 m
0
13.6 eV   = 0.04 A
E =
n2

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. State the postulates of Bohr’s for hydrogen Explanation:

atom. Write down necessary equation.
Let an electron of charge –e , mass m revolves
Ans. Postulate 1: The electron in a hydrogen atom with speed v in an orbit of radius r. The charge
revolves in circular orbit around the nucleus. The on nucleus is +e.
necessary centripetal force for circular motion is
Electrostatic force of attraction
provided by electrostatic force of attraction
between the positively charged nucleus and 1 e2
negatively charged electron. F = 4  2 … (1)
0 r
224 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Centripetal force is (2) Only few, about 0.14% scattered by more than 10.
(3) Few were deflected slightly and very few were
mv 2
= … (2) deflected by more than 900.
r
(4) Some -particles scattered by 1800.
Centripetal force = Electrostatic force of attraction
mv 2 1 e2
 = 4  2 ... (3)
r 0 r Gold Screen
foil
Postulates 2: The electron revolves around the Lead bricks
nucleus only in those orbits for which the angular
momentum of the electron is equal to an integral
h 
multiple of . Source of
2
 particles
Explanation: Let an electron is orbiting with
moment of inertia I about its axis of revolution
Detector
v
and  is angular velocity given by  =
r
Fig. Geiger Marsden Experiment
v 
 Angular momentum = I = mr2   Q.5. Explain continuous and characteristic X-ray
r 
Ans.
= mvr
But by 2nd postulate,
K
nh K
Angular momentum =
2
nh Intensity
 mvr =
2
where, n = 1, 2, 3, ... called principle quantum
number and h = Planck’s constamt.
Postulates 3: When an electron jumps from orbit min Wavelength
of higher energy to an orbit of lower energy, it
The nature of the graph shows that the variation
radiates energy in the form of photon. The energy
of intensity for different wavelengths present in
emitted of photon is equal to the difference
the X-rays coming from a Coolidge tube.
between energies of two orbits in which transition
takes place. Continuous X-rays:
Explanation: If En energy of the electron in the Origin of continuous X-rays can be explained from
nth higher orbit. the formula given below.
Ep is the Energy of the electron in the pth lower orbit. From the graph it is observed that there is cut-
off wavelength or threshold wavelength or
Energy radiated when electron jumps from higher
minimum wavelength below which there is no X-
to lower orbit is given by
ray emitted.
= En  Ep
 h = En  Ep ... (3) hc hc
This minimum wavelength is min = =
where,  is the frequency of emitted radiation. E eV
where, V is accelerating voltage.
Q.2. With the help of neat labelled diagram describe
Geiger–Marsden experiment. From above formula it is seen that cut-off
wavelength depends on accelerating voltage. It
Ans. Geiger–Marsden Experiment:
does not depend on material of the cathode.
In this experiment a narrow beam of -particle Intensity of these rays varies gradually.
was incident on a gold foil. The scattered -
These are produced by the target atoms. X–Rays
particles were detected by the detector fixed on
the rotating stand. The detector used had zinc Characteristics X-rays:
sulphide screen and microscope. They observed (i) Figure shows K, k wavelengths for which intensity
that, the number of scattered -particles as a of X–rays is very large. These X–rays are known as
function of scattering angle. characteristics X–rays.
Observation: (ii) Wavelengths of these rays depends on the material
(1) The most of the scattered -particles passed of the cathode and not on the accelerating voltage.
undeviated.
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 225

(iii) These are produced by the transitions of electrons 1 m 2v 2

from higher energy levels to lower energy levels.  E = ... (Rearranging)
2 m
(iv) Wavelengths of characteristic X–rays may be used
to identify the element from which they originate. 1 p2
= ... (p = mv = momentum)
2 m
(v) For a particular material, wavelengths have
definite values. The value of energies are different  p2 = 2m E
for different materials. p = 2mE
Q.6. Write the notes on nuclear fission and nuclear p = ... from (2)
2m eV
fusion.
Sub the above value of p in equation (1),
Ans. (a) Nuclear fission:
The Process of splitting up of heavy nucleus into h
We get,  =
two or more fragments is called nuclear fission. 2m eV
When uranium atom is bombarded with neutrons, 12.27 o
it splits into two separate atoms Barium and Krypton.   = A
The two fragments travel in the opposite direction V
with very high velocity and tremendous energy is This is the wavelength of electron accelerated by
released. The original nucleus has a greater mass potential difference of V volt.
than the sum of masses of two fragments. The mass
defect is converted into energy. Q.8. Define:
235 (i) Isotopes (ii) Isobars (iii) Isotones.
92 U  01n  236
92 U  144
56 Ba  89
36 Kr  301 n
Give one example each
The energy is released in fission, first appears
Ans. (i) Isotopes:
as K.E. which gets converted into heat. Fission
energy is used in nuclear power projects for The nuclei having same number of protons but
generation of electricity. Uncontrolled fission different number of neutrons are called isotopes.
process is used in atom bomb. e.g. Deuterium 21 H and tritium 31 H are the
(b) Nuclear fusion: isotopes of hydrogen. The element gold has 32
isotopes.
When two lighter nuclei are fused to form a heavier
nucleus, the process is called nuclear fusion. As the isotopes have same atomic number (Z)
and electronic structure, they have identical
Large amount of energy is released in this
chemical behaviour and are placed in the same
process. The newly formed nucleus have smaller
location in the periodic table.
mass than the sum of masses of fused nuclei.
The mass defect is converted into energy. (ii) Isobar:
1 1 2 1 The nuclei having same mass number (A) but
1H  1H  1H  1e  0.42 MeV
different atomic numbers are called isobars
2
1H  21H  42 He  24 MeV e.g. 3
and 3
are isobars.
2H 1H
When two deuterons are fused, -particle is (iii) Isotones:
emitted and 24 MeV energy is released. Fusion The nuclei having same number of neutrons
requires very high temperature of about 105 0C. (A  Z) but different atomic numbers (Z) are called
These reaction are called thermo-nuclear isotones
reactions. The energy generated in stars is because
198 197
of nuclear fusion. e.g. 80 Hg
and 79 Au
are isotones
Q.7. Obtain the relation for wavelength of an Q.9. What is mass defect? Define binding energy
electron accelerated by a P.D. of V volt. of the nucleus. Obtain an expression of B.E
Ans. According to de Broglie’s hypothesis, wavelength per nucleon.
associated with moving electron is Ans. Mass defect:
h The difference between the actual mass of the
 = p ... (1) nucleus and the sum of masses of constituent
where, h is Planck’s constant. nucleons is called mass defect.
If an electron of mass m is accelerated by a Mass defect is
potential difference V, the work done on electron m = [Zmp + (A  Z)mn]  M
increases its K.E. where, M = mass of nucleus
Work done E = eV ... (2) Z = atomic number
1 A = mass number (mass of nucleons)
Also, E = mv2 ... (3)
2 A  Z = number of neutrons
226 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

mp = mass of proton Solution: Data:

mn = mass of neutron E2 = 4.3 eV
Binding energy of nucleus: 1
 E  2
The amount of energy required to separate all n
the nucleons from the nucleus is called binding E3 n 22 22 4
energy of nucleus.  = 2 = 2 =
E2 n3 3 9
B.E. of nucleus can be expressed in terms of
mass defect. 4
E3 =   E2
9
B.E. = m  c2 joule
4
where, m is mass defect and ‘c’ is speed of light.  E3  4.3 eV = 1.51 eV
=
9
 B.E. = [Zmp + (A  Z)mn  M] × c2 joule … (1)
This is the total energy (T.E.) in the 3rd orbit.
B.E.per nucleus
The B.E. per nucleon = Since, T.E. = K.E. + P.E.
Mass number
If total energy is (x), then K.E. = x and P.E. = 2x
 Zmp  (A  Z )mn  M  2
 c i.e. K.E. =  (T.E.)
 E =  A
  K.E. =  (1.51 eV)
This is the expression of B.E. per nucleon to  K.E. = +1.51 eV
separate it from the nucleus.
P.E. = 2 (T.E.)
Q.10. Calculate the radius of the first Bohr orbit P.E. = 2(1.51 eV)
from given data. Hence find the radius of the
 P.E. = 3.02 eV
3rd Bohr orbit.
Solution: Data: Q.12. Find the shortest wavelength in Paschen
34 31 series if, longest wavelength in Balmer series
h = 6.63 ×10 J-s, m = 9 × 10 kg, o

2
is 6563 A
C
e = 1.6 × 1019 C, 0 = 8.85 × 1012 Solution:
Nm 2
For longest wavelength in Balmer series,
Radius of nth Bohr orbit is given by, o

 h 2 0  2 B = 6563 A
 
 r n =  me 2  n For longest wavelength in Balmer series
 
p = 2 and n = 3
For first orbit n = 1
1  1 1 
 h 2 0


  = R  p 2  n 2 
r1 =  me 2    
 
1  1 1 
(6.63  10 34 )2  8.82  10 12 = R 2  2 
r1 = B 2 3 
3.14  9  10 31(1.6  10 19 )2
1 1 1
43  95  8  82  10-68  1012 = R4  9
= B  
3  14  9  2  56  10 31  10 38
1 5R
387  64  1080 B
=
36
=
72  34  10 69
36
r1 = 5.358 × 1011 m   = ... (1)
o
5R
r1 = 0. 5358 A For shortest wavelength in Paschen series is
In general p = 3 and n = 
rn = r1n 2
1 1 
1
For 3rd orbit, = R 2  2 
p 3  
= r1 × 3 2
1 R
= 0.5358 × 9 =
o p 9
= 4.822 A
9
p = ... (2)
Q.11. Energy of electron in 2 Bohr orbit is 3.4 eV.
nd
R
Calculate its kinetic energy and potential
energy in 3rd Bohr orbit.
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 227

9 144
p R 5 L 7R
= 36 =  = 9
B 4 S
5R R
5 16
p =  =
4 B 7
5 = 2.286:1
p =  6563
4 Q.14. A monochromatic wavelength is incident on
o
= 8203.7 A a hydrogen atom that lifts it to 3rd orbit from
gro und level. Find the wavelength and
Q.13. Find the ratio of longest to shortest wavelength frequency of incident photon.
in Paschen series. Solution:
Solution: E3 = 1.51 eV, E1 = 13.6 eV
For longest wavelength in Paschen series, (i)  = ?, (ii) v = ?
p = 3 and n = 4 (i) Energy of photon,
1  1 1  h = En  Ep
 = R  p 2  n 2 
   hc
= E3  E1
 1 1  
1
 = R 2  2  hc
L  3 4  = (1.51 eV)  (13.6 eV)

1 1 1  = 12.09 eV
  
 L = R  9 16  = 12.09  1.6 1019 J
1 7R hc
 = 19.344  1019 J
 L = 144 
144 3  108  6.63  10 34
L = ... (1)  =
7R 19.344  10 19
For shortest wavelength in Paschen series,  = 1.028 × 107 m
p = 3 and n =  o
 = 1028 A
1  1 1 
= R 2  2  c
S 3   (ii) Since,  =

1 R 3  108
= =
S 9 1.028  10 7
9   = 2.9176  1015 Hz
S = ... (2)
R

Long Answer Type Questions (5 marks each)

Q.1. Derive an ex pression for total energy of 1 e2
electron in nth Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom.  mv2 =
4 0 r
Hence show that energy of the electron is
inversely proportional to the square of principal K.E. of electron is
quantum number. 1 1 e2
mv2 = … (1)
Also define binding energy and obtain its 2 8 0 r
expression. P.E of an electron in the orbit is
Ans. Consider an electron of mass m revolves in a P.E. = Potential × charge of electron
circular orbit of radius r of around the nucleus in
hydrogen atom with velocity v. 1 e
= 4   r × e)
From Bohr’s 1 postulate,
st 0

Centripetal force = electrostatic force 1 e2

=  … (2)
1 e 2 4 0 r
mv 2
=
r 4 0 r 2
228 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Total energy of electron is Ans. Bohr’s third postulate:

E = K.E. + P.E When an electron jumps from orbit of higher energy
1 e2 1 e2 to an orbit of lower energy, it radiates energy in
= 8   r  4  r the form of photon. The energy of emitted photon
0 0 is equal to the difference between energies of two
1 e2 orbits in which transition is taking place,
 E = ... (3)
8 0 r Suppose that an electron jumps from nth higher
Now radius of nth Bohr orbit is given by, orbit to pth lower orbit.
outer orbit
 h 2 0  (n)
r =   2
2 n
 me 
h = En  Ep
Substitute in equation (3), we get

1 e2 (p)
E =  inner orbit
8  0  h 2 0  2
 n If En is the energy of the electron in the nth higher
 me 2 
  orbit and
me 4 Ep is the energy of the electron in the lower orbit.
E = 
8 02 n 2h 2
me 4
i.e. Energy of electron in nth orbit is En =  and
8 20 n 2h 2
 me 4  1
  me 4
En =   8  h 2   n 2 ... (4) Ep = 
 0  8 20 p 2h 2
Negative sign shows that electron is bound to the Energy radiated when electron jumps from higher
nucleus by the attractive force and hence work to lower orbit is
has to be done in order to remove it from the atom.
Energy radiated = h= En  Ep
 me 4 
  me 4  
As the quantity  8 2 h 2  in equation (4) is  me 4 
 0  =  2 2 2   2 2
8 0 n h 2
 8 0 p h 
constant,
1 me 4  1  1 
 En   h =  2 n2 
n2 8 2 h 2  p
0 
The energy of electron is inversely proportional  1 1 
me 4  2  2
to the square of principal quantum number.  = p
8 20 h 3  n 
Binding energy of electron is defined as the
minimum energy required to make it free from c me 4  1 1   c
  2  2 ...    
the nucleus.

= p n  
8 20 h 3  
  me 4 
B.E. =  T.E. =   
2 2  1 me 4  1 1 
 2  2
 8 0 h n 
2

= p n 
8 20 ch 3  
me 4  1 1 
 B.E. = + 1
2
8 0 n 2h 2 = R  2  2  ... (1)
 p n 
This is the expression of the energy of electron
This is called Bohr’s Formula.
in Bohr orbit.
Q.2. Using expression for energy of electron, me 4
where R = is called Rydberg’s constant.
obt ain the Bohr ’s formu la for hydro gen 8 20 ch 3
spectral lines. By substituting the values of m, e, c, o and hi the
OR value of R is given by,
State Bohr’s third postulate for hydrogen  R = 1.093 × 107 m1
atom. Derive Bohr’s formula for wave number. The quantity,
Obtain expression for largest and shortest 1
wavelength of spectral line in ultraviolet =  is called wave number.

region for hydrogen atom.
 1 1 
  = R  2  2  ... (2)
 p n 
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 229

This gives the number of waves per unit distance. wavelengths simultaneously. Thus hydrogen
For shortest wavelength of spectral line in Lyman spectrum is a line spectrum.
series n =  and p = 1 (i) Lyman series:
Put in equation, (1) This series arise due to transitions of the
electrons from different outer orbits to the first
1 1 1 
 = R  2  2  = R (1  0) inner orbit (p = 1).
  1  
The wavelength for spectral line in Lyman series
1 is given as
 =R

1 1 1 
1 = R 2  2 
  =  1 n 
R
where n = 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, ……….. 
For longest wavelength of spectral line in Lyman
series (Ultraviolet region) This series lies in ultraviolet region of the
spectrum.
n = 2 and p = 1
For shortest wavelength of spectral line in this
1 1 1  series, n =  and p = 1.
 = R 2  2 
 1 2 
For longest wavelength of spectral line in this
1  1 1 series, n = 2 and p = 1.
= R 2   (ii) Balmer series:
 1 4
1 3R 3R This series arise due to transitions of the electrons
=   = from different outer orbits to the second inner
 4 4
orbit (p = 2)
Q.3. Draw a neat labelled energy level diagram and
The wavelength for spectral line in Balmer series
explain the different series of spectral lines
is given as
for hydrogen atom
Ans. Energy level diagram: 1  1 1 
= R  2  2
E = 0 eV  2 n 
n=
where n = 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 ………., 
E5 = 0.54 eV n=5
pfund This series lies in visible region of the
E4 = 0.85 eV n=4 spectrum.
Brackett
E3 = 1.5 eV n=3
For shortest wavelength of spectral line in this
Paschen series, n =  and p = 2.
For longest wavelength of spectral line in this
E2 = 3.4 eV n=2 series, n = 3 and p = 2.
Balmer
The lines corresponding to n = 3, 4, 5, 6, are called
as H, H, H and H lines spectively.
(iii) Paschen series:
This series arise due to transitions of the
electrons from different outer orbits to the third
E1 = 13.6 eV n=1
Lyman inner orbit (p = 3).
Explanation: The origin of spectral lines in The wavelength for spectral line in Paschen series
hydrogen atom can be represented by energy level is given as
diagram.
1  1 1 
(1) Horizontal lines represent energy levels for = R 2  2 
  3 n 
different orbits.
where n = 4, 5, 6 7, 8,………., 
(2) The orbits number are given at the right and the
corresponding energies in eV are given at the left. This series lies in infr ared region of the
spectrum.
(3) The vertical arrow lines show various transitions
of electron from various outer orbit to inner orbits. For shortest wavelength of spectral line in this
series, n =  and p = 3.
A single hydrogen atom can produce one spectral
line at a time. When hydrogen gas is excited, at For longest wavelength of spectral line in this
any instant, different atoms have electrons in series, n = 4 and p = 3.
different energy levels and continuous transitions (iv) Brackett series:
take place from different higher energy levels to This series arise due to transitions of the electrons
different lower energy levels. This gives rise to from different outer orbits to the fourth inner
continuous emission of all series of discrete orbit (p = 4).
230 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

The wavelength for spectral line in bracket series (4) Beyond 100 B.E/A decreases more slowly with
56 Fe
is given as increase in mass number, it becomes minimum
1  1 1  for 238U i.e. 7.6MeV.
= R 2  2  Significance:
  4 n 
where n = 5, 6, 7, 8, ……….. (1) The curve explain the relationship between the
This series lies in near infrared region of the B.E/A and stability of the nuclei.
spectrum. (2) Uranium has relatively low B.E./A hence it is
For shortest wavelength of spectral line in this least stable.To attain stability it breaks up into
series, n =  and p = 4. relatively less mass nuclei. (It undergo fission)
For longest wavelength of spectral line in this (3) Lighter nuclei A < 20 have low B.E./A hence not
series, n = 5 and p = 4. stable, therefore they undergo fusion. To attain
stability they combine into two lighter nuclei to
(v) Pfund series: form a heavier nuclei. The heavier nuclei has
This series arise due to transitions of the greater B.E./A than the lighter nuclei
electrons from different outer orbits to the fifth (4) Iron has maximum B.E./A, hence it is most stable.
inner orbit (p = 5). It does show either fission or fusion.
The wavelength for spectral line inbalmer series (5) The B.E per nucleon is practically constant and
is given as independent of mass number for nuclei, 30 < A  170.
1  1 1  (6) It is low for both light nuclei A < 30 and heavy
= R 2  2  nuclei A > 170. This means that nucleons of atoms
 5 n 
are loosely bound with nucleus.
where n = 6, 7, 8,………..
(7) When the heavy nucleus A = 240 breaks into
This series lies in far infra-red region of the lighter nuclei A = 120, B.E increases i.e. Nucleons
spectrum. get more tightly bound.
Q.4. Usi ng t he c urve for binding energy p er (8) When very light nuclei A < 10, join to form a
nucleon as a function of mass number A, heavier nucleus. B.E. Increases. Nucleons get
write the observation from the curve. more tightly bound.
Explain the constancy of the B.E. in the range (9) In both the cases, there is release of energy
30  A  170. because, the new nuclei formed have less mass
and are more stable.
Ans.
Constancy of the B.E. in the range 30  A 170:
Binding energy per nucleon (MeV/nucleon)

10
56 75
16
31
P 26
Fe 33
As
153
Eu
Constancy of the B.E. in the range 30  A  170 is
O 15 63 209
Bi
8
8 39
K
90
40
Zr 120
Sn
83 a consequence of the fact that the nuclear force
4 19
He F 19 50
2 9 14
N 238
U
is a short range force. It will be under the influence
7 92
6
12
C of some of its neighbour. if the nucleon can have
6
6
Li a maximum of protons neighbours within the
3

4
range of nuclear force, its binding energy would
3
be proportional to P. if we increase A by adding
H
1 nucleons, they will not change the binding energy
2
2
of a nucleons inside. Since most of the nucleons
H
1 in a large nucleus inside it and not on the surface.
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 The change in binding energy per nucleon would
mass number (A)
be small. Hence B.E./A is a constant.
From B.E. curve it is observed that, Q.5. Draw a plot of B.E./A versus mass number
(1) B.E per nucleon is minimum for lighter nuclei 2  A 170. Use this graph to explain the
e.g. for hydrogen it approximately 1.1 MeV. It release of energy in the process of nuclear
increases very sharply and reaches maximum fusion and fission of nuclei.
value for iron. For 100
56 Fe
, (B.E./A) is 8.75 MeV. OR
(2) In the region of smaller mass number B.E./A curve Explain giving necessary reactions, how energy
shows maximum and minimum, maximum is is released during (i) Fission and (ii) Fusion.
associated with even number of nuclei e.g. 42 He ,
12 16
6C
and 8O
and minimum are associated with
6 10 14
odd number of nuclei e.g. 3 Li
, 5B
and 7N

(3) Nuclei with even numbers have B.E. /A more than

corresponding their neighbours.
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 231

Ans. 2
1H  21H  42 He  24 MeV
fission Mass of reactant
10
16 2.014102 + 2.014102 = 4.028204
8O 56
Binding energy per nucleon (MeV)

Fe 120
26 Sn
4
2
He
50
Mass of product = 4.002603
238
8 U
92 Mass defect = 4.028204  4.002603
fission = 0.025601 amu
6 1 amu = 931 MeV
Energy released = 0.025601  931
fusion

4 = 24 MeV
Thus energy is released in fusion process.
3
2
He
2 Q.6. State the law of radioactive decay. Hence
2
1
H derive the expression N = N0e t where symbols
have their usual meanings.
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 What is decay constant?
Number of Nucleons, A (mass number) Define half-life period and obtain its expression.
(a) Nuclear fission: Ans. Decay law:
The phenomenon of splitting up of heavy nucleus The number of nuclei undergoing the decay per
into two or more nuclei is called nuclear fission. unit time is proportional to the number of
In nuclear fission, the sum of the masses of the unchanged nuclei present at that instant.
product is less than the sum of the masses of Let N be the number of nuclei present at any
the reactants. This difference of mass is converted instant t, dN be the number of nuclei that
into energy. Hence the amount of energy is disintegrated in short interval of time dt. Then
released in a nuclear fission. by decay law,
When uranium atom is bombarded with neutrons, dN
it splits into two separates atoms barium and  
dt
krypton. The original nucleus has a greater mass
than the sum of masses of two nuclei. The mass dN
or = N
defect is converted into energy. Hence energy is dt
released in the fission process. where  is called decay constant or disintegration
235 constant.
e.g. 92 U  01n  236
92 U  144
56 Ba  89
36 Kr  301n
Rearranging above equation,
Mass of reactant
dN
= 235.0439 + 1.0087 =   dt
N
= 236.0526 amu
Integrating both sides
Mass of product
dN
= 140.9139 + 91.8973 + 3.0261 N =   dt
= 235.8373 amu
logeN = t + c ... (1)
Mass defect = 236.0526 – 235.8373
where, c is the constant of integration whose
= 0.2153 amu value depends on initial conditions.
1 amu = 931 MeV At t = 0, N = N0 (the initial number of nuclei)
Energy released = 0.2153 931 Substituting in equation (1),
= 200 MeV logeN0 = 0 + c
Thus energy is released in fission process.  c = logeNo
(b) Nuclear fusion: logeN =  t + logeN0
The phenomenon of conversion of two lighter Putting value of c in equation (1), we get
nuclei into a single heavy nucleus is called
logeN  logeN0 =  t
nuclear fusion.
Since the mass of the heavier product nucleus is  N 
loge   = t

less than the sum of the masses of the reactant  N0 
nuclei. This difference of mass is converted into N
energy. Hence the amount of energy is released = et
N0
in a nuclear fusion.
N = N0et ... (2)
e.g. 11 H  11H  21H  01e  0.42 MeV
232 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

This shows that the number of nuclei of given  eT = 2

radioactive substance decreases exponentially T = loge2 = 0.693
with time.
0  693
 T =

N0
Q.7. Describe the Davisson and Germer experiment
Number of to demonstrate the wave nature of electrons.
unchanged Ans. Importance of this experiment:
nuclei
(1) This was the first to prove the wave nature of electron.
N t1/2 (2) It demonstrates the diffraction of electron beam
similar to the diffraction of light waves.
(N-dN) (3) It confirms the wave nature of electron.
Construction:
Experimental arrangement for electron diffraction
O t t+dt time is shown in figure.
Fig. Decay curve H. T.
 +

Decay constant: Accelerating Anode

Electron Beam
dN Filament
From equation, = N Nickel
dt
crystal
We have,  = 50

dN L. T.
 =  dt Electron
N gun Electron
Thus, Decay constant is defined as ratio of the Detector Vacuum
chamber
amount of substance disintegrated per unit time
to the amount of substance present at that time.
We have,
Fig. Experimental setup for diffraction of electron
N = N0e-t
wave
1
Let t = , It consists of an electron gun, nickel crystal and

1 electron detector. Electron gun has tungsten
  
N = N 0e  filament coated with barium oxide for high
emission efficiency.
N = N0e1 Working:
N0 Electrons are accelerated by cylindrical anode kept
N =
e at fixed high positive voltage V. This anode gives
N0 the desired velocity to electrons. The electrons
N = emerge out of anode aperture as fine beam. This
2.718
beam is made to fall on surface of nickel crystal.
 N = 0.37N0
The electron beam get scattered in all direction.
Thus decay constant , is equal to 1/t, can be defined The intensity of scattered electrons in a particular
as reciprocal of time duration t in which the direction is measured by the electron detector,
substance decays to 37% of its original quantity. which can be moved on a circular scale. The
Half-life period: detector is connected to sensitive galvanometer
Half-life period of radioactive substance is defined as whose deflection is directly proportional to
the time in which the half substance is disintegrated. intensity of electrons received by the detector.
The whole set up is enclosed in evacuated
We have, chamber. The intensity of scattered beam is
N = N0et recorded for different scattering angles  and for
N0 different accelerated voltages V.
At t = t ,N =
2
N0
 = N0e-T
2
1
= eT
2
Atoms molecules and Nuclei 233

Glancing angle

54 Volt  = 900  = 650 and
2
o
Incident  = 50 Spacing between the atomic planes for nickel is
electron beam o
d = 0.91 A .
 = 2 × 0.91  sin 65 …….
o
Intensity of scattered = 1.65 A … (2)
electron This is the wavelength of electron wave found
According to Brag’s diffraction formula, for first experimentally.
diffraction maxima, By de Broglie’s relation, the wavelength of electron
= 2d sin  … (1) at accelerating voltage 54 V is given by
where, d is the spacing between the atomic 12.27o 12.27 o o
 = = = 1.67 A ... (3)
planes,  is the wavelength of associated wave, V A 54 A
and  is the glancing angle. This is the excellent agreement between the
For scattering angle = 500, experimental and theoretical value of wavelength
of electron. This confirms the wave nature of
particle electron.

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
N = Noe–t.

Problems:
(1) Find the frequency of revolution of an electron in Bohr’s 2 nd orbit; if the radius and speed of electron in that
orbit is 2.14 × 10–10 m and 1.09 × 106 m/s respectively. [ = 3.142] (March 2017)
(2) Thorium 90Th232 is disintegrated into lead 82Pb200. Find the number of a and b particles emitted in disintegration.
(July 2017)
(3) Find the ratio of longest wavelength in Paschen series to shortest wavelength in Balmer series.
o
(4) The electron in the hydrogen atom is moving with a speed of 2.3 × 10 6 m/s in an orbit of radius 0.53 A .
Calculate the period of revolution of electron. [ = 3.142] (March 2018)
(5) Calculate the de-Broglie wavelength of an electron moving with one fifth of the speed of light. Neglect relativistic
effects. (h = 6.63 × 1034 J.s., c = 3 × 108 m/s, mass of electron = 9 × 1031 kg) (March 2018)


234 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
19
Syllabus
Energy bands in Solids, Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductors, P-type and N-type Semiconductors, P-N junction Diode,
I-V characteristics in Forward and Reverse bias, Rectifiers, Zener diode as a Voltage regulator, Photodiode, Solar cell,
Light emitting diode LED, Transistor action and its Characteristics, Transistor as an amplifier (CE mode), Transistor as
a Switch, Oscillators, Logic gates (OR, AND, NOT, NAND, NOR)

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. Which logic gate corresponds to the truth table given 5. In a semiconductor, donor impurity is
below? (a) antimony (b) indium
INPUTS OUTPUT (c) aluminium (d) boron
A B Y 6. The colour of light emitted by LED depends upon
0 0 1 (a) its forward bias
0 1 0 (b) its revese bias
(c) the band gap of the material used.
1 0 0
(d) its size
1 1 0
(a) AND (b) NOR 7. In the circuit shown below, current passing through
the diode is
(c) OR (d) NAND
2. The output of NOR gate is high when A B
(a) all inputs are high 5V 50  0V
(b) all inputs are low (a) 0.01 A (b) 0.02 A (c) 0 (d) 0.1 A
(c) only one of its inputs is high
8. In case of a transistor, to obtain sustained oscillations,
(d) only one of its input is low the product of voltage gain without feedback,
3. The output of NAND gate is low when feedback factor should be
(a) all inputs are high (a) zero (b) less than 1
(b) all inputs are low (c) one (d) infinity
(c) only one of its inputs is high 9. The solar cell converts light energy into
(d) only one of its input is low (a) sound energy (b) mechanical energy
4. In a semiconductor, acceptor impurity is (c) electrical energy (d) heat energy
(a) antimony (b) indium 10. Gallium – Arsenide LED emits
(c) phosphorous (d) arsenic (a) red light (b) yellow light
(c) green light (d) infrared

ANSWERS
(1) - (b), (2) - (b), (3) - (a), (4) - (b), (5) - (a), (6) - (c), (7) - (c), (8) - (c), (9) - (c), (10) - (d)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. How is photodiode fabricated? Q.3. Draw V-I characteristics of solar cell
Ans. Photodiode is fabricated with a transparent window Ans.
to allow light to fall on the junction of the diode. Y

Q.2. Why is Zener diode fabricated by heavily doping

both p-side and n-sides of the junction?
Ans. Due to heavy doping, the depletion layer becomes V oc (Open circuit voltage)
very thin and electric field, across the junction O X
V
becomes very high even for a small reverse bias Isc
voltage.
Short circuit current

(234)
Semiconductors 235

Q.4. In which region Zener diode is operated?
Ans. In breakdown region zener diode is operated.
Q.5. Name the device which is used as voltage
regulator.
Ans. Zener diode is used as voltage regulator.
Q.6. Name different regions of transistor
Ans. Emitter, base and collector are the different
regions of transistor.
Q.7. State two application of LED
Ans. (i) LEDs are used in traffic control light system.
(ii) They are used as brake indicators in bikes and
vehicles.
Q.8. In which region a transistor operated as a
closed switch.
Ans. In saturation region transistor operated as a
closed switch.
Q.9. In which region a transistor operated as an
open switch.
Ans. In cut-off region transistor operated as an open
switch.
Q.10. In which region a transistor operated as an
amplifier
Ans. In active region transistor operated as an amplifier.
Q.11. Name the electronic device which generates
a.c. signal from the d.c. source
Ans. Oscillators generates a.c. signal from d.c. signal.
Q.12. State the condition required for oscillator
Ans. Positive feed back
Q.13. State the condition to obtain sustained
oscillation.
Ans. The product of voltage gain without feedback and
feedback factor should be one.
Q.14. How should a transistor be biased in order to
work as an amplifier?
Ans. The emitter-base junction must be forward biased
while the collector-base junction is reserve baised.
Q.15. What is the resist ivi ty o f an int rinsic
semiconductor at absolute zero temperature?
Ans. At absolute zero temperature, the resistivity of
an intrinsic semiconductor is infinite.
Q.16. What is the charge on an n-type semiconductor?
Ans. The net charge in an extrinsic semiconductor is
zero.
Q.17. How many rows are there in the truth table of
a three input gate?
Ans. Eight.
As each of the three inputs take 2 values 1 or 0.
Hence, the number of rows in the truth table of
3-input gate is 8.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic Ans.
semiconductors.
n-type semiconductor p-type semiconductor
Ans.
(i) When pentavalent (i) When trivalent impurity
Intrinsic semiconductor Extrinsic semiconductor impurity is added to is added to pure
(i) A pure semiconductor (i) An intrinsic pure semiconductor, n- semiconductor, p-type
is called an intrinsic semiconductor with type semiconductor is semiconductor is
semiconductor. either pentavalent or formed. formed.
trivalent impurity is (ii) Electric conductivity is (ii) Electric conductivity is
called extrinsic due to negatively charged due to positively charged
semiconductor. electrons. holes
(ii) Number of holes and (ii) They are not equal in (iii) Impurity atoms called (iii) Impurity atoms called
electrons are equal in extrinsic semiconductor. donor impurity. accepter impurity.
intrinsic semiconductor. (iv) Electrons are majority (iv) Holes are majority
(iii) Electric current flows (iii) Electric current in p- charge carriers charge carriers
due to both holes and type due to majority
Q.3. Define -
electrons. charge carries holes,
and n- type it is due to (i) Depletion layer (ii) Potential barrier
electrons which are Ans. (i) Depletion layer: The region near junction of
majority charge carriers. p-n junction diode is depleted of free charges,
(iv) Conductivity increases (iv) Conductivity increase is called depletion layer
with increase in with doping impurity. (ii) Potential barrier: The potential difference
temperature. across the depletion layer of p-n junction
which opposes the diffusion of electrons and
Q.2. Di stin guish betwee n n-type and p-t yp e holes (majority charge carriers) across the
semiconductors. junction is called barrier potential.
236 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.4. Define : VCC – collector base bias

(i) Energy band (ii) Band gap RL – load resistance
Ans. (i) Energy band: For a given solid, closely spaced V0 – output voltage
energy levels of all the electrons in a IE – emitter current
particular orbit is called energy band for that IC – Collector current
orbit. IB – base current
(ii) Band gap: The separation between conduction
band and valence band is called band gap. Q.9. Draw a neat circuit diagram of full wave
rectifier using semiconductor diode.
Q.5. State any four advantages of semiconductor Ans. Diagram:
devices. D1 I
A M
Ans. (1) Semiconductor devices are very small in size +
and light in weight. A.C V 0 = IR L
Input C
(2) They do not have heating element and hence 
230 V N
low power consumption. 50 Hz D2
(3) They can operate on low voltage.
B
(4) They have high speed operation.
Labellings:
Q.7. State the principle and two uses of solar cell. D1 and D2 – P-N junction diodes
Ans. Solar cell, which is also known as a photovoltaic V0 – Output D.C. voltage
cell, converts light energy into electrical energy.
RL – Load resistance
A solar cell is basically a p-n junction diode which
generates e.m.f when solar radiation falls on the AB – Secondary coil
p-n junction. It works on the same principle as C – Centre tap of the transformer
the photodiode except that no external bias Q.10. Draw the logical symbol of NAND gate give its
(voltage) is applied. truth table.
Principle: Ans. Symbol for NAND gate:
When light falls on the junction, electron- hole
A
pairs are generated near the junction due to
Y=A.B
absorption of photons. Reverse current increases B
with increases in intensity of light and vice versa.
Uses: Truth table for NAND gate:
(1) They are used in communication stations, INPUTS OUTPUT
mobile military operations. A B Y = A.B
(2) In hand-held calculators, watches, portable 0 0 1
T.V. sets.
0 1 1
Q.8. Draw labelled circu it diagr am for NPN 1 0 1
transistor as an amplifier in common emitter
mode. 1 1 0
Ans. Diagram: Q.11. What are acceptor and donor impurity?
IC Ans. (a) Acceptor impurity: when pure Si or Ge is
doped with trivalent impurity like indium, p-type
semiconductor is formed. Three electrons of
C impurity atoms form three cobalent bonds with
IB
B
Amplified
three neighbouring Si atoms. Fourth covalent bond
input
RL output remains vacunt. This vacuncy is called hole. The
signal E Voltage impurity atom accepts an electron from the
Vi (V0 = IB.RL) neighbouring atoms and therefore trivalent
IE impurity is called acceptor impurity.
+  (b) Donor impurity:
 +
VBB VCC
When pure Si or Ge is doped with pentavalent
impurity like phosphorous, n-type semiconductor
Fig. Circuit diagram for C.E. transistor amplifier
is formed. Four electrons of impurity atoms form
Labellings: four covbalent bonds with neighbouring Si atoms.
Fifth electron remains free. Therefore every
Vi – input signal
pentavalent impurity atom donates one electron
VBB – emitter base bias for conduction, hence it is called donor impurity.
Semiconductors 237

Q.12. Draw neat labelled diagram of transistor Notations:

characteristics in C.E. mode. VBB - emitter base bias
Ans. Diagram: VBE - base-emitter voltage
IC
VCC - collector base bias
IB VCE - collector emitter voltage
C mA
+ B + IE - emitter current
VBB +
Rh +  V CE
VCC
 A E I Rh  I C - Collector current
VBE + E

 I B - base current

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Explain the formation of energy band diagram completely filled while the conduction band is
in case of conductor and semiconductor and empty. Hence no electrons are available for
insulators. conduction. For this reason the electrical
Ans. (i) Conductors: conductivity of insulators is extremely small.
The energy band diagram for a metal may be in (1011 to 1019 S/m)
one of the two forms. Conduction
Valence band may be partially empty and conduction band
band may be partially filled. Sometimes the Electron
conduction band and valence band are overlapped. Eg > 3 eV
energy
In both the cases there are a large number of
electrons are available for conduction. Such materials Valence
have very large conductivity (102  108S/m). energy band
band gap for conductors is nearly zero (Eg = 0) Fig. (c) Energy band diagram for an insulator.
Electron
energy Q.2. Draw a diagram of energy band gap of conductors,
C.B insulators and semiconductors. On the basis of
energy band gap, write any two distinguishing
features between them.
V.B
Ans.
Electron
Fig. (a) Energy band diagram for conductor energy
(ii) Semiconductors: C.B
In the case of semiconductors, the conduction band
and valence band are separated by a small band V.B
gap energy. The energy band gap is less than 3 eV.
(Eg is nearly 1 eV). The valence band is filled and
the conduction band is nearly empty. Conduction Fig. (a) Energy band diagram for conductor.
band has very small number of electrons available
for conduction. Thus the conductivity of Conduction
band
semiconductors is very small that lies between the Electron Eg < 3 eV
conductors and insulators (104 to 106 S/m) energy
Valence
Conduction band
band Fig. (b) Energy band diagram for semiconductor
Electron Eg < 3 eV
energy
Valence Conduction
band band

FIg. (b) Energy band diagram for semiconductor. Electron

Eg > 3 eV
energy
(iii) Insulators:
In the case of insulators, the conduction and Valence
valence bands are separated by very large energy band
band gap (>3 eV to 15 eV). The valence band is Fig. (c) Energy band diagram for insulator.
238
(1) In conductors, the valence band and conduction
bands overlap, while in insulators they are
separated by a very large energy gap (Eg > 3eV)
and in semiconductors they are separated by a
small energy gap less than 3 eV or (Eg is nearly
equal to 1 eV).
(2) The conduction band of a conductor has a large
number of electrons available for conduction.
Conduction band may be partially filled. The
conduction band of insulators is empty has no
conduction electrons, while the conduction band
of semiconductors is nearly empty has a very
small number of conduction electrons.
Q.3. Explain the behaviour of an intrinsic (pure)
semiconductor at absolute zero temperature
and at room temperature.
Ans. (a) At absolute zero temperature:
Pure silicon, germanium are example of intrinsic
semiconductor. Si atom has 4 valence electrons.
Every Si atom shares its 4 valence electrons with
its four neighbouring atoms. Thus all atoms
completes their octet. These shared electrons
pairs form covalent bound. At absolute zero
temperature, valence band is completely filled and
conduction band is empty. No electrons is
available for conduction and Si behave as insulator
at absolute zero temperature.
(b) At room temperature:
At room temperature, few covalent bonds are
broken because of thermal energy, and valence
electrons are raised to conduction band. The
departure of electron from valence band to
conduction band creates vacancy in bond. This is
called hole and it behaves as if it has positive
charge. Thus every broken bond creates electron
– hole pair. Thus, intrinsic semiconductor has
equal number of free electrons and holes.
When potential difference is applied across
semiconductor, these electrons and holes
contribute to current but the current in intrinsic
semiconductor is very small for any practical
application. Fig shows the energy band gap diagram
for an intrinsic semiconductor at room temperature.
Conduction
band
Electron
energy
Valence
band
 - Holes
 - Electrons
Q.4. Explain the structure of n-type semiconductor
and draw energy band diagram of it.
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
Ans. (a) Structure of n-Type semiconductor:
Si Si Si
Free
electron
Si As Si
Si Si Si
(b) Energy band-diagram of n-type semiconductor:
Conduction band
Energy
Valence band
Explanation:
(i) When Si or Ge is doped with pentavalent atom
such as arsenic (As), antimony Sb, phosphorous
P, n-type semiconductor is formed.
(ii) Pentavalent atom has 5 valence electrons in its
outermost orbit. When crystal structure is
formed, every pentavalent impurity atom forms 4
covalent bonds with 4 neighbouring Si atoms.
(iii) The fifth electron cannot find place in the covalent
bond. Hence this extra electron acts as free
electron. This electron is available for conduction.
Since every pentavalent impurity atom donates
one electron for conduction, therefore impurity
atom is called donor impurity.
(iv) As this semiconductor has large numbers of
electrons in conduction band and the conductivity
is due to negatively charged electrons it is called
n- type semiconductor.
(v) In this type of conductor few electrons and holes
are produced due to thermal energy. Thus it has
large number of free electrons. Therefore, in n-
type semiconductor, electrons are majority charge
carrier and holes are minority charge carriers.
Q.5. Explain the structure of p-type semiconductor
and draw energy band diagram of it.
Ans. (i) When Si or Ge is doped with trivalent atom
such as indium (In), boron B, aluminium Al, p-
type semiconductor is formed.
(ii) Trivalent atom has 3 valence electrons in its
outermost orbit. When crystal structure is
formed, every trivalent impurity atom forms 3
covalent bonds with 3 neighbouring Si atoms.
Semiconductors 239

(iii) The fourth covalent bond is empty. This empty
covalent bond is called vacancy. This vacancy is
called hole. It has tendency to accept electron from
neighbouring covalent bond. For this reason
trivalent impurity is called acceptor impurity.
(iv) At room temperature, an electron from neighbouring
atom jump into the hole. This hole disappears
and new hole is created at the position of
displaced electron. That is, this hole can move
and contribute to current. As this semiconductor
has large number of holes and conductivity is due
to positively charged holes, so it is called p-type
semiconductor.
Si Si Si
Si In Si
charges electrons and holes disappear from the
region near the junction. Thus due to diffusion of
electrons from n–region into p-region and holes
from p-region into n-region, a layer of positive ions
on n-side and negative ions on p-side near the
junction is formed is called the depletion layer.
or, The region near the junction is depleted of
free charges, hence it is called depletion region
or depletion layer.
The width of depletion layer ranges from 0.5 m
to 1 m. The loss of electrons from n-region and
the gain of electrons by the p-region cause a
difference of potential across the junction. The
n-side of the depletion region is at higher potential
than the p-side. This potential difference tends
to prevent further diffusion of electrons and holes
across the junction is called as barrier
potential.value of barrier potential is 0.3V foe Ge
diode and 0.7V for Si diode.
0.7 V barrier potential
 +

+ + + +   + +    
Hole    
+ + + +   + +
   
Si Si Si + + + +   + +
   
+ + + +   + +    
P N
Depletion Layer
 free electrons  negative ions
Fig. structure of p-type semiconductor + hole + positive ions
Fig. Unbiased p-n junction diode
Energy band diagram for p-type :
Symbol of p-n junction diode:
P N
Conduction band
Anode Cathode
Energy

Valence band Q.7. Explain working of p-n junction diode as

forward and reverse biased. Draw the V-I
characteristics of p-n junction diode.
In this type of conductor few electrons and holes Ans. (a) p-n junction diode as forward biased:
are produced due to thermal energy. Thus it has Holes Electrons
large number of holes. Therefore in p-type
semiconductor, holes are majority charge carrier + + +  +  
+ +  +  

and electrons are minority charge carriers. + + +  
+ + +  + 
 
+ +  
+ + +  + 
 
Q.6. What is p-n junction diode? Explain with + +  +  
I + + +  

diagram how a depletion layer and potential I
P N
barrier are formed in a junction. +  electron flow
Ans. p-n junction diode: V
When half of a Si crystal is doped with trivalent When positive terminal of the battery is
impurity and half with pentavalent impurity, we connected to p-side and negative terminal of
get p-n junction diode. The junction between p battery is connected to n-side, the diode is said
and n type of semiconductor is called p-n junction. to be forward biased. When forward biased,
Formation of p-n junction: electrons from n-side and holes from p-side are
When junction is formed, electrons from n-side pushed towards the junction. The depletion layer
diffuse across junction and recombine with holes width and barrier potential decreases with
on p-side. When electrons leave n-region, create forward bias. When forward bias becomes equal
+ve ion in n–region and on recombining with the to the barrier potential, large number of electrons
holes create –ve ion in the p-region. The free and holes cross the junction. They recombine and
240 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

large current flows through the diode. Thus, (unidirectional ), which produces d.c. voltage with
forward bias, p-n junction act as closed switch point M positive w.r.t. point N. Since current flows
and conducts heavily. through RL only for half cycle of the a.c. applied
(b) p-n junction diode as reverse biased: voltage, it is called half wave rectifier. [Fig. (b)]
Holes Electrons The output voltage is unidirectional, pulsating
and intermittent.
+ +    + + +   +V
+ +    + + +  
+ +  
+ +    + + +   a.c. input
+ +   voltage 0
+ +    + + +   time
+ +   (V in) t
+ +    + + +  
P N
V
 +
V +V
When positive terminal of the battery is connected d.c. output
to n-side and negative terminal of battery is voltage 0 time
t
connected to p-side, the diode is said to be reverse (V0 )
biased. When reverse biased, electrons from n-
side and holes from p-side move away from the V
junction. The depletion layer width and barrier Fig. (b) Input-output wave-form.
potential increases with reverse bias. As there
is no crossing of majority carriers across the Q.9. With a neat circuit diagram, explain working
junction, there is no current through reverse of p-n junction diode as a full wave rectifier.
biased diode. Very small current flows because Draw necessary graph.
of thermally generated minority carriers in Ans. This rectifier requires center tapped secondary
depletion region. Thus the reverse biased diode transformer. Fig.(a) shows circuit diagram for full
works as an open switch. wave rectifier. Two diodes are connected so that
Q.8. What is rectifier? With the help of neat RL is connected between common cathode M and
diagram explain the working of half wave centre tap of secondary.
rectifier using semiconductor diode Draw During positive half cycle of a.c. input, point A is
input and out wave–form. positive w.r.t. point C and point B is –ve w.r.t. C.
Ans. Rectifiers: The device which converts a.c. voltage Therefore the diode D1is forward biased and diode
into d.c. voltage is called rectifier. D2is reverese biased. The current flows through
diode D1, RL from M to Nthis current produces
Half wave rectifier:
d.c. voltage across load RL .
The following fig. (a) shows the circuit diagram
During negative falf cycle of a.c. input, point B is
for half wave rectifier.
positive w.r.t. point C. and point A is –ve w.r.t. C.
D Id
A +M Therefore the diode D2 is forward biased and diode
D1 is reverese biased. The current flows through
diode D2, RL and upper half windings (AC)
a.c. input RL d.c. output D1
A Id +M
230 V, 50Hz V0 = Id × RL

B N
a.c. input C RL d.c. output
Fig. (a) Half wave rectifier 230 V, 50Hz V0 = Id × RL

During positive half cycle of the a.c. input, the

point A becomes +ve with respect to point B, and
diode becomes forward biased. When forward B
D2 N
voltage crosses barrier voltage, the diode works Fig. (a) Circuit diagram for full wave rectifier
as closed switch and large current flows through
RL. From point M to N. This current produces D.C.
voltage across the load resistance RL.
During negative half cycle of a.c. input, the point
A becomes ve with respect to point B, and diode
becomes reverse biased. The diode works as an
open switch, and no current flows through RL and
no D.C. voltage is developed across it. that is
current always flows from point M to N
Semiconductors 241

+V Vi = (IL + IZ) RS + VO ... (1)

a.c. input (i) When the input voltage Vi is increased, the current
voltage 0 through R s and Zener diode increases. This
(V in) t
increases the voltage drop across the series
resistance Rs without any change in the voltage
V across the Zener diode. This is because in
breakdown region Zener voltage remains constant
+V even though the current through the Zener diode
changes.
d.c. output
voltage 0 (ii) If the input voltage is decreased, the current
t
(V0 ) through R s and Zener diode decreases. The
voltage drop across R sdecreases without any
V change in the voltage drop across the Zener diode
Fig. (b) Input and output waveforms for full wave (iii) If resistance R L is decreased, I L incre ases
rectifier therefore Zener current IZ decreases, but voltage
This current produces d.c. voltage across load RL. across Zener diode remains constant.
Thus for both half cycle current flows through RL Thus any increase or decrease in the input
from M to N ( unidirectional). This current produces voltage results in increase or decrease of the
uniduirectional, pulsating and continuous voltage voltage drop across RS without any change in the
across RL. Since the current flows through RL for voltage across the Zener diode. Thus Zener diode
full cycle of the a.c. input applied voltage, therefore acts as a voltage regulator.
rectifier is called full wave rectifier. Output

I F (mA)
waveform is shown in Fig. (b)
Q.10. What is zener diode? Which property of zener
VZ VF(V)
diode is used as voltage regulator? Draw its
I.V charateristics. State its one limitation V O +V
Ans. Zener diode:

A properly doped diode, which works in reverse
breakdown regeion, is called as zener diode
When zener diode is operated in reverse breakdown
region, voltage across it remains constant even
if current through it changes by large amount.
This proprty of zener diode is used as a voltage
regulator.
Circuit diagram for zener as a voltage regulator
is shown in fig. (a).
IZ (mA)
Fig. (b) I-V characteristics of zener diode
Limitation: The limitation on this regulator is
that the current through zener diode should never
exceed the IZ value, beyond which zener diode
gets damaged due to heating.

I RS R IL Q.11. With the help of a neat circuit diagram, explain

+ the working of a photodiode. State its any two
VS Regulated uses.
IZ output
Unregulated Ans. Photodiode: It is a reverse biased special p-n
input (Vi) VZ RL V0 = VZ
junction diode having transparent window in which
from rectifier)
reverse current varies linearly with intersity of Light.
Principle: Its working is based on photovoltaic
 effect. i.e. photoelectric effect.
Fig. (a) Zener diode as voltage regulator
Construction: A reverse biased p-n junction is
Unregulated d.c. voltage is connected to the zener enclosed in a transparent envelope. Light is
diode through a series resistance Rs such that allowed to incident on the transparent surface
the zener diode is reverse biased. The load facing the diode. All other faces of the envelope
resistance. RL is connected parallel to zener diode. may be enclosed in a metallic case.
Input voltage = Voltage drop across the series Symbol of photodiode:
resistance + Voltage across
the Zener diode
Vi = VS + VZ
Vi = ISRS + VZ
Vi = (IL + IZ )RS + VZ Anode Cathode
p n
As diode and load resistance are parallel
V O = V Z = I L RL
242
Working:
When light whose photon energy (h) greater than
band gap energy (Eg) of semiconductor is incident
on the photodiode, additional electron-hole pairs
are formed near the depletion region of the diode.
These electrons and holes are separated before
they combine by the electric field across the
junction. The electric field makes electrons to
diffuse through junction to reach n-region and
holes are diffused through the junction to reach
p-region. Hence an emf is developed across the
junction. When external resistane RL is connected
across photodiode, current flows through diode.
The electron-hole pairs formed are proportional
to the intensity of the incident light or the number
of incident photons. Thus an electric current is
proportional to the intensity of light.
Reverse voltage
Intensity (I1)
Photo
I2 diode
I2 > I1
current
(A)
Light with h > Eg
reflecting
coating
P-type N-type
I p-type
(A) RL
 +
Fig. Circuit for photodiode
Uses of photodiode:
(1) Photodiodes are used to detect optical signal.
(2) They are used as counting device.
(3) They also used as sensor in remote controlled
receivers.
Q.12. What is Solar cell? State the p rinc ip le.
Describe its construction and working.
Ans. Solar cell: A special p-n junction diode which
converts solar energy (sun light) into electrical
energy is callsd as solar cell or photo-voltaic cell.
Principle:
When light falls on the junction, electron- hole
pairs are generated near the junction due to
absorption of photons. Reverse current increases
with increases in intensity of light and vice versa.
Construction:
In simplest form, it uses n-type semiconductor
substrate, on its top a thin layer of p-type layer
is formed. Metallic contacts are formed on both
the layers for external connection. Top surface
is coated with ant reflecting material to increase
UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
absorption of light energy. Finally it is covered
with thin protecting glass. Silicon (ES  1.1 eV),
(Eg = 1.04 eV) GaAs (Es = 1.43 eV) are used for
making solar cells.
Symbol of solar cell
+ 
Working:
The light falls on the p-n junction, if the energy
of photon is greater than the energy gap of the
semiconductor (h > Eg), the electron – hole pairs
are generated due to the absorption of photons.
These electron- hole pairs are separated due to
electric field of the depletion region (barrier
voltage). Electrons are pushed to the n-side and
holes to p-side. The electrons reaching the n-
side are collected by the front contact and holes
reaching the p-side are collected by back contact.
This gives rise to open circuit voltage V 0.
diagram:
Solar energy or light energy
of h > Es
Anti-
n-type
Junction RL
Nickel plated contact
If p-n junction diode is open circuited, when an
external resistancs (P2) is connected across the
junction diode, electric current flows through the
circuit. The electric current in the circuit increases
with the increase in the intersity of sunlight.
I-V characteristics:
The I-V characteristics of solar cell is drawn in
the fourth quadrant of the coordinate axes. This
is because a solar cell does not draw current but
supplies the current to the load resistance.
I
(Open circuit voltage)
Vac
V
Isc
Short circuit current
ISC is short-circuited current when load resistance
RL is zero. (Shorted) VOC is open circuit voltage
when RL is open (infinity).
Semiconductors 243

Uses:
Energy
(1) They are used in communication stations, mobile P
military operations. n
(2) In hand- held calculators, watches, portable t.v. CB
sets.
Q.13. Describe construction and working of light
Light (hv = Eg)
emitting diode (L.E.D.). State any two uses.
Ans. L.E.D. (light emitting diode): It is a diode that
VB
emits visible light when connected in forward
biased.
Construction: It converts electrical energy into
light energy. L.E.D. are not made from silicon or Fig. Energy band diagram for forward biased LED
germanium but are made by using elements like
gallium, phosphorus and arsenic. By varying Symbol of LED:
quantities of these elements., it is possible to
produce light different wavelengths with colours
like, red, green, yellow and blue. p n

The colour of emitted light depends upon band

gap of material used. Therefore different
compound semiconductors are used to get LED’s Uses of LED:
of different colours. (1) LED are used in traffic control light system.
e.g. Gallium-Arsenide LED (Eg = 1.4 eV) emits (2) They are used in brakes indicators in bikes and
infrared, Ga-As – P LED emits red and yellow, vehicle.
Ga–P (Eg = 1.9 eV) LED emit red–green light.
(3) It also used in seven segment display
Working:
Q.14. What is a transistor? Explain construction of
When a p-n junction diode is forward biased, the
transistor. Draw symbols of n-p-n and p-n-p
electrons from n-region cross the junction and
transistors
recombine with the holes in p-region. This is
equivalent to the jum pins of electrons from Ans. Transistor: Transistor is semiconductor device
higher energy state (i. e. conduction band) to lower having three doped regions and two junctions.
energy state (i.e. valence band). Hence energy is the three doped regions are emitter, base and
released in the process of recombination of collector.
electron-hole in the from of visible Light. There are two types of junction transistor:
The energy of the photon of visible light is given by (1) n-p-n transistor:
h = Es When a thin layer of p-type semiconductor is
hc sandwitched between two thick layers of n-type
hc semiconductor, we set a n-p-n transistors.
 Es  E .. (1)
 s
p n n
where Es is the energy gap between the conduction n n E C
and valence band C
is the wavelength of the emitted light E
B
From eq (1), the colour of emitted light
n p
(wavelength) depends on band gap of material
used. E = emitter, B = base, B
C = collector Symbol
Therefore different compound semiconductors are
used to get leds of different colours.e.g. Gallium- (2) p-n-p transistor:
Arsenide LED emits infrared, Ga-As – P LED emits When a thin layer of n-type semiconductor is
red and yellow, Ga–P LED emit red–green light. sandwitched between two thick layers of p-type
The LED current increases with increases with semiconductors, we set a p-n-p transistor.
increase in voltage and intensity of light emitted p
p p
increases. n p E C
C
E
B
n

E = Emitter, B = Base, B
C = Collector Symbol
244 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(i) Arrow in the symbol of transistor represents the Ans. Alpha current gain (dc):
directron of conventional current. It is defined as ratio of collector current to emitter
(ii) A transister has three terminals, emitter, base current
and collector. IC
 d.c = I ... (1)
(a) Emitter: one side of a transistor which is of E
moderate size but heavily doped is called as Beta current gain  dc):
emitter. It supplies majority charge carriers It is defined as ratio of collector current to base
to thebase. current
(b) Base: The middle region of a transister which IC
 dc = I ... (2)
is very thin and lightly doped is called base. B

(c) Collector: The other side of transistor which Relation between dc and  dc
is slightly less than the emitter but having For transistor,
thickness slightly more that that of emitter
IE = IB + I C
is called collector. The collector collects the
majority charge carriers. Dividing by IC throughout
IE IB
(iii) The junction between emitter and base is called
emitter-base junction, while the junction I C = IC + 1
between the collector and base is called collector- 1 1
base junction.
I C = I C +1
(iv) The emitter base junction is always forward IE IB
biased, where as the collector-base junction is
reverse biased. 1 1
Q.15. Explain transistor action of n-p-n transistor. d .c . = d .c . +1 ... from (1) and (2)

Ans. Action of n-p-n transistor : dc

d.c = 1   and
The emitter-base junction of n-p-n transistor is dc

forward biased whereas the collector-base dc

junction is reversed biased as shown in fig. d.c = 1  
dc
n p n This is the relation between d.c and d.c.
For any transistor,
d.c ranges from 50-900 and d.c ranges from 0.92
to 0.98.

IE IC
Q.17. Draw a neat labelled circuit diagram for n-p-n
transistor as an amplifier in common emitter
IB mode and explain its working.
 +  +
Ans. Amplifier: it is a device, which increases the
V BB V CC strength of weak input signal. It magnifies
(amplifies) the voltage or current level of weak signal.
When emitter-base junction is forward biased Fig. shows the common emitter n-p-n transistor
electrons in the emitter are repelled (majority as an amplifier circuit. Emitter-base junction is
carriers) forward biased and collector-base junction is
reverse biased. The voltage source VBB and VCC
The negative terminal of the battery towards the
provides the necessary bias. The input signal Vi
base. The barrier potential of emitter-base
which is to be amplified, is connected between
junction decreases and the electron enters the base and emitter. The amplified voltage gets
base. About 5% of these electrons combine with developed across the load resistance RL.
the holes in the base region resulting in small
IC
base current (IB). The remaining electrons (95%)
enter the collector region because they are
attracted towards the positive terminal of battery C
(V CC ), for each electron entering the positive IB
B
terminal of the battery (VCC), an electron from the Amplified
input output
negative terminal of the battery (VBB) enters the RL
signal E Voltage
emitter region. Thus continuous flow of electons
from emitter to collector throuh the base begins Vi (V0 = IB.RL)
IE
For transistor,
+ 
IE = IB + IC  +
VBB VCC
Q.16. What are dc and dc parameters for a transistor?
Obtain a relation between them Fig. Circuit diagram for C.E. transistor amplifier
Semiconductors
When input signal varies slightly, the base
current varies which produces large change in
collector. When this collector current flows
through load resistance R L , we get amplified
voltage across RL.
Vo = Ic.RL
=IB .RL
We know that  is current gain, which is always
greater than 50. Thus, input voltage is amplified.
Vo
Voltage gain = V
i
Q.18. Explain the working of transistor as a switch
Ans. A transistor can be used as a switch by driving it
between cut off region and saturated region. This
is illustrated as follows
By Kirchhoff’s law
VCC = ICRL + VCE
VCE = VCC – ICRL
(i) When the base input voltage is low
i.e. Vi = 0 or Vi < 0.7 V
The transistor is in cut–off region and base
current is zero. Collector current is zero. Hence
no current flows through collector and load
resistance RL. As a result no voltage drop across
RL and the output voltage is ideally VCC
i.e. Vi = 0, IB = 0 hence IC = 0
VCE = VCC (source voltage)
Vo = VCC (high output voltage)
This condition is similar to open switch (OFF
state).
+ VCC
IC
RL
Vo
R B
V in VCE
E where, Af = voltage gain with feedback.
Fig. Transistor as a switch
(ii) When the input voltage is positive enough, i.e.
Vi > 0.6 V, the transistor is saturation state, base
current flows transistor large collector current
flows through transistor and through RL.
Under such condition the entire source voltage
VCC will drop across collector load RL and very low
voltage drops across transistor VCE = 0.2V.
Output voltage ideally zero
VO = 0 (Low output voltage )
This condition is similar to closed switch (ON state).
Q.19. Explain the elementary idea of an oscillator
with the help of block diagram.
Ans. Oscillator is an electronic device which generates
a.c. signal of desired frequency from the d.c. source.
245
It receives d.c. energy and changes it into a.c.
energy of desired frequency
An oscillator requires an amplifier and a feedback
network with frequency determining components.
Feedback: When a part of the output of an
amplifier is given back to the input of amplifier,
it is called feedback.
Negative feedback: When the feedback energy
(voltage) is out of phase with the input signal
(phase difference =  or 180 0 ) it is called as
negative feedback. it opposes the input signal
voltage .the negative feedback reduces the gain
of amplifier.
Positive feedback: When the feedback energy
(voltage) is in phase with the input signal (phase
difference = 0 or 2 or 1800) it is called as positive
feedback. This is shown in fig. feedback voltage
is in phase with input signal.
The positive feedback increases the gain of amplifier.
For oscillators positive feedback is required.
The block diagram is shown in fig.
o
180 Phase Shift
+ +
 
Basic Inverting
Vi Amplifier Vo
(A)
Feedback
Vf =  Vo Network Vo

+ +
 o 
180 Phase Shift
The voltage gain with feedback is
A
Af 
1  Aβ
A = voltage gain without feedback
 = feedback factor.
If for some frequency, A gets equal to 1, the
system gain becomes infinity Af =  and circuit
begins to oscillate at that frequency. The
condition A = 1 is called Berkhausencriterion
for sustained oscillations. When the power supply
is connected oscillator is tuned on, electrical
noise of wide range frequency is generated in
circuit. But the condition  = 1 is satisfied for
only particular frequency and oscillator oscillates
that frequency.
Q.20. What is logic GATE? Give logical symbol,
Boolean expression and truth table for each
of OR and NOR gates.
Ans. Logic gate: Electronic circuits consisting of
diodes, transistors and resistors perform the logic
functions. These circuits are called logic gates.
246 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

(1) OR GATE: It is an electronic circuit, which has (c) Truth table for AND gate:
two or more inputs and one output
INPUTS OUTPUT
(a) Symbol: A B Y=AB
A 0 0 0
Y=A+B 0 1 0
B 1 0 0
1 1 1
It is an electronic circuit, which has only one
input and one output. It produces LOW output (ii) NAND GATE:
when its input is HIFH, Thus its output is It is an electronic circuit, which has two or more
NOT of input or complement of input. inputs and one output. It produces HIGH output
(b) Boolean expression : Y = A + B when any of its inputs is LOW,and it produces
LOW output only when all of its inputs are HIGH
(c) Truth table for OR gate:
(a) Symbol:
INPUTS OUTPUT
A B Y=A+B A
Y=A.B
0 0 0
0 1 1 B
1 0 1
1 1 1 (b) Boolean expression: Y= A  B
(2) NOR GATE: It is OR gate followed by NOT gate. (c) Truth table for NAND gate:
(a) Symbol: INPUTS OUTPUT

A A B Y = AB
Y=A+B 0 0 1
B 0 1 1
1 0 1
It is an electronic circuit, which has two or more 1 1 0
inputs and one output. It produces LOW output
Any logic gate or function or complete digital
when any of the inputs is HIGH, and it produces
system can be constructed using either
HIGH output only when all of its inputs are LOW
NAND gates or NOR gates only. for this
(b) Boolean expression: Y = A  B reason they are called as universal building
(c) Truth table for NOR gate: blocks or universal gates.
INPUTS OUTPUT (iii) NOT GATE:
A B Y = AB It is an electronic circuit, which has two or more
0 0 1 inputs and one output. It produces HIGH output
0 1 0 when any or all of its inputs are HIFH, it produces
1 0 0 LOW output only when all of its inputs are LOW
1 1 0 (a) Symbol:
Q.21. What is logic GATE? Give logical symbol,
Boolean expression and truth table of each of A Y=A
AND, NAND and NOT gates.
Ans. Logic gates: Electronic circuits consisting of
diodes, transistors and resistors which perform (b) Boolean expreasions:
the logic functions, which are called logic gates.
Y= A
(i) AND gate: It is an electronic circuit, which has
(b) Truth table for NOT gate:
two or more inputs and one output. It produces
HIGH output only when all of its inputs are HIFH, INPUT OUTPUT
else output remains LOW A Y= A
(a) Symbol: 0 1
1 0
A
Y=A.B
B

(b) Boolean expression:

Y = A.B
Semiconductors 247

Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams

Theory :
(1) With the help of neat labelled circuit diagram explain the working of half wave rectifier using semiconductor
diode. Draw the input and output waveforms. (March 2013)
(2) Explain the working of transistor as a switch. (Oct 2013)
(3) Explain the working of P-N juction diode in forward and reverse biased mode. (Feb. 2014)
(4) Explain the formation of energy band diagram in case of conductor and semiconductor. (Oct. 2014)
(5) What are a and b parameters for a transistor? obtain a relation between them. (Feb. 2015)
(6) Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor. (Give any two points). (July 2016)
(7) Draw the schematic symbols for AND, OR, NOT and NAND gate. (July 2016)
(8) Explain with a neat diagram, how a p-n junction diode is used as a half wave rectifier. (March 2017)
(9) Draw a neat circuit diagram to study the characteristics of common emitter n-p-n transitor. With the help of
a graph, explain the output characteristics of this transistor. (July 2017)
(10) What is Zener diode? How is it used as a voltage regulator? (March 2018)


248 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
CHAPTER
20
Syllabus
Elements of communication system, Bandwidth of signals, Bandwidth of transmission medium, Need for modulation,
Production and detection of an amplitude modulated wave, Space communication, Propagation of electromagnetic waves in
atomspher

Multiple Choice Questions (1 mark each)

1. The process of superimposing a low frequency signal 6. A device that converts one form of energy into
on a high frequency wave is another form is termed as
(a) detection (b) mixing (a) transducer (b) transmitter
(c) modulation (d) attenution (c) amplifier (d) receiver
2. Ionoshere mainly consists of 7. The process of regaining of information from carrier
(a) positive ions and electrons wave at the receiver is called
(b) water vapour and smoke (a) modulation (b) transmission
(c) ozone layer (c) propagation (d) demodulation
(d) dust particles 8. The waves reflected from ionosphere are
3. The power radiated by linear antenna of length l is (a) sky wave (b) ground wave
proportional to ( = wavelength) (c) surface wave (d) space wave
 
2
l 
2
l 9. To transmit a signal, the length of antenna shouldbe
(a) (b)   (c)   (d) equal to
l  
l 
  
  3
4. The line of sight propagation is also called (a) (b) (c) (d) 
2 4 4
(a) Sky wave (b) Ground wave
10. When radio waves propagate along the surface of
(c) Sound wave (d) Space wave
the earth, to reach the antenna, the wave propagation
5. The outermost layer of the earth’s surface is is called
(a) stratosphere (b) Mesosphere (a) Sky wave propagation
(c) troposphere (d) ionosphere (b) Groundwave propagation
(c) Electromagnetic wave
(d) Space wave propagation

ANSWERS
1- (c), 2 - (a), 3 - (c), 4 - (d), 5 - (d), 6 - (a), 7 - (d), 8 - (a), 9 - (b), 10 - (b)

Very Short Answer Type Questions (1 mark each)

Q.1. Name the es sent ial comp onents of a Ans: Attenuation is the loss of strength of a signal
communication system. while propagating of wave through a medium.
Ans: (i) Transmitter
Q.4. Give one ex amp le of p oint to p oint
(ii) Communication channel and communication mode.
(iii) Receiver Ans: Telephone cell, microwave relay.
Q.2 How does the effective power radiated from a Q.5. The figure given below shows the block
linear antenna depend on the wavelength of diagram of a generalised communication
the signal to be transmitted? system. Identify the element labelled X and
2 write its function.
Ans: Effective power   
1
Communication system

i.e. effective power radiated decreases with an Information Message Transmitted Received Message User of
increase in wavelength. Source Signal
Transmitter
Signal
X Signal
Receiver
Signal Information

Q.3. What i s the m eani ng of a ttenuat ion in

communication system?
Noise

(248)
Communication Systems 249

Ans: X = Channel Q.8. Write function of repeater.

It connects the transmitter to the receiver. Ans: A repeater is a combination of a receiver and a
transmitter. Repeaters are used to extend the
Q.6. Name the type of waves which are used for the
range of a communication.
line of sight (LOS) communication. Write their
range of frequencies. Q.9. Write function of a transmitter.
Ans: Space wave are used in LOS Ans: A transmitter converts a signal produced by the
Its range of frequencies is 40 MHz and above. source of information into a form suitable for
transmission through a channel and subsequent
Q.7. Mention the function of transducer. reception.
Ans: A transducer converts energy from one form into
Q.10. Write a function of receiver.
another. It converts some physical variable (pressure,
displacement, force, etc.) into corresponding Ans: A receiver extracts the desired message from the
variations in the electrical signal at its output. received signals at the channel output.

Short Answer Type Questions - I (2 marks each)

Q.1. Draw a bloc k di agram of a g ener alised Function: Detector is used to recover the
communication system. modulating signal from the modulated carrier wave.
Ans. Q.5. What is sky wave propagation? Why is this
Communication system
mode of pro p agation restricted to t he
frequencies only upto 30 MHz?
Information Message Transmitted Received Message User of
Source Signal
Transmitter
Signal
Channel
Signal
Receiver
Signal Information Ans. Sky wave propagation: When the radio waves
from the transmitting antenna propagate through
sky, to reach the receiving antenna, after
Noise
reflection from the ionosphere, the wave
propagation is called sky wave propagation
Q.2. Draw a block diagram of receiver. The ionosphere layers acts as a reflector for a
Ans. certain range of frequencies (3  30 MHz).
Receiving
Electromagnetic waves of frequencies higher than
Antenna 30 MHz or upto 40 MHz penetrate the ionosphere
and never return to the earth’s surface.
Output Q.6. Write the factors that prevent a base band
Amplifier IF stage Detector Amplifier
Received signal of low frequency to be transmitted over
Signal long distances.
Q.3. Draw a block diagram of transmitter. What is to be done to overcome these factors?
Ans. Ans: Factors affecting base band signal :
(i) Size of antenna
Transmitting
antenna (ii) Effective power radiated by antenna
m (t) Amplitude Power (iii) Mixing up of signals from different transmitters.
Message modulator amplifier
signal To achieve this, signals to be transmitted are
Carrier superimposed on high frequency (small wavelength)
Q.4. Identify the boxes P and Q in the block diagram waves are called carrier wares. This process is
of receiver. Write the function of the blocks called modulation.
P and Q. Q.7. What is amplitude modulation? Draw a block
Receiving diagram of amplitude modulation.
Antenna
Ans. Amplitude modulation: When the amplitude of
Output
high frequency carrier wave is changed in
Amplifier P Q Amplifier accordance with the intensity of the signal is
Received called amplitude modulation.
Signal
Block diagram:
Ans: P = Intermediate frequency (IF) stage.
x(t) Square y(t) Band pass AM
Function: IF stage is used to change the carrier m(t)
+ law filter
frequency to lower frequency. Am sin mt wave
device centred at c
Q = Detector (Modulating 2
signal) Bx (t) + Cx (t)
c(t)
AC sin  Ct carrier
250 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.8. In the diagram below given what do c(t) , m(t) (2) Phase Modulation (PM):
and cm(t) stands for? In this type, phase shift of carrier wave is varied
Ans: according to information signal. It is direct FM.
1
Q.11. Explan bandwidth of signal. Give an example.
c(t) 0 (a)
1 Ans: Bandwidth of signal: It is the frequency range
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
1 over which an information signal is transmitted
m(t) 0 (b) or over which a receiver or other electronic circuit
1 operates.
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
2
cm(t) for 0 (c)
A fig. shows the bandwidth of speech (voice)
AM 2
frequency range from 300 to 3100 Hz. Therefore
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 speech signals require a bandwidth of 2800 Hz
c(t) - the carrier wave (3100–300) for commercial telephonic
m(t) - signal to be transmitted communication.
c m(t) - amplitude modulated wave Bandwidth
Q.9. Define modulation and frequency modulation.
Ans: (i) Modulation:
Modulation is the process of superimposing a low
frequency signal on a high frequency wave called f1 = 300 Hz f2 = 3100 Hz
carrier wave for long distance transmission
Bandwidth = f 2  f 1
(ii) Frequency Modulation (FM) :
= 3100  300
In this type, frequency of carrier wave is changed
= 2800 Hz
according to information signal.
Bandwidth for music is 20 kHz.
e.g. 98.4 FM radio station means its carrier wave
has frequency 98.4MHz. Video signals require bandwidth about 4.2 MHz.
T.V. signals require bandwidth of 6 MHz.
Q.10. Define:
(1) Carrier waves (2) Phase Modulation (PM).
Ans. (1) Carrier waves:
Original low frequency base signal to be
transmitted are superimposed on high frequency
waves are called carrier waves.

Short Answer Type Questions - II (3 marks each)

Q.1. Draw a schematic diagram showing Ground
wave, Sky wave and space wave propagation Frequency range :
modes for EM waves. (i) Standard AM broadcast - 540 - 1600 kHz
Write frequ ency range for each of t he (ii) Television - 54 – 890 MHz
following waves: (iii) Satellite communication - 5.925 – 6.425 GHz uplink
(i) Standard AM broad cast (ii) Television - 3.7 – 4.2 GHz downlink
(iii) Satellite communication
Q.2. Explain with neat labelled diagram ground
Ans. Diagram:
wave propagation or surface wave propagation.
Communication satellite
Why is it sutable for low frequency?
Ans. Ground wave propagation: When the radio
waves from the transmitting antenna propagate
Space wave along the surface of the earth, to reach the
Ionosphere
receiving antenna, the wave propagation is called
ground wave propagation or surface wave
propagation
Los Ground waves are the radio waves which propagate
Los Sky wave along the surface of the earth. Electromagnetic
Ground wave waves which are vertically polarized can travel in
this mode. The horizontal component of electric
Earth field in contact with the earth is short circuited.
The radio waves induce current in the ground over
Fig. Various propagation modes for e.m. waves which they pass. There is loss of power in a signal
Communication Systems 251

during its propagation on the surface of the earth
due to partial absorption of energy by ground. Loss
of energy is also due to diffraction effect.
The absorption of energy is high for high
frequency. .Hence ground wave propagation is
suitable for low frequency and medium frequency.
It is used for local broadcasting
e.g. Ship communication, radio navigation.
For TV and FM signals (HF) the ground wave
propagation is not used.
Communication satellite
Space wave
Ionosphere
(iii) Troposphere wave: The radio waves reach the
receiving antenna after reflection from troposphere.
Space waves are radio waves of very high
frequency between 30 MHz to 300 MHz or more.
The TV signals, FM radio, radar are in the range
100 MHz to 200MHz and these can be transmitted
only by space wave propagation. In this case the
receiving antenna directly intercepts the signal
sent out by the transmitter. But the earth is
spherical, so long distance transmission is not
possible. The range of communication can be
increased by increasing the eights of transmitting
antenna. Therefore the height of the antenna
should be as large as possible or repeater
transmission stations are necessary.
dM
dT

Los hT hR
Los Sky wave
Ground wave The range for line of sight propagation is given as

Earth d = 2Rh
FIg. Various propagation modes for e.m. waves. where, R is the radius of earth and h is the height
sky wave propagation of antenna
Q.3. What is space wave propagation? State its The space wave propagation is suitable for television
three components broadcast and satellite communication radar
OR communication and microwave communication.
Which mode of wave propagation is suitable Q.4. Explain Sky wave propagation or ionosphere
for T.V. broadcast and satellite communication wave propagation.
and why? Ans: Diagram:
Draw a suitable diagram for this mode of
propagation.
Ans. Space wave propagation : When the radio waves
from the transmitting antenna propagate along F2
the space surrounding the earth to reach the Ionospheric
receiving antenna, either directly or after Layers F1
reflection from the ground or in troposphere, the E
wave propagation is called space wave propagation D
or tropospheric wave propagation or line of sight
propagation.
Earth surface
Trophosphere
d
Fig. Sky wave propagation

Direct wave When the radio waves from the transmitting

a Ref c Receiver antenna propagate through sky, to reach the
Transmitter l ect ve
e d wa receiving antenna, after reflection from the
b ionosphere, the wave propagation is called sky
Earth wave propagation or ionosphere wave propagation.
Fig. Space wave propagation The refractive index of ionosphere is less than
The space wave has three components: - that of free space and within each layer decreases
with height. Electron density decreases with
(i) Direct wave: Along path (a), radio waves reach
height. The refraction occurs till the angle of
receiving antenna directly, (Transmitting to
incidence is less than the critical angle. When
receiver).
the angle of incidence is more than critical angle,
(ii) Ground reflected wave: The radio waves reach total internal reflection takes place and radio
the receiving antenna after reflection from the waves are reflected back by ionosphere.
ground.
252 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

The maximum angle made by transmitted radio where, N max is maximum electron density of
waves with the horizontal, above which the radio ionosphere
waves are no longer reflected back by ionosphere
When the frequency of radio waves is greater than
is called critical angle of radiation.
f c it crosses ionosphere and never reflects back
It depends on electron density of ionosphere and on the surface of the earth. Therefore the range
the frequency of radio waves.The maximum of fc up to few MHz sets an upper limit to frequency
frequency of transmitted radio waves, above which of waves used in this mode.
the radio waves are no longer reflected back by
ionosphere is called critical frequency. It is Q.6. Distinguish between sky waves and space
given by waves modes of propagation in communication
system.
fc = g N max
(a) Why is the sky wave mode propagation
where, N max is maximum electron density of restricted to frequencies up to 30 MHz?
ionosphere. (b) Give two examples where space wave mode
As 30 MHz > f c > 5 MHz, the radio waves having of propagation is used.
frequency between 3MHz to 30MHz are reflected Ans. Difference:
from ionosphere. When the frequency of radio
waves is greater than f c it crosses ionosphere and Space wave propagation Sky wave propagation
never reflects back on the surface of the (i) A space wave travels in (i) When the radio waves
earth.Therefore the range of f c upto few MHz sets a straight line from the from the transmitting
an upper limit to frequency of waves used in this transmitting antenna to antenna propagate
mode. the receiving antenna through sky, to reach
Q.5. Which mode of prop agat ion is used by either directly or the receiving antenna,
shortwave broadcast services having frequency reflection from the after reflection in the
range from a few MHz up to 30 MHz? Explain ground. ionosphere, the wave
diagrammatically how long d ista nce propagation is called
communication can be achieved by this mode. sky wave propagation.
Why is there an upper limit to frequency of (ii) Space wave propagation (ii) Sky wave propagation
waves used in this mode? takes place above takes place upto
40 MHz. frequency of about
Ans. Sky wave propagation is used by short wave
broadcast services having frequency range from 30 MHz.
a few MHz up to 30 MHz. Sky wave can travel very (iii) It is used for (LOS) line (iii) Radio waves having
long distances and can even travel around the of sight communication frequency below 30 Hz
earth. as well as satellite use this mode.
communication, TV
communication, radar
communication and
F2
microwave
Ionospheric communication.
Layers F1
(a) The ionosphere layer acts as a reflector for a
E certain range of frequencies (3 to 30 MHz). The
D electromagnetic waves having frequency higher
than 30 MHz penetrate the ionosphere and never
Earth surface return to the earth surface.
(b) In television broadcast, microwave links and
satellite communication, space wave mode of
Fig. Sky wave propagation propagation is used.
The refractive index of ionosphere is less than Q.7. With a block diagram, explain elements of a
that of free space and within each layer decreases communication system.
with height. Electron density decreases with
height. The refraction occurs till the angle of Ans. Communication system:
incidence is less than the critical angle. When A communication system is the device or set up
the angle of incidence is more than critical angle, used in the transmission of information from one
total internal reflection takes place and radio place to another. The basic elements of
waves are reflected back by ionosphere on the communication system are as follows
earth surface.
Critical frequency is given by
fc = g N max
Communication Systems 253

Communication system A receiver extracts the desired message signals

from the received signals at the channel output.
Information Message
Transmitter
Transmitted
Channel
Received
Receiver
Message User of It consists of a pickup antenna to pick up signal,
Source Information
Signal Signal Signal Signal
demodulator, an amplifier and the transducer. The
receiver reconstructs a recognizable form of the
original message signal for delivering it to the
Noise user of information.
It consists of three parts- Q.8. Write a note on bandwidth of signals.
(a) Transmitter Ans. Bandwidth: It is the frequency range over which
(b) Communication channel an information signal is transmitted or over which
a receiver or other electronic circuit operates.
(c) Receiver In a communication system, the message signal
(a) Transmitter: can be voice, music, and picture or computer data.
A transmitter converts a signal produced by the Each of these signals has different ranges of
source of information into a form of suitable for frequencies. The type of communication system
transmission through a channel and subsequent for given signal depends on the band of
reception. frequencies. Band width is the difference between
Components of transmitter are - the upper and lower frequency limits of the
signals.
(i) A modulator A fig. shows the bandwidth of speech (voice)
(ii) An amplifier and frequency range from 300 to 3100 Hz. Therefore
(iii) A transmission antenna speech signals require a bandwidth of 2800 Hz
(3100 – 300) for commercial telephonic
In communication system, the transmitter is
communication
located at one place and the receiver at some other
place which is separate from the transmitter. Bandwidth
(b) Communication channel:
A communication channel is the path or the
physical medium through which a signal
propagates from a transmitter to a receiver f1 = 300 Hz f2 = 3100 Hz
The transmitter and receiver are connected by
the physical medium is called channel. The Bandwidth = f 2  f 1
channel may be in the form of wires or cables, or = 3100  300
may be wireless depending on the type of = 2800 Hz
communication system. Bandwidth for music is 20 kHz.
(c) Receiver: Video signals require bandwidth about 4.2 MHz.
A receiver is a device that selects a signal from T.V. signals require bandwidth of 6 MHz.
among all the signals received from a
communication channel, recovers the baseband Q.9. Write a note on bandwidth of transmission
signal, and delivers it to the user of information. medium.
Satellite Ans. Different types of transmission media offer
different bandwidths. The commonly used
transmission media are wire, free space and
optical fibre (cable).
D

(1) Co-axial cable is most commonly used wire

ow
k
lin

medium, which offers a bandwidth of 750 MHz

nl
Up

in

Such cables are normally operated bellow 18 GH.

k

(2) Communication through free space using radio

waves takes place over a wide range of frequencies
Transmitting from a few hundreds of kHz to a few GHz.
Receiving
Earth station Earth (3) Optical communication using fibres is performed
station in the frequency range of 1 THz to 1000THz. An
optical fibre can offer a transmission bandwidth
Components of receiver are - in excess of 100GHz.
(i) Areceiving or pick up antenna
(ii) A demodulator
(iii) An amplifier
(iv) A transducer
254 UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution

Q.10. Explain the need for modulation related to This is done with the help of using high frequency
the size of antenna (aerial) signal called the carrier wave and process is called
Ans. Modulation: modulation.
The process of changing some characteristics e.g. Q.11. Define modulation. State and explain the
amplitude, frequency or phase of a carrier wave different types of modulation.
in accordance with the intensity of the signal is Ans. Modulation:
called as modulation
Modulation is a process of changing amplitude
Need for modulation: or frequency or phase of a carrier wave in
Modulation is extremely necessary in communication accordance with the intensity or the amplitude
system due to the following reason:. of the signal.
(i) Size of the antenna or aerial: For transmitting Types of modulation:
a signal we need an antenna or an aerial. The (1) Amplitude modulation
length of the transmitting antenna should be
(2) Frequency modulation
approximately equal to quarter – wavelength 
of the signal to be transmitted. (3) Phase modulation
(i) Amplitude Modulation:
Velocity 3  108
e.g. Wavelength = Frequency = Frequency m When the amplitude of high frequency carrier wave
is changed in accordance with the intensity of
For an electromagnetic wave of frequency 15 kHz, the signal is called amplitude modulation.
the wavelength is 20 km
All India radio Mumbai station signals are
 transmitted at 104.4 KHz. This is carrier frequency.
Therefore the length of antenna is = 5 km
4 1
This is too long to be constructed practically. For c(t) 0 (a)
this reason it is practically not possible to radiate 1
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
audio signal directly into space. On the other 1
m(t) 0 (b)
hand if transmission frequency is high of 1MHz
1
is used to carry the signal, we need an antenna 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
2
 300 cm(t) for 0 (c)
of length, = = 75 m
4 4 AM 2
0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Therefore there is need of translating the
In amplitude modulation
information contained in our original low
frequency baseband signal into high or radio (i) The amplitude of the carrier wave changes
frequencies before transmission. according to the intensity of the signal
(ii) Effective power radiated by an antenna: (ii) The amplitude variations of the carrier wave
is at the signal frequency
The power radiated by antenna of length l is
2 (iii) The frequency of the amplitude modulated
l  wave remains the same i.e. carrier frequency.
proportional to   this means, for the same
 (ii) Frequency Modulation (FM):
antenna length, the power radiated increases
with decreasing  i.e. increasing frequency. Hence In this type, frequency of carrier wave is changed
effective power radiated by a long wavelength base according to information signal. e.g. 98.4 FM radio
band signal would be small. For a good station means its carrier wave has frequency
transmission, we need high powers and hence 98.4MHz.
we use high frequency transmission. (iii) Phase Modulation (PM):
(iii) Mixing up signals from different transmitters: In this type, phase shift of carrier wave is varied
Another important argument against transmitting according to information signal. It is direct FM.
baseband signals frequencies directly. Suppose Q.12. What is Amplitude modulation? Explain the
many transmitters are transmitting baseband production of amplitude modulated wave.
information signals simultaneously. All these
signals will get mixed up and there is no simple Ans. Amplitude modulation: When the amplitude of
way to distinguish between them. the carrier wave changes according to the
intensity of the signal, but the frequens of the
This suggest that there is a need for translating
modulated wave remains constant is called
original low frequency baseband message or
amplitude modulation.
information signal into high frequency wave before
transmission and allotting a band of frequencies Amplitude modulation can be produced by variety
to each message signal for its transmission such of methods. A simple method of production of
that the translated signal continues to possess amplitude modulation is shown in the block
the information contained in the original signal. diagram as shown in below.
Communication Systems 255

m(t) x(t) Square y(t) Band pass AM
+ law filter
Am sin mt wave
device centred at c
(Modulating 2 Output
signal) Bx (t) + Cx (t)
c(t)
AC sin  Ct carrier
Fig. (a) A block diagram of simple modulator for
obtaining an AM wave
In this case the modulated signal Am sinmt is
added to the carrier signal Ac sinct to produce
the signal x(t). This signal
x(t) = Am sinm t + Ac sinct
is passed through a square law device which is a
non-linear device and produces an output.
y(t) = B x(t) + Cx2(t)
where, A and B are constants, thus
y(t) = BAm sinmt + BAc sinCt
+ C(Am2sin2mt + Ac2sin2ct
+ 2AcAmsinmt sinct)
= BAm sinmt + BAc sin ct
+ C/2 (Am2 +Ac2) + CAcAm cos (c m)t
 CAcAm cos (c+m)t
In this case there is a d.c. term C/2 (Am2 +Ac2) and
sinusoidal of frequencies m, 2m, c, c, c m
and c +m.
When this signal is passed through a band pass
filter which rejects d.c. and the sinusoidal of
frequencies m,2m, c , and retains frequencies
c and c mc +m. The output of the band pass
filter is same as the the equation above 3 and is
therefore an AM wave.
Note that the modulated signal cannot be
transmitted as such directly. The modulator is to be
followed by a power amplifier which provides the
necessary power and then the modulated signal is
fed to an antenna for radiation as shown in fig.(b)
Transmitting
antenna
m (t) Amplitude Power
Message modulator amplifier
signal
Carrier
Fig. (b) Block diagram of a transmitter.
Q.13. Explain the detection of amplitude modulated
wave.
Ans. As the transmitted message gets attenuated
while propagating through the channel, the
receiving antenna is followed by amplifier and a
detector. Also for further processing, the carrier
frequency is usually changed to lower frequency
by what is called intermediate frequency (IF)
stage preceding the detection. The detected signal
is amplified by amplifier. A block diagram of a
typical receiver is shown as below in fig. (a)
Receiving
Antenna
Amplifier If stage Detector Amplifier
Received
Signal
Fig. (a) Block diagram of a receiver
Detection is the process of recovering the
modulating signal from the modulated carrier
wave. The modulated carrier wave contains the
frequenciescand c  m. To obtain the original
message signal m(t) of the angular frequency m ,
a simple method is shown in the form of the block
diagram as shown in fig. (b)
… (1) AM Wave
Rectifier
Envelope m(t)
Output
detector
time time time
(a) (b) (c)
... (2) AM input wave Rectified wave Output (without RF
component)
Fig. (b) Block diagram of a detector for AM signal.
... (3) The quantity on Y-axis can be current or voltage.
The modulated signal of the form given in above
fig a is passed through a rectifier to produce the
output as shown in fig. (b). This envelop of signal
is the message signal. To recover m(t), the signal
is passed through an envelope detector
Q.14. Explain in brief the idea of structure of
atmosphere.
Ans. The gaseous envelope surrounding the earth is
called atmosphere
It is divided into different layers as follows
(i) Troposphere:
This layer is present upto height 12 km from the
earth’s surface. It consists of all the water vapours
(density varies from 1 to 0.1 kg/m3). And temperature
falls with height from 290K to 200K. This layer
reflects the waves of frequency ranging from
100MHz to 300MHz. The electromagnetic waves
of FM transmitter and TV transmitter can be
propagated through this layer.
(ii) Stratosphere:
This layer lies between 12 km to 15 km from the
earth’s surface. The important part of this layer
is ozone layer, which lies between 30 km to 50
km. It absorbs large amount of ultraviolet
radiations from the sun and protects the life on
the earth from its dangerous effect. (Density :
0.1 kg/m3 to 10-3 kg/m3 and temperature : 220K
to 280K).
(iii) Mesosphere:
This layer of atmosphere lies between 50km to
80km above the earth’s surface. The density of
this layer varies from103 kg/m3 to 105 kg/m3 and
temperature varies from 290K to 180 K.
256
(iv) Ionosphere:
This layer lies between 80km to 400km above the
earth’s surface. This is the outermost layer of
atmosphere and receives maximum energy from
the sun.
Due to this high energy from the sun and very low
pressure, the gas molecules in the ionosphere are
ionised. Hence concentration of electrons and
positive ions is very large. Hence this layer is called
ionosphere. The temperature of this layer between
80km to 110km varies from 180K to 700K. This
high temperature region is called thermosphere.
Beyond thermosphere there is a high density layer
of electrons which is called Kennelly Heavy side
layer (E layer). At the end of this region the
electron density suddenly falls to zero. Again at
height of 250km, there is a highly concentrated
electron layer which is called as Appleton layer
(F layer).
The ionized gas reflects radio waves of certain
frequency. Radio waves reflected from ionosphere
by single or multiple reflections can reach larger
distances. The E-layer reflects medium frequency
radio waves which is ineffective during night.
Questions Asked in Previous Board Exams
(1) What is space wave propagation? State its three components. (March 2013)
(2) Explain the need for modulation related to the size of antenna (aerial). (Oct 2013)
(3) Explain the terms : (a) Transmittter, and (b) Receiver in communication system. (Feb. 2014)

UTTAM’S XII Physics Papers Solution
Q.15. What do you mean by space communication?
Ans. Space communication:
The communication that takes place through
space surrounding the earth is called space
communication.
Radio waves, television, and satellite communication
are example of space communication.
The radio waves are useful for the transmission
of information (i.e. message, speech, music etc.)
from one place to another without the help of
wires or material medium between the two places
.The signal to be transmitted is converted into
an electrical signal, which is then superimposed
on a high frequency oscillating current flowing
through a metallic conductor of suitable size and
shape.
When a.c. travels through a conductor, conductor
radiates electromagnetic waves of the same
frequency. Such a conductor is called as
transmitting antenna and it radiates the
corresponding radio waves into the atmosphere.
There is another metallic conductor of suitable
size and shape, called the receiving antenna,
which is present at the receiving station. When
the radio waves are intercepted by the receiving
antenna, a small varying e.m.f. is induced in the
antenna. This e.m.f. is amplified and decoded to
obtain the information contained in the original
signal.
The radio wave and microwave region of
electromagnetic spectrum is used in radio and
television communication
(March 2018)